WB087 Toohey Road Salisbury Water Booster Electrical ...

QUEENSLAND URBAN UTILITIES

TOOHEY ROAD, SALISBURY

WATER BOOSTER

PUMP STATION WB087

ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARD

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Developed by:

J & P RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES CAMPBELL AVENUE

WACOL QLD 4076

ABN 23 001 952 325 ACN 001 952 325

Ph. (07) 3271 2911 Fax. (07) 3271 3623

WB087 Toohey Road Salisbury Water Booster Electrical Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS994 Active 10/12/2014 of 400

CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Operating Instructions

2.0 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

2.1 Mode Selection 2.2 Manual Control 2.3 Automatic Control

3.0 PUMPS

4.0 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL INFORMATION

5.0 QA DOCUMENTATION

6.0 SWITCHBOARD WORKS TEST RESULTS

7.0 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

8.0 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE



411I OD ID ID ID 110

C1,1-111,(1);1:1,1),1,1,1717i)

I. Introduction



)11,1111111111111171111fli

III ID ID WB087 Toohey Road Salisbury Water Booster Electrical Switchboard OM Manual


J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd

1.0 INTRODUCTION

These operating instructions cover the Toohey Road, Salisbury pumping station electrical equipment supplied by J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd in 2010.

1.1 Operating Instructions

Normal operation of the pumping station is in the automatic mode with control by means of a Master Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), which receives level signals from the Level Measurement System in the wet well/Electronic Level Relays/Float Switches.

Manual operation control of the station is available by means of selector switches on the motor control switchboard.

File: Swbd Manual Revision 0 Date:11/3/2010



ell III ID

2. Description of Operation



1111110 1111111111111111111



J & P Richardson Industries Ply Ltd

2.0 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

2.1 Mode Selection

The station can be operated either automatically or manually with mode selection being made by means of the mode selector switches mounted on each pump section of the switchboard. These selector switches are designated with the following mode selections AUTO-OFF-MAN.

2.2 Manual Control

Each pumping unit can be run in manual control from the motor control centre by: -

a). Selecting the "MAN" setting on the "MODE SELECTOR SWITCHES" as described in Clause 2.1.

b). Starting by "START" pushbutton. c). Stopping by "STOP" pushbutton.

N.B. DO NOT LEAVE IN MANUAL WHILE STATION UNATTENDED

2.3 Automatic Control

For automatic control of the station: -

a). The "MODE SELECTOR SWITCHES" on the switchboard should be in the "AUTO" position.

b). The "DUTY SELECTOR SWITCH" should be set to provide the desired pump operation sequence. The "DUTY SELECTOR SWITCH" is marked: -

1-2 2-1

The pumps should be alternated at regular intervals to ensure that each pump unit has a reasonably equal running time. The total running hours of each pump unit is displayed on the hour meter located on each pump section of the switchboard.

c). The automatic Duty Selection is done via the PLC software. Refer PLC SOFTWARE Section for details. The total running hours of each pump unit is displayed on the hour meter located on each pump section of the switchboard.

d). The automatic starting and stopping of the pumps is controlled by signals from Master PLC.

For NORMAL OPERATION, each of the pump selector switches should have "AUTO" mode selected.

In the AUTOMATIC mode the selected Duty Pump unit will start automatically as preset by the level in the wet well. In the event of the duty pump not being capable of supplying enough flow to continue draining the wet well and the well level rises to a second preset level, then the Standby Pump unit will automatically start, to provide additional pumping. The supplementary pump unit also takes over for the respective pump duty on the occurrence of one the Duty Pump unit failing.




sdwnd E

ID

CIM,111t11,0,0111,1041,11,WAMOMP

GI ID ID



ID ID MI WB087 Toohey Road Salisbury Water Booster Electrical Switchboard OM Manual



3.0 PUMPS

SUPPLIER: Grundfos

Ph: (07) 5540 6700 Fax: (07) 5540 6710

MODEL: Hydro MPC-E 4xCRE32 -1 2.2kW

File: Swbd Manual Revision 0 Date:II/3/2010



GRUNDFOS INSTRUCTIONS

BoosterpaQ - Hydro MPC

C) Installation and operating instructions

BE >THINK >INNOVATE 4antiNI 131 PC:10 4)<



LIMITED WARRANTY

Products manufactured by GRUNDFOS PUMPS CORPORATION (Grundfos) are warranted to the original user only to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of 24 months from date of installation, but not more than 30 months from date of manufacture. Grundfos' liability under this warranty shall be limited to repairing or replacing at Grundfos' option, without charge, F.O.B. Grundfos' factory or authorized service station, any product of Grundfos' manufacture. Grundfos will not be liable for any costs of removal, installation, transportation, or any other charges which may arise in connection with a warranty claim. Products which are sold but not manufactured by Grundfos are subject to the warranty provided by the manufacturer of said products and not by Grundfos' warranty. Grundfos will not be liable for damage or wear to products caused by abnormal operating conditions, accident, abuse, misuse, unauthorized alteration or repair, or if the product was not installed in accordance with Grundfos' printed installation and operating instructions.

To obtain service under this warranty, the defective product must be returned to the distributor or dealer of Grundfos' products from which it was purchased together with proof of purchase and installation date, failure date, and supporting installation data. Unless otherwise provided, the distributor or dealer will contact Grundfos or an authorized service station for instructions. Any defective product to be returned to Grundfos or a service station must be sent freight prepaid; documentation supporting the warranty claim and/or a Return Material Authorization must be included if so instructed.

GRUNDFOS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSSES, OR EXPENSES ARISING FROM INSTALLATION, USE, OR ANY OTHER CAUSES. THERE ARE NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THOSE WARRANTIES DESCRIBED OR REFERRED TO ABOVE.

Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages and some jurisdictions do not allow limit actions on how long implied warranties may last. Therefore, the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

2



CONTENTS 9.7.6 Setting of influence function (4.1.3.2) 35

1. Symbols used in this document Page

4

9.7.7 Primary sensor (4.1.4) 9.7.8 Clock program (4.1.6) 9.7.9 Proportional pressure (4.1.7)

35 36 36

2. Scope of these instructions 4 9.7.10 S-system configuration (4.1.8) 37 3. Product description 4 9.7.11 Pump cascade control (4.2) 37

4. Nameplate 5 9.7.12 Min. time between start/stop (4.2.1) 38

5. Software label 6. Type key 6.1 Examples of control variants

5

6

6

9.7.13 Max. number of starts/hour (4.2.1) 9.7.14 Standby pumps (4.2.3) 9.7.15 Forced pump changeover (4.2.4) 9.7.16 Pump test run (4.2.5)

38 38 39 39

7. Installation 9 9.7.17 Pilot pump (4.2.6) 40 7.1 Mechanical installation 9 9.7.18 Pump stop attempt (4.2.7) 40 7.1.1 Location 9 9.7.19 Pump start and stop speed (4.2.8) 41 7.1.2 Pipework 9 9.7.20 Min. performance (4.2.9) 41 7.1.3 Foundation 9 9.7.21 Compensation for pump start-up time (4.2.10) 42 7.1.4 Vibration dampers 9 9.7.22 Secondary functions (4.3) 42 7.1.5 Expansion joints 9 9.7.23 Stop function (4.3.1) 42 7.2 Electrical installation 10 9.7.24 Soft pressure build-up (4.3.3) 44 7.3 Start-up 10 9.7.25 Emergency run (4.3.5) 45 8. Control panel 12 9.7.26 Digital inputs (4.3.7) 45 8.1 Display (pos. 1) 12 9.7.27 Functions of digital inputs (4.3.7.1) 46 8.1.1 Menu line 12 9.7.28 Analog inputs (4.3.8) 46 8.1.2 Top line 12 9.7.29 Analog inputs (4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.7) 47 8.1.3 Graphical illustration 12 9.7.30 Analog inputs and measured value 8.1.4 Scroll bar 12 (4.3.8.1.1 to 4.3.8.7.1) 47 8.1.5 Bottom line 12 9.7.31 Digital outputs (4.3.9) 48 8.2 Buttons and indicator lights 13 9.7.32 Functions of digital outputs (4.3.9.1 to 4.3.9.16) 48 8.2.1 Arrow to the right (pos. 2) 13 9.7.33 Min., max. and user-defined duty (4.3.14) 49 8.2.2 Help (pos. 3) 13 9.7.34 Min. duty (4.3.14.1) 49 8.2.3 Up and down (pos. 4 and 5) 13 9.7.35 Max. duty (4.3.14.2) 49 8.2.4 Plus and minus (pos. 6 and 7) 13 9.7.36 User-defined duty (4.3.14.3) 50 8.2.5 Esc (pos. 8) 13 9.7.37 Pump curve data (4.3.19) 50 8.2.6 Home (pos. 9) 13 9.7.38 Control source (4.3.20) 51

8.2.7 Ok (pos. 10) 13 9.7.39 Fixed inlet pressure (4.3.22) 52 8.2.8 Indicator lights (pos. 11 and 12) 13 9.7.40 Flow estimation (4.3.23) 52 8.2.9 Contrast (pos. 13) 13 9.7.41 Monitoring functions (4.4) 52 8.2.10 Back light 13 9.7.42 Dry-running protection (4.4.1) 53

9. Functions 14 9.7.43 Dry-running protection with pressure/level switch

9.1 Tree of functions 14 (4.4.1.1) 53

9.2 Overview 17 9.7.44 Dry-running protection with pressure transmitter

9.3 Description of functions 19 (4.4.1.2) 54

9.4 Status (1) 19 9.7.45 Dry-running protection with level transmitter (4.4.1.3) 54

9.4.1 Current alarms (3.1) 19 9.7.46 Min. pressure (4.4.2) 55

9.4.2 System (1.2) 19 9.7.47 Max. pressure (4.4.3) 55

9.4.3 Operating mode (1.2.1) 20 9.7.48 External fault (4.4.4) 56

9.4.4 Setpoint (1.2.2) 20 9.7.49 Limit 1 and 2 exceeded (4.4.5 and 4.4.6) 56

9.4.5 Setpoint influence (1.2.3) 20 9.7.50 Pumps outside duty range (4.4.7) 57

9.4.6 Measured values (1.2.4) 21 9.7.51 Pressure relief (4.4.8) 57

9.4.7 Analog inputs (1.2.5) 21 9.7.52 Functions, CU 351 (4.5) 58

9.4.8 Pump 1...6 (1.3 to 1.8) 21 9.7.53 Display language (4.5.1) 58

9.5 Operation (2) 21 9.7.54 Display units (4.5.2) 59

9.5.1 Operation (2) 22 9.7.55 Date and time (4.5.3) 60

9.5.2 System operating mode (2.1.1) 22 9.7.56 Passwords (4.5.4) 60

9.5.3 Control mode (2.1.2) 23 9.7.57 Ethernet (4.5.5) 60

9.5.4 Setpoints (2.1.3) 25 9.7.58 GENIbus number (4.5.6) 61

9.5.5 Individual pump control (2.1.4) 25 9.7.59 Software status (4.5.9) 61

9.5.6 Setting of individual operating mode 9.8 Data communication 62

(2.1.4.1 to 2.1.4.6) 26 9.8.1 Ethernet 62

9.6 Alarm (3) 27 9.8.2 GENIbus 64

9.6.1 Alarm status (3) 27 10. External variable frequency drive 65 9.6.2 Current alarms (3.1) 32 10.1 VLT 2800 65 9.6.3 Alarm log (3.2) 32 10.2 Danfoss VLT 8000 factory settings 66 9.7 Settings (4) 32 10.3 Danfoss VLT 8000 extended menu programming 66 9.7.1 Primary controller (4.1) 33 10.4 Danfoss VLT 8000 factory settings 67 9.7.2 PI controller (4.1.1) 33 10.5 Danfoss VLT 8000 extended menu programming 67 9.7.3 Alternative setpoints (4.1.2) 33 10.6 Baldor Smart motor settings 68 9.7.4 Alternative setpoints 2 to 7 (4.1.2.1 to 4.1.2.7) 34 10.7 VLT FC 202 69 9.7.5 External setpoint influence (4.1.3) 34

3



11. Fault finding chart 70

12. Maintenance 71

12.1 Pumps 71

12.2 Motor bearings 71

12.3 CU 351 71

13. Frost protection 71

14. Taking out of operation 71

15. Technical data 71

15.1 Pressure 71

15.2 Temperature 72 15.3 Relative humidity 72 15.4 Sound pressure 72

16. Electrical data 72

17. Related documents 72

18. Disposal 72

Warning Prior to installation, read these installation and operating instructions. Installation and operation must comply with local regulations and accepted codes of good practice.

1. Symbols used in this document

Caution

Note

Warning If these safety instructions are not observed, it may result in personal injury!

If these safety instructions are not observed, it may result in malfunction or damage to the equipment!

Notes or instructions that make the job easier and ensure safe operation.

2. Scope of these instructions These installation and operating instructions apply to Grundfos Hydro MPC booster systems.

Hydro MPC is a range of factory-assembled booster systems, ready for installation and operation.

4

3. Product description As standard, Hydro MPC booster systems consist of two to six CR(E) pumps coupled in parallel and mounted on a common base frame with all the necessary fittings and a control panel.

A diaphragm tank is required in most installations. Note

5 4

Fig. 1 Hydro MPC booster system

Pos. Description Quantity

1 Control panel 1

2 Nameplate 1

3 Suction manifold (stainless steel) 1

4 Isolating valve 2 per pump

5 Base frame (stainless steel) 1

6 Non-return valve 1 per pump

7 Discharge manifold (stainless steel) 1

8 Pressure transmitter/pressure gauge 2

9 Pump 2 - 6



Hydro MPC booster systems are divided into seven groups based on control variant:

Control variant Description

-E Two to six CRE pumps

ED Two CRE pumps and up to four constant speed CR

- pumps

ES One CRE pump and up to five constant speed CR

- pumps

-EF Two to six CR pumps connected to external variable frequency drives (VFD)

Two CR pumps connected to external variable -EDF frequency drives and up to four constant speed CR

pumps

Up to six CR pumps connected to an external variable -F frequency drive. The speed-controlled operation

alternates between the pumps.

-S Two to six constant speed CR pumps

See also section 6.1 Examples of control variants.

Hydro MPC booster systems always includes application- optimised software for setting the booster system to the application in question.

4. Nameplate The nameplate of the booster system is fitted on the base frame. See position 2 in fig. 1.

Type: (2

Model: ?..2)

Serial No.: (2)

Mains supply: 0 Max. oper. press.: 0 PSI

O Max.: 0 GPM

T Medium: OT H Min.: (:) ft.

Number P

HP Un V

Fixed speed pumps: 0 0 0 E-pumps: 0 0 0 Pilot Pump: 0 0 Order No.: 0 Options: 0

0 Encl. Type: NEMA / PN 0 Weight: 0 lbs.

0 0

C 0 0 0 Assembled in US

US LISTED

N FOZ

Fig. 2 Nameplate

Pos. Description

1 Type designation 2 Model

3 Serial number

4 Supply voltage

5 Maximum operating pressure in PSI

6 Liquid temperature in °F

7 Maximum flow rate in GPM

8 Minimum head in feet 9 Number of fixed speed and/or auxiliary pumps

10 Motor power in HP for fixed speed pumps

11 Nominal voltage in volts for fixed speed pumps

12 Number of E-pumps

13 Motor power in HP for E-pumps

14 Nominal voltage in volts for E-pumps

15 Number of pilot pumps

16 Motor power in HP for pilot pump

17 Nominal voltage in volts for pilot pump

18 Order number

19- Options

24

25 Enclosure type

26 Weight in lbs

27 Approval marks

28 Production location & date code

5. Software label The software label is placed on the back of the CU 351 controller.

1. Control MPC 3. Hydro MPC GIRUNMFOSVX 0 0

2. C-MPC options 4. H-MPC options 5. Pump data

0 0

CONFIGURATION STEPS . PLEASE FOLLOW THE NUMBERS 96556126

Fig. 3 Software label

Pos. Description

1 Control MPC - GSC file number

2 Control MPC options - GSC file numbers

3 Hydro MPC - GSC file number

4 Hydro MPC options - GSC file numbers

5 Pump data - GSC file numbers

Note A GSC (Grundfos Standard Configuration) file is a

configuration data file.

5



6. Type key

Example Hydro MPC -ED 2 CRE 5-10 1 CR 5-10 3x460 V, 60Hz

Type range

Subgroups: Pumps with integrated variable frequency drive: -E, -ED, -ES Pumps with external VFD: -EF, -EDF, -F

Constant speed pumps (start/stop): -S

Number of pumps with integreted:variable:frequeriq'drie:end pumj:itype

Number of constant speed pumps and pump type

Supply.yoltage,:frequericjr

6.1 Examples of control variants

Booster systems with motors that include an integrated variable frequency drive (CRE)

Hydro MPC-E Hydro MPC-ED Hydro MPC-ES

Hydro MPC booster system with three CRE pumps.

One CRE pump in operation.

H

Hset

Three CRE pumps in operation.

The MPC-E system maintains a constant pressure through continuous adjustment of the speed of the pumps. The system performance is adjusted to the demand through cutting in/out the required number of pumps and through parallel control of the pumps in operation. Pump changeover is automatic and depends on load, operating hours and fault. All pumps in operation will run at equal speed.

Hydro MPC booster system with two CRE Hydro MPC booster system with one CRE pumps and one constant speed CR pump. pump and two constant speed CR pumps.


H

Hset

Two CRE pumps and one constant speed CR pump in operation.

H

Hset

The MPC-ED system maintains a constant pressure through continuous adjustment of the speed of two CRE pumps, while the CR pump is constant speed. One CRE pump always starts first. If the pressure cannot be maintained by the pump, the second CRE pump will be cut in. If the two CRE pumps cannot maintain the pressure, the CR pump will be cut in.

Pump changeover is automatic and depends on load, operating hours and fault.


H

Hset

a

One CRE pump and two constant speed CR pumps in operation.

H

Hset

a

The MPC-ES system maintains a constant pressure through continuous adjustment of the speed of the CRE pump. The other pumps are cut in/out according to demand to achieve a performance corresponding to the consumption.

The CRE pump always starts first. If the pressure cannot be maintained by the pump, one or both CR pumps will be cut in.

Changeover among the constant speed pumps is automatic and depends on load, operating hours and fault.

6



Booster systems with motors connected to external variable frequency drive (VFD)

Hydro MPC-EF Hydro MPC-EDF Hydro MPC-F

Hydro MPC booster system with three CR pumps connected to external variable frequency drives in the control panel.

One CR pump in operation.

a

Three CR pumps in operation.

a

rn

(0 7, rn

The MPC-EF system maintains a constant pressure through continuous adjustment of the speed of the pumps. The system performance is adjusted to the demand through cutting in/out the required number of pumps and through parallel control of the pumps in operation. Pump changeover is automatic and depends on load, operating hours and fault. All pumps in operation will run at equal speed.

Hydro MPC booster system with two CR pumps connected to external frequency converters in the control cabinet and one constant speed CR pump.

One CR pump connected to an external variable frequency drive in operation.

H

Hset

a

Two CR pumps connected to external variable frequency drives and one constant speed CR pump in operation.

H

Hset

a

The MPC-EDF system maintains a

constant pressure through continuous adjustment of the speed of two CR pumps connected to external variable frequency drives, while the third CR pump is

constant speed.

One CR pump connected to an external variable frequency drive always starts first. If the pressure cannot be maintained by the pump, the second CR pump connected to an external variable frequency drive will be cut in. If the pressure cannot be maintained by the two pumps, the constant speed CR pump will be cut in.


Hydro MPC booster system with three CR pumps connected to an external frequency converter in the control cabinet. The speed-controlled operation alternates between the pumps.

One CR pump connected to an external variable frequency drive in operation.

H

Hset

a

One CR pump connected to an external variable frequency drive and two constant speed CR pumps in operation.

H

Hset

a 0

The MPC-F system maintains a constant pressure through continuous adjustment of the speed of the CR pump connected to the external variable frequency drive. The speed-controlled operation alternates between the pumps. One CR pump connected to the external variable frequency drive always starts first. If the pressure cannot be maintained by the pump, one or two constant speed CR pumps will be cut in.


7



Booster system with constant speed pumps (on/off)

Hydro MPC-S

Hydro MPC booster system with three constant speed CR pumps.

One constant speed CR pump in operation.

'H

Hslop

Hset DAM. =NEIL

Three constant speed CR pumps in operation.

Hydro MPC-S maintains a pressure differential through cutting in/out the required number of pumps. The operating range of the pumps will lie between Hset and Hstop (cut-out pressure). Pump changeover is automatic and depends on load, operating hours and fault.

8



7. Installation

Warning

Installation and operation must comply with local regulations and accepted codes of good practice.

Before installation check that

the booster system corresponds to the one ordered.

no visible parts have been damaged.

7.1 Mechanical installation 7.1.1 Location

The booster system must be installed in a well ventilated room to ensure sufficient cooling of the motors and control panel.

Hydro MPC is not designed for outdoor installation unless protected and must not be exposed to direct sunlight.

The booster system must have a 3 feet clearance in front and on the two sides for inspection and dismantling.

7.1.2 Pipework

Arrows on the pump base show the direction of flow of water through the pump.

The pipework connected to the booster system must be of adequate size. The pipes are connected to the manifolds of the booster system. Either end can be used. Apply sealing compound to the unused end of the manifold and fit the screw cap. For manifolds with flanges, fit a blanking flange with gasket.

To achieve optimum operation and minimise noise and vibration, it may be necessary to consider vibration dampening of the booster system.

Noise and vibration are generated by the rotations in the motor and pump and by the flow in pipework and fittings. The effect on the environment is subjective and depends on correct installation and the state of the other parts of the system.

If booster system is to be installed where first customer on the line is close to the booster system, it is advisable to fit expansion joints on the suction and discharge pipes to prevent vibration being transmitted through the pipework.

Note

3 3

Fig. 4 Sketch showing the position of expansion joints, pipe supports and machine shoes

Pos. Description

1 Expansion joint

2

3 Machine shoe

Pipe support and good location for system isolation valve (not shown)

Note Expansion joints, pipe supports and machine shoes shown in the figure above are not supplied with a standard booster system.

All nuts should be checked and re-tightened if necessary prior to start-up.

The pipes must be fastened to parts of the building to ensure that they cannot move or be twisted.

7.1.3 Foundation

The booster system should be positioned on an even and solid surface, for instance a concrete floor or foundation. If the booster system is not fitted with machine shoes, it must be bolted to the floor or foundation.

Note As a rule the weight of a concrete foundation should be 1.5 x the weight of the booster system.

7.1.4 Vibration dampers To prevent the transmission of vibrations to buildings, it imay be necessary to isolate the booster system foundation from building parts by means of vibration dampers.

The right damper varies from installation to installation, and a

wrong damper may increase the vibration level. Vibration dampers should therefore be sized by the supplier of vibration dampers. If the booster system is installed on a base frame with vibration dampers, expansion joints should always be fitted on the manifolds. This is important to prevent the booster system from "hanging" in the pipework.

7.1.5 Expansion joints Expansion joints are installed to

absorb expansions/contractions in the pipework caused by changing liquid temperature

reduce mechanical strains in connection with pressure surges in the pipework

isolate mechanical structure-borne noise in the pipework (only rubber bellows expansion joints).

Note Expansion joints must not be installed to compensate for inaccuracies in the pipework such as center displacement of flanges.

Fit expansion joints at a distance of minimum 1 to 1 1/2 times the nominal flange diameter from the manifold on the suction as well as on the discharge side. This prevents the development of turbulence in the expansion joints, resulting in better suction conditions and a minimum pressure loss on the pressure side. At high water velocities (> 10 ft/sec) it is advisable to install larger expansion joints corresponding to the pipework.

Fig. 5 Examples of rubber bellows expansion joints without and with limit rods

Expansion joints with limit rods can be used to minimise the forces caused by the expansion joints. Expansion joints with limit rods are always recommended for flanges larger than 6 inches. The pipework should be anchored so that it does not stress the expansion joints and the pump. Follow the supplier's instructions and pass them on to advisers or pipe installers.

9



7.2 Electrical installation

Warning The electrical installation should be carried out by an authorized person in accordance with local regulations and the relevant wiring diagram.

The electrical installation of the booster system must comply with enclosure class IP54.

Make sure that the booster system is suitable for the electricity supply to which it is connected.

Make sure that the wire cross-section corresponds to the specifications in the wiring diagram.

The connection of the electrical supply, transmitters and external monitoring equipment must be carried out by an authorized electrician in accordance with the NEC, local regulations and the BoosterpaQ wiring diagram.

Ensure that the Hydro MPC controls and the pumps are suitable for the electricity supply on which they will be used (see Technical Data). Please read the wiring diagram carefully. According to the NEC, if the motors cannot be seen from the control panel, they must be fitted with a disconnect switch.

Any BoosterpaQ that utilizes a variable frequency drive (E, ED, ES, EF, EDF, F) should be connected to an electrical supply with all phase lines electrically symmetrical with respect to ground. A "four wire wye" electrical supply with line impedance between 0.5% - 3% is recommended. If a variable frequency drive is

connected to a delta transformer or if line impedance is not within the recommended 0.5% - 3%, the drive may not operate correctly and may not provide optimum performance (excessive faults, erratic behavior, or complete failure). Ask your power company or electrician to determine what type of electrical supply is present. Generator supplied power must meet public utility power quality standards.

7.3 Start-up 1. Have a qualified person check for proper power supply and

plumbing connections. Make sure the main power is off.

2. Check that the air pre-charge in the diaphragm tank is 0.7 times the required discharge pressure set-point (0.9 times for MPC-S systems). System pressure must not be applied to the tank connection during the tank precharge process. If water is supplied to the tank from the system, close the tank valve and bleed off the pressure in the tank before the pressurizing process.

Prime the system as follows 3. Suction pressure system (pumps are flooded at least as high

as the highest part of the pumps)

- close all discharge manifold pump isolation valves and open all inlet manifold pump isolation valves

- open the vent plug on top of each pump. It is a small hex head screw in a large vent plug. Air and water will escape from the pump through a small hole in the large vent plug. When the air is out and water is flowing steadily, tighten the small hex head screw on the vent plug to stop the flow.

If you are filling an empty piping system, do not allow the pumps to run with the discharge valves wide open as cavitation may occur.

Note

10

4. Suction lift system (the water source is below the pumps or does not flood the pumps to the highest point on the pumps).

- close all discharge manifold pump isolation valves and open all inlet manifold pump isolation valves

- for suction lift applications, a foot valve must be placed on the inlet piping at the water source (tank, etc). If there is a fill point above the highest point of the pumps, you may fill the system from this point. If there is no fill point above the highest point of the pumps, remove the large vent plug on

each pump. Fill each pump until the water is up to the vent plug, then replace the vent plugs.

5. Ensure all circuit breakers are in the "on" position.

6. Make sure the discharge manifold pump isolation valves are closed. Switch on main power.

Caution The pumps may start at this time.

7. At this time "Start-up wizard" may now be ran. Step 8 can be skipped upon completion of "Start-up wizard". If "Start-up wizard" could not be ran or already ran proceed to step 8.

8. Run the "Start-up wizard" again by performing the following: Move top line display to "Settings". If prompted for password enter "6814", next move down to "Functions, CU 351" and press the "OK" button. Now move down to "Run wizard again" and press the "OK" button.

9. Vent the system by opening the vent plug on each pump (as in Step 3, while the pump is running starting in step 18 of the "Start-up wizard".). Venting with the pumps running ensures all air is removed from the suction piping. Do not run the system with the discharge manifold pump isolation valves closed more than five minutes to prevent over-heating of the pump liquid.

10.As pumps stop, check pump rotation. Repeat as necessary. If

the area is dark, a flashlight may be required, or remove a

coupling guard on each pump for better visibility. Disconnect the main power when removing coupling guards.

Warning Do not touch the couplings while the pumps are turning as injury may result. Replace all coupling guards after the rotation check. Disconnect main power when removing and replacing coupling guards (or open service disconnect switches if this option was supplied).

If the rotation is incorrect on any 3 phase pumps, switch any 2

of the 3 power main wires supplied to the control panel (L1, L2, L3). If that doesn't correct the rotation, call your Grundfos representative.

Note If you are filling an empty piping system, do not allow the pumps to run with the discharge valves wide open as cavitation may occur.

11.Upon completion of venting pumps and checking for correct rotation you are now ready to bring the BoosterpaQ into normal operation. With the discharge manifold isolation valves still closed, partially open each pump discharge isolation valve to allow water to enter into the discharge piping of the BoosterpaQ. Continue the process of filling the discharge piping until discharge piping pressure is approximately at the desired Setpoint pressure of the BoosterpaQ.

12.0pen the discharge manifold isolation valves for each pump completely. System is now ready for operation.

It may be necessary to clear alarms in the fault log. Follow the steps in paragraph sections 9.6 to clear alarms.



INSTALLATION AND STARTUP NOTES

11



8. Control panel The control panel in the front cover of the control cabinet features a display, a number of buttons and two indicator lights. The control panel enables manual setting and monitoring of the performance of the Hydro MPC.

Fig. 6 Control panel

Key

Pos. Description

1 Display

2 Arrow to the right

3 Help

4 Up

5 Down

6 Plus

7 Minus

8 Esc

9 Home

10 Ok

11 Indicator light, operation (green)

12 Indicator light, fault (red)

13 Contrast

12

8.1 Display (pos. 1)

D

Status 1 salvo

Operation

P1.1: 4.2bar

SP: 5.0 bar

0% 0%

100%

4.2bar

Ouertem erature 64

System Normal CU 351

Pump 1 Stop Auto

'Pump 2 Stop Auto

Pump 3 Normal Auto

2007-11.26 16 45

Fig. 7 Display design

8.1.1 Menu line

The menu line (A) is illustrated in fig. 7.

The display has four main menus:

1- A

1-- B

C

Status: Indication of system status

Operation: Change of operating parameters such as setpoint (password option)

Alarm: Alarm log for fault finding

Settings: Change of settings (password option)

8.1.2 Top line

The top line (B) is illustrated in fig. 7.

The top line shows

the display number and title (left side)

the selected menu (left side)

the symbol d in case of alarm (right side)

the symbol El if the service language has been selected (right side).

8.1.3 Graphical illustration The graphical illustration (D) may show a status, an indication or other elements, depending on the position in the menu structure.

The illustration may show the entire system or part of it as well as various settings.

8.1.4 Scroll bar

If the list of illustration elements exceeds the display, the symbols and will appear in the scroll bar to the right. Use the

and Q buttons to move up and down in the list.

8.1.5 Bottom line

The bottom line (C) shows the date and time.



8.2 Buttons and indicator lights The buttons (pos. 2 to 10 in fig. 6) on the CU 351 are active when they are illuminated.

8.2.1 Arrow to the right (pos. 2)

Press the 0 button to move to the next menu in the menu structure. If you press 0 when the Settings menu is highlighted, you go to the Status menu.

8.2.2 Help (pos. 3)

When the button is illuminated, a help text applying to the current display will appear if the button is pressed.

Close the text by pressing the button.

8.2.3 Up and down (pos. 4 and 5)

Press the O and 0 buttons to move up and down in lists.

A text can be selected when it is in a box.

If a text is marked and the 0 button is pressed, the text above will be marked instead. If the 0 button is pressed, the text below will be marked.

If the 0 button is pressed in the last line in the list, the first line will be marked.

If the 0 button is pressed in the first line in the list, the last line will be marked.

8.2.4 Plus and minus (pos. 6 and 7)

Use the -0 and Q buttons to increase and reduce values. A value is activated when the ak button is pressed.

8.2.5 Esc (pos. 8)

Use the button to go one display back in the menu.

If a value has been changed and the e button is pressed, the new value will not be saved. For further information, see section 8.2.7 Ok (pos. 10).

If the OK button is pressed before the button, the new value will be saved. For further information, see section 8.2.7 Ok (pos. 10).

8.2.6 Home (pos. 9)

Press the a button to return to the Status menu.

8.2.7 Ok (pos. 10)

Use the e button as an enter button.

The ck button is also used to start the setting of a value.

If a value has been changed and the ok button is pressed, the new value will be activated.

8.2.8 Indicator lights (pos. 11 and 12)

The Hydro MPC control panel incorporates a green and red indicator light.

The green indicator light is on when the Hydro MPC is in

operation.lt is flashing if the Hydro MPC has been set to stop.

The red indicator light is on if there is an alarm or a warning. The fault can be identified from the alarm list.

8.2.9 Contrast (pos. 13)

The contrast in the display can be changed by means of the button:

1. Press

2. Adjust the contrast with 0 and Q. 8.2.10 Back light If no button is touched for 15 minutes, the back light of the panel will be dimmed, and the first display in the Status menu will appear.

Press any button to re-activate the back light.

13



9. Functions

9.1 Tree of functions

1. Status

Status

2. Operation

2 Operation

3. Alarm

3 Alarm status

-3.1 Current alarms X2.1 Further settings

1_3.1.1 Current alarms -2.1.1 System operating mode 3.1 Current alarms

-1.2 System -2.1.2 Control mode 3.2 Alarm log

-1.2.1 Operating mode -2.1.3 Setpoints

-1.2.2 Setpoint -2.1.4 Individual pump control

-1.2.3 Setpoint influence L 2.1.4. Pump 1...6

-1.2.4 Measured values

-1.2.5 Analog inputs

-1.3 Pump 1

-1.4 Pump 2

-1.5 Pump 3

-1.6 Pump 4

-1.7 Pumps -1.8 Pump 6

Key to the four main menus, Status, Operation, Alarm and Settings

!Status

The Status menu shows alarms and the status of system and pumps. Note: No settings can be made in this menu.

lOperation:

In the Operation menu, the most basic parameters can be set, such as setpoint, operating mode, control mode and individual pump control.

iAlarm

The Alarm menu gives an overview of alarms and warnings. Alarms and warnings can be reset in this menu.

,Settings

In the Settings menu, it is possible to set various functions: Primary controller Setting of alternative setpoints, external setpoint influence, primary sensor, clock program, proportional pressure and S-system configuration.

Pump cascade control Setting of min. time between start/stop, max. number of starts/hour, number of standby pumps, forced pump changeover, pump test run, pilot pump, pump stop attempt, pump start and stop speed, min. performance and compensation for pump start-up time. Secondary functions Setting of stop function, soft pressure build-up, digital and analog inputs, digital outputs, emergency run, min., max. and user-defined duty, pump curve data, flow estimation, control source and fixed inlet pressure. Monitoring functions Setting of dry-running protection, min. and max. pressure, external fault, limit 1

and 2 exceeded, pumps outside duty range and pressure relief. Functions, CU 351 Selection of service language, main language and units. Setting of date and time, passwords, Ethernet connection, GENIbus number and software status.

14

Continued on page 15



Continued from page 16 4. Settings - 4.1 Pnmary controller

-4,1.1 -4.1.2

-4.1.3

PI controller

Altemative setpoints

Altemative setpoints 2...7

External setpoint influence

L-4.1.3.1 Set the influence function

Setting of influence function

-4.1.4 Primary sensor

-4.1.6 Clock program

-4.1.7 Proportional pressure

-4.1.8 S-system configuration

-4.2 Pump cascade control

4.2.1 Min. lime between start/stop

Max. number of starts/hour

-4.2.3 Standby pumps

-4.2.4 Forced pump changeover

-4.2.5 Pump test run

-4.2.6 Pilot pump

-4.2.7 Pump stop attempt

-4.2.8 Pump start and stop speed

-4,2.9 Min. performance

-4.2.10 Compensation for pump start-up time

-4.3 Secondary functions

-4.3.1 Stop function

Stop parameters

-4.3.3 Soft pressure build-up

4.3.5 Emergency run

-4.3.7 Di ital inputs

Function, 011..013 (CU 351), [10. 12, 141

Function, D11..019 (10 351-41), [10...461

Function, 011..DI9 (10 351 -42),(10...46)

-4.3.8 Analog inputs

-Setting, analog input A11..A13 (CU 351), [51, 54, 57)

L-Function, A11...A13 (CU 351), (51, 54, 571

-4.4

-Setting, A11..Al2 (10 351-41), [57, 60)

L-Function, A11..Al2 (10 351-41), (57, 601

-Setting, A11..Al2 (10 351-42), [57, 60)

L-Function, A11..A2 (10 351-42), (57, 601

-4.3.9 Di Rai outputs

Function, 001 and D02 (CU 351), [71, 74)

Function, 001...007 (10 351-41), [77_88) Function, 001...007 (10 351-42), (77...881

-4.3.14 Min., max. and user-defined duty

4.3.14.1 Min. duty

4.3.14.2 Max. duty

4.3.14.3 User-defined duty

-4.3.19 Pump curve data

1-4.3.23 Flow estimation

-4.3.20 Control source

-4.3.22 Fixed inlet pressure

-4.3.23 Flow estimation

Monitoring functions

-4.4.1 Dry-running protection

-4.4.1.1 PressureAevel switch

-4.4.1.2 Measurement, inlet pressure

-4.4.1.3 Measurement, tank level

-4.4.2 Min. pressure

-4.4.3 Max. pressure

-4.4.4 External fault

-4.4.5 Limit 1 exceeded

-4.4.6 Limit 2 exceeded

-4.4.7 Pumps outside duty range

-4.4.8 Pressure relief

15



Continued from page 16

16

4. Settings 4.5 Functions, CU 351

Change language

Run wizard again

=4.5.1 Display

-4.5.2 Display

to service language (GB)

language

units

-4.5.2.1 Units for pressure

-4.5.2.2 Units for differential pressure -4.5.3 Date and time

-4.5.2.3 Units for head -4.5.4 Password

-4.5.2.4 Units for level -4.5.5 Ethernet

-4.5.2.5 Units for flow rate -4.5.6 GENIbus number

-4.5.2.6 Units for volume -4.5.9 Software status

-4.5.2.7 Units for specific energy

-4.5.2.8 Units for temperature

C 4.5.2.9 Units for power

4.5.2.10 Units for energy



9.2 Overview

Section Display and display number See page

19.4,Status (1) 19

9.4.1 Current alarms (3. 1) 19

9.4.2 System (1.2) 19

9.4.3 Operating mode (1.2.1) 20

9.4.4 Setpoint (1.2.2) 20

9.4.5 Setpoint influence (1.2.3) 20

9.4.6 Measured values (1.2.4) 21

9.4.7 Analog inputs (/. 2. 5) 21

9.4.8 Pump 1...6 (1.3 to 1.8) 21

F9.5 Operation (2) 21

9.5.1 Operation (2) 22

9.5.2 System operating mode (2.1.1) 22

9.5.3 Control mode (2.1.2) 23

9.5.4 Setpoints (2.1.3) 25

9.5.5 Individual pump control (2.1.4) 25

9.5.6 Setting of individual operating mode (2.1.4.1 to 2.1.4.6) 26

19,,6A/arm '(3)

9.6.1 Alarm status (3) 27

9.6.2 Current alarms (3.1) 32

9.6.3 Alarm log (3.2) 32

19.'7 Settings (4) x. 32

9.7.1 Primary controller (4.1) 33

9.7.2 PI controller (4. /. /) 33

9.7.3 Alternative setpoints (4.1.2) 33

9.7.4 Alternative setpoints 2 to 7 (4.1.2.1 to 4.1.2.7) 34

9.7.5 External setpoint influence (4.1.3) 34

9.7.6 Setting of influence function (4.1.3.2) 35

9.7.7 Primary sensor (4.1.4) 35

9.7.8 Clock program (4.1.6) 36

9.7.9 Proportional pressure (4.1.7) 36

9.7.10 S-system configuration (4.1.8) 37

9.7.11 Pump cascade control (4.2) 37

9.7.12 Min. time between start/stop (4.2.1) 38

9.7.13 Max. number of starts/hour (4.2.1) 38

9.7.14 Standby pumps (4.2.3) 38

9.7.15 Forced pump changeover (4.2.4) 39

9.7.16 Pump test run (4.2.5) 39

9.7.17 Pilot pump (4.2.6) 40

9.7.18 Pump stop attempt (4.2.7) 40

9.7.19 Pump start and stop speed (4.2.8) 41

9.7.20 Min. performance (4.2.9) 41

9.7.21 Compensation for pump start-up time (4.2.10) 42

9.7.22 Secondary functions (4.3) 42

9.7.23 Stop function (4.3.1) 42

9.7.24 Soft pressure build-up (4.3.3) 44

9.7.25 Emergency run (4.3.5) 45

9.7.26 Digital inputs (4.3.7) 45

9.7.27 Functions of digital inputs (4.3.7.1) 46

9.7.28 Analog inputs (4.3.8) 46

9.7.29 Analog inputs (4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.7) 47

9.7.30 Analog inputs and measured value (4.3.8.1.1 to 4.3.8.7.1) 47

9.7.31 Digital outputs (4.3.9) 48

9.7.32 Functions of digital outputs (4.3.9.1 to 4.3.9.16) 48

9. 7.33 Min., max. and user-defined duty (4.3.14) 49

9.7.34 Min. duty (4.3.14.1) 49

17



Section Display and display number See page

9.7.35 Max. duty (4.3.14.2) 49

9.7.36 User-defined duty (4.3.14.3) 50

9.7.37 Pump curve data (4.3.19) 50

9.7.38 Control source (4.3.20) 51

9.7.39 Fixed inlet pressure (4.3.22) 52

9.7.40 Flow estimation (4.3.23) 52

9.7.41 Monitoring functions (4.4) 52

9.7.42 Dry-running protection (4.4.1) 53

9.7.43 Dry-running protection with pressure/level switch (4.4.1.1) 53

9.7.44 Dry-running protection with pressure transmitter (4.4.1.2) 54

9.7.45 Dry-running protection with level transmitter (4.4.1.3) 54

9.7.46 Min. pressure (4.4.2) 55

9.7.47 Max. pressure (4.4.3) 55

9.7.48 External fault (4.4.4) 56

9.7.49 Limit 1 and 2 exceeded (4.4.5 and 4.4.6) 56

9.7.51 Pressure relief (4.4.8) 57

9.7.52 Functions, CU 351 (4.5) 58

9.7.53 Display language (4.5.1) 58

9.7.54 Display units (4.5.2) 59

9.7.55 Date and time (4.5.3) 60

9.7.56 Passwords (4.5.4) 60

9. 7. 57 Ethernet (4.5.5) 60

9.7.58 GENIbus number (4.5.6) 61

9. 7. 59 Software status (4.5.9) 61

18



9.3 Description of functions The description of functions is based on the four main menus of the CU 351 control unit: Status, Operation, Alarm and Settings. The functions apply to all control variants unless otherwise stated.

9.4 Status (1)

The first status display is shown below. This display is shown when the Hydro MPC is switched on, and it appears when the buttons of the control panel have not been touched for 15 minutes.

Fig. 8 Status

- 2007-11-26 16.40

Description No settings can be made in this menu.

The current value (process value, PV) of the control parameter, usually the discharge pressure, is shown in the upper right corner (G) together with the selected setpoint (SP) (H).

The upper half of the display (A) shows a graphic illustration of the Hydro MPC booster system and part of the system. The selected measuring parameters are shown with sensor symbol and current value.

In the middle of the display, an information field (I) is shown if any incidents occur.

The lower display half (B) shows

the latest current alarm, if any, and the fault cause together with the fault code in brackets

system status with current operating mode and control source

pump status with current operating mode and manual/auto.

If a fault has occurred, the symbol ct will be shown in the alarm line (C) together with the cause and fault code, for instance Limit 2

exceeded (191).

If the fault is related to one of the pumps, the symbol d will also be shown in front of the status line (D) of the pump in question. At the same time, the symbol 4 will be flashing instead of the pump symbol (E). The symbol d will be shown to the right in the top line of the display (F). As long as a fault is present, this symbol will be shown in the top line of all displays.

To open a menu line, mark the line with 0 or Q , and press

e.

Note

The display makes it possible to open status displays showing

current alarms

system status

status of each pump.

9.4.1 Current alarms (3.1)

5734.0 1:41711714.

3.1- Current alarms

Alarm Isattr'453

- -d Press toll to reset alarms. lescl returns to the previous display.

&Pump 1

Overload 1481

Occurred at Disappeared at

2007-11-26 16:41

2007-11-26 16.41

Fig. 9 Current alarms

Description In this display, current unreset alarms and warnings are shown.

For further information, see sections 9.6.2 Current alarms (3.1) and 9.6.3 Alarm log (3.2).

9.4.2 System (1.2)

MEM= I hatirnsettingO 12 -System

rent operating mode

rum

rent control mode

elected setpoint urrent setpoint urrent value

trot source: System controlled from

urther information:

Normal

CU 351

Closed loop

5.0bar 5.0bar 5.0bar

CU 351

Setpoint Setpoint influence Measured values Analog inputs

'2007-11-26 1626

Fig. 10 System

Description This display shows the current operational state of the Hydro MPC booster system. It is possible to go to subdisplays showing details.

The display makes it possible to open specific displays about

operating mode

setpoint

setpoint influence

measured values

analog inputs.

19



9.4.3 Operating mode (1.2.1)

atalliVer-atk,n Atarrk 12.1. Opetating mese

rent operating mode rom

Normal

CU 351

Ming mode, all control sources: trot source Operating mode Selected

CU 351 Normal

Bus Normal

200711.26 1626

Fig. 11 Operating mode

Description Here the operating mode of the Hydro MPC booster system is shown as well as from where the Hydro MPC is controlled.

Operating modes Hydro MPC has six operating modes: 1. Normal

The booster system adapts its performance to the requirement.

2. Max. The pumps run at a constant high speed. Normally, all pumps run at maximum speed.

3. User-defined The pumps run at a constant speed set by the user. Usually it

is a performance between Max. and Min.

4. MTh.

The pumps run at a constant low speed. Normally, one pump is running at a speed of 70 %.

5. Stop All pumps have been stopped.

6. Emergency run The pumps run according to the setting made in the display Emergency run (4.3.5).

The performance required in the operating modes Max., Min., User-defined and Emergency run can be set in the Settings menu. See sections 9.7.33 Min., max. and user-defined duty (4.3.14) and 9.7.25 Emergency run (4.3.5).

The current operating mode can be controlled from four different sources: Fault, External signal, CU 351 and Bus.

Control source Hydro MPC can be set to remote control via an external bus (option). In this case, a setpoint and an operating mode must be set via the bus.

In the Settings menu, it is possible to select whether the CU 351 or the external bus is to be the control source.

The status of this setting is shown in the display Operating mode.

20

9.4.4 Setpoint (1.2.2)

Status fix7T3t11-71iiigialgitiSet 122 - Setpoint

From

.etpoint 351

CU 351

Open loop Closed loop Selected

No 1 70% No 2 70% No 3 70% No 4 70% No 5 70% No 6 70% No 7 70%

Setpoint, bus 0%

5.0bar 3.0bar 3.Obar 3.0bar 3.Obar

3.0bar 3.Obar

0.Obar

2007-11-26 1626

Fig. 12 Setpoint

Description This display shows the selected setpoint and whether it comes from the CU 351 or an external bus.

The display also shows all seven possible setpoints from CU 351

(for closed- and open-loop control). At the same time, the selected setpoint is shown.

As it is a status display, no settings can be made.

Setpoints can be changed in the Operation menu.

9.4.5 Setpoint influence (1.2.3)

212.1087111[PftTnirt;,,SOITMS 111

123 -setpoint innu-ensi

trot mode

acted setpoilt Closed loop

5.0bar

nfluenced by:

External setpoint influence --% Low flow boost 0.0 bar

Proportional pressure

ent setpoint 5.0bar

2007-11-26 1626

Fig. 13 Setpoint influence

Description The selected setpoint can be influenced by parameters. The parameters are shown as percentage from 0 to 100 % or as a

pressure measured in bar. They can only reduce the setpoint, as the influence in percentage divided with 100 is multiplied with the selected setpoint:

Setpoint (I) 1011(2) x current(SP) Setpoint selected infi'

The display shows the parameters influencing the selected setpoint and the percentage or value of influence.

Some of the possible parameters can be set in the display External setpoint influence (4.1.3). The parameter low flow boost is set as an on/off band as a percentage of the setpoint set in the display Stop function (4.3.1). The parameter is set as a

percentage in the display Proportional pressure (4.1.7).

Finally the resulting current setpoint (SP) is shown.



9.4.6 Measured values (1.2.4)

tatus gulwth. 1.2.4 - Ineasuiea oatues

Current control parameter (PU):

Discharge pressure 5.0bar

Other measured or calculated values: Discharge pressure Flow rate Power consumption Energy consumption

5.0bar 20.3m3,11

3.2 kW

702 kWh

2007-11-26 162-

Fig. 14 Measured values

Description This display gives a general status of all measured and calculated parameters.

Note The lines "Power consumption" and "Energy consumption" are only shown in Hydro MPC-E booster systems.

9.4.7 Analog inputs (1.2.5)

EIMMoper 773-tion 1.2.5- Analog inputs

alog inputs and measured value:

All (CU 351), (51)

(Discharge pressure)

5.0bar

012 (CU 351), (54)

(Flow rate)

013 (CU 351), (57)

(Not used)

20.3m3ki

2007-11-26 1626

Fig. 15 Analog inputs

Description The display shows an overview of the analog inputs and the current measured values of each input. See sections 9.7.28 Analog inputs (4.3.8), 9.7.29 Analog inputs (4.3.8.1 to

4.3.8.7) and 9.7.30 Analog inputs and measured value (4.3.8.1.1 to 4.3.8.7.1).

9.4.8 Pump 1...6 (1.3 to 1.8)

Status

Operating mode

Current operating mode

From

Speed

Power

Energy consumption Hour counter Temperature

Auto Normal

CU 351

88% 1.7 kW

22k1Th

Oh

2008.01-30 112

Fig. 16 Pump 1

Description This display shows the operational state of the individual pumps.

The pumps may have different operating modes:

Auto Together with the other pumps in automatic operation, the pump is controlled by the PI controller which ensures that the booster system delivers the required performance (pressure).

Manual The pump is not controlled by the PI controller. In manual operation, the pump has one of the following operating modes:

- Max. The pump runs at a set maximum speed. (This operating mode can only be selected for variable-speed pumps.)

- Normal The pump runs at a set speed.

- The pump runs at a set minimum speed. (This operating mode can only be selected for variable-speed pumps.)

- Stop The pump has been forced to stop.

Besides information about the operating mode, it is possible to read various parameters in the status display, such as these:

speed (only 0 or 100 % are shown for mains-operated pumps)

power consumption (only CR(I)E pumps)

energy consumption (only CR(I)E pumps)

operating hours.

9.5 Operation (2)

In this menu, the most basic parameters can be set, such as setpoint, operating mode, control mode and forced control of pumps.

21



9.5.1 Operation (2)

A

C

ttmti-.):;21tirtY'l

cutreht control parameter (Pu) -

stirta 5.0bar

Selected setpoint: Setpoint 1

5.0bar

16.0 bar

0.0bar

Current setpoint (SP):

5.0bar

Set set .oint 1 closed 5.0bar

Operating mode:

Further settings

Normal

Stop

2007-11.26 16 26

Fig. 17 Operation

Description The column shows the setting range. In closed-loop control, it

corresponds to the range of the primary sensor, here 0-16 bar. In

open-loop control, the setting range is 0-100 %.

At the left hand of the column, the selected setpoint 1 (A) is shown, i.e. the value set in the display. At the right hand of the column, the current setpoint (B) is shown, i.e. the setpoint acting as reference for the PI controller. If no kind of external setpoint influence has been selected, the two values will be identical. The current measured value (discharge pressure) is shown as the grey part of the column (C). See sections 9.7.5 External setpoint influence (4.1.3) and 9.7.6 Setting of influence function (4.1.3.2).

Below the display is a menu line for setting of setpoint 1 and selection of operating mode, including the operating modes Normal and Stop. It is possible to select further settings: system operating mode, control mode, setpoints for closed and open loop as well as individual pump control.

Setting range

Setpoint:

Closed-loop control: Measuring range of the primary sensor

Open-loop control: 0-100 %

Setting via control panel

Setpoint:

1. Mark the Operation menu with 0. 2. Mark Setpoint 1 with 0 or 0 . Set the value with

0 3. Save with ok

Operating mode:

1. Mark the Operation menu with 0 .

2. Mark o erating mode Normal or Stop with 0 or 0 Save with c( .

Further settings: 1. Mark the Operation menu with 0 2. Mark Further settings with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

3. Select one of the settings below with 0 or 0 , and press ok

Factory setting The setpoint is a value suitable for the Hydro MPC booster system in question. The factory setting may have been changed in the start-up menu.

9.5.2 System operating mode (2.1.1)

Operating mode:

Normal

Max.

User-defined Min.

Stop

Emergency

Set Min., Max. and User-defined duty: Min.

Max.

User-defined Emergency

Fig. 18 System operating mode

Description Hydro MPC can be set to six different operating modes. Normal is the typical setting. See section 9.4.3 Operating mode (1.2.1).

The performance of the operating modes Max., Min., User- defined and Emergency run can be set in the Settings menu.

In the display shown, it is possible to go directly to the Settings menu in order to set the pump performance or the setpoint.

Setting range

It is possible to select the operating modes Normal, Max., Min., User-defined, Stop and Emergency run.


1 Mark the Operation menu with 0 .

2. Mark Further settings with 0 or 0 , and press e. 3. Mark System operating mode with 0 or 0, and press

ok

4. Select the desired operating mode by marking one of the lines with check boxes with Q or 0, and press (3.

5. In order to set the performance in min., max., user-defined duty or emergency run, mark the desired line at the bottom of the display, and press e.

&or See sections 9.7.33 Min., max. and user-defined duty (4.3.14) and 9. 7. 25 Emergency run (4.3.5).

Factory setting Normal.

system operating mode (see section 9.5.2)

control mode (see section 9.5.3)

setpoints (see section 9.5.4)

individual pump control (see section 9.5.6).

22



9.5.3 Control mode (2.1.2) Open loop In open-loop control, the pumps run at a fixed speed.

Operation

Control mode:

C The pump speed is calculated from the performance set by the user (0-100 %). The pump performance in percentage is proportional with the flow rate.

Closed loop 171 Open-loop control is usually used when the booster system is Open loop controlled by an external controller which controls the

performance via an external signal. The external controller could for instance be a building management system connected to the Hydro MPC. In such cases, the Hydro MPC is like an actuator. See figs 22 and 23.

2007-11-26 16 2

Fig. 19 Control mode

Description There are two control modes, namely closed and open loop.

Examples:

Closed loop The typical control mode is closed loop where the built-in PI

controller ensures that the booster system delivers the discharge pressure required (setpoint). The performance is based on the setpoint set for closed loop. See figs 20 and 21.

Fig. 20 Booster system controlled by built-in PI controller (closed loop)

P [bar]

Setpoint

Time [sec]

Fig. 21 Regulation curve for closed loop


1. Mark the Operation menu with 0. 2. Mark Further settings with 0 or , and press ok .

3. Mark Control mode with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

4. Select Closed loop with 0 or CI, and press C). 5. Set the setpoint. See sections 9.5.4 Setpoints (2.1.3) and

9.5.1 Operation (2).

Fig. 22 Booster system with external controller (open loop)

Flow rate [gpm]

0 5

Input [ %] from external controller

Fig. 23 Regulation curve for open loop

Flow rate [gpm]

100

75

50

25

/ L 1/

Flow rate - - Pump 1

Pump 2

5 50 70.7 86.6 100

- - - Pump 3

Pump 4

Input ( %) from external controller

Fig. 24 Regulation curve for Hydro MPC-E in open loop

23



Flow rate [gpm]

100

75

50

25

5

Flow rate - - Pump 1

Pump 2 - - - - Pump 3

Pump 4

50 70.7 86.6 100 Input [%] from external controller

Fig. 25 Regulation curve for Hydro MPC-ED in open loop

Flow rate [gpm]

100

75

50

25

Flow rate - - - Pump 1

Pump 2 - - - - Pump 3

Pump 4

5 50 70.7 86.6 100 Input [%) from external controller

Fig. 26 Regulation curve for Hydro MPC-ES in open loop

Flow rate [gpm]

100

75

50

25

5 50 70.7 86.6 100

Flow rate Pump 1

Pump 2

Pump 3

Pump 4

Input [ %] from external controller

Fig. 27 Regulation curve for Hydro MPC-S in open loop

24

Correlating open loop input setpoint percentage with number of pumps in operation. Example: MPC system with (4) pumps

Setpoint 0% to 5% = All pumps stopped

One pump operation from setpoint from 5% to J (1- pump /4- pumps) = 50%

Two pump operation from 50% to J (2-pump/4-pumps) =

70.7%

Three pump operation from 70.7% to NI (3-pumps/4-pumps) =

86.6%

Four pump operation from 86.6% to 100%

For staging pumps off the cut-out is 2% less then cut-in. Example: staging from 4-pump to 3-pump operation will occur at 84.6% reference signal.

Setting range These settings must be made in connection with open loop:

stop of the Hydro MPC booster system

selection of control mode Open loop

setting of setpoint 1, open loop

setting of external setpoint influence

selection of operating mode Normal.

Setting via control panel To set an external control source to control the Hydro MPC booster system, proceed as follows:

1. Mark the Operation menu with 0. 2. Mark the operating mode Stop with 0 or 0 , and press

ok . The check mark in the right box shows that the operation has been stopped.

3. Mark Further settings with 0 or 0 , and press e 4. Mark Control mode with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

5. Select Open loop with 0 or 0, and press ok .

6. Return by pressing twice.

7. Mark Set setpoint 1, open loop with 0, or O. 8. Set the setpoint to 100 % with 0 , and save with ok .

9. Mark the Settings menu with 0 .

10.Mark Primary controller with 0 or , and press e. 11.Mark External setpoint influence with 0 or 0 , and press

12.Mark Go to setting of analog input with 0 or 0 , and press e.

13.Select the analog input with 0 or 0 , and press e 14.Select the range of the analog input with 0 or 0 , and

press C). The selection is indicated by a check mark.

15.Mark Measured input value with 0 or 0 , and press ok

Now the display 4.3.8.1.1 appears.

16.Select 0-100 % signal with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

17.Press to return to display 4.3.8.1. 18.Set the minimum sensor value with 0 or Q, and save with

19.Set the maximum sensor value with 0 or 0, and save with ok

-

20.Return by pressing twice.

21.Mark Input value to be influenced by with Q or O , and press 0 .

22.Mark 0-100 % signal with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

23.Return with .

24.Mark Set the influence function with 0 or 0 , and press ok . For details, see section 9.7.6 Setting of influence

function (4.1.3.2).

25.Mark the menu line for number of points with Q or 0 , and press co.



26.Select the required number of points with 0 or 0, and save with e.

27.Mark External input value (point 1) with e or 0 .

28.Set the value of the external input value with 0 or 0, and save with e.

29.Mark Reduce setpoint to (point 1) with 0 or 0 .

30.Set the value as a percentage with 0 or 0, and save with ok

'

31.Repeat 27 to 31 for all chosen points.

32.Return with

33.Mark Filter time with , set the time in seconds with 0 or 0, and save with

34.Mark Activated with Q or O , and press O. The check mark in the right box shows that the function has been activated.

35.Return by pressing c) twice.

36.Mark the Operation menu with 0 .

37.Mark the operating mode Normal with Q or Q^ , and press e. The check mark in the right box shows that the operation

is normal. The booster system can now be controlled by an

external controller.

Factory setting Closed-loop control.

9.5.4 Setpoints (2.1.3)

tatus .1.3-Setpoints

Operation Mine battfrigi

Set the setpoints. Closed loop:

Setpoint 1 5.0bar Setpoint 2

Setpoint 3

Setpoint 4

Setpoint S

Setpoint 6

Setpoint 7

Open loop: Setpoint 1

Setpoint 2

Setpoint 3

Setpoint 4

Setpoint 5

3.0bar 3.0bar 3.0bar 3.0bar 3.0bar 3.0bar

70% 70% 70% 70% 70%

Setpoint 6 70% Setpoint 7 70%

Fig. 28 Setpoints

Description In addition to the primary setpoint 1 (shown in the display 2 in the Operation menu), six alternative setpoints can be set for closed- loop control. It is furthermore possible to set seven setpoints for open-loop control.

As described in sections 9.7.3 Alternative setpoints (4.1.2) and 9.7.4 Alternative setpoints 2 to 7 (4.1.2.1 to 4.1.2.7), it is possible to activate one of the alternative setpoints by means of external contacts.

Setting range The setting range of setpoints for closed-loop control depends on the range of the primary sensor. See section 9.7.7 Primary sensor (4.1.4).

In open loop control, the setting range is 0 - 100 %.

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Operation menu with 0 .

2. Mark Further settings with 0 or 0 , and press e. 3. Mark Setpoints with 0 or 0 , and press 0 .

4. Select the setpoint with 0 or 0 .

5. Set the setpoint with -0 or 0, and press

Factory setting Setpoint 1 for closed-loop control is a value suitable for the Hydro MPC in question.

The alternative setpoints for closed-loop control are 3 bar.

All setpoints for open-loop control are 70 %.

9.5.5 Individual pump control (2.1.4)

.1.4 .1110WidUal pomp control

Select the pump:

battings

Pump 1 Auto Stop Pump 2

Pump 3

Auto Auto

Fig. 29 Individual pump control

Normal

Normal

Description It is possible to change the operating mode from automatic operation to one of the manual operating modes.

Auto

The pumps are controlled by the PI controller, ensuring that the booster system delivers the required performance (pressure).

Manual

The pump is not controlled by the PI controller, but set to one of the following manual operating modes:

Max. The pump runs at a set maximum speed. (This operating mode can only be selected for variable-speed pumps.)

Normal The pump runs at a set speed.

Min. The pump runs at a set minimum speed. (This operating mode can only be selected for variable-speed pumps.)

Stop The pump has been forced to stop.

Pumps in manual operation are not part of the normal pump cascade and speed control. The manual pumps are a

"disturbance" of the normal control of Hydro MPC.

If one or more pumps are in manual operation, Hydro MPC may not be able to deliver the set performance.

There are two displays for the function. In the first display, the pump to be set is selected, and in the next display, the operating mode is selected.

Setting range All pumps can be selected.

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Operation menu with Q. 2. Mark Further settings with 0, or 0 , and press co .

3. Mark Individual pump control with 0 or 0 , and press ok

'

4. Select the pump with 0 or 0, and press Ot .

25



9.5.6 Setting of individual operating mode (2.1.4.1 to 2.1.4.6)

Status 2.1A.1 - Pump

Operation

erating mode, pump 1

Auto VI

Manual

anal: Max.

Normal

Setpoint, manual operation Min.

Stop

0 0%

0 0

11111111111111111=13:0 Fig. 30 Setting of individual operating mode

Description This display is shown for the individual pumps and makes it

possible to set an operating mode.

Setting range

It is possible to select Auto or Manual as well as the operating mode of the pump for manual operation - Max., Normal, Min. or Stop. For mains-operated pumps only Normal or Stop can be selected.


1. Mark the Operation menu with 0 .

2. Mark Individual pump control with 0 or 0, and press

0 '

3. Select the pump with 0 or O, and press Ct. 4. Mark Auto or Manual with 0 or 0, and press CI .

5. Manual: Select the operating mode with 0 or 0, and press ok .

6. Normal: Mark Setpoint with 0 or 0 .

Set the speed of the variable-speed pump with C) or CI ,

and press ok .

Factory setting Auto.

26



9.6 Alarm (3)

The Alarm menu gives an overview of alarms and warnings. In this menu, it is possible to reset alarms and to see the alarm log.

9.6.1 Alarm status (3)

tatuatIca) 3- Alarti Milos

Alarm rettr4s.

Further information about alarms, go to:

Current alarms Alarm log

Fig. 31 Alarm status

Description A fault gt in the Hydro MPC booster system or one of the components monitored can cause an alarm C) or a warning Q. Besides the fault signal via the alarm/warning signal relay and the red indicator light on the CU 351, an alarm can also cause a

change of operating mode, for instance from Normal to Stop. A

warning only causes a fault indication.

The table shows the possible causes of fault together with an alarm code number, and whether they result in an alarm or a

warning. It also shows to what operating mode the booster system changes in case of alarm, and whether restart of the booster system and reset of the alarm is manual or automatic.

The table also shows that the reaction to some of the fault causes mentioned can be set in the Settings menu. See sections 9.7.24 Soft pressure build-up (4.3.3) and 9.7.41 Monitoring functions (4.4) to 9.7.51 Pressure relief (4.4.8).

Fault ,

O E

rn _

of C

cu

0 0

o cr)

C co 13 .0 o E

a)

rn C

ar rn

.c C 2

a)

co E

0

E

Water shortage Auto 206

Water shortage 0 Stop Man/auto X 214

Pressure high Stop Auto 210

Pressure low Auto

X 211 C) Stop Man

Pressure relief 6 Auto X 219

Alarm, all pumps C) Stop Auto 203

External fault 6 Auto

X 3 C) Stop Man

Dissimilar sensor signals 6 Auto 204

Fault, primary sensor 0 Stop Auto 89

Fault, sensor Auto 88

Communication fault Auto 10

Phase failure Auto 2

Undervoltage, pump Auto 7, 40,

42, 73

Overvoltage, pump & Auto 32

Overload, pump Auto 48, 50,

51,54 Overtemperature, pump

Auto 64,

65, 67

Other fault, pump Auto 76, 83

Internal fault, CU 351 ,L Auto 72, 83, 157

Internal fault, 10 351 0 Stop Auto 83, 157

VFD not ready Auto 213

Fault, Ethernet 8 Auto 231, 232

Limit 1 exceeded 80 Man/auto X 190

Limit 2 exceeded 00 Man/auto X 191

Pressure build-up fault 8 0 Man/auto X 215

Pumps outside duty range 6 Man/auto X 208

Pilot pump fault 6 Auto 216

27



Alarm (3) continued

M PC alarm indication "Protocol description"

Alarm Associated

code device and Description/cause Remedy device no.

Reset Alarm/warning typel Action type2

1. Phase failure, pump 2 Pump 1-6

1. Check that all three power supply phases are within a 15 V window.

Auto Warning.

2. Undervoltage

7 Pump 1-6

HSD = hardware shutdown.

There has been a fault, and the permissible number of restarts for the fault type has been exceeded.

a) Fault in power supply.

a) Terminal box defective.

1. Restore power supply.

2. Replace terminal box. Auto Warning.

3. Undervoltage, pump 40 Pump 1-6

a) Power supply voltage 1. Bring voltage back to

is too low at start. prescribed level.

4. Undervoltage, pump a) Faulty power supply 1. Restore proper power

42 Pump 1-6 at the time of staging on a pump.

supply.

5. Undervoltage, pump

73 Pump 1-6

a) Low supply voltage.

b) Power supply failure 1. Restore proper power while motor is supply.

running.

6. Overvoltage, pump 32 Pump 1-6

a) Supply voltage is too 1

high at start. . Bring voltage back to

prescribed level.

7. Overload, associated device 48 Pump 1-6

a) Heavy overload has caused software shutdown (SSD).

. Check and possibly reduce load.

Auto Warning.

Auto Warning.

Auto Warning.

Auto Warning.

Auto Warning,

8. Overload, associated device

50 Pump 1-6

a) MPF = motor protection function. The built-in motor 1. Check and possibly protection has reduce load/improve detected a sustained cooling. overload (MPF 60 sec. limit)>

Auto Warning.

9. Overload, associated device

51 Pump 1-6

a) Heavy overload (Imax. very high). Pump blocked at start.

1. Unblock the pump. Auto Warning,

10. Overload, associated a) The built-in motor device protection has

54 Pump 1-6 detected a transitory overload (MPF 3 sec. limit).

1. Check and possibly reduce load/improve cooling

Auto Warning,

11. Over temperature, pump a) PTC sensor in the 65 Pump 1-6 motor has signalled

over temperature.

1. Check and possibly reduce load/improve cooling.

Auto Warning.

12. Over temperature, pump

a) Terminal box has 67 Pump 1-6 indicated over

temperature.

1. Check and possibly reduce load/improve cooling. (Temperature during operation can be read via PC Tool E- products.)

Auto Warning

28



MPC alarm indication "Protocol description"

Alarm Associated

code device and Description/cause device no.

Remedy Reset Alarm/warning typel Action type2

13. Other fault, associated device

76 Pump 1-6

a)

14. Limit 1 exceeded

190 Measured parameter

a)

15. Limit 2 exceeded

191 Measured parameter

a)

16. Pressure relief 219 System

a)

17. Pressure build-up fault

215 System

a)

18. Pumps outside duty range 208 System

a)

19. Pilot pump fault 216 Pilot pump a)

Internal communication error has occurred in the pump.

Try to reset the fault:

1. Switch off the supply power.

2. Wait until all diodes are out.

3. Switch on the supply power.

If this does not remedy the fault, replace the terminal box.

Auto Warning

The measured parameter has exceeded the limit set.

1. Remove the cause of the Auto/ Alarm/warning

fault. manual Stop/

unchanged.

The measured parameter has exceeded the limit set.

1. Remove the cause of the Auto/ Alarm/warning

fault. manual Stop/

unchanged,

The monitored 1. Reduce the pressure to

pressure could not be reduced sufficiently.

below the limit. Auto

Warning Unchanged

The pressure set cannot be reached within the configured time.

1. Check limit and pipes. Auto/

manual

Alarm/warning Stop/

unchanged

The pump is running outside the defined 1. Check the system. range.

Auto/ Warning manual Unchanged

Pilot pump fault 1. Check wires.

2. Check the pump. Auto Warning

29




Alarm Associated



20. Water shortage, level 1

"Water shortage, level 1

a) The pre-pressure (or the level in the

206 feed tank) is below its programmable warning limit.

21. Water shortage, level 2

*Water shortage, level 2 214

22. Discharge pressure high Pressure above max. 210 pressure

23. Discharge pressure low 'Pressure below min. 211

pressure

24. All pumps in alarm All pumps in alarm

203

25. External fault signal 'External fault signal

003

System

a) The pre-pressure (or the level in the feed tank) is below its programmable warning limit.

b) The pre-pressure switch detect water shortage.

a) The system pressure is above the programmable high- pressure alarm limit.

a) The system pressure is below the programmable low- pressure alarm limit.

1. Check the actual and the corresponding settings.

2. Check the sensor/switch, wiring and input according to the wiring diagram.

3. Check the sensor/switch.

Auto Warning

Unchanged

Auto/ Manual

Alarm Stop

Auto/ Manual

Warning Unchanged

Alarm Fast stop (over rule min. seq.

time)

Auto/ Alarm/Warning

Manual Stop/

Unchanged

a) All pumps, set to Auto, is stopped on account of pump alarm

Troubleshoot according to the alarm message/code: 1. System

2. Pumps installed Use fault fault finding for the pump.

b) Pumps are not indicating alarm

Check the Genibus wires eg. connection, polarisation.

Auto Alarm Stop

a) External fault digital input activated.

1. Check the external signal source.

2. Check the digital input according to the wiring diagram

Auto/ Manual

Alarm/Warning Stop/

Unchanged

26. Inconsistency between sensors *Inconsistency between sensors

204

a) Primary

sensor and/or redundant

sensor

Primary feedback sensor value (pressure) is

inconsistent with redundant feedback sensor value.

1. Check the wiring and input according to the wiring diagram.

2. Check the sensor output according to the measured value.

Auto Warning

Unchanged

27. Primary sensor 'Closed loop feedback sensor signal fault

089 Primary sensor

a) A fault in the sensor assigned to the feed back control is

detected.

1. Check the wiring and input according to the wiring diagram.

2. Check the sensor output according to the measured value.

b) Error in the settings Check the primary sensor of the sensor which is settings assigned to the regulator.

28. Sensor fault *General (measurement) sensor signal fault

088 CU 351

10 351 as 10 module

a) The signal 1.

(ex. 4-20 mA) from one of the analog sensors is outside the 2. selected signal range.

Check the wiring and input according to the wiring diagram.

Check the sensor output according to the measured value

Auto

Alarm Stop

Warning Unchanged

30




Alarm Associated



29. CU 351 internal fault 'Real time clock out of order

a) The real-time clock in Replace the CU 351 157 CU 351 is out of

order.

30. Ethernet fault `Ethernet: No address 231 from DHCP server

31. Ethernet fault 'Ethernet: Auto disabled 232 due to misuse

32. FLASH parameter verification error *FLASH parameter verification error

CU 351

a) No address from DHCP server

a) Auto-disabled due to misuse

1. Communication error.

2. Please contact the system integrator.

a) Verification error in

083 CU 351 FLASH memory

Replace the CU 351

33. 10 351 internal fault `Hardware fault type 2

080 10 351

a) 10 351 pump module See current alarms and hardware fault identify the faulty 10 351

module from the alarm message and replace the module.

b) 10 351 I/O module hardware fault

34. VFD not ready *VFD not ready

213 Pump 1-6 CU 351

1. Check for VFD alarm a) The VFD signal relay

do not release the 2. Check the wiring and

VFD for operation input according to the wiring diagram.

35. Communication fault *Pump communication fault

010 Pump 1-6

10 351

a) No GeniBus communication with a

device connected to CU 351

See actual alarms and identify the faulty device from the alarm message. 1. Check power supply

2. Check GeniBus cable connection

3. Check, with R100, that the device GeniBus no. is

correct.

36. Device alarms From device

Pump 1-6 a) The device is in alarm

See actual alarms and identify the faulty device from the alarm message. 1. Fault find according to

the service instruction for the device.

Auto Warning

Unchanged

1)

2)

Reset type is either fixed as "Auto acknowledge" (Auto) or can be programmed to be Auto or manual ackknowledge (Auto/Man)'.

Programmable action types:

- Go to operating mode "Stop" (no delay (<0.5 s) between pump disconnections).

- Go to operating mode "Min".

- Go to operating mode "User-defined".

- Go to operating mode "Max".

- Set pumps in source mode "Local". - No action (warning only)

31



9.6.2 Current alarms (3.1)

Statu;,Z1715eerition'ii 3.1-Current alarms

Alarm Teti Ais71

Press tokl to reset alarms. lescl returns to the previous display.

&urnp 1

Overload 1481

Occurred at Disappeared at

2007-11-26 16A1

2007-11-261641

Fig. 32 Current alarms

Description This submenu shows the following:

Warnings 8 caused by faults that still exist.

Warnings caused by faults that have disappeared, but the warning requires manual reset.

Alarms ® caused by faults that still exist.

Alarms 0 caused by faults that have disappeared, but the alarm requires manual reset.

All warnings and alarms with automatic reset are automatically removed from the menu when the fault has disappeared.

Alarms requiring manual reset are reset in this display by pressing ok . An alarm cannot be reset until the fault has disappeared.

For every warning or alarm, the following is shown:

Whether it is a warning or an alarm ®. Where the fault occurred: System, Pump 1, Pump 2, etc.

In case of input-related faults, the input is shown.

What the cause of the fault is, and the alarm code in brackets: Water shortage (214), Max. pressure (210), etc.

When the fault occurred: Date and time.

When the fault disappeared: Date and time. If the fault still exists, date and time are shown as --...--.

The latest warning/alarm is shown at the top of the display.

9.6.3 Alarm log (3.2)

The alarm log can store up to 24 warnings and alarms.

tutus Operatiiiri' Alarm settings" 32 - etanntog

8Pump Overload 148)

Occurred at 2007-11-26 16:41

Disappeared at - --

8System water shortage 1214)

Occurred at 2007-11-26 16:39

Disappeared at 2007-11-26 16:39

Fig. 33 Alarm log

32

Description Here warnings and alarms are shown.

For every warning or alarm, the following is shown:

Whether it is a warning & or an alarm ®. Where the fault occurred. System, Pump 1, Pump 2, etc.

In case of input-related faults, the input is shown.

What the cause of the fault is, and the alarm code in brackets: Water shortage (214), Max. pressure (210), etc.

When the fault occurred: Date and time.

When the fault disappeared: Date and time. If the fault still exists, date and time are shown as --...--.

The latest warning/alarm is shown at the top of the display.

9.7 Settings (4)

Operatten alarm -Settings

Select the submenu:

Settings

Primary controller Pump cascade control Secondary functions Monitoring functions Functions, CU 351

1111111111111=1= Fig. 34 Settings

In the Settings menu, it is possible to set the following functions: Primary controller Setting of PI controller, alternative setpoints, external setpoint influence, primary sensor, clock program, proportional pressure and S-system configuration. Pump cascade control Setting of min. time between start/stop, max. number of starts/ hour, number of standby pumps, forced pump changeover, pump test run, pilot pump, pump stop attempt, pump start and stop speed, min. performance and compensation for pump start-up time. Secondary functions Setting of stop function, soft pressure build-up, digital and analog inputs, digital outputs, emergency run, min., max. and user-defined duty, pump curve data, flow estimation, control source and fixed inlet pressure. Monitoring functions Setting of dry-running protection, min. and max. pressure, external fault, limit 1 and 2 exceeded, pumps outside duty range and pressure relief. Functions, CU 351 Selection of service language, main language and units. Setting of time and date, passwords, Ethernet connection, GENIbus number and software status.

Usually, all these functions are set correctly when the Hydro MPC is switched on. It is only necessary to make settings in this menu if the functionality is to be expanded with for instance alternative setpoints or setpoint influence, or if the settings of the CU 351 are to be adjusted.



9.7.1 Primary controller (4.1)

rixaeato'r 4.1 - Pomatq controller

Settings

-tact the submenu:

PI controller Alternative setpoints External setpoint influence Primary sensor Clock program Proportional pressure S-system configuration

200711.26.16 26

Fig. 35 Primary controller

Description In this menu section, it is possible to set the functions related to the primary controller. It is only necessary to make settings in this menu if the functionality is to be expanded with for instance alternative setpoints, external setpoint influence, clock program or proportional pressure. The following menus can be selected:

PI controller

Alternative setpoints

External setpoint influence

Primary sensor

Clock program

Proportional pressure

S-system configuration.

9.7.2 PI controller (4.1.1)

Statu5 4.1.1.- PI controller

SettIngs

Set the PI controller. If inverse control is required, gain Kp must be negative:

1031111111111111 Integral time Ti 1.05

2007-11-26 1626

Fig. 36 PI controller

Description Hydro MPC includes a standard PI controller which ensures that the pressure is stable and corresponds to the setpoint.

It is possible to adjust the PI controller if a faster or slower reaction to changes of consumption is required.

A faster reaction is obtained if Kp is increased and Ti is reduced.

A slower reaction is obtained if Kp is reduced and T1 is increased.

Setting range Gain Kp: -30 to 30. Note: For inverse control, set Kp to a negative value.

Integral time Ti: 0.1 to 3600 seconds.

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with 0 .

2. Mark Primary controller with O or O , and press ok .

3. Mark PI controller with 0 or 0 , and press e. 4. Select the gain (Kr) with 0 or Q . Set the value with 0 or

0, and save with e .

Note: Usually it is not necessary to adjust Kp.

5. Select the integral time (Ti) with 0 or 0 . Set the time with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

Factory setting Kp: 0.5

Ti: 1 second

9.7.3 Alternative setpoints (4.1.2)

talus - Operation; .12- ntrernanue setpoints

Set alternative setpoint

Settings

Setpoint 2

Setpoint 3

Setpoint 4

Setpoint 5

Setpoint 6

Setpoint 7

2007-11.26 16

Fig. 37 Alternative setpoints

Description This function makes it possible to select up to six setpoints (No 2

to 7) as alternatives to the primary setpoint (No 1). The primary setpoint (No 1) is set in the Operation menu. Every alternative setpoint can be addressed manually to a

separate digital input (DI). When the contact of the input is

closed, the alternative setpoint applies.

If more than one alternative setpoint has been selected and they are activated at the same time, the CU 351 selects the setpoint with the lowest number.

Setting range Six setpoints, No 2 to 7.

33



Factory setting

No alternative setpoints have been selected.

9.7.4 Alternative setpoints 2 to 7 (4.1.2.1 to 4.1.2.7)

OperatioritiAlarm,t,h,, 4.1 2.1. Alternative setpoints

Settings

elect digital input for setpoint 2:

Go to sett of tal ' t

t setpoint:

Setpoint 2, closed loop 3.0bar

Setpoint 2, open loop 7096

20029126 1626

Fig. 38 Alternative setpoints 2 to 7

For each alternative setpoint, select the digital input to activate the setpoint.

It is possible to set a setpoint for closed loop and for open loop.



2. Mark Primary controller with 0 or 0 , and press e. 3. Mark Alternative setpoints with 0 or O , and press e 4. Select the alternative setpoint with 0 or O , and press

5. Mark Go to setting of digital input with 0 or CI , and press ok

Now the display Digital inputs (4.3.7) appears. Set the input and return with .

6. Mark the menu line of the setpoint (closed or open loop) with 0 or C. 7. Set the required setpoint with 0 or Q and save with Ot .

Set both setpoints if Hydro MPC is to be controlled both in open and closed loop.

Factory setting No alternative setpoints have been set.

9.7.5 External setpoint influence (4.1.3)

settings

Setpoint influence: Deactivated Activated 0

The analog input for the influence parameter must be set to activate the function:

6o to setting of analog input

Input value to be influenced by

(Flow rate(

The influence function must be set to activate the function:

Set the influence function

Low-pass filtering of influence signal: Filer time Os

2007.11.26 162

Fig. 39 External setpoint influence

34

Description This function makes it possible to adapt the setpoint by letting measuring parameters influence the setpoint. Typically an analog signal from a flow or temperature transmitter, or a similar transmitter.

As an example, the setpoint can be adapted to parameters that can influence the discharge pressure or temperature of the system. The parameters which influence the performance of the booster system are shown as a percentage from 0 to 100 %. They can only reduce the setpoint, as the influence as a percentage divided with 100 is multiplied with the setpoint:

Setpoint (1) o Infl.(2).... current(SP) Setpoint selected " Inn'

The influence values can be set individually.

A low-pass filter ensures smoothing of the measured value which influences the setpoint. This results in stable setpoint changes.

Setting range The following parameters can be selected.

0-100 % signal

Inlet pressure

Discharge pressure

External pressure

Differential pressure, pump

Differential pressure, external

Flow rate

Tank level, discharge side

Tank level, suction side

Flow pipe temperature

Return pipe temperature

Ambient temperature Return pipe temperature, external Differential temperature.


2. Mark Primary controller with 0 or CI , and press ok .

3. Mark External setpoint influence with CI or CI , and press ok

4. Mark Input value to be influenced by with NO or 0 , and press 0 .

Now a list of available parameters appear.

5. Mark the parameter which is to influence the setpoint with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

6. Return with 0 7. Mark Set the influence function with 0 or 0 , and press

e. For details, see section 9.7.6 Setting of influence function (4.1.3.2).

8. Mark the menu line for number of points with 0 or CI , and press e.

9. Select the required number of points with 0 or 0 , and save with e.

10.Mark External input value (point 1) with 0 or 0 .

11.Set the value of the external input value with 0 or , and save with 0,

12.Mark Reduce setpoint to (point 1) with 0 or 0 .

13.Set the value as a percentage with 0 or 0, and save with

cp. 14.Repeat points 8 to 13 for all desired parameters. 15.Return with

16.Mark-Filter time with 0 or -0 or 0, and save with

, set the time in seconds with



17.Mark Activated with 0 or O , and press 0. The check mark in the right box shows that the function has been activated.

Factory setting Setpoint influence is not activated.

9.7.6 Setting of influence function (4.1.3.2)

tatus COeration

.1.3 2.Sethng of influence function

Set the influence function

Settings

Select the number of points 12 to 81

on the influence curve: 4

Point

1 External input value 10.0m,M Reduce setpoint to 12%

2 External input value 20.0m% Reduce setpoint to 40%

3 External input value 30.0m3ch

Reduce setpoint to 50% 4 External input value

Reduce setpoint to

4o.on134,

100%

11111111Millii= Fig. 40 Setting of influence function

Description In this menu, you select the relation between the measuring parameter which is to influence the setpoint and the desired influence as a percentage.

The relation is set by entering values in a table with maximum eight points by means of the control panel.

Example with four points:

Setpoint influence [ %)

100

80

60

40

20

50

0 [m3/h)

Fig. 41 Relation between setpoint influence and flow rate

The control unit of the Hydro MPC draws straight lines between the points. A horizontal line is drawn from the minimum value of the relevant sensor (0 m3/h in the example) to the first point. This is also the case from the last point to the sensor's maximum value (example 50 m3/h).

Setting range Two to eight points can be selected. Each point contains the relation between the value of the parameter which is to influence the setpoint and the influence of the value.



2. Mark Primary controller with or O , and press Go .

3. Mark External setpoint influence with 0 or 0, and press ok

4. Mark Set the influence function with e or 0, and press e

5. Mark the menu line for number of points with 0 or 0, and press e .

6. Select the required number of points with 0 or 0, and save with ok .

7. Mark External input value (point 1) with O or

8. Set the value of the external input value with 0 or 0, and save with 2k.

9. Mark Reduce setpoint to (point 1) with 0 or O. 10.Set the value as a percentage with 0 or 0 , and save with e 11.Repeat points 7 to 10 for all desired parameters.

Factory setting External setpoint influence is not activated.

9.7.7 Primary sensor (4.1.4)

titus Oper-ati&. 4larm 4.1A - Pftinanisensa

Settings

The analog input for the control parameter rust be set to activate the function:

Go to setting of analog input

Select the control parameter:

Discharge pressure Cif t. pressure, external Dif. f . pressure, pump

Series 2000, dill. pressure External pressure Cliff. pressure, inlet Off pressure, outlet Flow rate Series 2000, flow rate Flow pipe temperature Return pipe temperature

Fig. 42 Primary sensor

0

0

I

Description In this display, select the control parameter of Hydro MPC and the sensor to measure the value.

Usually, the control parameter is the discharge pressure which is

measured by a sensor fitted on the discharge manifold and connected to analog input All of the CU 351.

If another control parameter is selected, the sensor must be connected to A13 (CU 351) which is then set to one of the chosen parameters listed below.

Setting range Discharge pressure (factory setting)



Series 2000, differential pressure

External pressure

Differential pressure, inlet Differential pressure, outlet

Flow rate

Series 2000, flow rate Flow pipe temperature


Differential temperature

Ambient temperature

Return pipe temperature, external

0-100 % signal

Not used.

35



From factory the discharge pressure sensor is connected to All (CU 351). If one of the above parameters is selected, the sensor in question must be connected to Al3 (CU 351) and set in order to function as the primary sensor.



2. Mark Primary controller with 0 or O , and press e. 3. Mark Primary sensor with 0 or O , and press ok

.

4. Mark Go to setting of analog input with 0 or 0 , and press e. Now the display Analog inputs (4.3.8) appears. Select the analog input (Al) for the primary sensor, and set the parameters for this sensor. Return to display Primary sensor (4.1.4) with e.

5. Select the control parameter for the primary sensor with 0 or and press ().

If the primary parameter is discharge pressure, All (CU 351) must be set to this parameter. If the primary parameter is external pressure or flow rate, Al3 (CU 351) must be set to this parameter.

Factory setting The primary parameter is discharge pressure. The sensor is

connected to All (CU 351).

9.7.8 Clock program (4.1.6)

Note

Settings 4.1.6- Clock program

Activated

1 Sat. to Sun.

2 Mon. to Fri.

3 Deactivated 4 Deactivated 5 Deactivated 6 Deactivated 7 Oeactivated 8 Deactivated 9 Deactivated

0 00:00 4.0bar 00:00 5.0bar

2007-12-20

U

15 :04

Fig. 43 Clock program

Description With this function, it is possible to set setpoints and day and time for their activation. It is also possible to set day and time for stop of the Hydro MPC system.

If the clock program is deactivated, the setpoint of the program will remain active.

Setting range Activation of the function.

Activation and setting of event.



2. Mark Primary controller with 0 or 0 , and press e. 3. Mark Clock program with 0 or 0 , and press e. 4. Mark event 1 with 0 or 0 , and press 0 .

36

Deactivated Activated

Operating mode:

Normal

Stop Setpoint, closed loop 4.0bar

Time: Hours 00

Minutes 00

h4Onday

Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Daily

to Fri simmarsicliti 5. Mark operating mode Normal or Stop with (9 or 0 , and

press . (If Stop is selected, point 7 is skipped.)

6. Mark Setpoint, closed loop with 0 or r9 . Set the pressure with 0 or and save with e.

7. Mark Time (hours, minutes) with 0 or 0 .

8. Set the time with C.) or 0 , and save with

9. Mark day of week on which the settings are to be activated with 0 or , and press ok .

10.Mark Activated with 0 or 0 , and press e .Return with 0 .

12.Mark Activated with 0 or 0 , and press ok . The check mark in the right box shows that the function has been activated.

13.Repeat points 4 to 11 if several events are to be activated. Note: Up to ten events can be set.

Factory setting The function is deactivated.

9.7.9 Proportional pressure (4.1.7)

CoratIon 4.1.1; Proportional pressure

Proportional pressure:

Settings

Deactivated Activated

Adaptation:

Linear Square

Influence at 0 flow 90%

Fig. 44 Proportional pressure

Description The function can only be activated in pressure-controlled systems and automatically adapts the setpoint set to the current flow rate. The adaptation can be linear or square. See fig. 45.



- Pump curve

Setpoint - Resultant setpoint, linear - --Resultant setpoint, square

0

Starting point of proportional pressure control (Influence at 0 flow = x % of Hset)

Fig. 45 Proportional pressure

The function has these purposes:

to compensate for pressure losses

to reduce the energy consumption

to increase the comfort for the user.


Selection of control mode.

Setting of setpoint influence.


2. Mark Primary controller with 0 or 0 , and press co. 3. Mark Proportional pressure with 0 or 0 , and press 0. 4. Mark Activated with 0 or 0 , and press ok . The check

mark in the right box shows that the function has been activated.

5. Mark Adaptation, linear or square with 0 or 0 , and press e.

6. Mark Influence at 0 flow with 0 or 0 . Set the value with 0 or 0, and save with c). Factory setting The function is deactivated.

9.7.10 S-system configuration (4.1.8)

Settings

Select the fixed-speed control type: Normal NI Inverse

Set the on off band for fixed-speed control. The value is a percentage of the sensor range.

Start/stop band 9.8%

Fig. 46 S-system configuration

Description The function makes it possible to invert the control of mains- operated pumps (Hydro MPC-S). That is to set whether pumps are to be started or stopped depending on the current value.

A start/stop band must be set in order to use this function. See fig. 47.

Normal control: A pump is stopped when the current value becomes higher than Hset + start/stop band. And a pump is started when the current value becomes lower than Hset.

See fig. 47.

Inverse control: A pump is started when the current value becomes higher than Hset + start/stop band. And a pump is

stopped when the current value becomes lower than Hset.

See fig. 47.

Normal control

H [m]

Hset

Inverse control

H [m]

Pump stops Pump starts

Start/stop band Start /stop band

Hset Pump starts Pump stops

Time [sec] Time [sec]

Fig. 47 Normal and inverse control

Setting range

Selection of configuration (normal or inverse control).

Setting of start/stop band.


2. Mark Primary controller with 0 or 0 , and press e. 3. Mark S-system configuration with 0 or 0 , and press

ok

4. Mark Inverse with C) or 0 , and press e. 5. Mark Start/stop band with 0 or 0 . Set the value 0 with

or 0 , and save with e. Factory setting Normal.

9.7.11 Pump cascade control (4.2)

Fara716WaFic 4.2 -Ptimpcascacecontrot

Settings

-lect the submenu:

IMICIErt1=11112E71111111 Max. number of starts.ohour Standby pumps Forced pump changeover Pump test run

Pilot pump Pump stop attempt Pump start and stop speed Min. performance Compensation for pump start-up time

2007.11-26 1626

Fig. 48 Pump cascade control

37



In this menu section, it is possible to set the functions connected to pump cascade control. The following menus can be selected:

Min. time between start/stop

Max. number of starts/hour

Standby pumps

Forced pump changeover

Pump test run

Pilot pump

Pump stop attempt

Pump start and stop speed

Min. performance

Compensation for pump start-up time.

9.7.12 Min. time between start/stop (4.2.1)

Status CIPWborigaarna 4.2.1.- min. time and max number of starts

Settings

-et the min. time between start/stop and max. ber of startshour:

Min. time between start/stop Is

Max. number of starts,hour 200

2007-11-26 1626

Fig. 49 Min. time between start/stop

Description This function ensures a delay between the starting/stopping of one pump and the starting/stopping of another pump.

The purpose is to prevent hunting when pumps start and stop continuously.

Setting range

From 1 to 3600 seconds.



2. Mark Pump cascade control with 0 or O , and press

3. Mark Min. time between start/stop with 0 or O , and press e.

4. Mark Min. time between start/stop with 0 or 0 , and press e.

5. Set the required minimum time with 0 or 0, and save with

Factory setting Minimum time between start/stop of pumps:

Hydro MPC-E and -EF: 1 second

Other variants: 5 seconds

38

9.7.13 Max. number of starts/hour (4.2.1)

Statuf CIPe'rrstW*iTiliffhl 4.2.1 Min time arm max number Of starts.

Settings

t the min. time between start/stop arid max. ber of startsMour:

Min. time between start/stop is

Max. number of startsMour 200

nor-n.561626

Fig. 50 Max. number of starts/hour

Description This function limits the number of pump starts and stops per hour for the complete system. It reduces noise emission and improves the comfort of booster systems with mains-operated pumps.

Each time a pump starts or stops, the CU 351 calculates when the next pump is allowed to start/stop in order not to exceed the permissible number of starts per hour.

The function always allows pumps to be started to meet the requirement, but pump stops will be delayed, if needed, in order not to exceed the permissible number of starts per hour.

The time between pump starts must be between the minimum time between start/stop, see section 9.7.12, and 3600/n, n being the set number of starts per hour.

Setting range

1 to 1000 starts per hour.


2. Mark Pump cascade control with O or (:), and press 0 3. Mark Max. number of starts/hour with 0 or 0 , and press

4. Mark Max. number of starts/hour with 0 or O , and press

5. Set the permissible number of starts per hour with 0 or -0, and save with ok .

Factory setting

Hydro MPC-E and -EF: 200 starts per hour

Other variants: 100 starts per hour

Note This function has no influence on Stop function (4.3.1).

9.7.14 Standby pumps (4.2.3)



Settings

Set the number 01 standby pumps:

Number of standby pumps 0

2007.11-26 162

Fig. 51 Standby pumps

Description This function makes it possible to limit the maximum performance of the Hydro MPC, by selecting one or more pumps as standby pumps.

If a three-pump system has one standby pump, maximum two pumps are allowed to be in operation at a time.

If one of the two pumps in operation has a fault and is stopped, the standby pump will be started. The performance of the booster system is thus not reduced.

The status as standby pump alternates between all pumps.

Setting range The number of possible standby pumps in a Hydro MPC booster system is equal to the total number of pumps in the system minus 1.



2. Mark Pump cascade control with 0 or 0 , and press

3. Mark Standby pumps with 0 or 0 , and press e. 4. Select the number of standby pumps with 0 or 0 , and

save with e. Factory setting The number of standby pumps is set to 0, i.e. function is

deactivated.

9.7.15 Forced pump changeover (4.2.4)

ititus .' Operatic, 2.4 Foic ea pump ceingeouer

Forced pump changeover.

Deactivated (-3 Activated

Time of day fix changeover: Hours

Minutes

Fig. 52 Forced pump changeover

03

00

Description This function ensures that the pumps run for the same number of operating hours.

In certain applications, the requirement remains constant for long periods and does not require all pumps to run. In such situations, pump changeover does not take place naturally, and forced pump changeover may thus be required.

Once every 24 hours, the CU 351 checks if any pump running has a larger number of operating hours than pumps that are stopped. If this is the case, the pump will be stopped and replaced by a

pump with a lower number of operating hours.

Setting range The function can be activated/deactivated. The hour of the day at which the changeover is to take place can be set.



3. Mark Forced pump changeover with 0 or 0 , and press

4. Mark Activated with 0 or 0 , and press 0. The check mark in the right box shows that the function has been activated.

5. Mark Time for changeover with 0, and press e. 6. Set the time with 0 or 0 , and save with ok .

Factory setting The function is activated. The time is set to 03:00.

9.7.16 Pump test run (4.2.5)

tatims Operation

4 2.6 - Pumitest run

Select interval:

et tings

Not used

Once every 24 hours

Once every 48 hours

Once a week

Fig. 53 Pump test run

O

2007-11-26 162

Description This function is primarily used in situations where the forced pump changeover is deactivated, and/or if the Hydro MPC is set to operating mode Stop, for instance in a period when the system is not needed. In such situations, it is important to test the pumps regularly.

The function ensures that

pumps do not seize up during a long standstill due to deposits from the pumped liquid.

the pumped liquid does not decay in the pump.

trapped air is removed from the pump.

The pumps start automatically one by one and run for five seconds.

39



Note Pumps in the operating mode Manual are not included in the test run. If there is an alarm, the test run will not be carried out.

Setting range

Not used.

Once every 24 hours.

Once every 48 hours.

Once a week.



2. Mark Pump cascade control with 0 or O , and press

0 3. Mark Pump test run with 0 or 0 , and press e. 4. Select the interval with 0 or 0 .

5. Activate the function with 0 .

Factory setting Test runs are set to once every 24 hours.

9.7.17 Pilot pump (4.2.6)

;91:t2p, Settings

The digital output for the pilot pump must be set to control the pilot pump:

6o to setting of digital output

The digital input for the pilot pump must be set to detect it the pilot pump is ready or not:

Go to setting of digital input

Fig. 54 Pilot pump

Description The function controls a pilot pump via a digital output. The pilot pump takes over the operation from the main pumps in periods when the consumption is so small that the stop function of the main pumps is activated. See section 9.7.23 Stop function (4.3.1).

Via a digital input, the operational state of the pilot pump is

monitored, i.e. whether it is operational or in a fault condition.

The purpose is to

save energy

reduce the number of operating hours of the main pumps.

If the pilot pump cannot keep the pressure by itself, one or more main pumps are started. If only one main pump is started and runs on/off operation, the pilot pump remains cut in. If one or more main pumps run continuously, the pilot pump is cut out.

Note If the setpoint of the main pumps is changed, the setpoint of the pilot pump must be changed too.

Setting range See section 9.7.31 Digital outputs (4.3.9).

See section 9.7.26 Digital inputs (4.3.7).

40



2. Mark Pump cascade control with e or 0 , and press ok

3. Mark Pilot pump with 0 or 0 , and press uk

4. Mark Go to setting of digital output with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

5. Select a digital output with 0 or 0 , and press 0. 6. Mark Pilot pump control with 0 or 0 , and save with

7. Return by pressing 0 twice.

8. Mark Go to setting of digital input with 0 or 0 , and press e.

9. Select a digital input 0 or 0 , and press e. 10.Mark Pilot pump fault with 0 or 0 , and save with e. Factory setting The function is deactivated.

9.7.18 Pump stop attempt (4.2.7)

Settings

Periodic pump stop attempt: Deactivated Activated

Type of stop attempt: Sett learning Fixed interval

Interval between stop attempts 120s

Fig. 55 Pump stop attempt

Description The function makes it possible to set automatic stop attempts of a

pump when several pumps are running. It ensures that the optimum number of pumps is always running, in terms of energy consumption. At the same time, the purpose is to avoid disturbances in connection with automatic stop of pumps.

Stop attempts can either take place with a fixed interval set under Interval between stop attempts or by self learning. If self learning is selected, the interval between stop attempts will be increased if repeated attempts to stop the pump fail.



3. Mark Pump stop attempt with 0 or 0 , and press e. 4. Mark Self learning or Fixed interval with 0 or 0 , and

press 0. 5. If Fixed interval is selected: 6. Mark Interval between stop attempts with 0 or 0 .

7. Set the interval with 0 or , and save with .

8. Mark Activated with 0 or 0 , and press c). The check mark in the right box shows that the function has been activated.

Factory setting The function is activated.



9.7.19 Pump start and stop speed (4.2.8)

Description The function controls the starting and stopping of pumps. There are two options:

1. Use calculated speed This function ensures that the optimum number of pumps is

always running at a desired duty point, in terms of energy consumption. The CU 351 calculates the required number of pumps and their speed. This requires that the differential pressure of the pump is measured by a differential pressure sensor or separate pressure sensors on the inlet and discharge side. When calculated speed has been selected, the CU 351

ignores the percentages set. 2. Use fixed speed

The pumps are started and stopped at speeds set by the user.

1. Use calculated speed

giriSlrelrilbeergtiori 4.2.8 Pump start and stop speed

ect how to start and stop a pump: Use calculated speed Use fixed speed

tart next pump at this speed: 1-> 2

2 -> 3

3 -> 4

4 -> 5

5 -> 6

Stant pump stop at: 1 -> 0

2 -> 1

3 -> 2

4 -> 3

5 -> 4

6 -> 5

75% 75% 75% 98% 98%

40% 40% 40% 40% 40% 40%

Fig. 56 Calculated pump start and stop speed



e. 3. Mark Pump start and stop speed with 0 or 0 , and press

ok

4. Mark Use calculated speed with 0 or 0 , and press e. 2. Use fixed speed

opsWtii;Warnil Set

28; Ptimp start ana stop speea

Setect how to start and stop a pump:

logs

Use calculated speed Use fixed speed

Start next pump at this speed: 1-> 2

2 -> 3

3 -> 4

4 -> 5

5 -> 6

terstant pump stop at: 1 -> 0

2 -> 1

3 -> 2

4 -> 3

5 -> 4

6 -> 5

E1

98% 98% 98% 98% 98%

40% 40% 40% 40% 40% 40%

200791.26':t62

Fig. 57 Fixed pump start and stop speed

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with .


3. Mark Pump start and stop speed with 0 or 0 , and press ok

4. Mark Use fixed speed with 0 or 0 , and press e. 5. Mark Start of next pump at: 1->2 with 0 or 0 , and press

ok

6. Set the speed as percentage with 0 or 0, and save with ok . Set the other pumps in the same way.

7. Mark Instant pump stop at: 1->0 with 0 or 0 , and press

e. 8. Set the speed as percentage with 0 or 0, and save with

0. Set the other pumps in the same way.

Factory setting The function is set to calculated speed.

9.7.20 Min. performance (4.2.9)

tatti; ,OperatiOn Alarni

2.9 - ten. pertormance

Settings

Enter the minimum performance for closed-loop operation.

Number of pumps at minimum performance in

closed loop: Number of pumps:

Speed of variable-speed pumps at minimum

performance in closed loop: Speed 25%

iiMEMIZEM= Fig. 58 Min. performance

Description This function ensures circulation in a system. Note that the stop function, if activated, can influence this function. See section 9.7.23 Stop function (4.3.1). Examples:

If 0 or 1 pump has been selected as a minimum, the stop function can stop the pump if there is no or a very small consumption.

If two or more pumps have been selected as a minimum, the stop function is not active.

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with 0. 2. Mark Pump cascade control with 0 or 0 , and press

ok

3. Mark Min. performance with 0 or 0 , and press e. 4. Set Number of pumps with 0 or 0 , and save with e. 5. Mark Speed with 0 or 0 . Set the speed with 0 or 0 ,

and save with e. Factory setting The number of pumps is set to 1. The speed in closed loop is set to 25 %.

41



9.7.21 Compensation for pump start-up time (4.2.10)

Vit6;7?:,:oc x.2.10: Compinsation tor pump star t:tilitinie

ter the time it takes a fixed-speed pump to start up and reach full performance:

2007.1126 1626

Fig. 59 Compensation for pump start-up time

Description The function is used for the system types -ES, -ED, -F and -EDF.

The purpose is to avoid disturbances when a mains-operated pump with fixed speed is started. The function compensates for the time it takes a mains-operated pump to reach its full performance after start. The start-up time of the mains-operated pump must be known.


2. Mark Pump cascade control with Q or O , and press e 3. Mark Compensation for pump start-up time with 0 or

0 , and press e. 4. Set the start-up time with 0 or 0, and save with e. Factory setting The start-up time is set to 0 seconds.

9.7.22 Secondary functions (4.3)

fah-A-Maeration Alarm

.3-Secondary functions

Select the submenu:

Settings

Stop function Soft pressure build-up Emergency run

Digital inputs Analog inputs Digital outputs Kin., max. and user-defined duty Pump curve data Control source Fixed inlet pressure Flow estimation

2007-11-2616 26

Fig. 60 Secondary functions

Description Functions that are secondary in relation to the normal operation of the Hydro MPC booster system can be set in this display. Secondary functions are functions that offer additional functionality.

42

The display makes it possible to open specific displays regarding:

Stop function (4.3.1)

Soft pressure build-up (4.3.3)

Digital inputs (4.3.7)

Analog inputs (4.3.8)

Digital outputs (4.3.9)

Emergency run (4.3.5)

Min., max. and user-defined duty (4.3.14)

Pump curve data (4.3.19)

Flow estimation (4.3.23)

Control source (4.3.20)

Fixed inlet pressure (4.3.22).

9.7.23 Stop function (4.3.1)

latLIS (Veinier% .3.1. Stop funclion

top function: Deactivated Activated

n

the stop function is to be controlled by a flow switch, the input for the switch must be set:


f the stop function is to be based on direct flow measurement, the input for the flow sensor must be set:

Go to setting of analog' nput

Set the desired oNoff band in 9'o of the current setpoint:

On/off band 25%

Set flow stop parameters: Go to setting of flow stop parameters

Fig. 61 Stop function

Description This function makes it possible to stop the last pump if there is no or a very small consumption. The purpose is to

save energy

prevent heating of shaft seal faces due to increased mechanical friction as a result of reduced cooling by the pumped liquid

prevent heating of the pumped liquid.

The description of the stop function applies to all Hydro MPC booster systems with variable-speed pumps. Hydro MPC-S will have on/off control of all pumps as described in section 6.1 Examples of control variants.

H

Hset

°min

On/off control

Normal operation

Fig. 62 On/off band



When the stop function is activated, the operation of Hydro MPC is continuously monitored to detect a low flow rate. When the CU 351 detects no or a low flow rate (Q < ()min), it

changes from constant-pressure operation to on/off control of the last pump in operation.

Before stopping, the pump increases the pressure to a value corresponding to Hset + 0.5 x on/off band. The pump is restarted when the pressure is Hset - 0.5 x on/off band. See fig. 63.

[psi)

Stop .

Start

A: Normal operation B: Pressure boosting C: Stop

Time [sec) Stop = Hset + 0.5 x on/off band

Start = Hset - 0.5 x on/off band

Fig. 63 On/off operation

The flow rate is estimated by the CU 351 when the pump is in the stop period. As long as the flow rate is lower than Qmin, the pump will run on/off. If the flow rate is increased to above ()min, the

pump returns to normal operation, Hset. Hset is equal to the current setpoint. See section 9.4.4 Setpoint (1.2.2).

Detection of low flow rate Low flow rate can be detected by means of

direct flow measurement with a flowmeter or flow switch

estimation of flow rate by measurement of current pressure and speed.

If the booster system is not connected to a flowmeter or flow switch, the stop function will use the estimating function.

If the detection of low flow rate is based on flow estimation, a

diaphragm tank of a certain size and with a certain precharge pressure is required.

Diaphragm tank size

Recommended diaphragm tank size [gallons] Pump type

-E -ED -ES -EF -EDF -F -S

CR(E) 3 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 20

CR(E) 5 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 34

CR(E) 10 10.2 10.2 10.2 10.2 10.2 10.2 62

CR(E) 15 34 34 34 34 34 34 211

CR(E) 20 34 34 34 34 34 34 211

CR(E) 32 44 44 44 44 44 44 317

CR(E) 45 86 86 86 86 86 86 528

CR(E) 64 132 132 132 132 132 132 1056

CR 90 132 132 132 1056

Precharge pressure Hydro MPC-E, -ED, -ES, -EF, -EDF and -F: 0.7 x setpoint.

Hydro MPC-S: 0.9 x setpoint.

During each flow estimation (every 2 minutes), the estimating function will disturb the discharge pressure by ±10 % of the setpoint. If this disturbance is not acceptable, the stop function must be based on direct flow measurement with a flowmeter or flow switch.

The minimum flow rate can be set, i.e. the flow rate at which the booster system changes to on/off control of the last pump in

operation.

If both a flowmeter and a flow switch are connected, the changeover to on/off control is determined by the unit first indicating low flow rate.

Setting range

On/off band: 5 to 30 %

Min. flow rate: 2 to 50 % of the nominal flow rate (0nom) of one of the pumps. (Can only be set if direct flow measurement by means of flowmeter has been selected.)


System without flow switch or flowmeter 1. Mark the Settings menu with 0 .

2. Mark Secondary functions with 0 or 0 , and press a. 3. Mark Stop function with 0 or 0 , and press 0. 4. Mark Activated with 0 or 0 , and press 0.

The activation is indicated by a check mark in the box.

5. Mark On/off band with 0 or O .

6. Set the on/off band with 0 or 0 , and save with e. 7. Mark Go to setting of flow stop parameters with 0 or 0 ,

and press ok

Now the display below is shown.

Operation:

r m t

Stop parameters:

Settings

Enerou-savino mode Medium flow highest comfort level Customised settings

Fig. 64 Stop parameters

8. Select one of the stop parameters with or 0 , and save with e. If Customised settings are selected, the parameters shown in fig. 65 must be set. See examples below.

43



taros ematian .3.1.1 Siopparainters

Stop parameters: Energy-saving mode

Medium flow Highest comfort level

Settings

0 0

Customised settings I?)

Delta pressure for gradient 5.9%

Delta lime for gradient (pump

stopped)

Delta time for gradient (pump running)

Speed reduction 8%

1.55

2.05

Fig. 65 Customised settings

Note

2007.11-26 -te2-

Rule of thumb: Speed reduction = 2 x delta pressure for gradient.

Example 1: Increasing the stop limit, Qmin (high flow limit) Increase the delta pressure for gradient.

Reduce the delta time for gradient (pump stopped).

Reduce the delta time for gradient (pump running).

Increase the speed reduction.

Example of increased stop limit

Parameter

Delta pressure for gradient

Delta time for gradient (pump stopped)


Speed reduction

Value

6 %

1.5 sec

2.0 sec

10 %

Example 2: Reducing the stop limit, Qmin (low flow limit) Reduce the delta pressure for gradient.

Increase the delta time for gradient (pump stopped).

Increase the delta time for gradient (pump running).

Reduce the speed reduction.

Example of reduced flow limit

Parameter

Delta pressure for gradient

Delta time for gradient (pump stopped)


Speed reduction

Value

3% 15.0 sec

25.0 sec

6%

Note The stop limit depends on the tank size.

System with flow switch Make the following additional settings:

1. Mark Go to setting of digital input with 0 or C.), and press e. Now the display Digital inputs (4.3.7) appears.

2. Select the digital input where the flow switch is connected with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

3. Mark Flow switch with 0 or 0 , press ok and return with

Note An open contact indicates low flow.

System with flowmeter Make the following additional settings:

44

1. Mark Go to setting of analog input with , and press ok . Now the display Analog inputs (4.3.8) appears.

2. Select the analog input where the flowmeter is connected, and set up the input for the flowmeter by selecting Flow rate.

3. Return to Stop function by pressing twice. 4. Mark Stop limit with 0 or 0 .

5. Set the value with 0 or 0, and save with ok

Factory setting The function is activated.

On/off band: 25 %

Min. flow rate: 30 % of the nominal flow rate of one pump

9.7.24 Soft pressure build-up (4.3.3)

Opecatton ,Alarmktat 4.3.3 Soft pressure build-up

Settings

oft pressure build-up 111MIZEI Activated

acing phase:

Speed

Number of pumps

Filing pressure 1.0bar

Max. time Ens

0

70%

.x. time reaction: Warning

Alarm * stop

assure build-up phase: Ramp time 105

2007.11.26 16 26

Fig. 66 Soft pressure build-up

Description The function ensures a smooth start-up of systems with for instance empty pipes.

Start-up takes place in two phases. See fig. 67.

1. Filling phase. The pipework is slowly filled with water. When the pressure sensor of the system detects that the pipework has been filled, phase two begins.

2. Pressure build-up phase. The system pressure is increased until the setpoint is reached. The pressure build-up takes place over a ramp time. If the setpoint is not reached within a given time, a warning or an alarm can be given, and the pumps can be stopped at the same time.

H [psi 1. Filling phase 2. Pressure build-up phase

Filling time Ramp time

Fig. 67 Filling and pressure build-up phases




Setting of pump speed.

Setting of number of pumps.

Setting of filling pressure.

Setting of maximum filling time.

Setting of warning or alarm + stop. Setting of ramp time for the pressure build-up phase.

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with 0 2. Mark Secondary functions with 0 or O , and press e. 3. Mark Soft pressure build-up with 0 or 0 , and press

4. Mark Speed with 0 or 0 .

5. Set the value with 0 or 0, and save with

6. Mark Number of pumps with 0 or 0 .

7. Set the value with 0 or 0 , and save with

8. Mark Filling pressure with 0 or 0 .

9. Set the value with 0 or (-) , and save with

10.Mark Max. time with 0 or 0 .

11.Set the value with 0 or Q, and save with 0 .

12.Mark Warning or Alarm + stop with e or 0 , and press ok

ok

C9

13.Mark Ramp time with 0 or O .

14.Set the value with 0 or 0, and save with ok .

15.Mark Activated, and press 0. Factory setting The function is deactivated.

9.7.25 Emergency run (4.3.5)

Settings 4.3S- Emeigency run

digital input may be used to activate rgency run.

Go to self of .

digital output may be activated in case of mergency run:

Go to setting of digital output

Setpoint, emergency run 3.0bar

2007.11-26 16 26

Fig. 68 Emergency run

Description When this function has been activated, the pumps will keep running regardless of warnings or alarms. The pumps will run

according to a setpoint set specifically for this function.

Caution In case of sensor fault, both main and standby pumps will run at 100 % speed!

Setting range Setting of digital input (9.7.26 Digital inputs (4.3.7)).

Setting of digital output (9.7.31 Digital outputs (4.3.9)). Setting of setpoint for emergency run.


1. Mark the Settings menu with 0

2. Mark Secondary functions with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

3. Mark Emergency run with 0 or 0 , and press a . 4. Mark Go to setting of digital input with 0 or 0 , and

press e Select a digital input with e or 0 , and press 0.

6. Mark Emergency run with 0 or 0 , and save with a 7. Return by pressing e twice.

8. Mark Go to setting of digital output with 0 or 0 , and press 0 .

9. Select a digital output with 0 or 0 , and press a . 10.Mark Emergency run with 0 or 0 , and save with e 11.Return by pressing twice.

12.Mark Setpoint, emergency run with 0 or O. 13.Set the value with 0 or 0, and save with e

Note When this function has been set as described above, it can also be activated via the display System operating mode (2.1.1).

9.7.26 Digital inputs (4.3.7)

Z3136 Operation illaral 4.3.70ional inputs

Digital inputs and related functions:

Set trigs

Ott (CU 3511, (101 (External start/stool

DI2 (CU 3511,1121 (Orli-running protection]

0I3 (CU 3511,1141 (Not used)

2007.11-26 16 2

Fig. 69 Digital inputs

Description In this menu, the digital inputs of the CU 351 can be set. Each input, except D11, can be activated and related to a certain function.

As standard, the Hydro MPC has three digital inputs. If the Hydro MPC incorporates an 10 351B module (option), the number of digital inputs is 12.

In the display, all digital inputs are shown so that their physical position in the Hydro MPC can be identified.

Example DI1 (10 351-41), [1O]:

OH: Digital input No 1

(10 351-41): 10 351, GEN1bus number 41

[10]: Terminal No 10

For further information on the connection of various digital inputs, see the wiring diagram supplied with the control cabinet.

Setting range The digital input to be set is selected in the display Digital inputs (4.3.7).

Note DM (CU 351) cannot be selected.

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with 0

45



2. Mark Secondary functions with 0 or 0 , and press e 3. Mark Digital inputs 0 or 0 , and press 0. 4. Select the digital input with 0 or 0 , and press e. 9.7.27 Functions of digital inputs (4.3.7.1)

Stalir511`10PeriffOh AIWA 4.3.7.1 - Functions of motet inputs

unction, 012 (CU 3511:

>et fines

112=1111111111111117 13

Min, duty Max, duty User-defined duty External fault Dry-running protection Flow switch Reset of alarm

Emergency run

Piot pump fault Alternative setpoint 2

Alternative setpoint 3




Alternative setooint 7

0 0 0

n0

0 0 0

2007.11.26 16-26

Fig. 70 Functions of digital inputs

Description In the displays 4.3.7.1, a function can be related to the digital inputs.

Setting range

It is possible to select one function in each display:

Function Contact activated

Not used

Min. duty = Operating mode Min.

Max. duty = Operating mode Max.

User-defined duty = Operating mode User-

defined

External fault = External fault

Dry-running protection = Water shortage

Flow switch = Flow rate > Set switch

value

Reset of alarm = Reset alarms

Emergency run = Operating mode

Emergency run

Pilot pump fault = Pilot pump fault







= Setpoint 2 selected






See the relevant sections for further information about the functions.

Generally, a closed contact activates the function selected.

46

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with 0 2. Mark Secondary functions with 0 or 0 , and press 0. 3. Mark Digital inputs with 0 or 0 , and press 0 .

4. Select the digital input with 0 or 0 , and press e 5. Select the desired function with 0 or 0 , and activate it

with e. The activation is indicated by a check mark in the box.

Factory setting

Digital input Function

Dll (CU 351) [10] External start/stop. Open contact = stop. Note: Input No 1 cannot be changed.

DI2 (CU 351) [12]

Monitoring of water shortage (dry-running protection). Open contact = water shortage (if the Hydro MPC is supplied with this option).

Note Monitoring of water shortage requires a pressure switch connected to the Hydro MPC.

9.7.28 Analog inputs (4.3.8)

Stotts. Operation

4.3 e-Analog inputs

Settings

Analog inputs and measured value:

On (CU 3511,1511 (Discharge pressure)

012 161.13511,1541

Al3 (CV 3511, (571

(Flow rate)

(Not used'

2007-11-26 16 26

Fig. 71 Analog inputs

Description In this display, the analog inputs of the Hydro MPC can be set.

Each input can be activated and related to a certain function.

As standard, the Hydro MPC has three analog inputs. If the Hydro MPC incorporates an 10 351B module (option), the number of analog inputs is 5.

In the display, all analog inputs are shown so that their physical position in the Hydro MPC can be identified. A redundant primary sensor can be fitted as back-up for the primary sensor in order to increase reliability and prevent stop of operation.

Note If two sensors are to be redundant, each must have a separate analog input.

Example All (CU 351) [51]:

All: (CU 351):

[51]:

Analog input No 1

CU 351

Terminal No 51



Note

Setting range In the display Analog inputs (4.3.8), the analog input to be set is selected.


1. Mark the Settings menu with 0. 2. Mark Secondary functions with 0 or 0 , and press 0. 3. Mark Analog inputs with Q or 0 , and press e. 4. Select the analog input with 0 or 0 , and press e. 9.7.29 Analog inputs (4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.7)

4.18.1:analog inputs

Setting, all (CU 3511,1511

Settings

0-20 mA n 4-20 mA

0-10 U

Not used

Measured input value

Range:

Min.

Max.

lI

(Discharge pressure)

0.0bar

16.0bar

IMEIMEMMIEMilinn Fig. 72 Analog inputs

Description In the displays 4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.7, analog inputs can be set. Each display is divided into three parts:

Setting of input signal, for instance 4-20 mA

Measured input value, for instance discharge pressure

Measuring range of the sensor/signal transmitter, for instance 0-16 bar.

Setting range

It is possible to set the following parameters in each display:

Not used

Range of input signal, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-10 V

Measured input value

Sensor range.


1. Mark the Settings menu with (:). 2. Mark Secondary functions with 0 or 0 , and press e 3. Mark Analog inputs with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

4. Select the analog input with se or Q , and press 0. 5. Mark the setting of the analog input with 0 or 0 , and

activate it with e. The activation is indicated by a check mark in the box.

If an analog input is deactivated, the display will only show the top part, i.e. the setting of the analog input. If the input is activated, the middle part, "Measured input value", is shown. This makes it possible to relate a function to the analog input in another display. When the analog input has been related to a function, CU 351 will return to the display for setting of analog inputs.

Factory setting

Analog input Function

All (CU 351) [511

Al2 (CU 351) [54)

Al3 (CU 351) [57)

Discharge pressure

Tank precharge pressure (if Hydro MPC is supplied with measurement of tank precharge pressure)

Redundant primary sensor (if Hydro MPC is supplied with this option)

9.7.30 Analog inputs and measured value (4.3.8.1.1 to 4.3.8.7.1)

Operation .3.8.1.1-Mato) inputs art measures value

Function, All (CU 3511:

lettings

Not used n (4 0-100 % signal Inlet pressure Discharge pressure External pressure Dill. pressure, pump

Flow rate Tank level, discharge side Tank level, suction side System pressure Dill. pressure, external Tank precharge pressure Dill. pressure, inlet Dill. pressure, outlet Return pipe temp., external Flow oioe terreemme

Fig. 73 Analog inputs and measured value

Description In the display Analog inputs and measured value (4.3.8.1.1 to 4.3.8.7.1), a function can be related to the individual analog inputs.

Setting range It is possible to select one function per analog input.

Not used

0-100 % signal

Inlet pressure

Discharge pressure

External pressure


Flow rate

Tank level, discharge side

Tank level, suction side

System pressure


Tank precharge pressure

Differential pressure, inlet

Differential pressure, outlet

Return pipe temperature, external Flow pipe temperature


Differential temperature

Ambient temperature

Power, pump 1 to 6

Power, VFD.

47





2. Mark Secondary functions with 0 or 0 , and press ,c). 3. Mark Analog inputs with 0 ore , and press e. 4. Select the analog input with 0 or 0 , and press e. 5. Set the range of the analog input with 0 or 0 , and press

The activation is indicated by a check mark.

6. Mark Measured input value with f or 0 , and press 0. Now the display 4.3.8.1.1 appears.

7. Select the input with 0 or , and press 0 .

8. Press to return to display 4.3.8.1.

9. Set the minimum sensor value with 0 or 0, and save with

10.Set the maximum sensor value with 0 or 0 , and save with ok

9.7.31 Digital outputs (4.3.9)

7.;tt:,416 4.3,9-Digital outputs

Settings

ratan outputs and function:

001 (CU 35111711 (Alarm, system)

002 (01 3511.1741 (Operation, System)

2007-11-29 1526

Fig. 74 Digital outputs

Description In this display, the digital relay outputs of the Hydro MPC can be

set. Each output can be activated and related to a certain function.

As standard, the Hydro MPC has two digital outputs.

If the Hydro MPC incorporates an 10 3518 module (option), the number of digital outputs is 9.

In the display, all digital outputs are shown so that their physical position in the Hydro MPC can be identified.

Example 001 (10 351-41) [71]:

001 Digital output No 1

(10 351-41) 10 351B, GENIbus number 41

[71] Terminal No 71

For further information on the connection of various digital outputs, see the wiring diagram supplied with the CU 351.

Setting range In the display Digital outputs (4.3.9), the digital output to be used is selected.

48

9.7.32 Functions of digital outputs (4.3.9.1 to 4.3.9.16)

Status Operakdn:?,Rlarnl Settings 4.3.9.1- FunitiOn of digital outputs

1 (CU 351), (711 is signalling: 1131.1 Operation, system Alarm, system IJ Warning, system 0 Ready, system 0 Water shortage 0 !Ain. pressure 0 Max. pressure Emergency run Pilot pump control 0 Pressure relief valve 0 Pump outside duty range 0 Operation, pump(s)

Operation, pump 1 0 Operation, pump 2

Operation. (sumo 3

0 n

2007.12-20 1505

Fig. 75 Functions of digital outputs

Description In the displays Functions of digital outputs (4.3.9.1 to 4.3.9.16), a

function can be related to the individual outputs.

Setting range It is possible to select one function in each display:

No function

Operation, system Alarm, system Warning, system

Ready, system

Water shortage

Min. pressure

Max. pressure

Emergency run

Pilot pump control

Pressure relief valve

Operation, pump 1 to 6

Alarm, pump 1 to 6

Alarm, limit 1 exceeded

Warning, limit 1 exceeded

Alarm, limit 2 exceeded

Warning, limit 2 exceeded.

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with 01. 2. Mark Secondary functions 0 with or 0 , and press e. 3. Mark Digital outputs with 0 or 0 , and press e. 4. Select the digital output with 0 or 0 , and press e. 5. Mark the desired function with 0 or 0 , and activate it with

cs The activation is indicated by a check mark in the box.

Factory setting

Digital output Function

001 (CU 351) [71] Alarm, system

002 (CU 351) [74] Operation, system



9.7.33 Min., max. and user-defined duty (4.3.14)

Aaiun OPWariiiim Settings .3.14 min., max. and useriletined duty

The desired pump performance for Min., Max. and User-defined duty can be set here.

Select an operating mode, end set the function: Min. duty Max. duty Set User-defined duty

IMMOMMIMM=MEt Fig. 76 Min., max. and user-defined duty

Description Hydro MPC is usually controlled in a closed loop to maintain a

discharge pressure. In certain periods, it may be necessary to let the booster system run in open loop at a set pump performance.

Setting range The CU 351 makes it possible to change between three operating modes:

1. Min. duty (4.3.14.1).

2. Max. duty (4.3.14.2).

3. User-defined duty (4.3.14.3).

r Note For each of these modes, the number of operating pumps and the pump performance (speed) can be set.

9.7.34 Min. duty (4.3.14.1)

S-1=_,,0 Operation Alarm 4.3.14.1 min. duty

Settings

et the desired pump performance for min. duty

. of pumps in operation, min. duty:

Number of L -IV 5 in ation

peed of variable-speed pumps in operation: Speed 70%

2007-11-26 16 26

Fig. 77 Min. duty

Description In all booster systems apart from Hydro MPC-S, minimum duty is

only possible for variable-speed pumps. In Hydro MPC-S systems, only the number of pumps running at 100 % speed can be set.

Setting range Number of pumps in operation.

Speed as percentage (25 to 100 %) for variable-speed pumps.


1. Mark the Settings menu with C). 2. Mark Secondary functions with 0 or 0 , and press e. 3. Mark Min., max. and user-defined duty with 0 or C.), and

press 0 4. Mark Min. duty with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

5. Mark Number of pumps in operation, min. duty with 0 or

6. Set the number with 0 or C) , and save with 0 .

7. Mark Speed with (9 or Q .

8. Set the value with 0 or 0 , and save with ok .

Factory setting Number of pumps in operation during min. duty: 1

Speed as percentage for variable-speed pumps: 70

9.7.35 Max. duty (4.3.14.2)

0941,4 Operation Marro

4.3.14.2max.duty

Settings

et the desired pump performance for max. duty

umber of pumps in operation at 100 % speed, ax. duty: Number of LLLs in -ration 3

. 2007-11-26 16 26

Fig. 78 Max. duty

Description The function makes it possible for a set number of pumps to run at maximum performance when the function is activated.

Setting range In this display, the number of pumps to run in the operating mode Max. can be set. All pumps run at 100 % speed.


1. Mark the Settings menu with 01. 2. Mark Secondary functions with 0 or 0 , and press ok

.

3. Mark Min., max. and user-defined duty with 0 or 0 , and press 0.

4. Mark Max. duty with 0 or 0 , and press 9. 5. Mark Number of pumps in operation at 100 % speed, max.

duty with O or 0 .

6. Set the number with 0 or Q , and save with ok

Factory setting

Number of pumps in operation All pumps (except standby during max. duty: pumps)

49



9.7.36 User-defined duty (4.3.14.3)

et the desired pump performance for sec-defined duty.

ber of pumps in operation, user-defined ut :

Number of ..- awn 0

eed of variable-speed wags in operation: Speed 70%

2007-11.26 16:26

Fig. 79 User-defined duty

Description In this display, it is possible to set a user-defined performance, typically a performance between min. and max. duty.

The function makes it possible to set a pump performance by selecting the number of pumps to run and the speed of variable- speed pumps.

This function primarily selects the variable-speed pumps. If the number of selected pumps exceeds the number of variable-speed pumps, mains-operated pumps are started too.

Setting range Number of pumps in operation.

Speed as percentage for variable-speed pumps. Note: In Hydro MPC booster systems with only variable-speed pumps, the speed can be set between 25 and 100 %; in booster systems with both variable-speed pumps and mains- operated pumps the speed can be set between 70 and 100 %.



2. Mark Secondary functions with e or 0 , and press e. 3. Mark Min., max. and user-defined duty with 0 or O , and

press e. 4. Mark User-defined duty with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

5. Mark Number of pumps in operation, user-defined duty with 0 or 0 .

6. Set the number with 0 or 0 , and save with e. 7. Mark Speed with e or Q .

8. Set the value with 0 or 0, and save with ok .

Factory setting The function is not activated, as the following has been set:

Number of pumps in operation during user-defined duty: 0

50

9.7.37 Pump curve data (4.3.19)

StatUS Operations ,i,Cilaral Ptiiip mire data

Settings

Nominal flow rate Morn 10 0m3,1-1

Nominal head Hnom Max. head Hmax

Max. flow rate Oman

tor data: Power, 00, 100 % speed Power, 00, 50 % speed Nominal power Pnom

Flow estimation

48m 61m

0.0m3/n

0.00kUJ

0.00kw 0.00kle

2007-11-26 1826

Fig. 80 Pump curve data

Description The CU 351 has a number of functions using these pump data:

Nominal flow rate, Qnom, in m3/h

Nominal head, FInorm in metres

Max. head, Hmax, in metres

Max. flow rate, Qmax, in m3/h

Power, Q0, 100 % speed, in kW

Power, Q0, 50 % speed, in kW

Nominal power, Pnom, in kW.

Note

Note

Grundfos can supply hydraulic data for CR, CRI, CRE and CRIE pumps where GSC files can be downloaded directly to the CU 351.

The electrical data, "Power, QO, 100 % speed" and "Power, QO, 50 % speed" must be entered manually.

For Grundfos E-pumps, the data of input power (P1) must be entered.

The data are read by means of the pump performance curves which can be found in WebCAPS on Grundfos' homepage, www.grundfos.com. See examples in figs 81 to 84.

If WebCAPS is not accessible, try to bring a pump into the three duty points: Power, QO, 100 % speed, Power, QO, 50 % speed and Nominal power, Pnom. Read the power values in displays 1.3 to 1.8, depending on the pump. See section 9.4.8 Pump 1...6 (1.3 to 1.8).

()nom Qmax

Fig. 81 Reading of Qnom, Hnom Hmax and Qmax (WebCAPS)



Fig. 82 Reading of Power, 00, 100 % speed (WebCAPS)

V1121111 -Art

Fig. 83 Reading of Power, QO, 50 % speed (WebCAPS)

Fig. 84 Reading of Nominal power, Pnom (WebCAPS)

Note Qnom and Hnom are the rated duty point of the pumps and usually the duty point with the highest efficiency.


2. Mark Secondary functions with 0 or 0 , and press ok

3. Mark Pump curve data with 0 or 0 , and press e. 4. Mark Nominal flow rate Qnom with 0 or 0 .

5. Set the value with 0 or 0 , and save with 0. 6. Mark Nominal head Ham, with 0 or 0 .

7. Set the value with 0 or Q, and save with ok .

8. Mark Max. head Hmax with 0 or 0 .

9. Set the value with 0 or 0, and save with ok

10.Mark Max. flow rate Qmax with 0 or 0 .

11.Set the value with 0 or 0, and save with ok

12.Mark Power, Q0, 100 % speed with 0 or 0 .

13.Set the value with 0 or 0 , and save with 0. 14.Mark Power, Q0, 50 % speed with 0 or 0 .

15.Set the value with 0 or Q, and save with 0. 16.Mark Nominal power Pnom with 0 or 0 .

17.Set the value with 0 or 0, and save with olc .

9.7.38 Control source (4.3.20)

Select from where the system is to be

From the CU 351

From bus

Fig. 85 Control source

Description Hydro MPC can be remote-controlled via an external bus connection (option). See section 9.8.2 GENIbus. Control of the Hydro MPC can also take place via the bus connection. For further information, see section 9.8 Data communication.

In this display, the control source, CU 351 or the external bus connection, is selected.


1. Mark the Settings menu with 0. 2. Mark Secondary functions with 0 or 0 , and press ok

3. Mark Control source with 0 or 0 , and press 0. 4. Select the desired control source with 0 or 0 , and save

with O. Factory setting The control source is CU 351.

51



9.7.39 Fixed inlet pressure (4.3.22)

Status OweratIon.Z, Alarm, .

4.3.22 . Fixed inlet pressure

Setting

ixed inlet pressure:

Activated El

at fixed inlet pressure: Fixed inlet pressure 0.0bar

200711.26 1626

Fig. 86 Fixed inlet pressure

Description If the Hydro MPC has a fixed inlet pressure, it can be entered in

this display so that the CU 351 can optimise the performance and control of the booster system.

Setting range

A fixed inlet pressure can be set, and the function can be activated/deactivated.


2. Mark Secondary functions with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

3. Mark Fixed inlet pressure with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

4. Set the inlet pressure with 0 or 0, and save with 6). 5. Mark Activated with 0 or 0 , and press The

activation is indicated by a check mark in the box.


9.7.40 Flow estimation (4.3.23)

(1PeratiOri'' ?.Alarm

.3.23 Min estimation

Settings

Activate one or more methods for functions that use pump curve data:

2nd order OH polynomial

5th order OH Polynomial

Power polynomial, OP

Head loss in non-return valve at nominal pump flow rate:

Head loss

Fig. 87 Flow estimation

Om

20071220 150

Description As described in section 9.7.37 Pump curve data (4.3.19), the CU 351 can optimise operation according to performance curves and motor data. In this display, curve types are selected which the CU 351 will use for the optimisation if they are available.

At large flow rates, there may be a considerable head loss between the pump discharge flange and the pressure sensor.

52

The loss is caused by non-return valves and pipe bends. To

improve the flow estimation of the system, it is necessary to compensate for the difference between the measured and the actual differential pressure across the pump. This is done by entering the head loss in non-return valves and pipe bends at the rated flow rate of one pump.

Setting range 2nd order OH polynomial

5th order QH polynomial

Power polynomial, QP

Head loss.

Note It is possible to select several curve types, as the CU 351 makes a priority based on the data available.


2. Mark Secondary functions with e or 0 , and press (3 3. Mark Flow estimation with 0 or 0 , and press co .

4. Select the curve type by marking one of the lines at the selection box with Q or 0 , and press e.

Factory setting All polynomials are selected.

9.7.41 Monitoring functions (4.4)

Siatiis Pit&M.

4.4 monitoring functions

Settings

elect the submenu:

Or -runnino otection Min. pressure Max. pressure External fault Limit 1 exceeded Limit 2 exceeded Pumps outside duty range

Pressure relief

200711-26 16:26

Fig. 88 Monitoring functions

Description Hydro MPC has a series of functions that constantly monitor the operation of the booster system.

The primary purpose of the monitoring functions is to ensure that faults do not damage pumps or the system.

Setting range The following functions can be selected:

Dry-running protection (4.4.1)

Min. pressure (4.4.2)

Max. pressure (4.4.3)

External fault (4.4.4)

Limit 1 and 2 exceeded (4.4.5 and 4.4.6)

Pumps outside duty range (4.4.7)

Pressure relief (4.4.8).

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with (). 2. Mark Monitoring functions with 0 or 0 , and press 3. Select the function with 0 or 0 , and press 0.

ok



9.7.42 Dry-running protection (4.4.1)

talus [lactation Iiia .4.101y-running protection

Select method:

PressureAevel switch Measurement, inlet pressure Measurement, tank level

Fig. 89 Dry-running protection

Description Dry-running protection is one of the most important monitoring functions, as bearings and shaft seal may be damaged if the pumps run dry. Grundfos thus always recommends dry-running protection in connection with Hydro MPC booster systems.

The function is based on monitoring of the inlet pressure or the level in 'a possible tank or pit on the suction side.

Level switches, pressure switches or analog sensors signalling water shortage at a set level can be used.

There are three different methods for detection of water shortage:

Pressure switch on suction manifold or float switch/electrode relay in the supply tank. See section 9.7.43 Dry-running protection with pressure/level switch (4.4.1.1).

Measurement of inlet pressure in the suction manifold by means of an analog pressure transmitter. See section 9.7.44 Dry-running protection with pressure transmitter (4.4.1.2).

Measurement of level in the supply tank by means of an analog level transmitter. See section 9.7.45 Dry-running protection with level transmitter (4.4.1.3).

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with GI .

2. Mark Monitoring functions with 0 or 0 , and press e. 3. Mark Dry-running protection with 0 or 0 , and press

ok

4. Select the method with 0 or 0 , and press e.

9.7.43 Dry-running protection with pressure/level switch (4.4.1.1)

taros Operation tdarm 4.1.1- Piiisure/level wilco

The digital input for the pressureAevel switch must be set to activate the function:


Reaction in case of water shortage:

Warning

Alarm + stop

Reset:

Manual Auto a

iiilMENEEMEEM Fig. 90 Dry-running protection with pressure/level switch

Description Dry-running protection can take place by means of a pressure switch on the suction manifold or a level switch in a tank on the suction side.

When the contact is open, the CU 351 will register water shortage after a time delay of approx. 5 sec. It is possible to set whether the indication is to be just a warning or an alarm stopping the pumps.

In the display, it is possible to set whether restart and reset of the alarm is to be automatic or manual.

Setting range Selection of digital input for the function.

Reaction in case of water shortage: Warning or alarm + stop.

Restart: Manual or automatic.


1. Mark the Settings menu with i0 .

2. Mark Monitoring functions with 0 or CI , and press e. 3. Mark Dry-running protection with 0 or 0 , and press

4. Mark Pressure/level switch with Q or Q , and press O. 5. Mark Go to setting of digital input, and press e. Now the

display Digital inputs (4.3.7) appears. Set the input to dry- running protection. Return with e .

6. Mark Warning or Alarm + stop with 0 or 0 , and save with 0.

7. Mark Manual or Auto with 0 or 0 , and save with ok .

Factory setting If the booster system is equipped with a pressure switch for dry- running protection, it is set to alarm + stop in case of water shortage.

Restart: Manual.

53



9.7.44 Dry-running protection with pressure transmitter (4.4.1.2)

Settings 4.4.1.2 Measurement, inlet pressure

g-running protection: 12115111110 Activated

The analog input for the measurement of inlet essure trust be set to activate the function: Go to setting of analog' nput

let pressure level: warning

Warm stop

arm reset: Manual Auto

-Thar

Obar

2007.1126 16 26

Fig. 91 Dry-running protection with pressure transmitter

Description Dry-running protection can take place by means of a pressure transmitter measuring the inlet pressure.

It is possible to set two levels of inlet pressure: Warning and alarm + stop.

In the display, it is possible to set whether restart and reset of the alarm is to be automatic or manual.

Setting range Selection of analog input for the function.

Activation of the function.

Inlet pressure level for warning.

Inlet pressure level for alarm + stop.



1. Mark the Settings menu with 0 2. Mark Monitoring functions with O or O , and press e .

3. Mark Dry-running protection with 0 or 0 , and press

4. Mark Measurement, inlet pressure with 0 or 0 , and press e.

5. Mark Go to setting of analog input, and press e. Now the display Analog inputs (4.3.8 appears. Set the input to Inlet pressure, and save with ok . Return with e.

6. Mark Activated with 0 or , and press e. 7. Mark Warning with 0 or 0 Set the level with 0 or 0,

and save with ok .

8. Mark Alarm + stop with CI or 0 . Set the level with 0- or

0, and save with e .

9. Mark Manual or Auto with 0 or 0 , and save with e If one of the levels is not required, the level value must be the minimum value of the inlet pressure transmitter. This deactivates the function.

Note

Factory setting If the booster system is supplied with a pressure transmitter on the suction side, the transmitter has been set.

The warning level is 0.5 bar and the alarm level 0.2 bar. The function is activated.

Restart: Manual.

54

9.7.45 Dry-running protection with level transmitter (4.4.1.3)

il'Otfii/111111111 4.4.13 - MeaSurement, sang level

Settings

Activated 0 he analog input for the measurement of tank evel must be set to activate the function: Go to setting of analog input

ante level: Warning

Alarm stop

arm reset: Manual

Auto

-100.0m -100.0m

200711.26 1626

Fig. 92 Dry-running protection with level transmitter

Description Dry-running protection can take place by means of a level transmitter measuring the level in a tank on the suction side.

It is possible to set two levels: Warning and alarm + stop.

In the display, it is possible to set whether restart and reset of alarms is to be automatic or manual.

Setting range Selection of analog input for the function.


Tank level for warning.

Tank level for alarm + stop.



2. Mark Monitoring functions with 0 or 0 , and press e. 3. Mark Dry-running protection with 0 or 0 , and press

ok

4. Mark Measurement, tank level with 0 or 0 , and press

0 5. Mark Go to setting of analog input, and press e. Now the

display Analog inputs (4.3.8) appears. Set the input to Tank level, suction side. Return with e.

6. Mark Activated with 0 or 0 , and press e. 7. Mark Warning with e or 0 . Set the level with 0 or 0 ,

and save with e. 8. Mark Alarm + stop with 0 or 0 Set the level with 0 or

, and save with e. 9. Mark Manual or Auto with 0 or 0 , and save with e. Factory setting The function is deactivated.



9.7.46 Min. pressure (4.4.2)

sigus Oweiti/.7 4.42- maipressure

Settings

- toning of min. pressure:

Activated 0 discharge pressure sensor must be sal fore the function can be activated:


. pressure

arm + stop at min. pressure

ore delay of function at start-up Time delay of function during

eration

0.0 bar

0 305

105

2007-11-26' 16 26

Fig. 93 Min. pressure

Description The discharge pressure can be monitored so that the CU 351 can react if the pressure becomes lower than a set minimum level for an adjustable time.

The minimum pressure can be monitored if a fault indication is

required in situations where the discharge pressure becomes lower than the set minimum pressure. It is possible to set whether the indication is to be just a warning or an alarm stopping the pumps. This may be desirable if Hydro MPC is used for an irrigation system where a very low discharge pressure may be due to pipe fracture and thus an extraordinarily high consumption and a very low counter- pressure. In such situations, it is desirable that the booster system stops and indicates alarm. This situation will require a

manual reset of alarms.

It is possible to set a start-up delay ensuring that the Hydro MPC can build up pressure before the function is activated. It is also possible to set a time delay, i.e. for how long time the discharge pressure may be lower than the set minimum pressure before the alarm is activated.


Minimum pressure level within the range of the primary sensor.

Activation of stop when the pressure falls below the minimum pressure.

Time delay at start-up.

Time delay during operation.



2. Mark Monitoring functions with C.) or 0 , and press a. 3. Mark Min. pressure with 0 or 0 , and press a. 4. Mark Activated with 0 or 0 , and press to to activate/

deactivate the function.

5. Mark Min. pressure with L9 or 0 . Set the pressure with 0 or 0, and save with 0. 6. Mark Stop at min. pressure with 0 or 0 , and press a

to activate/deactivate the function.

7. Mark Time delay of function at start-up with 0 or 0 . Set the time with 0 or 0, and save with 0.

8. Mark Time delay of function during operation with 0 or . Set the time with 0 or 0, and save with ok

.


9.7.47 Max. pressure (4.4.3)

Sfatuat4 OperationAlarm, 4.4,3 maxpressure

'41 settngs

1:2121MITN1IIIIN Activated

discharge pressure sensor must be set fore the function can be activated:


-x. pressure 16.0 bar

'eset: Manual

Auto

2007-11-26 1626

Fig. 94 Max. pressure

Description The discharge pressure can be monitored so that the CU 351 can react if the pressure becomes higher than a set maximum level.

In certain installations, a too high discharge pressure may cause damage. It may therefore be necessary to stop all pumps for a

short period if the pressure is too high.

It is possible to set whether the Hydro MPC is to restart automatically after the pressure has dropped below the maximum level, or if the system must be reset manually. Restart will be delayed by an adjustable time. See section 9.7.12 Min. time between start/stop (4.2.1).


Maximum pressure level within the range of the primary sensor.

Manual or automatic restart after fault.


2. Mark Monitoring functions with 0 or 0 , and press ek .

3. Mark Max. pressure with O or 0 , and press a. 4. Mark Activated with 0 or 0 , and press a to activate/

deactivate the function.

5. Mark Max. pressure with 0 or 0 . Set the pressure with 0 or , and save with a. 6. Mark Manual or Auto with 0 or 0 . Activate the function

with co.


55



9.7.48 External fault (4.4.4)

44. External taint Settings

The digital input for the external fault signal must be set to activate the function:


Time delay, fault indication

Reaction in case of fault: Warning

55

E l

Alarm and change of operation mode to:

Stop Min.

Max.

User-defined

Reset: Manual

Auto

Fig. 95 External fault

Ij

Description The function is used when the CU 351 is to be able to receive a

fault signal from an external contact. In case of external fault, the CU 351 indicates warning or alarm. In case of alarm, the booster system changes to another manual operating mode, for instance Stop.

Setting range Selection of digital input for the function.

Setting of time delay from closing of the contact until the CU 351 reacts.

Reaction in case of external fault: Warning or alarm and change of operating mode.

Restart after alarm: Manual or automatic.

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with 0. 2. Mark Monitoring functions with 0 or 0 , and press co 3. Mark External fault with 0 or 0 , and press e .

4. Mark Go to setting of digital input with 0 or 0 , and press 0. Now the display Digital inputs (4.3.7) appears. Set the input to External fault. Return with .

5. Mark Time delay, fault indication with 0 or 0 . Set the time with 0 or 0, and save with co.

6. Mark Warning with 0 or 0 if only a warning is required in

case of external fault. Activate the function with 0. 7. Select operating mode with 0 or 0 if the booster system

is to give alarm and change operating mode in case of external fault. Activate the function with ok

.

8. Mark Manual or Auto with 0 or 0 . Activate the function with e.

Factory setting The function is deactivated. If the function is activated, the following values have been set from factory:

Time delay: 5 seconds.

Operating mode in case of alarm: Stop.

Restart: Manual.

56

9.7.49 Limit 1 and 2 exceeded (4.4.5 and 4.4.6)

as - Lad fexceenen Settings

itoring of limit:

Activated

The analog input for the control parameter st be set to activate the function:


t value to be monitored

Limit type: Min. limit

Max. limit

Set delays Set warning limit

Set alarm limit

(Not used)

0

'2007-11-26'1626

Fig. 96 Limit 1 exceeded

Description With this function, the CU 351 can monitor set limits of analog values. It will react if the values exceed the limits. Each limit can be set as a maximum or minimum value. For each of the monitored values, a warning limit and an alarm limit must be defined.

The function makes it possible to monitor two different locations in a pump system at the same time. For instance the pressure at a consumer and the pump discharge pressure. This ensures that the discharge pressure does not reach a critical value.

If the value exceeds the warning limit, a warning is given. If the value exceeds the alarm limit, the pumps are stopped.

A delay can be set between the detection of an exceeded limit and the activation of a warning or an alarm. A delay can also be set for resetting a warning or an alarm.

A warning can be reset automatically or manually.

It is possible to set whether the system is to restart automatically after an alarm, or if the alarm must be reset manually. Restart can be delayed by an adjustable time. It is also possible to set a start- up delay ensuring that the system reaches a steady state before the function becomes active.

Setting range Activation of an analog input for the function.

Selection of the measured value to be monitored.

Setting of limit type (min./max.).

Setting of warning limit.

Setting of alarm limit.


Note Analog inputs must be correctly set before the function is activated. See section 9.7.28 Analog inputs (4.3.8).

1. Mark the Settings menu with 0 2. Mark Monitoring functions with e or 0 , and press 04 3. Mark Limit 1 exceeded or Limit 2 exceeded with 0, or 0 ,

and press e. 4. Mark Go to setting of analog input with O or 0 , and

press 0 .

5. Select the analog input with 0 or 0 , and press e. 6. Mark the setting of the analog input with 0 or 0 , and

activate it with 0 .

The activation is indicated by a check mark in the box.



7. Mark Measured value with 0 or 0 , and press ok . Now the display 4.3.8.1.1 appears.

8. Select the input with C) or 0 , and press ok

9. Press 0 to return to display 4.3.8.1.

10.Set the minimum sensor value with 0 or 0 , and save with ok

11.Set the maximum sensor value with 0 or 0, and save with ok

12.Return by pressing e twice.

13.Mark Measured value to be monitored with CI or 0 ., and press 0.. Select the input with 0 or 0 , and press 6

14.Return with e. 15.Mark Min. limit or Max. limit with 0 or O., and press

ok

16.Mark Set delays with 0 or 0 , and press e 17.Mark Time delay of function at start-up with 0 or 0 . Set

the time with 0 or Q, and save with ok .

18.Mark Time delay of function during operation with 0 or 0 . Set the time with 0 or 0, and save with e. 19.Mark Time delay of function at reset with 0 or 0 . Set

the time with 0 or Q, and save with e. 20.Return with .

21.Mark Set warning limit with 0 or 0 , and press e. 22.Mark Activated with 0 or 0 , and press ok

.

23.Mark Warning limit with 0 or 0 . Set the value with 0 or 0, and save with ok .

24.Mark Manual or Auto with 0 or 0 . Activate the function with ok .

25.Return with

26.Mark Set alarm limit with 0 or O , and press 0. 27.Mark Activated with 0 or CI , and press e. 28.Mark Alarm limit with 0 or 0 . Set the value with 0 or

, and save with O. 29.Mark Manual or Auto with e or 0 . Activate the function

with c9 30.Return with e. 31.Mark Activated with 0 or 0 , and press e to activate

the function.


9.7.50 Pumps outside duty range (4.4.7)

Status ".OpeiafionAla'na 4.4.7 Pumps outsiceauty lenge

Settings

'toning, pumps outside duty range:

2007-11-26,1626

Fig. 97 Pumps outside duty range

Description The function gives a warning if the duty point of the pumps moves outside the defined range. For instance, if the inlet pressure becomes lower than a minimum permissible value, thus causing a

risk of cavitation for some pump types.

The warning is given with a set time delay. It is possible to set whether the warning is to be reset automatically or manually when the duty point comes within the defined duty range. It is

also possible to set a relay output to be activated when the warning is given, and to be deactivated when the warning is reset.

This function requires that the discharge pressure and the inlet pressure (either measured or configured) or the differential pressure of the pumps is monitored, and that CU 351 contains valid pump data from either a GSC file or from manual input. See section 9.7.37 Pump curve data (4.3.19).


Setting of manual or automatic reset.

Setting of warning delay.

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with 0 2. Mark Monitoring functions with 0 or 0 , and press e. 3. Mark Pumps outside duty range with 0 or 0 , and press

ok

4. Mark Manual or Auto with 0 or 0 , and activate the function with e.

5. Mark Warning delay with 0 or 0 . Set the time with 0 or 0, and save with ok .

6. Mark Activated with 0 or 0 , and press 0 to activate the function.


9.7.51 Pressure relief (4.4.8)

Operation 'Mann 4.8 Pressure relief

Monitoring of pressure:

Settings

Deactivated P1 Activated

A digital output must be set to control the valve: So to setting of digital output

Pressure to be monitored (System pressure)

Set the Limits:

Valve opening pressure Band, valve opening pressure

Warning:

Deactivated Activated Delay

Fig. 98 Pressure relief

Ober

Obar

is 2007-11-26 162-

57



Description The purpose of the function is to reduce the pressure in the pipework by opening a solenoid valve if it exceeds a set limit. If the pressure is not reduced within a given time, the solenoid valve will be closed, and a warning can be given.

P [psi]

Valve opening pressure

1: Solenoid valve opens.

2: Solenoid valve closes. 3: Solenoid valve opens. 4: Warning is activated.

5: Solenoid valve closes, and warning is reset.

2 3 4 5

Band t.

Valve opening pressure minus band

Fig. 99 Pressure relief

Warning delay

Setting range

Setting of digital output.

Setting of pressure to be monitored.

Setting of valve opening pressure.

Setting of band for valve opening pressure.

Setting of warning or alarm.


Time [sec]


1. Mark the Settings menu with 0 2. Mark Monitoring functions with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

3. Mark Pressure relief with 0 or 0 , and press e. 4. Mark Go to setting of digital output with 0 or 0 , and

press ok .

5. Select a digital output with 0 or 0 , and press e. 6. Mark Pressure relief with 0 or O , and save with ok .

7. Return by pressing twice.

8. Mark Pressure to be monitored with 0 or 0 , and press

9. Mark Discharge pressure, System pressure or External pressure with 0 or 0 , and save with e.

10.Return with (3. 11.Mark Valve opening pressure with 0 or . Set the

pressure with 0 or 0, and save with

12.Mark Band, valve opening pressure with pressure with 0 or 0, and save with

13.Mark Warnin , Deactivated or Activated with 0 or O ,

and press (29. 14.Mark Delay with e or 0 . Set the time with 0 or 0,

and save with 0 . (Only to be set if warning has been activated.)

15.Mark Activated with e or 0 , and press e activate the function.

. Set the


58

9.7.52 Functions, CU 351 (4.5)

019 W; Operatbn''sOlarm 4.5 Functions, CU 351

Settings

The display language can be changed to the service la .e English

Change language to the service I- age (English) 0

The start-up wizard can be re-activated if eeded Run wizard again

ther settings related to CU 351:

Display language

Units bate and time

Password Ethernet MMus number

Software status

21307.11-26 16-26

Fig. 100 Functions, CU 351

Description In this submenu, it is possible to make the basic settings of the CU 351.

CU 351 comes with most of these settings, or they are made at start-up and normally not to be changed.

The service language, English, can be activated for service purposes. If no buttons are touched for 15 minutes, the display will return to the language selected at start-up or to the language set in section 9.7.53 Display language (4.5.1).

If the service language is selected, the symbol will be shown to the right of the top line of all displays.

Setting range

Activation of service language, British English.

Note

Re-activation of start-up wizard. (After start-up, the wizard is inactive.)

Selection of display language.

Selection of display units.

Setting date and time.

Selection of password for the menus Operation and Settings. Setting of Ethernet communication.

Setting of GENIbus number.

Reading of software status.

9.7.53 Display language (4.5.1)

01.14:ition.

4.5.1 - Display language

elect language: British English

German

Danish

Spanish

Finnish

French

Greek

Italian

Dutch Polish

Portuguese Russian Swedish Chinese

Korean

Settings

0 0 0 0 0 0

apane

Fig. 101 Display language



Description Here the language for the CU 351 display is selected.

Setting range British English

German Danish

Spanish

Finnish

French

Greek

Italian

Dutch

Polish

Portuguese

Russian

Swedish

Chinese

Korean

Japanese

Czech

Turkish.



2. Mark Functions, CU 351 with O or O , and press e. 3. Mark Display language with 0 or O , and press co. 4. Select language with 0 or 0 , and save with ok .

Factory setting The display language is English. It can be changed at start-up.

9.7.54 Display units (4.5.2)

Opwatioa .5 2- Display units

Select unit standard:

Settings

SI units El US units

Units can be selected for specific parameters: Pressure Differential pressure Head

Level Flow rate Uolume

Specific energy

Temperature Power

Energy

200711.26 162

Fig. 102 Display units

Description In this display, it is possible to select units for the various parameters.

As basic setting, it is possible to select between SI and US units.

It is also possible to select other units for the individual parameters.

Setting range

Parameter Basic setting

Possible units SI US

Pressure bar psi kPa, MPa, mbar, bar, m, psi

Differential pressure kPa, MPa, mbar,

m psi bar, m, psi

Head m ft m, cm, ft, in

Level m ft m, cm, ft, in

Flow rate m3 /h m3/s, m3/h, I/s, gpm,

gpm yd

3/s, yd

3/min, yd

3/h

Volume m3 gal I, m3, gal, yd3

Specific energy kWh/m3, Wh/gal,

kWh/m3 Wh/gal Wh/kgal, BTU/gal, HPh/gal

Temperature °C °F K, °C, °F

Differential temperature K K K

Power kW HP W, kW, MW, HP

Energy kWh, MWh, BTU,

kWh kWh HPh

Note If units are changed from SI to US or vice versa, all individually set parameters will be changed to the basic setting in question.



2. Mark Functions, CU 351 with Q or 0 , and press 0 3. Mark Units with 0 or 0 , and press ok .

4. Select the unit with 0 or 0 , and save with e . A check mark shows that the unit has been selected.

5. Select the measuring parameter with NO or es , and press ok to open the display for the measuring parameter.

See the example.

Tatr; Opertbn Mara .5 2.1- Usit/ 101 pressate

Units, pressure:

Settings

kPa n MPa

mbar

bar

PSI 0

MOIMEN=M:== Fig. 103 Example of selection of display units

6. Select the unit with 0 or 0 , and save with 0. A check mark shows that the unit has been selected.

Factory setting CU 351 has been set to US units from factory.

59



9.7.55 Date and time (4.5.3)

ifatits 41.1ationrithito 45.3 -Date and time

Settings

et date: ..M1111111/1 Month 11

Year 2007

,et tine: Hours 16

Minutes 26

elect date-time format: 2005-09-27 13:49 27-09-2005 13:49 927/2005 1:49pm

First day of week: Sunday Monday

lI

IZI

2007.11-26 16 26

Fig. 104 Date and time

Description In this display, date and time are set as well as how they are to be shown in the display.

The clock has a built-in rechargeable voltage supply which can supply the clock for up to 20 days if the voltage supply to the Hydro MPC is interrupted.

If the clock is without voltage for more than 20 days, it must be set again.

Setting range The date can be set as day, month and year. The time can be set as a 24-hour clock showing hours and minutes.

There are three formats.

Examples of format

2005-09-27 13:49

27-09-2005 13:49

9/27/2005 1:49pm

It is also possible to select if Sunday or Monday is to be the first day of week.


2. Mark Functions, CU 351 with 10 or 0 , and press 0 3. Mark Date and time with or O , and press e 4. Mark Day, Month and Year with 0 or O , and set the date

with 0 or 0. Save with co. 5. Mark Hours and Minutes with Q or 0 , and set the time

with 0 or 0. Save with e. 6. Select the format with 0 or 0 , and save with ok .

7. Mark First day of week, Sunday or Monday with 0 or 0 ,

and save with ok

Factory setting Local time.

Note

60

If the booster has been without voltage for more than 20 days since it left the factory, the clock may have returned to the original setting: 01 -01- 2005 0:00.

Date and time may have been changed during the setting of Hydro MPC.

There is no automatic changeover to/from daylight-saving time.

9.7.56 Passwords (4.5.4)

iitat7).r.lgKerttwir'Aii(etia 4.6.4 PiiiSwOra

Settings

Password, Operation menu: 171=111111111INNEINI

Activated Enter password

Password, Settings menu: Deactivated Activated Enter password 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

200791-28 .1626

Fig. 105 Passwords

Description In this display it is possible to limit the access to the Operation and Settings menus by means of a password. If the access is limited, it is not possible to view or set any parameters in the menus.

The password must consist of four digits and may be used for both menus.

Note If you have forgotten the password(s), contact Grundfos.


2. Mark Functions, CU 351 with 0 or 0 , and press

3. Mark Password with 0 or 0 , and press e. 4. Mark the password to be activated, and press e. 5. Mark Enter password, and press c).

Now the first digit of the password is flashing. 6. Select the digit with 0 or 9 , and save with ok .

Now the second digit of the password is flashing.

7. Repeat points 4 to 6 if it is necessary to activate the other password.

Factory setting Both passwords are deactivated. If a password is activated, the factory setting will be "6814".

9.7.57 Ethernet (4.5.5)

ok

Stet' eperatior-:41:31m1 '31a Settings

IP address 192 168 0 102

Subnet mask 255 255 255 0

Standard gateway 192 168 0 2

AC address 50 60 70 80 90

Reset the Ethernet password by pressing (ok)

20071 E.26 1626

Fig. 106 Ethernet



Description The CU 351 is equipped with an Ethernet connection for communication with a computer, either directly or via Internet. For further information, see section 9.8.1 Ethernet.

9.7.58 GENIbus number (4.5.6)

*taws, 2i,'OrxriMiiCarm

0EN1bus number for external communication

Number

IMOMMON Fig. 107 GENIbus number

Description CU 351 can communicate with external units via an RS-485 interface (option). For further information, see fig. 109 and section 9.8.2 GENIbus.

Communication is carried out according to the Grundfos bus protocol, GENIbus, and enables connection to a building management system or another external control system.

Operating parameters, such as setpoint and operating mode, can be set via the bus signal. Furthermore, status about important parameters, such as current value and input power, and fault indications can be read from the CU 351.

Contact Grundfos for further information.

Setting range The number can be set between 1 and 64.

Setting via control panel 1. Mark the Settings menu with 0. 2. Mark Functions, CU 351 with 0 or es , and press GI 3. Mark GENIbus number with O or O , and press e. 4. Select the number with 0 or 0 , and save with efc

Factory setting No number is set ("-").

9.7.59 Software status (4.5.9)

stews WeVorir aaim 4.s2-sottillare status

Settings

,ftware versions Software version, CU 351: v00.00.45

figuration files: Factor version code 43 7

fi4PCkontrol MPC

Pump curve data PIN. 95307027 PAN. 96307224

2007-11,2616:27

Fig. 108 Software status

Description This display shows the status of the software installed in the CU 351. Furthermore, the version code and the product numbers of configuration files (GSC) read into the unit are shown.

As it is a status display, no settings can be made.

61



9.8 Data communication CU 351 is equipped with a hardware enabling communication with external units, such as a computer, via an external GENIbus or Ethernet connection.

Third party gateway

Grundfos G100 gateway

External GENIbus connection External I GENIbus module I (factory option)

Ethernet connection

Fig. 109 Data communication via external GENIbus and Ethernet connection

9.8.1 Ethernet

Ethernet is the most widely used standard for local networks (LAN). The standardisation of this technology has created some of the easiest and cheapest ways of creating communication between electrical units, for instance between computers or between computers and control units.

The web server of the CU 351 makes it possible to connect a

computer to the CU 351 via an Ethernet connection. The user interface can thus be exported from the CU 351 to a computer so that the CU 351 and consequently the Hydro MPC booster system can be monitored and controlled externally.

Grundfos recommends that you protect the connection to the CU 351 according to your safety requirements in consultation with the system administrator.

In order to use the web server, you must know the IP address of the CU 351. All network units must have a unique IP address in

order to communicate with each other. The IP address of the CU 351 from factory is 192.168.0.102.

Alternatively to the factory-set IP address, it is possible to use a

dynamic assignment of IP address. This is possible by activating a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) either directly in

the CU 351 or via the web server. See the example in fig. 110.

Note

62

Internet

-ijralERreriori' 4.5.5 Einetne4;

Host name

Use OHCP

IP address sublet mask

Standard gateway

RAPC address

192 168 0 102

255 255 255 0

192 168 0 2

50 60 70 80 90 OR

Reset the Ethernet password by pressing (ok)

1=31:1EIM Fig. 110 Example of setting of Ethernet

Dynamic assignment of an IP address for the CU 351 requires a

DHCP server in the network. The DHCP server assigns a number of IP addresses to the electrical units and makes sure that two units do not receive the same IP address.

A traditional Internet browser is used for connection to the web server of the CU 351.

If you want to use the factory-set IP address, no changes are required in the display. Open the Internet browser and enter the IP address of the CU 351.



In order to use dynamic assignment, the function must be activated. Click e Use DHCP in the menu line. A check mark next to the menu line shows that activation has been made. After activation in the display, open the Internet and enter the host name of the CU 351 instead of the IP address. The Internet browser will now try to connect to the CU 351. The host name can be read in the display, but can only be changed by either a GSC- file (configuration file) or via a web server. See Change of network setting on page 63.

Note To use DHCP, a host name is required.

This is the first display shown when connecting to the CU 351.

Fig. 111 Connection to CU 351

Factory setting User name:admin Password: admin

When user name and password have been entered, a Java Runtime Environment application starts up in the CU 351, provided that it has been installed on the computer in question. If this is not the case, but the computer is connected to Internet, then use the link on the screen to download and install the Java Runtime Environment application.

Fig. 112 Display with link to the Java Script® program

The Java Runtime Environment application will then export the CU 351 user interface (including display and operating panel) to the computer screen. It is now possible to monitor and control the CU 351 from the computer.

Fig. 113 Network setting

Change of network setting When connection to the web server of the CU 351 has been established, it is possible to change the network setting.

Fig. 114 Change of network setting

1. Press the icon >Network admin. 2. Enter the changes.

3. Press Submit to activate the changes.

63



Change of password

Fig. 115 Change of password

1. Press the icon >Change password. 2. Enter the new password.

3. Press Submit to activate the new password.

9.8.2 GENIbus

By installing a GENIbus module it is possible to connect a CU 351 to an external network. The connection can take place via a

GENIbus-based network or a network based on another protocol via a gateway. See fig. 109. For further information, contact Grundfos.

The gateway may be a Grundfos G100 gateway or a third party gateway. For further information on the G100 gateway, see the G100 data booklet (publication number V7139522).

64



10. External variable frequency drive External variable frequency drives used in Hydro MPC booster system variants -F, -EF and -EDF come with the manufacturer's factory settings. See tables below.

At start-up, the factory settings must be changed to the Grundfos settings in the tables below.

In order not to affect the functions of the CU 351 at optimum operation, only the parameters shown should be adjusted. Other parameters should be as set from factory.

10.1 VLT 2800

Press [QUICK MENU] + [+] to access all parameters.

Parameter

Factory setting Grundfos setting

Function Value or number in the display of VLT Function Value or number

in the display of VLT

2 Local/remote operation Local/remote operation 0

3 Local reference Local reference Default

101 Torque characteristics Torque characteristics 2

102 Motor power Motor power Motor nameplate in kW

103 Motor voltage Motor voltage Motor nameplate

104 Motor frequency Motor frequency Motor nameplate, Hz

105 Motor current Motor current Motor nameplate, SFA

106 Rated motor speed Rated motor speed Motor nameplate RPM

107 Automatic motor adaptation Automatic motor adaptation 2

128 Thermal motor protection Thermal motor protection 4

204 Minimum reference Minimum reference 20 Hz

205 Maximum reference Maximum reference 60 Hz

206 Ramp type Ramp type 2

207 Ramp up time Ramp up time 1.5 sec

208 Ramp down time Ramp down time 3 sec

214 Reference function Reference function 2

215 Preset reference Preset reference 100

302 Digital input Digital input 7

304 Digital input Digital input 0

305 Digital input6 Digital input6 24

323 Relay output Relay output 1

406 Automatic restart time Automatic restart time 10 sec

411 Switching frequency Switching frequency 4500

* Thermistor function used for thermal protection of LC filter.

** For information about languages available, see relevant documentation. - Use data from the Hydro MPC booster set.

Factory setting of VLT 2800

To recall the factory settings of all parameters, follow one of the procedures below:

1. Set the parameter 620 to (3).

2. Disconnect the power supply.

3. Re-connect the power supply.

4. All parameters are now factory-set except from the fault log.

Or


2. Press and hold [QUICK MENU] + [+] + [CHANGE DATA] and re-connect the power supply.

All parameters are now factory-set, including the fault log.

65



10.2 Danfoss VLT 8000 factory settings Press [EXTEND MENU] to access all parameters.

Parameter Function Grundfos setting

Value

001 Language English 0

002 Motor power Motor nameplate

003 Motor voltage Motor nameplate

004 Motor frequency Motor nameplate

005 Motor current Motor nameplate (SFA)

006 Motor speed Motor nameplate (RPM)

201 Minimum frequency 20 Hz

202 Maximum frequency 60 Hz

207 Ramp up time 1.5 sec

208 Ramp down time 3 sec

323 Relay 1 function Ready signal 1

326 Relay 2 function Running 3

10.3 Danfoss VLT 8000 extended menu programming


Value

007 Large readout Frequency [Hz] 3

008 Small display readout Motor voltage [V] 16

009 Small display readout Motor current 5

010 Small display readout Power [Hp] 6

101 Torque characteristics VT low 2

113 Motor Preheater DC Current 0%

117 Motor Thermal Protection ETR Trip 1 4

208 Automatic ramp-down Disable 0

210 Reference type External/preset 2

302 Pin 18 Start 1

303 Pin 19 Reverse and start 2

304 Pin 27 Safety interlock 3

308 Pin 53 Reference 1

309 Term. 53, min. scaling 0.0 V

310 Term. 53, max. scaling 10 V

325 Relay 01, off delay 1 sec.

400 Reset function Automatic reset x 10 6

401 Automatic restart time 5 sec.

407 Switching frequency 4500

408 Interference reduction method Fixed switching freq. 0

016 Lock for data change Locked 1

66



10.4 Danfoss VLT 8000 factory settings Press [EXTEND MENU] to access all parameters.


Value


002 Motor power Motor nameplate

003 Motor voltage Motor nameplate

004 Motor frequency Motor nameplate

005 Motor current Motor nameplate (SFA)

006 Motor speed Motor nameplate (RPM)

201 Minimum frequency 20 Hz

202 Maximum frequency 60 Hz

207 Ramp up time 1.5 sec

208 Ramp down time 3 sec

323 Relay 1 function Ready signal 1

326 Relay 2 function Running 3

10.5 Danfoss VLT 8000 extended menu programming


Value

007 Large readout Frequency [Hz] 3

008 Small display readout Motor voltage [V] 16

009 Small display readout Motor current 5

010 Small display readout Power [Hp] 6

101 Torque characteristics VT low 2

113 Motor Preheater DC Current 0%

117 Motor Thermal Protection ETR Trip 1 4

208 Automatic ramp-down Disable 0

210 Reference type External/preset 2

302 Pin 18 Start 1

303 Pin 19 Reverse and start 2

304 Pin 27 Safety interlock 3

308 Pin 53 Reference 1

309 Term. 53, min. scaling 0.0 V

310 Term. 53, max. scaling 10 V

325 Relay 01, off delay 1 sec.

400 Reset function Automatic reset x 10 6

401 Automatic restart time 5 sec.

407 Switching frequency 4500

408 Interference reduction method Fixed switching freq. 0

016 Lock for data change Locked 1

67



10.6 Baldor Smart motor settings

Section Parameter Grundfos setting

Value

Level 2 blocks

Output limts Min. output frequency 12 Hz

Output limts Max. output 60 Hz

Output limts PK current limit Max. of drive

Output limts PWM frequency 6 kHz

Miscellaneous Restart aut/man Auto

Motor data Motor voltage 230 V

Motor data Motor rated amps SFA on nameplate

Level 1 blocks

Preset speed Preset speed #1 60 Hz

Accel Accel #1 CR 3 - CR 10

CR 15 - CR 90

Decel rate Decel #1 CR 3 - CR 10

CR 15 - CR 90

1.5 sec.

2.0 sec.

3.0 sec.

4.0 sec.

Output Opto output #1 Ready

Input Operating mode #1 2 wire / 7 spd

Input ANA CMD select Pot. / 0-10 V

V/Hz and Boost V/Hz profile 67% sqr. law

68



10.7 VLT FC 202

Press [EXTEND MENU] to access all parameters.


Value


002 Motor Speed Unit Hz 1

003 Regional Settings North America 1

020 Display Line 1.1 Small Power [hp] 1611

021 Display Line 1.2 Small Motor Voltage 1612

022 Display Line 1.3 Small Motor Current 1614

023 Display Line 2 Large Frequency 1615

024 Display Line 3 Large Speed [RMP] 1617

100 Configuration Mode Open Loop 0

103 Torque Characteristics Variable Torque 1

121 Motor Power [HP] Nameplate

122 Motor Voltage Nameplate

123 Motor Frequency Nameplate

124 Motor Current Nameplate

125 Motor Nominal Speed Nameplate

190 Motor Thermal Protection ETR trip 1 4

302 Minimum Reference 0.000 Hz

303 Maximum Reference 60.000 Hz

304 Reference Function Sum 0

310 Preset Reference 100.00%

313 Reference Site Remote 1

341 Ramp 1 Ramp up Time 1.50 s

342 Ramp 1 Ramp down Time 3.00 s

412 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] 0.0 Hz

414 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] 60.0 Hz

419 Max Output Frequency 65.0 Hz

511 Terminal 19 Digital Input Start reversing 11

513 Terminal 29 Digital Input Preset reference on 15

540.0 Function Relay Drive ready 2

542.0 Off Delay, Relay 2.00 s

610 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 0.00 V

611 Terminal 53 High Voltage 10.00 V

614 Terminal 53 Low Ref. / Feedb. 20.000 Hz

615 Terminal 53 High Ref. / Feedb. 60.000 Hz

1400 Switching Pattern 60 AVM 0

1401 Switching Frequency 5.0 kHz 7

Factory setting of VLT FC 100

To recall the factory settings of all parameters, follow one of the

procedures below:

1. Select parameter 14-22.

2. Press [OK].

3. Select "Initialisation" (for NLCP select "2").

4. Press [OK].


6. Reconnect the power supply.

7. All parameters are now factory-set, except RFI 1, protocol, address, baud rate, minimum response delay, maximum response delay, maximum inter-char delay, operating data, historic log and fault log.

Or


2. Press and hold [STATUS] + [MAIN MENU] + [OK] and reconnect the power supply.

3. All parameters are now factory-set, except operating hours, the number of power-ups and overtemp's and overvolt's.

69



11. Fault finding chart

Warning Before making any connections in pumps, terminal boxes or breaker cabinet, make sure that the electricity supply has been switched off for at least 5 minutes and that it cannot be accidentally switched on.

Fault Possible cause Remedy

Pumps do not run when started.

Current pressure is higher than or equal to Wait until the pressure has dropped, or lower the

the setpoint. pressure on the discharge side of the Hydro MPC, and check that the pumps start.

Electricity supply disconnected. Connect the electricity supply.

Main switch cut out. Cut in the main switch.

Main switch is defective. Replace the main switch.

Motor protection is activated. Contact Grundfos.

Motor is defective. Repair or replace the motor.

Pressure transmitter fault - Pressure transmitter is defective.

Replace the pressure transmitter. Transmitters with 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA output signals are monitored by the Hydro MPC.

- Cable is broken or short-circuited. Repair or replace the cable.

The pumps start, but stop immediately. The operating pressure Dry running or no inlet pressure. is not reached.

Re-establish the supply of water to the Hydro MPC. When the inlet pressure has been re-established, the pumps will restart after 15 seconds.

The Hydro MPC is stopped and cannot restart.

Pressure transmitter fault - Pressure transmitter is defective.

Replace the pressure transmitter. Transmitters with 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA output signals are monitored by the Hydro MPC.

- Cable is broken or short-circuited. Repair or replace the cable.

CU 351 fault - Electricity supply disconnected.

Connect the electricity supply.

- CU 351 defective. Contact Grundfos.

Inlet pressure is too low.

Unstable water delivery from Suction pipe or pumps partly blocked by Hydro MPC (applies to unstable water impurities. supply).

Check the suction pipe and possible suction strainer.

Clean the suction pipes, strainer or pumps.

Pumps suck air. Check the suction pipe for leakages.

Pressure transmitter defective. Replace the transmitter.

The valves are closed. Open the valves.

Suction pipe or pumps blocked by impurities.

Clean the suction pipe or pumps.

Pumps are running, but deliver no Non-return valve blocked in closed position.

Clean the non-return valve. The non-return valve water. must move freely.

Suction pipe leaky. Check the suction pipe for leakages.

Air in suction pipe or pumps. Vent and prime the pumps. Check the suction pipe for leakages.

The Hydro MPC is unable to reach the setpoint.

Too high consumption. - Reduce consumption (if possible). - Install a bigger Hydro MPC booster system.

Too many standby pumps selected.

Pipe fracture or leakage in the system.

Reduce the number of standby pumps.

Check the system, and repair damages, if necessary.

Leakage from the shaft seal. Shaft seal is defective. Replace the shaft seal.

Height adjustment of pump shaft inaccurate. Readjust the shaft height.

Noise.

The pumps are cavitating. Clean the suction pipe/pumps and possibly the suction strainer.

The pumps do not rotate freely (friction resistance) due to inaccurate height adjustment of the pump shaft.

Readjust the shaft height.

Very frequent starts and stops. Wrong diaphragm tank precharge pressure. Set correct precharge pressure.

70



12. Maintenance

Warning Before starting work on the pumps, make sure that the electricity supply has been switched off. Lock the main switch with a padlock to ensure that it cannot be accidentally switched on.

12.1 Pumps Pump bearings and shaft seal are maintenance-free.

12.2 Motor bearings Motors without grease nipples are maintenance-free.

Motors with grease nipples should be lubricated with a high- temperature lithium-based grease. See the instructions on the fan cover of Grundfos motors.

In the case of seasonal operation (motor is idle for more than 6

months of the year), it is recommended to grease the motor when the pump is taken out of operation.

12.3 CU 351

The CU 351 is maintenance-free. It must be kept clean and dry.

Protect it against direct sunlight. Furthermore, the CU 351 must not be outside the ambient temperature range. See section 15. Technical data.

13. Frost protection Pumps which are not being used during periods of frost should be drained to avoid damage.

Drain the pump by loosening the vent screw in the pump head and by removing the drain plug from the base.

Warning Care must be taken to ensure that the escaping water does not cause injury to persons or damage to the motor or other components. In hot water installations, special attention should be paid to the risk of injury caused by scalding hot water.

Do not tighten the vent screw and replace the drain plug until the pump is to be used again.

14. Taking out of operation Switch off the main switch to take the booster system out of operation.

Warning The conductors in front of the main switch are still energised. Lock the main switch with a

padlock to ensure that it cannot be accidentally switched on.

Individual pumps are taken out of operation by switching off the corresponding motor-protective circuit breaker, automatic circuit breaker or fuse.

15. Technical data

15.1 Pressure

Inlet pressure Hydro MPC booster sets can operate with a positive inlet pressure (precharged pressure system) or with a negative inlet pressure (i.e vacuum at the inlet manifold).

Calculation of the inlet pressure is recommended when

water is drawn through long pipes,

water is drawn from depths,

inlet conditions are poor.

Note

In this installation and operating instruction the term 'inlet pressure' is defined as the pressure/ vacuum which can be measured immediately before the booster set.

To avoid cavitation, make sure that there is a minimum inlet pressure on the suction side of the booster set. The minimum inlet pressure in bar can be calculated as follows:

H = P b

-NPSH-H f -H

v -Hs

Pb = Barometric pressure in feet (33.9 feet at sea level). In

closed systems, Pb indicates system pressure in feet.

Ht = Friction loss in suction piping in feet. (At the highest flow the pump will be delivering).

= Vapor pressure in feet.

NPSH = Net Positive Suction Head in feet. NPSH can be read from the NPSH curve at the maximum capacity at which the pump will run. (See installation and operating instructions for CR, CRI, CRN).

Hs = Safety margin = minimum 2 feet.

If "H" is calculated as positive, the pump can operate at a suction of maximum "H" feet. If "H" is calculated as negative, an inlet pressure (psia) of minimum "H" feet is required.

Maximum inlet pressure

Pump Maximum inlet pressure

[psi]

160 Hz ''""

CR(E) 5-7 145

CR(E) 10-3 116

CR(E) 15-3 145

CR(E) 20-3 145

CR(E) 32-2 58

CR(E) 45-2-1 145

CR(E) 64-2-1 145

CR 90-2-1 218

Note

The maximum inlet pressure is determined by the construction of the pump, such as bearing pressure. For information about other CR pump sizes, see WebCAPS on www.grundfos.com.

Operating pressure As standard the maximum operating pressure is 230 psi (16 bar].

On request, Grundfos offers Hydro MPC booster systems with a

maximum operating pressure higher than 230 psi (16 bar).

71



15.2 Temperature Liquid temperature: Ambient temperature:

32 °F to +158 °F

32 °F to +104 °F

15.3 Relative humidity Max. relative humidity: 95 %

15.4 Sound pressure For sound pressure level, see the installation and operating instructions for the CR pumps.

The sound pressure level for a number of pumps can be calculated as follows:

Lmax

Lmax =

Lpump =

n =

Lpump + (n - 1) x 3

Maximum sound pressure level.

Sound pressure level for one pump.

Number of pumps.

16. Electrical data

Supply voltage See nameplate of the Hydro MPC.

Backup fuse See the wiring diagram supplied with the Hydro MPC.

Digital inputs

Open circuit voltage:

Closed circuit current:

Frequency range:

Note

24 VDC

5 mA, DC

0-4 Hz

All digital inputs are supplied with PELV voltage (Protective Extra-Low Voltage).

Analog inputs

Input current and voltage: 0-20 mA 4-20 mA 0-10 V

Tolerance:

Repetitive accuracy:

Input resistance, current:

Input resistance, voltage, CU 351:

Input resistance, voltage, 10 351:

±3.3 % of full scale

±1% of full scale

< 250

10 kfl ±10 %

> 50 kc2± 10 %

Supply to sensor: 24 V, maximum 50 mA,

short-circuit protected

Note

72

All analog inputs are supplied with PELV voltage (Protective Extra-Low Voltage).

Digital outputs (relay outputs)

Maximum contact load:

Minimum contact load:

240 VAC, 2 A

5 VDC, 10 mA

All digital outputs are potential-free relay contacts.

Some outputs have a common C terminal. For further information, see the wiring diagram supplied with the Hydro MPC.

Inputs for PTC sensor/thermal switch For PTC sensors to DIN 44082. Thermal switches can also be connected.

Note

Open circuit voltage:

Closed circuit current:

Note

12 VDC ±15 %

2.6 mA, DC

Inputs for PTC sensors are electrically separated from the other inputs and outputs of the Hydro MPC.

17. Related documents Further product information about Hydro MPC booster systems can be found in the following documents.

All documents are available in WebCAPS on Grundfos' homepage, www.grundfos.com.

Title Frequency Publication

number

!Product Gyide

Grundfos Hydro MPC

Grundfos CR,CRI,CRN

60 Hz L-BPQ-PG-01

60 Hz L-CR-PG-001

Installation' and operating instructions

CR, CRI, CRN 60 Hz

CRE, CRIE, CRNE, CRKE, SPKE, MIRE, CHIE

60 Hz

L-CP-TL-003

L-MLE-TL-02

Se'rviCe dOcuMentation. .,

Service instructions

Service kit catalog

lOthe'r:.doumentation

Wiring diagram**

50/60 Hz 96646712

50/60 Hz 96488862

Only relevant for Hydro MPC-E, -ED and -ES booster systems.

A wiring diagram is supplied with the booster system.

18. Disposal This product or parts of it must be disposed of in an

environmentally sound way:

1. Use the public or private waste collection service.

2. If this is not possible, contact the nearest Grundfos company or service workshop.

Subject to alterations.



U.S.A. Canada GRUNDFOS Pumps Corporation 17100 West 118th Terrace Olathe, Kansas 66061 Phone: +1-913-227-3400 Telefax: +1-913-227-3500

GRUNDFOS Canada Inc. 2941 Brighton Road Oakville, Ontario L6H 6C9 Phone: +1-905 829 9533 Telefax: +1-905 829 9512

Mexico Bombas GRUNDFOS de Mexico S.A. de C.V. Boulevard TLC No. 15 Parque Industrial Stiva Aeropuerto Apodaca, N.L.C.P. 66600 Phone: +52-81-8144 4000 Telefax: +52-81-8144 4010

Addresses revised 22.09.2005



BE >THINK >INNOVATE > Being responsible is our foundation

Thinking ahead makes it possible Innovation is the essence

L-BPQ-TL-01 10/08

Repl. L-BPG-TL-01 03/08 US

www.grundfos.com GIRILJNIEDIFC05"X



OD el OD ID ID

falA111.11111100tilliiiiimmltu

4. Electrical Equip. Technical Info.



MO

1111111 flITITITI1111111111




4.0 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL INFORMATION

1 MAIN SWITCHES

2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS / CIRCUIT BREAKER CHASSIS / CONTACTORS

3 FUSES

4 RELAYS

5 SOFT STARTER

6 INSTRUMENTS

7 PUSHBUTTONS /SWITCHES

8 TERMINALS

9 EARTH / NEUTRAL LINKS

10 POWER SUPPLY

11 POWER QUALITY

12 ACCESSORIES

13 TELEMETRY EQUIPMENT





1 Main Switches

TERASAKI - S125CJ80125 - Normal Supply Main Switch

TERASAKI - S125CJ803 125 - Generator Supply Main Switch

SUPPLIED BY: NHP ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRODUCTS Pty. Ltd.

16 Riverview Place, Murarrie 4172, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (07) 3909 4999 FAX: (07) 3399 9712

File: Swbd Manual Revision 0 Date:I1/3/2010



TERAS i AKI

Ppqrnnx Terhno Tem eak MCCB's

Thermal magnetic type

S125NJ

36kA Current rating: 12.5 - 125A

Approvals and Tests: Standards AS/NZS 3947-2, and IEC60947-2

Interrupting capacity:

Voltage Icu Ics AC use 380/400 36 36 DC use 250V 25 19

Trip unit: Adjustable thermal (0.63 Ir to 100% Ir) and adjustable magnetic (6 Im to 12 Im)

Dimensions (mm) Poles 3 4 H 155 155 W 90 120 D (less toggle) 68 68 Toggle cut-out Standard DIN

Ampere Rating NRC

Adj. Ir 1)

Min - Max. Adj. Im I)

Min - Max. Cat. No.

20 12.5 - 20 120 - 240 S125 NJ 3

S125 NJ 4 20 20

32 20 - 32 192 - 384 S125 NJ 3 32 S125 NJ 4 32

50 32 - 50 300 - 600 S125 NJ 3 50 S125 NJ 4 50

63 40 - 63 378 - 756 S125 NJ 3 63 S125 NJ 4 63

100 63 - 100 600 - 1200 S125 NJ 3 100 S125 NJ 4 100

125 80 - 125 750 - 1500 S125 NJ 3 125 S125 NJ 4 125

1) NRC: Nominal rated current Adj. Ir. Adjustable thermal setting Adj. Im: Adjustable magnetic setting

Replaces: XS125NJ, Note: check exact ratings or dimenions to suit your application requirement

Price Schedule T2 I 9



1111111111111111111111111111eififif fiatikILIATali111

' i ,

TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs QI OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

THERMAL MAGNETIC CHARACTERISTICS 125A Frame MCCBs

Time/current characteristic curves

El 25-NJ, S125-NJ, S125-GJ

Magnetic trip current-

so

384±77 240±48....

50

30

20

0

''50.125Alnun 20'32Aima.1

0.0

0.6 0.5 0.4

0.3

0.2

C.1

006 0.00 0.02

0.03

0.02

C.01 0006

0.006 0.cco

2 8 ? ? § § ???.?

Adjustable, setting range; 01 magnetic

11 1

I-

tT

a 15

Time/current characteristic curves

H125-NJ, L125-NJ

Magnetic trivdurrent

1200±240

.756±151 600±120 384±77 240 48

A A ?, § § A§A§ § 121 anzmialsa-amm

Beyond the StandardTM TeitiRreak page:*221



' I I

TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs

OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS LET-THROUGH PEAK CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS S125-NE 240V AC S160-NF. 240V AC.

30.

200

3 -

Nov. ...Creak 2 -

i<OVAC 040.101 II.0091, 00alccurrent

I

1

1

1

i 1 . ...L. 1

10 20 30 50 130 200 300

Prospective short circuit current in RMS sym.(kA)

E125-NJ, S125-NJ, S125-GJ. 440V AC.

0.3

i4:12:11N2

V22291,.... '0 v/120,A. or yAc:44:1:.: -Cl.0ype ',Am I

H0.1.117., , .

'

2 3 S

1254-500 :

1.

I I I 11

-

!: .11 0100380-4 15V..151,.A/0IOV-

2 .0 W0A. h, I 5..; 2.510.400.-

.0 ,....y.:380-115V. 50k204402 i ;

20 70 0 100

Prospective short circuit current in RMS syrn.tkA)

200 300

Pee-34 TemBreak Beyond the StandardTM

r 200

1 00

0

3

111 :0.1.ak 2

1.rip 13011e1...inft Peal,

10 20 30 50 100 200 300

Prospective short circuit current in RMS sym.(kA)

S125-NJ, S125-GJ. 690V AC.

0.

111.91 ,11,222. 0.111400

C LIMO iyo Max : peak NO m45C5

2 3 5 10

Prospective short circuit current in MRS syrn.(kA)



TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs

INSTALLATION INSULATION DISTANCE IN mm (AT 440V AC MAXIMUM)

Type B1 B2

E125 NJ 50 10 ; 10 0 25

S125 NF 50 10 10 25

S125 NJ 50 10 10 25

S125 GJ 75 45 25 0 25

H125 NJ 100 80 60 0 50

L125 NJ 100 80 60 50

S160 NF 50 40 30 0 25

S160 NJ 50 40 30 0 25

S160 GJ 100 80 60 0 50

H160 NJ 100 80 60 0 50

L160 NJ 100 80 I 60 0 50

E250 NJ 50 40 ; 30 0 25

S250 NJ 50 40 30 0 25

S250 GJ 100 80 30 0 25

S250 I PE 100 80 60 0 50

H250 NJ 100 80 60 0 50

H250 NE 100 80 60 0 50

L250 NJ 100 80 60 0 50

E400 NJ 100 80 40 0 30

S400 I CJ 100 80 40 0 30

S400 NJ 100 80 40 0 30

S400 GJ 100 80 40 0 30

S400 GE 100 80 40 0 30

H400 NJ 120 120 80 0 80

H400 NE 120 120 80 0 80

L400 , NJ 120 120 80 0 80

L400 NE 120 120 80 80

E630 NE 120 100 80 80

S630 CE 120 100 80 0 80

S630 GE 120 100 80 0 80

1)

11)

j 11)

1)

*(1)

*Note: (1) Insulate the exposed conductor until it overlaps the moulded case at the terminal, or the terminal cover.

page 78 Beyond; the Stnaardrm



It m

TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs

INSTALLATION TEMPERATURE RATINGS & DERATINGS Calibration Temperature: 45°C

MCC8 Type Connection A -6

RatingaLcalrbralion tern eriair 50°C)

f(ateatCurren 50°C 55°C

,(A) 60°C 65°C

E125-NJ S125-NJ

. S125-GJ

Front. '

Rear Plug-in

20A 19 18.5 18 17.5

32A 31 30.5 30 29

50A 48 45 43 41

63A 100A

60 97

57 94

55

90 52 87

125A 121 117 113 109 H125-NJ L125-NJ

Front Rear'

Plug-in

20A 19 18.5 18 17.5 32A 31 30 29 28 50A 48 47 45 44

63A 61 59 57 55 100A 97

---121- 95 118

92 -114

89 111 125A ----

5160-NJ S160-GJ '

Hi6o-NJ L160,NJ -

Front 1 Rear

' plug-in ,,

- 7Front , Rear Plug-in

20A 19 18.5 18 17.5 32A 31 30 29 28 50A 48 46 44 42 63A 61 59 57 55 100A 97 94 91 88 125A 121 117 113 109 160A

160A

156

156

151

151

146

147

141

143

E250-NJ . .

Front '

Rear Plug-in ,

20A 19 18.5 18 17.5 32A 31 30 29 28 50A 48 46 44 42 63A 61 59 57 55 100A 97 94 91 88 125A 121 117 113 109

E250-NJ '

S250-NJ S250-GJ

.-' Front ,

' Rear 1 Plug-in

., Front . Rear

Plug:in Front ',

.

' Rear

160A 156 151 146 141

250A 243 235 227 219

H250-NJ ,

-L250-NJ 160A

250A

156

244

151

237

147

230

143

223

E400-NJ S400-CJ S400-NJ S400-GJ

" Front .

, Rear' ,

, Plug-in - ,

' .. '

250A 244 237 230 223 400A 390 380 369 358

H400-NJ. L400-NJ

Front . Rear '

250A 243 237 230 223 400A 390 381 371 361

Plug-in 250A 243 237 231 224 400A 392 384 376 368

Calibration Temperature: 30°C

MCC8 Type Connection Rating ,.atcalibration Rated:Cur ent.:(A) , ,

,

., T" e - tem eratilie 30°0 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C - H250-NJ Plug-in Conn.. 250A 244 236 225 219 209 200 190 ' 't_250-NJ -

_

CCBT '

,. 50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 30°C 35°C 40°C 45°C S250-PE Front 250A- 250 250 250 250 237.5 225 200 200 H250-NE Rear

Plug-in 250A 250 237.5 225 225 200 200 157.5 157.5 S400-NE , `, Front . , 250A 250 250 250 250 250 250 225 200 S400-GE Rear. ' ---- 400A ---- 400 400 400 400 400 380 360 320

- '-Plug-in 11400-NE Front 250A 250 250 250 250 250 250 225 200 L400-NE Rear 400A 400 400 400 400 400 380 360 320

Plug-in , 250A 250 250 250 250 250 250 225 200 400A 400 400 400 400 400 380 360 320

E630-NE Front 630A 630 630 630 630 598.5 598.5 567 504 S630-CE Rear S630-GE

Beyond the StandardTM TemB,eak page 81



. II i i ,

. , .

. ,

....

, -

,

. ..

TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs \I I 1

DIMENSIONS E125-NJ, S125-NJ, S125-GJ ASL: Arrangement Standard Line Irj: Handle Frame Centre Line

Front connected

3P

Irritee,;r_rmX)

I 11

60 90

Mount'

4P

hole I 0 1

120

Preparation of conductor

09

1A8 Sc,

17(maa.) 1040.15

M4x0.7 Mounting screw

08.5

With terminal bars (optional)

3P

LINA

arum

16

LIIF op

27.2 3.2

27.2

Drilling plan

3P

30

4P

Rear connected

op

It Stud can be turned 45"or 90'

Drilling plan

3P

It

aP

It

Panel Cutout (Front view)

3P 4P

122

Panel emu dimensions shown give an allowance 01 1.01010 around the handle escutcheon.

Front connected with Motor Operator

3P 4P

Mount

. , §

hole

45 5

I rat knob

Connector lu

154

Frnro panel t2

M8 screw r-

28 as.)

Preparation of conductor

o9

17(max.) mas.t5

AlOrnling screw

Drilling plan

3P aP

It

L

M400 7

aPP

Panel hinge position (hatching area) bottom view

1 ,11 I AIM aIMIIIIIIIIIIMIIIKf3111.11

Rear connected with Motor Operator

154

Front eel t2 /MoC4plate

72max.

Pad

Connector plug

R3(Lnaz.)

M4X 7

Mounting screw

Drilling plan

3P 4P

Die M400.7

4P

3P

It

'in

45 I

so

Panel cutout dimensions shown give an allowance ol 1.5mm around the handle escutcheon.

Beyond the StandardTM '7:entBreak page 85



TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs

APPLICATION DATA SELECTIVITY (DISCRIMINATION) AND CASCADE

Selectivity The principle of Selectivity (Discrimination) is based upon an analysis of several circuit breaker characteristics. These include time-current (tripping) curves, peak-let-through current (I,.0 and energy let-through (I2t).

The figures stated give the maximum selectivity level with the two nominated breakers in series under short-circuit conditions. For an indication on selectivity under overloads refer to the circuit breaker tripping/characteristic curves, or use the NHP Tem Curve selectivity analysis software package.

Selectivity can be enhanced beyond the breaking capacity of the downstream breaker provided it is backed up by an appropriately selected upstream breaker, which should not trip (unlatch) under the stated short circuit current.

Cascade Cascading is achieved by using an upstream device to assist (back-up) a

downstream device in clearing a fault current. This principal is necessary should the downstream device be required to clear a prospective short circuit current greater than the devices' breaking capacity.

In most cascading applications it is generally necessary for the upstream breaker to trip (unlatch), as well as the downstream breaker to give adequate back-up protection. As such, cascade is commonly used in feeding and protecting non-essential loads, such as basic lighting.

For more information on selectivity and cascading please refer to the latest NHP Part C catalogue.



Selectivity & Cascade Tables @ 400 / 415 V

Upstream MCCBs

Downstream kA MCCBs (RMS

CL

Csl CO

70

1.1.1 z 0. 1

125

O

V)

50

I IL 1.1.4 I IL Z Z 1 Z O 0 I 0 I C9 CT = 2;

1

, t:,

125 200 1 36

E125N.1, 25 25/25 ;:'''.25(65 25%36 '25/50 :25/65 25/85 25/36 :25/25

S125NJ 36 .36%36 i .36'./i5 36%50 - 36/65 36/85 364125 36/36 36/36

S125Gj 65 65/65 .65/125 50%50 65/70 65/1125-= 65'4150 X36/36 50/50

H125Nj 125 70/70 125/125 50/50 70/70 125/125 125/200 36/36 5.9(50

S 1 6ONJ 36 t

36/50 36/65 .36/85 '3641251 36/36 36/50

S160G<.(< , 65 50/50 65/70 :654125' 'fi54150 r..36/36 50(50

H16ONJ 125 I 125/125 125/200' 36/36 50/50

E25ONJ 25 25/65 ',25/85 1;25/36 25/25

S25ONJ 36 36/85 364125 i., 36/36 36/36

S250GJ 65 1 654125 654150 :36/36 50/50

S250P E 70 404125 '70/150.1 36/36 50/50

H250NJ 125 125/125 1 5/2001': 36/36 50/50

H250PE 125 125/125 125/200 '16/36 50/50

E400NJ - 25 ' ? t ;19/25 0/25

S400CJ 36 10/36 10/36

S400N E 50 .

10/36 10/50

$400NJ 50 r 10/36 10/36

S400GJ 70 1 - r 10/36 10/50

141400NJ..:..

H4OONE

E630NE

(6306E

S63OGE '

X S630C/ .

XS630Nj'

125 ;'::10/36

10%36

.10 /50

19(50 125

36 ...._.

70

45

65

...-

.,

-

XS630 PJ:. 85

XS630 E:. 50 ,

XH630SE:. 65

XH630P.E- 65

WOW' .... 65 ;

XS800SE 50

XJ800Pj.. .. 85

X H800SF.i. 65 ,

XI-4800P E 65

X S1250SE 65

151600SE ' 85 1

Selectivity /'Cascade

W u., I , I La . 1 C7) .... CI) V) V) = 0 ,=, 0 0 0 = . ,., .-, ,,, .. .. ,.. 0 0 0 p 0.1 c.,, 0 0 Li,

(v., ,J, CO CO co 1- .- r Cg CJ 0 ...I CO = _, CO J V) V) V) U7 1- X X I- X I- X X X

70 125 50 65 125 85 125 100 85 85

'25/50 '425/25 25(36 `:25/36 25/65 25%25 25(25 -"25/25 25/25 25/25

136/65 36/36 36/50 36/36 116%36 36/36 36%36 36/36 36%36 36/36

;-'65:(70 :65/65 65/50 65/65 65/65, ';"65/65 65/65 :65/65 65(65 65/65

70/70 70%70 50/50 65/65 ' 65/65 85/50 '85/50 100/100 85/85 85/85

-16/50 36/36 36/36 36/65 36165 "36/36 '36/36 36%36 36/36 36/36

65/70 "'.65(65 '50%50 50%65" 50%65 '65(65 :65/65 65/65 '65(65 65/65

7,0/70 70/70 50%50 50%65 :'50%65 ' 85%65 85/65 100/100 85/85 85/85

25/50 25/25 i: 25/25 -,25/50 25%50 .',25%25 25/25 25/25 25/25 .25/25. 16/65 ;36/36 :: 36136 '36(36 36/36 '36136 36136 .:36/36 36/36 36/36

65/70 :65(65 50%50 50/65 50/65 :65/65 .65/65 65/65 65/65 65/65

;;:70/70 :;,70(70 :50%50 "50/65 :50/65 .. 70/70 70/70 70170 70170 ;70/70

176/70 :70(70 50%50 50/65 56/65 '85%85 85/85 100/100 85/85 85/85

'70/70 ' 70/70 ' 50/50 50/65 _50/65, 85/85 85/85 100/100 85/85 85/85

'1 0/50 =--'10(36 <25/25 25/25 ' 25/36 125/25 :. 25/25 ' 25/36 '25125 ":25/25

10%65 ' ipto .2'136 25/36 -- 25/50 36/36 ::36/36 36/50 36/36 36/36

:10/50 -. 10(50 25/50 25(50. 25150 ;50%50 50(50 56/50 .50(50 :50%50

`. 10%70 -.<<',10(65 25/50 25/50 25/65 50%50 50/50 . :50/65 50/50 50/50

-`10/70 ".; 10/.70 ,25/50 25/50 25/65 70%36 70(36 70/85 70/70 70(70.

16/70 t10p 0 25/50 25/65 25(65 ' )25/85 125/85 125/100 125/85 1.25/85 " 4 _

10/70 10/70 25/50 25165 25/65 125/85 125/85 125/100 125/85 125/85

25136 25/36 :: 25/36 36/36 36/36 36736 36/36 36/36

25150 25/50 25/50 50/50 :;50/50 -56/50 750/50 50/50 ,--- 4-

< 1 70/70 70/70 70p0 70/70 70(70

" 36/ '1 1---

45 ' 30/45 30/46 35/45 35%45

',. 1 , 30/65 30/65 30/65 35/65 36%65

30185 . 30/85 ' 30/85 35/85 35/85

130%65 :'.30/65 30785 : 30/85 : 30%85

1 30(65 30/65 30(85 30/85 30/85

1

30/65 30/65 30/85 30785 30%85

%,15/65 15/65 ,20/65 35/65 35'165

15/.50 '15/50 20(50 35/50 35(50

.15/85- 15/85 -20/85 35/85 ,35/85

'::45/65 15/65 20165 '-'35/65 35(65

15/65 15/65 20(65 <35/65 .35765

4 1 20/65 35%65 35%65

35/85 '. 35/85



APPLICATION DATA

CASCADE TABLES

CASCADE CO 380 - 415 V A C ' )

Downstream kA MCCBs (RMS)

m Ri c, ,.._

25

ci..2

IV (l c... 2

36

cn

rt t.3

c..

x, IV ''' c

125

m 'V cl

200

Cl,

;) 2

36

En

.74

e,

65

x CIt

2 ,...

125

m a) 2 c

200

m (n 'en '4 2 2 c ,...

25 36

rcn,

m 2 c

65

(in, . 5,3

m

70

x 1.);

2 c

125

IT.,

....,,

-i m

125

r- 1`..)

2 c

200 65

1E125NJ ' -

f S125NJ

, 25

36

-; -

36 ,

- 36

50

65

85

85

125

36 '

- 36 '

50

65

85

'85

125

- 36

- - 36 ..

- - ,

- 65

85

65

85

85 1 125 .

IS125GJ '65t - -- -125 150 - 125 '' 150 , 65 125 ' 125 150,1

!H125NJ - 125 - - - , - 200 - - - 200 - - 65 - - - 200

LS160NJ' 36 -

65 - - 65' :

- '--

- '- -

7 .

'- 65

- -85

125

`' 125 = , ' 65 -,65 85 ''85 125

!S160GJ 150 - - - 70 125 125 150

IH16ONJ :125 - -, - L 200 1

IS250NJ 65 85 85 125 '

[S250GJ :

1S250PE

65

70

= - - -

- - - - -

- -

- -

- -

, -.

- - .

- .70

- 125

125

125' ,

125

150

150 )

1H250NJ _- . ' 125 - _ - - - ,'.... , - . 200

IE400NJ - - - - 36 65 65 - 6 S400CJ- t , 3 ` 50, 70 - 70 ' - -

1S4OONJ 50 - - - - - - - - 50' -65 85 85 - S400GJ a 70 50 . -, ' 125 125-

IH400NJ - - - - - - Note: ') Ratings have not been verified where a dash "-" is shown.

All pick-up and time delay settings are to be set at a maximum for upstream MCCB's

Upstream MCCBs

CASCADE @ 380 - 415 V AC')

Downstream kA MCCBs (RMS)

fn 4, O c(?)

c...

to cn 4, .12. a° 2 2

fl,

in (I) 4> A 00 e.) 2 c.m

I x A 4 Oa 2 2 mc-c-m

m .o. a 2

r A 0 2

m 0) ca 2 mmmmmr_mmmm

to cn 0) 0) Ca ca <(. E

-I m 0) Ca 2

X cn CO a 5;

X X (n x co Co 0 a 2 fi;

x -I Cn m - CO 1.7 0, ,.. 2 5:,

x Cn - a) o (T)

36 50 70 125 200 200 36 50 70 125 65 65 65 200 65 85

IE125NJ 25 36 36,- 50 65 85 85 36 50' - 36 36 ' 36 , --- ' - t IS125NJ 36 - 50 65 85 125 125 - - - 65 - 50 50 - - - -- IS125GJ ' 65 - - 70 125 150 150 50 70 .' - -- '65 - '

111125NJ 125 - - - - 200 200 . - 65 - 50 - 1S16ONJ 36 50 '65, 85 125 125, - 50 50 ' - 65 65 __ ., _

:S160GJ 65 - - 70, 125 150 150 - - 70 - - - - - - 1H160N4,

tE25ONJ

125

25

' - 36

- ,

36

- 50

- .

65 85

200

85

'- '

36

- , - - -

- ' 65' 36 50

- 65

- - - - - 50

IS>25ONJ- 36 50 65 85 125 125 65. - 65 . - - -' 1S250GJ 65 - - 70 125 150 150 - - 70 - - - - - - - 1S250k ,:- 70 - , 125 . 150

-

- 150 . --. - - - ___:___ - - i H25ONJ 125 - - -

_

- 200 -200 -- - - - - - E400NJ 25 36 36 50 65 85 65 36 50 36 - , 36 --' 36

1S400CJ 36 - 50 65 70 100 100 - - 65 50 - - - 50 - 50

S400NJ 50' ,70 85 125 125 36 70 65 - - 50, 65 65

S400GJ 70 - - 125 150 150 36 - - - - - 50 - - 36 85 i

H400NJ', 125 - , 200 200 - - ' - . -

`page 46 '

Note: ') Ratings have not been verified where a dash "-" is shown.

All pick-up and time delay settings are to be set at a maximum for upstream MCCBs

em- #realt- Beyond the StandardTM



TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs

APPLICATION DATA

SELECTIVITY AND CASCADE TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs AND DIN-T / SAFE-T MCBs

SELECTIVITY / CASCADE @ 415V AC

Downstream Amp MCB rating

kA (RMS)

Upstream MCCB

m to WM CO rn N (1) CP 2 ni u u a 4=. 4, 0 o

al o o 0 a Z OZ Z 2 0 0 Z

C c- C

25 36 65 36 65 36 70 125

iDTCB6 , ': 2-20 6 - 118/18 25/25 35/35 35/35 35/35 - - - ,

i 25-63 6 118/18 20/25 20/25 30/30 30/30 - - - IDTCB10 , , 05 - 32 10 118/18 30/30 30/50 35/35 40/50 35/35 40/50 40/50

40-63 10 118/18 20/25 25/25 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30

DSRCBH J_ 1DSRCD

:05.-32

4 40

10 , 118/18

10 118/18

30/30

20/25

30/50

25/25

35/35

30/30

40/50

30/30

35/35

30/30

40/50 40/505

30/30 30/30

Din-T1 OH1 80-125 10 -1,4/18 4/25 4/25 15/15 15/15 10/10 10/10 - I DTCH15 0 5 - 32 15 118/18 30 30/50 35/35 40/50 35/35 40/50 40/50

1Safe-T

40 .7 63 :15 118/18 , 20 25/25 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30

s 16-20 6 , 3/10 3/10- 3/10 - - - - - SRCB 16-20' 6 1'3/10 3/10 3/10 -

Guide XX / YY

Selectivity Cascade

Notes: All figures stated are at 400/415 V AC.

Beyond the StandardTM Ted/Pre/4k,, page 47.



B

TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs

APPLICATION DATA

MOTOR STARTING TYPE 1 CO-ORDINATION TABLES

Short-Circuit Co-Ordination Motor Starting Table

Type '1' Terasaki MCCB's & Sprecher + Schuh KT7's DOL starting 50/65 kA @ 400/415 V to AS/NZS 60947.4.1

Terasald Combinations i

Motor Size (kW)

Approx. amps 13,

400/415 V (A) ,MCCB Contactor

0.37 1.1 XM3OPB/1.4 CA7-9

0.55 1.5 XM3OPB/2 .CA7 -9 i

0.75 1.8 XM3OPB/2.6 ' CA7-9 I

1.1 2.6 XM30P13/4.0, CA7-9 - I

1.5 3.4 XM301.19/5 . ' CA7-9

2.2 4.8 XM3OPE3/8 - CA7-9

3 6.5 XM30P6/10 CA7-9

4 8.2 XM30143/12, CA7-9

5.5 11 S1256J/20 ' CA7-12 . '

7.5 14 S125GJ/20 , CA7 -16

11 21 S125GJ/32. CA7-23

15 28 S1256..1/50 CA7-30 ' -

18.5 34 S125GJ/50 CA7 -37

22 40 S125GJ/63 CA7-43

30 55 S125GJ/100 .CA7 -60

37 66 ',: S125GJ/1910 CA7-72

45 80 .S125GJ/125 CA7-85

55 100 -, S125GJ/125 CA6-110

5 130 S250PE/250 .. 'CA6=140

0 155 S250PE/250 - CA6-180 I

10 200 S250PE./250 . 'CA6-210 '

32 225 S400GE/400 CA6-210

60 270 , S400GE/400 -CA6-300 I

00 361 S400GE/400 CA6-420 I

Notes: Thermal or electronic overload relays may be used. XM3OPB MCCB's can be replaced with 5125GJ/20 it required. Combinations based on the thermal overload relay tripping before the circuit. breaker at overload currents up to the motor locked rotor current.

-.:134de Teipgreak- 'Beyond the tàndàrdTM

I Terasaki Combinations Sprecher .. Schuh Combinations

Overload ,

IReley'' :' Thermal

. Setting. (A) ,

KT7 Circuit Breaker

Contactor

;CT 7 -24" ' 1.0 1.6 KTA7-25S-1.0A CA7-9

fCT 7-24 . . .1.0 - 1.6 ' KTA7-25S-1.6A CA7-9

!CT 7-24 . .1.6 - 2.4 KTA7- 25S -2.5A CA7-9

[CT 7-24 KTA7-25S-2.5A CA7-9

;CT 7-24 2.4 4.0. KTA7-25S-4.0A CA7-9

ICT 7-24 4.0 - 6.0 ' KTA7-25S-6.3A CA7-9

[CT 7-24 .. 6.0 -10 KTA7-25S-6.3A CA7-9

iCT7-24,, 6.0' 10, KTA7-25S-10A CA7-9

;CT 7,24 .:. ilti' 16 KTA7-25H-16A CA7-12

,CT 7-24 10 - 16 KTA7-25H-16A CA7-16

;CT 7.24 , , 16 -24 " KTA7-45H-20A CA7-23

ici- 7-45 KTA7-45H-32A CA7-30

16i- 7-45- . ......i0.- 45' KTA7-45H-45A CA7-37

;CT 7-45 :'30 - 45 KTA7-45H-45A CA7-43

ICI 7-75 45 = 60 KTA3-100-63A CA7-60

;CT 7-75, . - 60 - 75 KTA3-100-90A CA7-72

1CT 7-100: - 70, 90 KTA3-100-90A CA7-85

ICU, 1-11/12 - 20', 180- KTA3-160S-100A CA6-110

ICEF 1-11/12 ' -0.. 180 KTA3-160S-160A CA6-140

;CEF 1-11/12 20 '- 180 KTA3-160S-160A CA6-180

ldEF 1-41/42 -:160 =400 ... KTA3-250S-200A CA6-210

ICEF1;41/42: ' 160 -400. .: KTA3-250S-250A CA6-250

!CEF 1:41/42. 190 :400 KTA3-4005 -320A CA6-300

ICEF 1-41/42 160 =400 KTA3-400S-400A CA6-420



,.. TERASAKI .....nior-tection,a,ho.4gy

TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs i..._ j N 1

t= \ = APPLICATION DATA

MOTOR STARTING TYPE 2 CO-ORDINATION TABLES

Short-Circuit Co-Ordination DOL Motor Starting Table

Type '2' Terasakl MCCB's & Sprecher + Schuh KT7's DOL starting 50/65 kA @ 400/415 V to AS/NZS 60947.4.1

Terasaki Combination

Motor Size (kW)

Approx. amps 0 400/415 V (A)

MCCB Contactor 1

0.37 1.1 XM30Pf3/1.4 CA7-9 1

0.55 1.5 XM3OPB/2 CA7 -9. ,

0.75 1.8 XM3OPB/2.6' CA7-9

1.1 2.6 XM3OPB/4.0 CA7-16 1

1.5 3.4 XM3OPB/5 CA7-16 1

2.2 4.8 XM3OPB/8 CA7-16 1

3 6.5 XM3OPB/10 , ' CA7-30 1

4 8.2 XM3OPB/12 CA7-30

5.5 11 S125GJ/20 CA7-30 1

7.5 14 S125GJ/20 CA7-30 1

11 21 S125GJ/32 CA7-30

15 28 S125GJ/50 CA7:43 1

18.5 34 S125GJ/50 CA7-43 1

22 40 S125GJ/63 CA7-43 ' 1

30 55 S125GJ/100 CA7-72

37 66 S125GJ/100 'CA7-72",

45 80 ' S125GJ/125 CA6-105 , 1

55 100 S250PE/160 CA6-105.5 1

75 130 S250PE/250 CA6-140 1

90 155 S250PE/250 CA6-170 1

110 200 S250PE/250 CA6-210 3

132 225 S400PE/400 CA6-210 1

160 270 S400PE/400 CA6-300 1

200 361 ,,S400PEJ400 ' CA6-,'120 1

Notes: Thermal or electronic overload relays may be used. XM3OPB combinations can be replaced with S125GJ/20 and CA7.30 if required. Combinations based on the thermal overload relay tripping before the circuit breaker at overload currents up to the motor locked rotor current.

I

j -. Terasaki Combinations Sprecher + Schuh Combinations

;Overload. ,

;Relay Thermal Setting (A)

KT7 Circuit Breaker

Contactor

1CT 7-24 1.0 - 1.6 KTA7- 25S -1A CA7-9

,;CT 7-24 ,,',, 1.0.1.1.6 KTA7-25S-1.6A CA7-9

1CT 7-24 '' ' .1.6 -2.4 , KTA7-25S-2.5A CA7-9

1CT7-24 . 2.4 -4.0 KTA7-25S-2.5A CA7-9

ICT 7-24 2.4 - 4.0 KTA7-25S-4A CA7-9

1CT.7-24 4.0 - 6.0 KTA7 -25S -6.3A CA7-9

1CT 7-24. :. 6.0 - 10 KTA7-25S-6.3A CA7-9

;CT 7 -24 ' 6.0 - 10 KTA7-25S-10A CA7-9

1CT 7-24 10 - 16 KTA7-25H-16A CA7-12

1CT 7-24 10.7 16 .. KTA7-25H-16A CA7-16

ICI 7-24 16- 24...;. KTA7-45H-20A CA7-23

CT 7-45 18 - 36 KTA7-45H-32A CA7-30

ICT.7-45 ' 30 - 45 KTA7-45H-45A CA7-37

1CT 7-45 . . 30 - 45 KTA7-45H-45A CA7-43

1CT7-75 .:45 - 66 :, KTA3-100-63A CA7-60

}CT 7-75 KTA3-100-90A CA7-72

(CT 7-100 70 - 90 KTA3-100-90A CA7-85

!GEE 1-11/12 20-180 KTA3-160S-100A CA6-110

ICU 1-11/12 20 ='186 ,. .

20 - 180 .

.

KTA3-160S-160A

KTA3-160S-160A

CA6-140

CA6-180 ICEF1,11/12:-': ,

(CEF 1-41/42 : ' 160 -'400 KTA3- 250S -200A CA6-210

10EF 1-41/42 160 - 400 KTA3-250S-250A CA6-250

10EF 1-41/42 160 - 400 KTA3- 400S -320A CA6-300

10EF1 =41/42 . '': 160'400. KTA3-400S-400A CA6-420

Beyond the StandardTm Tentlilietth



I

TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs

APPLICATION DATA

MOTOR STARTING TYPE 2 CO-ORDINATION

Short -Circuit Co-Ordination DOL Motor Starting Table

Type '2' Terasakl MCCB's & Sprecher + Schuh 107's DOL starting 85 kA @ 400/415 V to AS/NZS 60947.4.1

' Terasaki Conthinations

Motor Size (kW)


MCCB - ' Contactor

0.37 1.1 XM3OPB/1.4 CA 7-9

0.55 1.5 XM3OPB/2 . 'CA,7 -9 .

0.75 1.8 XM3OPB/2.6 - CA 7-9

1.1 2.6 XM3OPB/4.0 CA 7-16

1.5 3.4 -XM3OPB/5 CA 7-16

2.2 4.8 XM3OPB/8 CA 7-30

3 6.5 XM3OPB/10 .. . CA 7-30

4 8.2 XM3OPB/12 CA 7-30

5.5 11 H125NJ/20 CA 7-30

7.5 14 H125Nj/20 CA 7-30 i

11 21 H125NJ/32 CA 7-30

15 28 H125NJ/50 - CA 7-43

18.5 34 H125NJ/50 CA 7-43

22 40 ' Ij1125NJ/63 CA 7-43'

30 55 . H125NJ/100 CA 7-72

37 66 H125NJ/100 ''. CA 7-72

45 80 H125NJ/160 .CA 6-105

55 100 H16ONJ/160- - CA 6-105

75 130 .'H250PE/250 " !. CA 6-210

90 155 H250PE/250 ' - CA 6 -210. i

110 200 H250PE/250 CA 6-210 1

132 225 1-1400NE/400' ' CA 6-210

160 270 H400NE/400 . , CA 6-300

200 361 H400NFJ400 -CA 6-420 I

Notes: Thermal or electronic overload relays may be used. XM3OPB combinations can be replaced with H125GJ/20 and CA7-30 if required. Combinations based on the thermal overload relay tripping before the circuit

breaker at overload currents up to the motor locked rotor current.

page 50 ' TemB,Tivitic Beyond the StanderdTm' , -

I Terasaki Combinations Sprecher + Schuh Combinations

i :Overload Thermal Relay , Setting (A) '

KT7 Circuit Breaker

Contactor

CT 7-24 1.0 - 1.6 KTA7-25S-1A CA 7-9

!CT 7-24 ,

1.0 - 1.6 KTA7-25S-1.6A CA 7-9

!CT 7-24 1.6 - 2.4 KTA7-25S-2.5A CA 7-9

iCT 7-24 - 2.4 - 4.0 KTA7-25H-2.5A CA 7-9

!CT 7-24 2.4 - 4.0 KTA7-25H-4A CA 7-9

ICT 7-24 4.0 - 6.0 KTA7-25H-6.3A CA 7-9

CT 7-24 , 6.0 - 10 KTA7-25H-6.3A CA 7-9

;CT 7-24

ICT 7-24

KTA7-25H-10A CA 7-9

KTA7-45H-16A CA 7-12

ICT 7-24 KTA7-45H-16A CA 7-16

;CT 7-24 16 - 24 KTA7-45H-20A CA 7-23

CT 7-45 ' 18 --30, KTA7-45H-32A CA 7-30

ICT 7-45 . 30 - 45 . KTA7-45H-45A CA 7-37

iCT 7-45 30 - 45' KTA7-45H-45A CA 7-43

CT 7-75 45 - 60 KTA3-100-63A CA7-60

ICT.7-75'; 60 - 75 KTA3-100-90A CA7-72

!CT 7-100 70 - 90 KTA3-100-90A CA7-85

ICEF-1-11/12 ' 20 - 180 -

ICEF 1-11/12 20 - 180

iCEF 1-11/12 20 - 180 - -

ICEF 1-41/42 .160 - 400 - -

ICEF 1-41/42 160 - 400

!CEF 1-41/42 160 - 400

ICEF 1-41/42 160 - 400 -



TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs.

APPLICATION DATA

MOTOR STARTING TYPE 2 CO-ORDINATION

Short-Circuit Co-Ordination DOL Motor Starting Table

Type '2' Terasaki MCCB's & Sprecher + Schuh KT7's DOL starting 100 kA @ 400/415 V to AS/NZS 60947.4.1

Terasaki Combinations

Motor Size (kW)


MCCB ' Contactor ,

0.37 1.1 H125NJ/20 CA 7-30

0.55 1.5 H125NJ20 ' ' CA 7-30

0.75 1.8 , H125NJ/20 CA 7-30

1.1 2.6 H125NJ/20 CA 7-30

1.5 3.4 H125NJ/20 CA 7-30

2.2 4.8 1-1125NJ20 CA 7 -30

3 6.5 H125NJ/20 CA 7-30

4 8.2 H125NJ/20 CA 7-30 i

5.5 11 H125N..1/20. CA 7-30 1

7.5 14 H125NJ/20' CA 7-30 ..,

11 21 '' H125NJ/32 , CA 7-30

15 28 H125NJ/50 ., CA 7-43

18.5 34 H125NJ/50. ' CA 7-43 1

22 40 H125NJ/63 ' CA .7-43 1

30 55 H125-NJ/100 CA 7-60 i

37 66 H125-NJ/100 . . I CA 7-72 1

45 80 H125 -NJ /125 CA 7-85 '1

55 100 H250-NE/160 CA 6-95 1

75 130 ' H250- NE/250 CA 6-140

90 155 H250-NE/250 CA 6-140 1

110 200 H250-NE/250 CA 6-180 1

132 225 H400-NE/400, CA 6-420 1

160 270 H400-NE/400 CA 6-420 1

200 361 'H400-NE/400 ' ,, CA 6-420

Notes: Thermal or electronic overload relays may be used. Combinations based on the thermal overload relay tripping before the circuit breaker at overload currents up to the motor locked rotor current.

Terasaki Combinations

,Overload Thermal 'Relay Setting (A)

Sprecher + Schuh Combinations

KT7 Circuit Breaker

Contactor

{CT 7-24 1.0 1.6 KTA7-255-1A CA 7-9

1CT 7-24 1.0. 1.6 KTA7-255-1.6A CA 7-9

!CT 7-24 1.6 - 2.4 KTA7 -25S -2.5A CA 7-9

!CT 7-24 2.4 -4.0 KTA7-25H-2.5A CA 7-9

CT 7-24 .2.4 .4.0 KTA7-251-1-4A CA 7-9

CT 7-24 4.0. 6.0 KTA7-25H-6.3A CA 7-9

'CT 7-24 6.0 - 10 KTA7-251-1-6.3A CA 7-9

',CT 7-24 6:0- 10 KTA7-25H-10A CA 7-9

(CT 7-24 10 - 16 KTA7-45H-16A CA 7-12

CT 7-24 10. 16 KTA7-45H-16A CA 7-16

CT 7-24

!CT 7-45 '

16 - 24 KTA7-45H-20A CA 7-23

KTA7-45H-32A CA 7-30

!CT 7-45 30 -45 KTA7-45H-45A CA 7-37

!CT 7-45. 30 - 45 KTA7-45H-45A CA 7-43

;CT 7-75 45 - 60 - -

!CT 7-75 60 - 75 -

iCT 7-100 70 - 90

10EF 1-11/12 20.180 idEF 1-11/12 20. .180 -

,CEF 1-11/12 20. 180

10EF 1-41/42 160.400 - -

CEF 1-41/42 160.400 - -

iCEF 1-41/42 160 - 400

',CEF 1-41/42 160.400 -

Beyond the StandardTM Tentlireak. page 51:



TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs I

OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS THERMAL MAGNETIC PROTECTION Adjustment Dials

0.63 0 0.8

0 6

k (xi n) (x1 n)

1. /R is the thermal element adjustment dial and is used to set the rated current to match the conductor rating.

/R can be set between 0.63 and 1.0 times I.

2. L is the magnetic element adjustment dial and is used to set the short circuit tripping threshold to suit the application.

L can be set between 6 and 12 times In on 125A and 400A frame models.

L can be set between 6 and 13 times I, on 250A frame models with ratings of 160A, 200A and 250A.

L can be set between 6 and 12 times In on 250A frame models with ratings of 125A and less.

Mode s, Types and Rated Currents of Thermal Elements

Model Itp Current Ratingiln#9 S125 ...2.-Nr : 16, 20;257'32,40, 50,63, 80,100, 125

E125 -NJ, 20, 32,50, 63, 100, 125 ' '

S125- - --NJ --- 20,32, 50, 63,100,125 - - --

S125 .. - .

--GJ .. ' 20,32 50 63-100 125

H125 -NJ -,'20,:3250, 63, 100, 125

'L125 -NJ 26;32, 50, 63,_100, 125

S160 -NF 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125 160

S160 -NJ 0, 32, 50, 63, 100, 125, 160

S160 -GJ , , 50, 63,100, 125, 160

H160 -NJ ! 160

L160 -NJ -:160 E250 -NJ 7 20, 32, 50, 63, 100, 125, 160;:200, 250

S250 -NJ . 160, 200, 250

S250 -GJ : 160, 200,-250

H250 , 160,1250_1* .

'L250' -NJ ' ; 160, 250 7

.

t400 -NJ '256, 400

S400 -6J ' 256, 4ixi

S400 ' -NJ , '';. 280, 400

.S400 -GJ' . . 250;400

H400 -NJ 250, 400

1400 :NJ 250, 400 ,

. M.

Beyond the StandardTm TertiBreok. pa;ge:23-



°

TEMBREAK 2 MCCBs

OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS LET-THROUGH ENERGY CHARACTERISTICS S125-NE 240V AC

30

0.'

0 3 5

1 I 1 i

. :

i

i 1 3 3 3

. : .. I 1 I i I

0.02

I I I

I I

Apo ;e. ieintreek I 240V51.'

NO

1 I Hi; I

w 20 30 50 100 200 300

Prospective short circuit current in RMS sym.(k.A)

E125-NJ, S125-NJ, S125-GJ. 440V AC.

10

0

0.3

2

. .

S160-NF. 240V AC

10

.5

o3

0.2

0.05

0.03

Come 7.rtitireik 2 , ..;33 24DYAC

mnp3303.5,15

I I

i I

I .

0 35 30 50 CO 200 300

.1

Prospective shn.: ^.:3c.:0 current in RMS sym.(kA)

S125-NJ, S125-GJ. 690V AC.

Range Tert111.0.0 Range 1013 en. Voltage 3/n05.0. Vellagr 43311CVAC,3115VAC,41050.0 ,Curve Type Wile. 2 2.73 Me .0 .1) Cu.re Ivpr .1:3.1.c...facugh 000, 9 , Crewing NO M451?

I I

1 1 1

I I

3 3 3 3

2 3 5 io

Prospective shun cocOlt current in RMS syni.(kA)

O wsiorato. 35v. 15,./.1.54v

41, 300A ;5.3,, :5 21.3. :4. Ziit 653...r380-4351 501,44.0

. . .

30 50

3 3

150 200 300

page 38 TemBreak Beyond the Standardim

-4

1250000

0.31

0.2

31 5 14f4},NM Prospective short cirCuit current in RMS sym.(kA)




2 Circuit Breakers / Circuit Breaker Chassis / Contactors

TERASAKI - DTCB15 320C - Pump 1,2,3,4 Circuit Breaker c/w DTLDC

TERASAKI - DTCB10306C - Station Mains Phase Failure Circuit Breaker & DC Power Supply

TERASAKI - DSRCBH-16-30A - 15A GPO Circuit Breaker

TERASAKI DSRCBH-10-30A - RTU Laptop GPO Circuit Breaker

TERASAKI - DTCB10106C - SW/BD Internal Lighting Circuit Breaker

TERASAKI - DTCB10104C - Grundfos Controller Circuit Breaker

TERASAKI - DSRCBH-06-30A - Sump Pump Circuit Breaker

SUPPLIED BY: NHP ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRODUCTS Pty. Ltd.

16 Riverview Place, Murarrie 4172, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (07) 3909 4999

FAX: (07) 3399 9712




TP.A.s419 Miniature circuit breakers

Din-T series General features

Advantages of the Din-T series miniature circuit breakers Li Short circuit breaking capacity of 6, 10 and 15 kA at 415 V AC

D Increased rating up to 63 kA when backed up with HRC fuses (Refer page 9 - 10)

Li Rated current range from 0.5 A to 125 A

LI Silver graphite contacts

D Input connection by lifting cage terminal with capacity of up to 35 mm2 giving fast and practical connection

I:I Output terminals offer finger and hand protection with a capacity of up to 35 mm2

ILI Snap fixing with two stop locations, for normal DIN rail mounting

Li Approval number N17481

Li Conforms to AS/NZS 4898, IEC 60898 and IEC 60947-2 as applicable

Brief description The Din-T series miniature circuit breakers have inverse time delayed thermal and instantaneous magnetic trips and are suitable for mounting in distribution boards or in switchgear panels and consumer units.

Operation Protection against overheating of electrical conductors, excess currents due to overload, short circuit or earth fault.

Application In switching, control, distribution and measurement systems for domestic, commercial and industrial installations.

Tripping characteristics Thermal release In case of overload, the release is initiated by a bi-metal strip. Standards IEC 60898 and IEC 60947 define the range of release for specific overload values. Reference ambient temperatures are 30 °C and 40 °C for the respective standards.

Magnetic release In case of short circuit, an electromagnet with plunger ensures instantaneous tripping. IEC 60898 describes the characteristics for the following curve types:

Curve Type Test current Application

B 3-5 x In Resistive loads

Protection of general distribution loads

C 5-10 x In - lighting

- socket outlets

- motors etc

Protection of circuits having high inrush transient currents

D 10-20 x In - high inertia motor starting

- transformers

- welders

1 - 8



T_E.Aggg Miniature circuit breakers

Din-T series General features

Handle Sealable and padlockable with quick-make and quick-break type mechanism. The handle is sealable in ON and OFF position. Due to the free-tripping mechanism, the MCB contacts open through overload or short circuit even when the handle is sealed in the ON position on all types.

Input terminal (`OFF' side) Box terminal with lifting screw for copper and aluminium conductors: max. capacity 1 x 35 mm2 or 2 x 16 mm2.

When unscrewing the screw, the head lifts; however, on pushing the screw head, the box terminal opens. This system enables the MCBs to be linked with a cable and fork or pin type bus comb. The MCB is delivered with a half open box terminal and a lifted screw head.

Output terminal (`ON' side) Box terminal with captive terminal screw for copper and aluminium conductors: max. 1 x 35 mm2 or 2 x 16 mm2.

The box terminals are always delivered in the open position. Output terminal screw has IP 20 protection against direct finger contact by standard design.

Arc chamber Contains arc extinction plates, (de-ionising type) designed to break up and dissipate the arc which is generated during interruption of all types of faults.

Electromagnet Operating the plunger which opens the contacts instantaneously.

Arc magnetic blowout system Short circuit currents do not flow through the bi-metal but are directed by the blowout magnet in such a way that the arc is transferred to a special arc runner, therefore taking the bi-metal out of the circuit, which ensures the thermal trip characteristics remain unchanged after an MCB has been exposed to a fault current.

O This combination of the electromagnet (with a plunger rapidly opening the contacts), the blowout magnet and the arc chamber, results in an extremely high short circuit breaking capacity, and very low let through energy.

Snap-on clip for DIN rail mounting This special flexible system gives ease of mounting and positioning of the MCB on DIN rail.

Catalogue number structure for Din-T MCBs (6, 10, 10H & 15)

DTCB i X X 1 X X X I X

onstant 1 Short circuit I Polarity -11 ir Current I Curve capacity (A) 1

I I (A) type

NHP DIN I 6 6000 05 0.5 - 1 pole B 3 In 5 In

01 1 --------- format 10 10000 2 2 pole ' 02 2 1 LC 5 In - 10 In

J

10H 10000 3 3 pole 11 03 3 04 4 I

D 10 In - 20 In

15 15000 1N 1P + N j i 06 6

DC 6000 4 3P + N ! I 10 10 13 13 Etc

1 - 9



ligig.4.19 Miniature circuit breakers

Din-T6 series 2-63 A 6 kA 'C' curve

Standard AS/NZS 4898

Li Approval No. N17481

Li Current range 2-63 amps 1, 2 and 3 pole

J Sealable and lockable handle

DIN rail mounting

Padlockable in OFF position

F.3 Suits CD type chassis

Li General purpose light and power distribution

Curve type: C (5 - 10 In) Single pole

In (A) Cat. No. Price $ In (A) Cat. No. Price $

2 ' DTCB6102C ' 35.00 i 20 DTCB6120C ' 35.00 :

4 -DTCB6104C l 35.00;! 25 DTCB6125C ' 35.00 ;

6 'DTCB6106C 35.00;; 32 4

DTCB6132C. 35.00

10 DTCB6110C ; 35.001 40 :DTCB6140C 35.00 ;

13 DTCB6113C 35.001 50 DTCB6150C ' 35.001

16 DTCB6116C 35.00 63 DTCB6163C 35.001

Double pole

2 i = DTCB6202C ' 110.00-; 20 :OTCB6220C , 110.00;

4 1 DTCB6204C i 110.001 25 DTCB6225C 110.001

6 ' DTCB6206C '1 ! 110.00 ' 1

32 DTCB6232C ; 110.00 ]

10 a DTCB6210C 1 110:001 40 DTCB6240C : 110.00 1

13 i 0 DTCB6213C 1 110.001 50 DTCB6250C 110.001

16 1 DTCB6216C 110.00', 63 DTCB6263C - 110:001

Triple pole

2 'DTCB6302C ; 140.001 20 DTCB6320C ' : 140.00i

4 DT,CB6304C ,i 140:001 DTCB6325C;;-,,,. 140* 6 , :DTCB6306C ' 140X10 I 32 DTC B63326' '', , ), 146061

10 D7-0631 oc I 146;00 40 DTCB6340C - :! 1,46:06

13 i DTCB631'3C' ' , 1 140.001 50 DTCB6350C ' 140.001 - .1

16 DTCB6316C 14000 i 63 ' DTCB6363C . 146.:00.!

Notes: The LINE-side is the OFF or bottom of the MCB, and connects to CD chassis tee-offs. Suitable for the following side mounted accessories:- - AUX/ALM switches - refer page 1 - 31

- Shunt trip - refer page 1 - 30 - UVT Trip - refer page 1 - 30 - Clip-on RCD module - refer page 1 - 23 - Din-Safe-M module - refer page 1 - 23 - Din-T terminals and accessories - refer page 1 - 35

Available on indent only

1 - 10 GST not included price.schedulefriLi



TP14§4.1.9 Miniature circuit breakers

Din-T6 series 2-63 A 6 kA 13' curve J Standard AS/NZS 4898

LI Approval No. N17481

LI Current range 2-63 amps 1, 2 and 3 pole

Li Sealable and lockable handle

U DIN rail mounting


J Suits CD type chassis

Li Motor starting and transformer applications

Curve type: D (10 - 20 In) Single pole

In (A) Cat. No. Price $ In (A) Cat. No. Price $

2 DTCB6102D 40.001 20 DTCB6120D 1- 40.01

4 DTCB6104D ' 1 40.00 i 25 DTCB6125D , '

i

40.00

6 CiTaB6106ti : 40.00 i 32 : DTCB6132D 40.001

10 DTCB6110D 40.001 40 DTCB6140D , ,1 40.001

13 I DTCB6113D 40.00 50 DTCB6150D , 40.001

16 DTCB6116D . 40.00 63 DTCB6163D , i

40.00 1

Double pole

2 . DTCB6202D i 120.00 20 _ .. .

:', 13:TCB6220D ; 120.00::

4 , . DTCB6204D i 120.001 25 DTCB6225D 120:001

6 DTCB6206D 120.001 32 , . DTCB6232D ' 120.0 1

10 ' kif C B 62 I 0 CV ' - a'

120.00! 40 ' , DTCB6240D 120.00

13 120.001 50 DTCB6250D ' 120.001 I DTCB621313 "

16 DTCB6216D 1 120.001 63 - DTCB6263D - ' 120.001

Triple pole

2 Di-06302D -'! 105.001 20 DTC146320D 165.001

4 DTCB6304D , 165.00 1 25 DTCB6325D 1 166.00i

6 ' DTCB6306D '.: 155.001 32 1

DTCB6332D : 165,001

10 DTCB6310D ' 165.001 40 DTCB6340D 165.001

13 155,00. 50 'DTC36350D- ' 166.001 n DTCB63136; -`` 1

16 1

' DTCB6316D 165.00.; 63 1, DTCB6363D , .. 165.001

Notes: The LINE-side is the OFF or bottom of the MCB, and connects to CD chassis tee-offs. Suitable for the following side mounted accessories:- - AUX/ALM switch - refer page 1 - 31. - Shunt trip - refer page 1 - 30 - UVT trip - refer page 1 - 30 - Clip-on RCD module - refer page 1 - 23 - Din-T terminals and accessories - refer page 1 - 35 Di Available on indent only.

GST not included 1 - 11



714§.4.41 Miniature circuit breakers Din-T6 series 6-32 A

1P+N (switched neutral) 6 kA 'C' curve Li Standard AS/NZS 4898 IEC 60898

Li Approval No. N17481

Li Current range 6-32 amps

C curve tripping characteristic

lcu = los = 6 kA

13 1 pole + 1 switched neutral pole 1) 2)

Li Single width module 18 mm wide

Li Voltage rating 230 V AC

D Terminal cap. Flexible/rigid cable: 10-16 mm2 3)

Li DIN rail mounting

C3 Sealable and lockable toggle



Curve type: C (5 -10 In) Single module width

In (A) Cat. No. 1) 4) Price $

6 _ "

CB61NO6C 140.00

10 I '-DTC186iNlOC I 140,00';

16 ' DTCB61N16C '; 140.00:

20 i :4 DTCB61,N20b 140.001

25 - -

r:DTCB61N25C 1_ 140.00: , 32 II- DTCB61N32C ' 140.001

18 ---- Dimensions (mm)

70 -- 44

I 1

45 ;

Notes: ') DTCB61N types have 1 protected switched pole and 1 unprotected switched neutral pole

2) The neutral pole contacts in a DTCB61N are early make/late break type 3) DTCB61N types are not suitable for CD chassis mounting °) Standard Din-T accessories are not suitable for DTCB61N MCB's Miscellaneous Din-T terminals and accessories - refer page 1- 35 E Available on indent only.

90

1 - 12 GST not included 1,,Price..schedule 71',A



e TE.RAMICJ Miniature circuit breakers

Din-T DC series 0.5-63 A 6 kA 'C' curve Li Standard AS/NZS 4898

LI Current rating 0.5-63 amps 1 and 2 pole

Li DC voltage, 220 V 1 pole, 440 V 2 pole

Li AC voltage, 230 V 1 pole, 415 V 2 pole

11 Sealable and lockable handle


Ci Suits CD type chassis

Li Industrial applications

Operation

Din-T DC MCBs are equipped with a permanent magnet which aids arc extinguishing under fault conditions, making this range of MCBs suitable for voltages up to 220 V DC (1 pole) and 440 V DC (2 poles in series). Din-T DC MCBs are also suitable for AC voltages. Polarity labelling must be respected due to permanent magnet in the MCB.

Curve type: C (5 -10 In)

Single pole

In (A) Cat. No. Price $

Double pole


0.5 1 'IbtolitDC105C 100:001 0.5 1 DTCBDC205C, : 210.001

1 1 =DT6BDC10,1C 100.00 / 1 1 DTCBDC2011C , 210.00

2 DTCBDC102C .i 100.00 1 2 DTCBDC202t f 210.00 1

4 DTCEiDC104C- i 100.00 1 4 DTCBDC204C 210.00

6 DTCBDC106C 1

100.00 1 6 DTCBDC206C I 210.001

10 DTCB,DC110C 100.00 1 10 DTCBDC210C :1210.00 I

16 , DTCBDC116C 100.0.0 i 16 DTCBDC216C 210.00

20 DTCBDC120C 100.001 20 DTCBDC220C 1- 210.00/

25 DTCBDC125C . 100.00 25 DTCBDC225C -'; 210.001

32 DTCBDC132C 100.00 i 32 ' DTCBDC232C ', 210.00

40 DTCBDCi 4OC 100.001 40 DTCBDC240C , 210.00

50 DTCBDC150C 100.00 1 50 DTCBDC250C ' 210.00

63 DTCBDC163C , 100.00 63 DTCBDC263C 210.00

Notes: The LINE-side is the OFF or bottom of the MCB, and connects to CD chassis tee-offs. Suitable for the following side mounted accessories:- - AUX/ALM switch - refer page 1-31

- Shunt trip - refer page 1-30 - UVT trip - refer page 1-30 - Din-T terminals and accessories - refer page 1-35

aj Available on indent only.

LPriCe schedule GST not included 1 -13



URg419 Miniature circuit breakers

Din-T1OH series 80-125 A 10 kA 4C' Curve 7.5 kA `13' Curve LI Standard AS/NZS 3947 - 2 [

L Cl Current range 80 - 125 amps 1, 2, 3 and 4 pole

.

LI Module width = 27 mm

DIN rail mounting

Cl Suits CDH hybrid type chassis

Industrial applications

Curve type: C (5 -10 In) Single pole


Double pole


80 DINT10H180t 145.00li 80 -DINT1OH280C 365.00

100 DINT1OH1100C 145.001 100 *DINT10H2100C 365.00

'125 DINT1OH1125C 200.00 125 DINT1OH2125C 415.00

Triple pole Four pole') 80 DINT101-1380C 370.001 80 U DINT10H480C 650.001

100 J:DINT:103109c. 370.001 100 U=.DINTI.OH4i00C.,1 650.001

125 'INT1OH3125C 525-00' 125 N ;p4fitti-4125C;1 780.001

Curve type: D (10 - 20 In) Single pole


Double pole


80 B DINT1OH180D 205.00 80 U DINT1OH280D 390.00

100 [El DINT1OH11006 205.00I 100 U DINT1OH2100D 390.00

125 DINT1OH1125D 235.001 125 U DINT10-12125D- 510.001

Triple pole Four pole 1)

80 DINT1OH380D 555.001 80 B DINT1OH480D 750.001

100 DINT1OH3100D , 555.001 100 DINT1OH4100D 750.001

125 DINT1OH3125D ; 660.00 125 B DINT1OH4125D :1040.001

Notes: The LINE-side is the OFF or bottom of the MCB, and connects to CDH chassis tee-offs. Din-T1OH MCBs do not fit CD chassis with 18mm pole pitch ') All poles include overcurrent and short circuit protection. Suitable for the following side mounted accessories:- - AUX/ALM switch - refer page 1-31

- Shunt trip - refer page 1-30 - Din-T terminals and accessories - refer page 1-35 II Available on indent only.

1 - 14 GST not included I Price scheduleLtl_



TIERAWI Miniature circuit breakers Din-T10 series 6-63 A

10 kA B' curve Standard AS/NZS 4898

Approval No. N17481

Current range 6-63 amps 1, 2, and 3 pole

Sealable and lockable handle

DIN rail mounting


Suits CD type chassis

Resistive load applications

Curve type: B (3 -5 In)

In (A) Cat. No. ') 1 Pole Price $

2 Pole 3 Pole Price $ Price $

6 DTCB10 .-:0613 60.00 0 175 00 I 205.00'

10 DTCB10 10B i 1 so:go 205.00 ' 0 175.00

13 DTCB10 13B - - ' : 60.00 175.00 I 205.00

16 ' DTCB10' ' 16B 60.00 - 11 175.00 205.00

20 ' DTCB19,, 20B - 60.00 El 175.00 : 205.00

25 DTCB10 ^L 2513- ' 0 205.00 I 6090 i 175.00

32 ', DTCB10'_ 32B, : 0 60.00 [2 175.00 0 205.00

40 :,, DTCB10 ,:40B ' 0 20500 7: i 79.00 I 245.00

50 ': DTCB10 50B , M 220.00 M 305.00 I 90.00

63 , . DTCB10 l 63B : i 105.00 1 235.00 i ,340.09,-

Notes: The LINE-side is the OFF or bottom of the MCB, and connects to CD chassis tee-offs. ') Insert No. of poles into cat. No. space marked '-' eg. DTCB10 3 20B = 3 P

Suitable for the following side mounted accessories:- - AUX/ALM switch - refer page 1 - 31

- Shunt trip - refer page 1 - 30 - UVT trip - refer page 1 - 30 - Clip-on RCD module - refer page 1 - 23 - Din-T terminals and accessories - refer page 1 - 35 M Available on indent only.

Price schedule GST not included 1-15



WW1! Miniature circuit breakers Din-T10 series 0.5-63 A

10 kA `CY curve D Standard AS/NZS 48983)

D Approval No. N17481

Li Current range 0.5-63 amps 1, 2, 3 and 4 pole



LI Padlockable in OFF position

D Suits CD type chassis


Curve type: C (5 - 10 In)


2 Pole Price $

3 Pole 4 Pole Price $ Price $ 2)

0.5 DTCB10 2 05C 50.00 155.00 180.00 205.00

1 DTCB16_ 01C ' - 50.00 155.00 180.00 ,205.00 '

2 ' DTCB1 ci _ 02C 50.00 155.00 180.00 205.00

3 DTCB10 2 03C - 50.00 155.00 180.00 205.00

4 - DTCB10 04C ' 50.00 155.00 180.00 205.00

6 ^ - DTCB10 66C 50.00 155.00 180.00 205.00

10 DTCB10 -2 10Q 50.00 155.00. 180.00 ' ..,?o5.00

13 1 DTCB10 13C 50.00 166.00 , 180.00 '205.00

16 oll-cplo __'-i 6C 50.00 155.00 180.00 205.00

20 DTCB10 20C 1 50.00 155.00 180.00 205.00

25 DTCB10 25C -1 50.00 155.00 , 180.00 205.00

32 .. 'DTCB10 _ 32C 50.00 155.00 180.00 205.00 ,

40 'DTCB10 40C 50.00 155.00 180.00 205.00

50 DTCB10 _ 50C ' i 50.00 155.00 180.00 205.00 , !

63 - DTCB1 O't 63C 1, 50.00 155.00 180.00 205.00 :

Notes: The LINE-side is the OFF or bottom of the MCB, and connects to CD chassis tee-offs. ') Insert No. of poles into cat. No. space marked '_' eg. DTCB10 3 20C = 3P 2) All poles include overcurrent and short circuit protection 3) A range of UL standard MCBs is available on indent. (ref: DTCBUL10_ _ _C) Suitable for the following side mounted accessories:- - AUX/ALM switch - refer page 1-31

- Shunt trip - refer page 1-30 - UVT trip - refer page 1-30 - Clip-on RCD module - refer page 1-23 - Din-T terminals and accessories - refer page 1-35

Available on indent only.

1 - 16 GST not included Price schedule 'Ti' r



( TER.A4.1S1 Miniature circuit breakers

Din-T10 series 0.5-63 A 10 kA 'D' curve

Li Standard AS/NZS 4898

U Approval No. N17481

U Current range 0.5-63 amps 1, 2, 3 and 4 pole

D Sealable and lockable handle

U DIN rail mounting


Suits CD type chassis

U Motor starting and transformer applications

Curve type: D (10 - 20 In)


2 Pole 3 Pole 4 Pole Price $ Price $ Price $

2)

0.5 DTCB10 :_ 05D fil 55.00 Li 170.00 II '195.00 205.00

1 DTCB10 OlD 55.00 170.00 a 195.00 205.00

2 DTCB10 020 ' : 55.00 , 170.00 205.00 1 195.00

4 ' DTCB10 04D ' : 55.00 170.00 195.00 : 205.00

6 DTCB10 _1 06D 55.00 170.00 195.00 0 205.00

10 pTcBto 100 5500 , : 170.00 195.00 1_ D 205.00

13 DTC1319 136 55.00 170.00 195.00 i 1 205.00

16 DTCB1 C._ 16D 55.00 --* 170.00 195.00 .

0 205.00

20 DTCB10 _ 20D , 55.00 170.00 . 195.00 D 205.00

25 DTCB10 _ 25D 55.00 170.00 195.00 0 205.00

32 DTCB10 _ 32D 55.00 " : 170.00 195.00 - 0 205.00

40 DTCB10 - 40D 55.00 195.00 235.00 ' 305:00

50 DTCB10 50D ' 5500 , 230.00. 340.00 - 043500 63 ' DTCB10 _ 63D -`,, , 1 55.00 270.00 390.00 1 510.00

Notes: The LINE-side is the OFF or bottom of the MCB, and connects to CD chassis tee-offs. ') Insert No. of poles into cat. No. space marked eg. DTCB10 3 20D = 3P.

2) All poles include overcurrent and short circuit protection. Suitable for the following side mounted accessories:- - AUX/ALM switch - refer page 1-31



rPrice schedalo,31: GST not included 1 - 17



Miniature circuit breakers

Din-T15 series 6-63 A 15 kA, 20 kA, 25 kA, 50 kA 'C' curve

Standard AS/NZS 3947 - 2

L:1 Current rating 6-63 amps 1, 2, 3 and 4 pole


D DIN rail mounting

L.1 Suits CD type chassis

LI Industrial applications


In (A) Cat. No. 1)

1 Pole Price $

2 Pole 3 Po e Price $ Price $

4 Pole Price $ 2)

6 -DTCB15 06C 120.0 340.00 0 395.00 220.00

10 .,DTCB15 10C 120.90 340.00 0 395.00 220.00

13 , DTCB1,5 13C ,:0 120.00 395.00' 220.00 340.00

16 . DTCB15 16C ' 120.00 340.00 0 395.00 1 220.00

20 . DTCB15 _ 20C 120.00 340.00 0 395.00 220.00

25 DTCB15 _ 25C E 120:00 340.00 0 395.00 220.00

32 - 1 DTCB15_ 32C 120.00 ' 340.00 0 395.00 220.00

40 DTCB15 _'40C 120.00 a 220:00 340.00 1 395.00

50 DTCB15 50C 120.00 340.00 0 395.60 220.00

63 '-'2-'DTCB15 -63C - i20.:00 / 34ci.p9 395.00 IN 220.00

Short circuit capacity

In (A) No. poles Voltage (V) Icu (kA) 3)

6-25

132-40 I

I

50-63

1 240 25

2-4 240 50

415 25

1 240 20

2-4-' - .240 40

415 20

1 240 15

2-4 240 30

415 15

Notes: The LINE-side is the OFF or bottom of the MCB, and connects to CD chassis tee-offs. I Insert No. of poles into Cat. No. space marked eg. DTCB15 3 20C = 3P.

2) All poles include overcurrent and short circuit protection. 3) Ics = 50 % Icu. Suitable for the following side mounted accessories:- - AUX/ALM switch - refer page 1-31


Available on indent only. III

1 - 18 GST not included ,

Price sChedule..1111'



TPIMAIII Residual current device

Din-Safe safety switches (RCCB) U Standard AS/NZS 61008

U Approval No. N17482

U Current ratings 40, 63, 80 and 100 amps

Li 2 and 4 pole configuration

U Accepts Din-T side mounting accessories

Li Handle sealable and padlockable

2 pole modules Amp Phase Trip rating Voltage Config. Sens. (mA) Cat. No.

40 240 V 1P+N 30 DSRCD-2-40-3e)

100 0 DSRCD-2-40-10e)

300 111 DSRCD2-40-300 -1

63 240 V 1 P +N 30 DSRCD-2-63-301)

80 240 V 1P+N 30 bSFICD-2-80-301

100 DSR6D-2:80-1001)

300 ii DSRCD-2-80-300

Instantaneous tripping type

Price $

1 180.00

# 225.00

250.00

215.00

1 255.00

295.00

320.00

2 pole modules 40 ms delayed, selective type

300 ,DSRCD-2-63-300-S

2 pole modules High immunity type 40 240 V 1P+N 30 DSRCD-2-40-30-Al

63 240 V 1P+N 30 DSRC.pt2.63-30 7AI

63 240 V 1P+N 100 DSRCD-2-63-100=S

4 pole modules Instantaneous tripping type

215.00

255,00.1

275.00

285:001

40 415 V 3P+N 30 DSRCD-4-40-301 245.00

100 I DSRCD-4-40-100 260.001

300 DSCRD4-40-360 280.001

63 415 V 3P+N 30 ' DSRCD-4-633e) 265.001

100 1 DSRCD-4-63-1001 290.001

80 415 V 3P+N 30 i DSRCD-4-80-30 295.00

100 DSRCD-4-86-1001) 360.001

100 415 V 3P+N 30 DSRCD-4-100-3e) i 415.001

100 , DSRCD-4-100-100 i 420.001

300 DSRCD-4-100-300 420.001

500 ' DSRCD-4-100-500 425.00

4 pole modules High immunity type 40 415 V 3P+N 30

,

DSRCD-4-40-30=Al 265.001

63 415 V 3P+N 30 DSRCD-4-63-30-Al 295.00 4 pole modules 40 ms delayed, selective type

63 415 V 3P+N 100 = DSRCD:4-63-100S 1 340.00

300 0 DSRCD-4-63-300S 1 345.00 1

100 415 V 3P+N 100 ' DSRCD-4-100-100S i 460.00 1

300 ,0 DSRCD-4-100-300S 1 470.001

Notes: Refer next page.

GST not included 1 - 19 I Price,schedule Tad



TgRAsirill Residual current device

Din-Safe safety switches (RCCB)

Connection Details

RCCB 2P

110/240

® ®

NUI

®_®

4P (240/415V)

® ®

gar

GI

RCCB 4P

3P (240/415V)

® [

ILO

1® ®

2P (240V)

0 0 ° 0 ®[ kW

3 5

3".'6';`,,,,Z..7".71.' -,- -, ...

]® 0 0 0

Circuit Diagrams

1/2 3/4

2/1 4/3

Dimensions (mm)

-- 36

®o @

®

72

]® ® ® ®

2/1 4/3 6/5 N

70 44

Notes: ') Insert 'A' at end of catalogue number for type A RCD e.g. DSRCD-2-40-30A. For pricing please contact NHP.


1 - 20



TglgA.KI Residual current device

Din-Safe single pole width residual current circuit breaker (RCBO)

U Standard AS/NZS 61009 10 kA LLI Approval No. N17482 LI One module wide (18 mm) U Short circuit, overcurrent and earth leakage protection LI Short circuit capacity 10 kA U Sensitivity 10 and 30 mA Li Suits CD chassis LI Type 'A' RCD


Short Trip In Modules Voltage circuit sens.

cap. (kA) (mA) (A) (18mm) (AC) Cat. No. 1) 2) Price $

6 1 240 10 30 DSRCBH-06-30A 275.001

10 1 240 10 30 DSRCBH-10-30A 275.001

16 1 240 10 30 DSRCBH-16-30A 275.001 20 1 240 10 30 : DSRCBH-20-30A 275.001 25 1 240 10 30 DSRCBH-25-30A 275.001 32 1 240 10 30 DSRCBH-32-30A

E

275.001 40 1 240 10 30 DSRCBH- 40.30A 275.001

6 1 240 10 10 D DSRCBH-06-10A 320.00,'1

10 1 240 10 10 DSRCBH-10-10A S 320.001 16 1 240 10 10 DSRCBH-16-10A 320.00.1

20 1 240 10 10 DSRCBH-20-10A 1 320.00i 25 1 240 10 10 0 DSRCBH-:251;10A 320.001 32 1 240 10 10 12 DSRCBH-321 OA 320.001 40 1 240 10 10 DSRCBH-40:1 OA 320.00I

Notes: The LINE-side is the OFF or bottom of the MCB, and connects to CD chassis tee-offs. ') Neutral not switched. 2) Will not accept Din-T side mounting accessories.


Dimensions (mm) Connection Diagram N flying lead (black)

LOAD

Neutral bar

Earth bar

L FE flying lead (white)

(Earth reference)

WARNING! Disconnect N&L

and both flying leads before Insulation test

L 240V- (Power supply)

Note: Nuisance tripping may be experienced in VFD and motor starting applications refer NHP.

Pric_e_s_chedute 73' GST not included 1 -21



T Residual current device

Din-Safe MCB (RCBO) D Standard AS/NZS 61009 10 kA J Approval No. N17482 IJJ Voltage rating 110/240 V AC D Interrupting capacity 10 kA U Switched neutral

Din-Safe MCB is a combined MCB/RCD providing overload, short circuit and earth leakage protection in the one integral unit.


In (A)

No. of Voltage Poles (AC)

Trip sens.

Phase (mA) Cat. No. Price $

6 2 110/240 1 P +N 30 DSR61-06-30 205.00

10 2 110/240 1P+N 30 DSRCB-10:301) j ,205.00^

16 2 110/240 1P+N 30 DSRCB-16-301) 205.00

20 2 110/240 1P+N 30 DSRCB-20-30',1) 205.00 ,

25 2 110/240 1P+N 30 DSRCB- 25 -30') 205.00

32 2 110/240 1P+N 30 DSRCB-32-30'1 205.00,

40 2 110/240 1P+N 30 DSRCB-40-301) i 205.00

6 2 110/240 1P+N 10 1 DSRCB-06-10A°2) 225.00

10 2 110/240 1 P +N 10 DSRCB-10-10A 2) ' E. 225.00

16 2 110/240 1P+N 10 DSRCB-1,6-10A 2) ' 225.00

20 2 110/240 1P+N 10 DSRCB-20-,10A,2) 225.00

10 2 110/240 1P+N 100 DSRCB-10-100 1 1. 225.00

16 2 110/240 1P+N 100 DSRCOL16-1001) j 225.00

20 2 110/240 1P+N 100 DSRCBL20-1001) .225.00

Din-Safe MCB with pigtail (RCBO) D Voltage rating 110/240 V AC

U Approval No. N17482 D Interrupting capacity 10 kA

Un-switched neutral

Complete with revised terminal configuration and neutral pigtail, will fit standard Din-T 3 ph chassis.

Curve type: C (5 - 10 In) In No. of Voltage (A) Poles (AC) Phase

Trip sens. (mA) Cat. No. ') Price $

6 2 110/240 1 P +N 30 DSRCB- 06 -30P 225.00

10 2 110/240 1P+N 30 DSRCB-10-30P 225.00

16 2 110/240 1P+N 30 DSRCB-16-30P 225.00

20 2 110/240 1P+N 30 -DSRCB-20-30P , 225.00'1

25 2 110/240 1P+N 30 DSRCB25-30P 225.00,

32 2 110/240 1P+N 30 DSRCB-32-30P 225.00 I

40 2 110/240 1P+N 30 DSRCB-40-30P , 225.00

Notes: ') Insert 'A' at end of catalogue number for type A RCD e.g. DSRCB-20-30A. For pricing please contact NHP.

2) Type A RCD

a Available on indent only.

1 - 22 GST not included Price schedule



0 TIMM Residual current device

Li

Li

Li

CI

Din-Safe-M add-on earth leakage modules Standard AS/NZS 3190

Current ratings 32 and 63 amps

Sensitivity lAn 30, 100 and 300 mA

Suits Din-T6, 10 and 15

Tripping characteristics 0.5 x lAn 1 x 'An 5 x lAn

no tripping t < 300 ms t <40 ms

Din-Safe-M modules to suit Din-T6, 10 and 15

Sensitivity MCB No. of Width mA rating 3) Poles ') Mods.2) Cat. No. Price $

30 32 A 1P+N 2 DSRCM-32-30=1PN - ! 340.00

32 A 3P+N 2 DSRCM-32-30-3PN 1 420.00

100 32 A 1P+N 2 DSRCM-32-100-1PN 360.00

32 A 3P+N 2 DSR-CM-32-100-3PN' 450.00 = ,

300 32 A 1P+N 2 DSRCM-32-300-1PN 405.09

32 A 3P+N 2 DSRCM-32-300-3PN 465 00

30 63 A 1P + N 2 DSRCM-63-30-1PN 430.00

63 A 3P + N 3 DSRCM-63-30-3PN 455.00

63 A 3P 3 DSRCM-63-30-3P 465.00

100 63 A 1P + N 2 1 ' DSRCM-63-100-1PN 450.00

63 A 3P + N 3 , DSRCM-63-100-3PN 490.00

63 A 3P 3 . DSRCM-63-100-3P 505.00

300 63 A 1P + N 2 DSRCM-63-300-1PN , 490.00 '

63 A 3P + N 3 DSRCM-63-300-3PN ; 510.00

Notes: ') 1P+N and 3P+N type supply neutral connected by "pigtail" cable. 2) Dimensions of Din-Safe-M unit only; add MCB width for total installed width. 3) "MCB rating" refers to the max. MCB rating the module can be fitted to.

Not suitable for Din-T1OH MCBs. Available on indent only.

Priceschedule.73'' GST not included 1 - 23



TP.A.§41 Residual current device

Din-Safe-M modules to be combined with Din-T MCBs

Din-Safe-M modules are an earth leakage module only. To complete the functional unit a Din-T6, Din-T10 or Din-T15 MCB must be added as shown.

Din-Safe-M space requirements

Type Without MCB fitted neutral not switched

MCB fitted neutral not switched

MCB fitted neutral switched

1 P + N 32/63 A 2 modules (36 mm) 3 modules (54 mm) 4 modules (72 mm)

3P + N 32 A 2 modules (36 mm) 5 modules (90 mm) 6 modules (108 mm)

3P + N 63 A 3 modules (54 mm) 6 modules (108 mm) 7 modules (126 mm)

3P 63 A 3 modules (54 mm) 6 modules (108 mm) N/A

Operation The combined Din-T MCB/Din-Safe-M earth leakage module has two operating toggles which indicate the reason for the trip action taking place.

LI When an overload or short circuit occurs the Din-T MCB will operate. In this case the Din-Safe-M toggle will remain in the ON position.

If an earth leakage fault occurs both toggles will move to the OFF position. In

order to reset the MCB the Din-Safe-M unit must be reset first.

L In both instances - if the cause of the trip operation has not been rectified, a trip operation will occur as soon as the MCB is turned to the ON position. The trip free mechanism of the MCB ensures that a successful trip operation takes place even when the toggle is held in the ON position.

Assembly D Place the MCB and Din-Safe-M unit on a flat surface. Be sure that both the

MCB and the Din-Safe-M toggles are in the ON position. Li Slide the two units towards each other inserting the connecting bars or links into

the MCB tunnel terminal, ensuring no undue pressure is applied to the metal tripping pin of the Din-Safe-M unit.

Li Push in the connecting clips, locking the unit together.

Li Check that the MCB trips when the toggle on the Din-Safe-M is moved to the OFF position.

D Tighten the busbar connections between the MCB and the Din-Safe-M and fit the insulating cover supplied.

3 If the pigtail and N connections are reversed, the breaker will trip as soon as load is energised. Reset Din-Safe-M module before switching MCB 'ON'.

Li In the case of a three phase 3 wire system (no neutral) use 3 phase models. 3P+N models will operate satisfactorily but test button will only function if neutral pigtail is connected.

1 - 24



T...W.M.K1 Residual current device

Din-Safe-M modules to be combined with Din-T MCBs

Testing The MCB/Din-Safe-M combination must be connected with the line conductors to the LINE side (OFF/Bottom side) of the MCB and the load conductors connected to the Din-Safe-M terminals. The MCB/Din-Safe-M combination must be tested with the supply connected before connecting the load. First switch the Din-Safe-M unit 'ON' then the MCB. When the test button is pressed, both handles should trip. It is recommended that the test button is operated periodically to test the detection and tripping functions of the combined unit.

Li Both 1 P +N and 3P+N models have a neutral pigtail connection. 3P modules have no neutral connection at all.

Din-Safe-M 1P+N with 1 pole MCB Din-Safe-M 1P+N with 2 pole MCB (neutral not switched) switching active and neutral

LOA te k

NEUTRAL

PIGTAIL

00 N L

Din -Safe -M

HEARTH

POLE

MC9

I- I

V

OIT

Din-Safe-M 3P+N with 3 pole MCB (neutral not switched)

LOAD

@OGG N LI L7 LS

®® ® Din-Scle-M

3 Po E

MCB 11

® ® e

Din-Safe-M 3P+N with 4 pole MCB switching active and neutral

LOAD

0000 N IL L7 13

Din-Solc-M

II

a a 4 FOLE

M

a 8

@

eeee

Connection diagram 1 PHASE N L

3 PHASE N L, L, 13

Load

PHASE

I PHASE

I

I

I I

N I, 1, 1, N L

- - 1-

u u

jEARTLI

1 - 25



T RAM Accessories Mounting on the left-hand side

4 x DTAUXAL/G

00 0

a 00 00

1=3

2 x DTAUXAL/G Motor

0 0 Din-T

6

10 15

Note: The above accessories will not fit to Din-Ti OH MCBs. Refer to pages 1 - 30 and 1 - 31 for suitable shunts and auxiliaries.



TITAYYSI Accessories

Din-T 8

10 15

Din-Safe Safety

Switches

Din-Safe MCEls

(Double Pole)

O 0

O 0

O 0

O 0

Mounting on the right-hand side

4 x DTAUXAL/G Shunt UVT

00 00

Motor 2 x DTAUXAL/G

DTPBS

Note: DSRCBH - Single pole RCD/MCB will not accept side mounted accessories. DINTMS - Main switches will accept side mounting auxiliary contacts only.

1 - 27



TE.PAPAK! Accessories Mounting of add-on devices onto

MCBs, RCCBs and RCBOs

Di n-T, DC,

Type/Description 6, 10, 15

DTAUXAL L - R

Signal or AUX contact

DTAUXALG

Signal or AUX contact, gold

DSRCB, Din-T DSRCD 10H all types DSRCM

Change -over

DINTMS switch

R R L - R I L - R

R L - R

DINT1OHHS

Signal or AUX + AUX contact

DTPBS

Panelboard switch

R

DINTSHT

Shunt trip

DTSHT

Shunt trip

DTUVT

Undervoltage trip

DTMD

Motor operator

L = Left mounting

- R

L.-

L

R

R

L - R R

R = Right mounting

1 - 28



Miniature circuit breakers Din-Safe MCBs (RCBO)

El Standard AS/NZS 61009

Approval N17482

Short circuit, overcurrent and earth leakage protection 13 Handle sealable and padlockable

El DIN Rail mounting

Din-Safe MCB with pigtail

No of Poles

Amp rating (A)

Voltage (V)

Short circuit (kA)

Trip Sens.

Phase ') (mA) Cat. No

2 6 110/240 10 1+N 30 rjAiaairtli); 2 10 110/240 10 1+N 30 k:'15'Sfi6.B:ii.)3,44,i,,

2 16 110/240 10 1+N 30 -4-SRC61630P;3,--,14

2 20 110/240 10 1+N 30 t-4 2 25 110/240 10 1+N 30 .;gkei25310'01 2 32 110/240 10 1+N 30

2 40 110/240 10 1+N 30 °OSRC84'd30P s," Din-Safe MCB standard terminal configuration

Amp Short Trip No of rating Voltage circuit Sens.

Poles (A) (V) (kA) Phase ') (mA) Cat. No ')

2 6 110/240 10 1+N 10 F!6Sge60:60A;

2 6 110/240 10 1+N 30 :,,pDSRC7R0630

2 10 110/240 10. 1+N 10 ASRPB.10.1X,,,,,

2 10 110/240 10 1+N 30 '.1DSR631030!

2 10 110/240 10 141 100 p-- r....,r..., . ,' ..,

YrDSR6B1p1Or

2 16 110/240 10 1+N 10 lisitilail*. 2 16 110/240 10 1+N 30 iski160,k,

2 16 110/240 10 1+N 100 4DiriOA6W, Wtt

2 20 110/240 10 1+N 10 . 40 ,. ',3£' ,,.4i si, ''."

2,DSBC8201011

2 20 110/240 10 1+N 30 ..216S16.2..0i0..741

2 20 110/240 10 1+N 100 ..11,7DSifEB2D100'

2 25 110/240 10 1+N 30 plDSREB2530 A

2 32 110/240 10 1+N 30 L-A/S103"2:370:-

2 40 110/240 10 1+N 30

.,- 5bAtB4D3b .

Application Din-Safe MCB is a combined MCB/RCD proViding thermal overload, short circuit and earth leakage protection in the one integral unit.

Din-Safe MCBs are suitable for use in residential, commercial and light industrial applications.

Terminal configuration

PIGTAIL

(LOAD) NEUTRA

NEUTRAL

(LOAD) L

0 0 N

01,1= ACTIVE (g'

NEUTRAL ACTIVE (LOAD) (LOAD)

0 na Li N

0 0 NEUTRAL ACTIVE

UN[) (l NE)

DIN-Safe NCB with neutral pigtail

suits standard 3 phase chassis

DIN-Safe MCB

standard terminal configuration

Characteristics El Width: 2 modules.

El For type AC residual currents.

E3 Rated voltage: 110/240 V/50-60 Hz.

El Tripping characteristics of MCB part:

IEC 60848 - C curve.

El Short circuit capacity: 10 kA.

El Terminal capacity: 25 mrn2.

El High immunity to transient current.

El Profile as per Din-T MCB.

El Test button for periodic testing.

Notes: ') Unprotected neutral, not switched. ') Unprotected neutral, switched. ') Fits Din-T chassis (special configuration)

refer page TBA. 1 Some type mir RCDs are stocked. Refer NHP.

Nuisance tripping may be experienced in VFD

and motor starting applications refer NHP.




TER SA Innovators In l'rorertIon Aschnnlog,

Din-T MCBs + RCDs Technical data

What is an RCD?

The RCD (Residual Current Device) is a device intended to protect people against indirect contact, the exposed conductive parts of the installation being connected to an appropriate earth electrode. it may be used to provide protection against fire hazards due to a persistent earth fault current, without operation of the overcurrent protective device.

RCDs having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30 mA are also used as a means for additional protection in case

of failure of the protective means against electric shock (direct contact).

Working Principle

The main components of an RCD are the following:

The core transformer: which detects the earth fault current.

The relay: when an earth fault current is detected, the relay

reacts by tripping and opening the contacts.

El The mechanism: element to open and close the contacts

either manually or automatically.

LSI The contacts: to open or close the main circuit.

The RCD constantly monitors the vectorial sum of.the current passing through all the conductors. In normal conditions the vectorial sum is zero (I142-0) but in case of an earth fault, the vectorial sum differs from zero (I1+I2-Id), this causes

the actuation of the relay and therefore the release of the main contacts.

Test resistor -

Secbridary windin0

Test -button

MRS r.61

-Contacts

Tripping rneripcl.a oil n gism

transformer and primary winding.

Definitions related to RCDs

RCCB = Residual Current Circuit Breaker without overcurrent protection.

RCBO = Residual Current Circuit Breaker with overcurrent protection.

Breaking capacity

A value of AC component of a prospective current that an RCCB

is capable of breaking at a stated voltage under prescribed conditions of use and behaviour.

Residual making and breaking capacity (IAm)

A value of the AC component of a residual prospective current which an RCCB can make, carry for its opening time and break under specified conditions of use and behaviour.

Conditional residual short-circuit current (lAc) A value of the AC component of a prospective current which an RCCB protected by a suitable SCPD (short-circuit protective device) in series, can withstand, under specific conditions of use and behaviour.

Conditional short-circuit current (Inc) A value of the AC component of a residual prospective current which an RCCB protected by a suitable SCPD in series, can withstand, under specific conditions of use and

behaviour.

Residual short-circuit withstand current

Maximum value of the residual current for which the operation of the RCCB is ensured under specified conditions, and above which the device can undergo irreversible alterations.

Prospective current

The current that would flow in the circuit, if each main

current path of the RCCB and the overcurrent protective device (if any) were replaced by a conductor of negligible impedance.

Making capacity

A value of AC component of a prospective current thatan RCCB is capable to make at a stated voltage under prescribed conditions of use and behaviour.

Open position

The position in which the predetermined clearance between open contacts in the main circuit of the RCCB is secured.

Closed position

The position in which the predetermined continuity of the main circuit of the RCCB is secured.

Tripping time The time which elapses between the instant when the residual operating current is suddenly attained and the instant of arc extinction in all poles.

Residual current (I.An)

Vector sum of the instantaneous values of the current flowing in the main circuit of the RCCB.

Residual operating current

Value of residual current which causes the RCCB to operate under specified conditions.

Rated short-circuit capacity (Icn) Is the value of the ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity assigned to the circuit breaker. (Only applicable to RCBO)

Conventional non-tripping current (Int) A specified value of current which the circuit breaker is capable of carrying fora specified time without tripping. (Only applicable to RCBO)

Conventional tripping current (It) A specified value of current which causes the circuit breaker to trip within a specified time. (Only applicable to RCBO)



TE ASAK11 Inrroovemr3 in Prunwient 7i,iumfo

Din-T MCBs + RCDs Technical data

Tripping current as a function of the frequency All RCDs are designed to work at frequencies of 50-60 Hz, therefore to work at different values, we must consider the variation of the tripping sensitivity according to the tables below. It should be taken into consideration that there is a no tripping risk when pushing

the test-button, due to the fact that such action is made by means of an internal resistor with a fixed value.

RCBO DSRCB ')

ftWA0 toyoz: foflizj. 5 26-641i,

30 mA 0.62 0.65 0.80 0.91 1.24 1.55 1.88

100, mA 0.74 0.71 0.80 0.95 1.16 1.38 1.59

300 mA 0.80 0.74 0.80 0.97 1.19 1.44 1.64

500 mA 1.10 0.81 0.80 0.89 1.18 1.38 1.68

ffi.W44.4: 30 mA 8.17 3.13 0.75 1.70 3.10 3.52 3.67

100 mA 6.81

6.20

4.34

2.71

2.16

0.75

0.75

1.43

0.49

2.35

0.87

2.58

0.74

0.62

2.71

300 mA 0.95

500 mA 1.53 0.75 0.39 0.59 0.64

Notes: ') The standard NHP/Terasaki type is the "type AC" in Australia, Type "A" in New Zealand.

1 The standard NHP/Terasaki DSRCBH single pole RCBO is "type A" in Australia and New Zealand.

The numbers in the table above are multipliers, e.g. A "DSRCD" at 50 hz has an 0.8 multiplier. Therefore a 30 mA, "type AC" RED will trip at (0.8 x 30 mA) 24 mA.

Power losses The power losses are calculated by means of measuring the voltage drop between the incoming and the outgoing terminal of the device at rated current. Power loss per pole;

RCBO-DinSafe MCB DSRCB

FTATAJ177:-, 1

125 53 16.5 11.9 9,8 7.1 5.6 4.7 3.6

2.0 1.9 1.6 2.0 2.5 2.8 3.5 4.8 5.8



TERASAK11 Imrovahsr, In.Praterdoll Tiehriologr

Din-T MCBs + RCDs Technical data Overview Din-Safe RCDs

Device type definition

Rating/description Cat. No.

KUSU

., , .

DSRCB

Standards ITC 61009-1

Magnetic tripping characteristics C

Residual tripping characteristic ') AC, A

Tripping time at Inn Instantaneous ms .300

Selective no

Rated current A 4, 6, 10. 13, 16. 20, 25, 32. 40

Rated residual current [An mA 10, 30

Calibration temperature C 10

Number of poles versus modules 1

Rated voltage Un 2 P AC V 110. 240 (1 2.6)

3 P AC V

4 P AC V

Frequency Itz 50/60

Maximum service voltage Ubmax V 255

Minimum service voltage Ubmin V 100

Power supply Top/Bottom

Selectivity class 3

Rated making and breaking capacity (Im) A -

7500 Residual nsakingand breaking capacity (lAm) A

Conditional short-circuit capacity (Inc) A .

Conditional residual short-circuit capacity (IAc) A .

Short,circuit capacity (Ice) A 10000

Grid distance (safety distance between two devices) nrnr 35

Isolator application Yes

Insulation degree Insulation voltage V (DC) 500

Shock'voltage (1.2/50 ms) ky 6

Insulation resistance (mOhm) 1000

Dielectric strength V 2500

Shock resistance (in x, y, z directionMEC 60077/16.3) 40 g, 18 shocks 5 ms

Vibration resistance (in x, y. z direction: IEC 60068-2-6) 1.5 9. 30 min, 0...80 rlz

Endurance electrical at Uri, In 10000

mechanical at Un. In 20000

Protection degree (outside/inside electrical enclosure) IP 20 / IP 40

Self-extinguish degree (accerding to UL 94) 02

Tropmalisation (according to MC 60068-2, DIN 40046) *URN .55/95 V.

Pollution degree (acc. TEC 60947.1) 1

Operating temperature °C -25...60

Storage temperature °C -5..+70

Terminals capacity Rigid cable min/max (Top) nine 1/25

Flexible table min/max (Top) mmr 1/16

Rigid cable min/max (bottom) mrn' 1/35

flexible cable min'/max (bottom) mil

(flexible cable 075/1/1.5 mm' with cable lug)

1/25

Torque Top/Bottom Nm 3/4

Add-on devices (side add,.on) Auxiliary contacts Yes

1191 yes

Shunt trip yes

Motor operator yes

Panelboard switch Bottom

Busbam-systems Pin Bottom

Fork yes

Accessories

Oimensions, weights, 0 Poles 1.14

packaging (11x0xW) 86068011 nun 36

weight/unit g

Package/unit

250

1/6

Note: ') gee, catalogue section for types.

Making SUre that Ill and both flying leads are disconnected.




3 Fuses

NHP - 63amp 63ms Fuse

SUPPLIED BY: NHP ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRODUCTS Pty. Ltd. 16 Riverview Place, Murarrie 4172, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (07) 3909 4999 FAX: (07) 3399 9712




L_

0 SS

"t..-" - =. ,. - ..

- y

- - - -

Ai 4,....-

bs:.-. -!...2i, 1......,774.f....;:::--- ..._...e.,,- Ni 4:74:2,.....L.:±e=1-7

. -=.1..::z.::: / -....-

--I

....r..4. _ i....,, ..> ... . e - -- - : -.::- -r--: - 1

\ " - -.--'4. ' - '' ra 7-7. -'- -..., . .....'-.7°S_,"."- 1&g;,,,-...;--,... - 7 - ' - - .,..-7,:._:,_-,; - . - -: f- --'."- - 1."-

,- re. ree ..1. 6.-- -_,_ .r.--V..- 1-4 . r

_ -'..7.1141Z1,_2-1.2:7,-

....71'..-.7 e ....

:. ,... ,,,,...,...

.--.----.,

-

-

-- : '71.0nE

0



Contents Page

Performance Data & Application Notes 2/2

List Numbers and Dimensions 2/3

Motor Circuit Protection 2/4

Characteristics 2/5

Performance Data A.C. performance

The standard ratings are ASTA 20 certified at 80kA, 440 Volt* to BS 88:Part 1

or Part 6:1988. SS types are certified at 16.5kA, 240 Volt, and the NS32M40, ES63M80 and XS125 at 80kA, 415 Volt.

Protection of PVC insulated cables

Standard 'gG' ratings of 'SAFECLIP' fuse

links provide complete protection to PVC

insulated cables when applied in

accordance with rule 433.02 of 16th

Edition, IEE Wiring Regulations (ie. when their current ratings are equal to, or less

than, those of the cables).

Discrimination

'SAFECLIP' fuse links will discriminate with each other at fault levels up to their rated a.c. performance when the ratio between 'major' and 'minor' current ratings is 2:1 (See Application Notes).

Protection against electric shock

The values of maximum earth loop impedance (4) given in Table 41D(o) of 16th Edition, IEE Wiring Regulations are applicable to circuits protected by

'SAFECLIP' fuse links, to give good protection against electric shock in fixed installations.

Energy conservation All 'SAFECLIP' fuse links have low power loss values, well within the limits specified in BS 88:1988.

Motor starting ability All 'SAFECLIP' fuse links are suitable for use in motor circuits and have superior motor starting. ability (See page 2/4).

Approvals Manufactured to BS 5750:Part 1:1987, 'Quality systems : design/development, production, installation and servicing', and approved by leading independent authorities.

'SAFECLIP' Compact fuse links to BS 88:Parts] or 6:198r for use in 'SAFECLIP' fuse holders and fuse switches

Application Notes Short circuit energy limitation and discrimination The designers of electrical equipment such

as switches and contactors have to prove their products under the worst possible

conditions (ie. at maximum breaking capacity, at 110% rated voltage, very low

Power factor, and with faults initiated at the most onerous points on the voltage wove), ana they require relevant data from the fuse lin manufacturer. This is given in

the cut-orCurrent characteristics and I2t

Values on pages 2/5, 2/6 and 2/7. However, in service the short circuit fault conditions are usually less exacting than

those produced in proving tests. In

particular, the circuits ore usually three-phose with relatively high power factor. In practice, therefore, the Pt values

of 'SAFECLIP' fuse links are significantly less than those tabulated and they will discriminate with each other if the ratio between 'major' and 'minor' fuse links in

series is 2:1. Where 'SAFECLIP' fuse links

are used as the minor rating in series with

a 'RED SPOT' range fuse link as the major rating then discrimination at 415 /240 Volt

will generally be achieved with a ratio of 1.6:1.



Applications

Equipment Refer to Fuse link type Publication accommodated in equipment number for details SS NS ES XS OS

'SAFECLIP' HRC Fuse holders and Fuse banks IEF/402 'SAFECLIP' Distribution Fuse boards IEF/403 'SAFECLIP' Fuse Combination Units - Type MSS IEF/498 'SAFECLIP' Wall Mounting Fuse Combination Units - Type WMS IEF/503 ;

'SAFECLIP' Panel boards IEF/450 Type MST100 Fuse switch IEF/404 Type WM1003N Wall Mounting Fuse Switch IEF/503

List Numbers and Dimensions

D

A

E ti

KI

A

G

Figure 1 Figure 2

I t --r F

1E

list number prefix

SS

NS

ES

XS t

OS

Current rating

Amp

Figure number

Dimensions in millimetres

A B D max max max

E F N

2*, 4*, 6, 10, 16, 20 1 25 14.5 51 11 0.8 3.6 2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 32M40* 1 35.5 14.5 62 11 0.8 3.6 40, 50, 63, 63M80* I 39 17.5 69 15 1.25 3.6 20*, 32*, 63*, 80*, 100*, 125* 1 39 26.4 80 19 1.6 3.6

A BD E F G H K

80*, 100*, 100M125* 2 58 26.4 90.5 12.7 1.2 73 5.2 27.8 These types are ASTA Certified to 8S 88:Port 1: 1988

t Intermediate and minor rating are also available down to 2 Amp.



Motor Circuit Protection Select HRC fuse links to protect 3-phase motor circuits as follows: 1) Obtain motor full load current from

Table I .

2) The following motor starting conditions are assumed:

Direct -On -Line:

Up to 1 kW: 5 x FLC for 5 secs.

1.1 to 7.5 kW: 6 x FIC for 10 secs.

7.6 to 55 kW: 7 x FIC for 10 secs.

Assisted Start:

Up to 1 kW: 2.5 x FIC for 20 secs.

Greater than 1 kW: 3.5 x FLC for

20 secs.

3) Choose the recommended fuse link for the motor FLC and starting condition from Table 2 (DOL start) or Table 3

(assisted start).

4) Ensure voltage rating of fuse link is

adequate for the application (See page 2/2).

The recommended fuse link ratings apply for up to 8 starts per hour under stated

starting conditions. They may need to be

adjusted if any of the following conditions occur singly or in combination:

a) Starting currents in excess of assumed values.

b) Longer starting times than those stated.

c) Large number of starts per operating cycle.

d) High enclosure temperature.

Table 1 Full load currents of typical 3-phase induction motors at voltages shown

Motor rating

kW HP 220

0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1

1.5

2.2 3

4

5.5 7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30 37 45 55

0.5 0.75 1

1.5

2

3

4

5.5 7.5

10

15

20 25 30 40 50 60 75

2.0 2.7 3.9 4.7 6.5 9.3

12

15.4

20.7 28

39.1

52.8 66 77

103

Voltage

380 415 440

1.15 1.05 1.0

1.6 1.5 1.4

2.3 2.0 1.9

2.8 2.5 2.4

3.8 3.5 3.3 5.4 5.0 4.7 7.1 6.5 6.1

9.0 8.4 7.9 11.9 11 10.3

16.1 14.4 14

231 21 19.8

30'5 28 26.4 3r 35 33

45 41 39 60 55 52 75 69 65 87 80 75

107 98 92

Table 2 Direct-on-line starting

Motor FLC Fuse Current Rating

Amp From to Amp

Fuse Type

0 0.7 0.8 1.4

1.5 2.0 2.1 3.0 3.1 6.1

6.2 9.0 9.1 11

11.1 14.4 14.5 18

18.1 22 22.1 28 28.1 38 38.1 53 53.1 72 28.1 45 45.1 58 58.1 80

2

4

6

10

16

20 25

32

40' 50 ES3

63

802

100 XS

125

80 100 05

100M125

NS3

1) NS32M40 is alternative fuse type if FLC does not exceed 32 Amp & voltage is

415 Volt or less. 2) ES63M80 is olternative fuse type at 415

Volt or less. 3) XS fuse links are also available in-minor

ratings below 80 Amp.

Table 3 Assisted starting (star/delta, etc.) *

Motor FLC Fuse Current Rating

Amp From to

0 1.4

1.5 2.1

2.2 3.1

3.2 5.5 5.6 10

10.1 14

14.1 18

18.1 22

22.1 32

32.1 40 40.1 51

51.1 80 80.1 100

100.1 125

Amp

2

4

10

16

20 25 32

401

50 63 802

100 125

Fuse Type

N53

ES3

OS or XS

XS

* The assisted starting recommendations apply for ambient temperatures up to 35°C. At hyher temperatures, some ratings may nee to be deroted. Consult GEC ALSTHOM Low Voltage , Equipment Limited for further information'



Characteristics 'SAFECUP'

Type SS

Time/Current Characteristics 6.20 Amp

'SAFECUP'

Type SS

Cut-off Current Characteristics 6-20 Amp

20000

10.000

1.000

100

01

001

0005

z

LL

0

01

IIIIIIISIIIIE1111111281=11111111C1 i011101 ====. IIMEMMENIMMI

=MIM.../111=1. W=IMM.... =Win

1111111111111111111111111111 mamas =mvxmo=13

W1111111111111111V1M1111111111111=11MIIIIIM EMI= M

=nM

:WM= wineasamimmimmusitrai. waling 111

111111WallitlilliN11111111111 iill IIIMINIIMI Aimminismat-aimmusavarnami IMMIWIESIMINIIMMIIMINEMIIIIMMI=1=111111

1111.111.1111115.11111fablifilliriaMillinin

1111101111111111111111111111111111111MIMMI1111111118111.

MililalliMINME10 =. NIMMOINIMINLOMMIM=ElgelirtTell IMMIl%Sala MEWS IhinialmallEMMINIUMINCIANN rn ==":".7====:=1::====

10 100

RMS SYMMETRICAL PROSPECTIVE CURRENT IN AMPERES

1.000

II ./d011111 IMMIIM1MIIP%aMi al murr..--amralm 10 =way

MIIIIII.Pr..1111111PilltilM=MMII =WM IIIIMIIMMIIIIMR1111=1/1111111111%1 6 ME= IIIIMMIIMIMIIIMMINUJIPP" rinHlll _.III 111111

WA111111111§101111111111111101 PA! it

20 16

10 to

PROSPECTIVE CURRENT kA (RmS SYMMETRICALI

100



'SAFECLIP'

Types NS, ES & X5

Time/Current Characteristics 2125 Amp

'---. 10.000 - - - 111111181111111111111111111111=111111111=10111101MMINI

I 1 11 al I ! I : I f I

. 1 I I

' t 1

I I I i I 1 I

111111111111WIRIMEN i

imarimic mu. 111111111111111111111M1111

IIIIMITEILIIIIIIIIIMUNIMMI 1125

. OPP' ' ; , 1

.0

...._...._ i 00 ____.. .,..=.........-_.....,.......w.....n........---..=;.....-

,011iOfM1IlIlMlIIlIr.!.'!/1llII!t MM. ........_

MOI1/4411MMIlIWZMIIMUILAIMINE' ......"War...

MIIMININIMM1111111MSENV111MMINHIZI/ 80 i

, I

..aillialagillairdareiralarirridW ! ! 1 - 63 1 1 I I

........---:.............-....................-....=.- -AnMa7r;.:i"Zai:Z:&srsvaZra"MraroWr- minimpermiummosimisminumoulsme.sdailissi..- 1111EM111111111111111111M1111111111111111111111111MMINIIPP'"

Ingaillinin

A ---m-7..--=- liall....-

50

16 - 10 -7---- 6

4

.40 WIWI

lialilWirnater ' 111111111MIIIINNIEN I il 32

'7"7-'==11101111M ilEt .m.::::::4M-= 11Milit1IMINSIIIIIIIIINIONIII111111=MMILVIIIIMICIIIIMMINSW:walML IMMUMMMIMMOMMENIMMOLIMOLIIMMUIDMIMMUMUNIMMUMEMINAMINI IEWEINSURIMMariiinaWkirainarallMiliniiiniiiii/MAMMEMMU 111WINIMIMILHEIMPAWINIMIUG1111

W.= =IBM .-.7.. ..... 25 113111.fmell1111

1111 1

======.-..,-........-. ,...........wor.,Bg.=..t'r..e7rnr:=....o.....=".=......Z. =4.4.4.4111worommuomaiemaisumatamiesuavamnimmowtozasammErm MUMILIMMININNEMMILIMISEMMIRIMMIMORIMAMINaggi -.......7-...=.................7.....-.-.................

NIMINUNI11111111111011101111111MIERVIIIIMMIIIMNIIIIMINIIIII 0 m 11111111111113SEUE111M11111101111111 ;

i 1 I

0-005

'SAFECUP'

Types N5, ES & XS

Cut-off Current Characteristics 2125 Amp

100

10

yo

10 100


10.000

MINIMIIIMIIII 11111M1111111

INIM1111=111111MIIIIIMINSIO1 INUMMUMMIIIMIMIIIMMIMMIN MIMI ! 1

I I

!

1 I

IIIIIIMMIIMIIIMIUMAIMIIIP

I

d1101

125 100

80 mmmuawamsitssmmw--IswP^-...dmr-..oa wimosominmemtiNUPimsratiffiwo! 63

cr, INIIIMMOMPIIIIIIINMENWMIIIIII0.1111110-..del ,," NIIMMISIIIIIIIMIIMPIIIIPP-dlIMOPP- 25 IIIMIMIWIP.-.

1111110.P.OP.

-tea:.

,, .,

Mdl

20

16 I IFW.e.SMOSIM iir,----...,i0 ._.........., ............,.......... MI .AMAIENP/U11101MINNIPP--.1111

i1

MMIUM1121

4 WrIntPria.11.1111.111/nPlialMnrdilli FAMIMMIMIIIIIIIIIIIIIIMMAS11111111%11111UI All Oral

4E110111111MillffrallMill

w'' 1111111 PrllIPP' I

I

1

1 i

10 10

PROSPECTIVE CURRENT kA IRMS SYMMETRICAL)

100 500

100.000



'SAFECUP' Types NS, ES & XS Current

I2t Values* Rating

Amp

Pre-Arcing /211.

(A2 Sec)

Total I2t (A2 Sec)

2 1.5 16

4 7.0 75

6 22 200

10 90 440 16 300 1300

20 520 2200 25 900 3000 32 1100 4000 40 2400 12000 50 3200 15000 63 5400 25000 80 8000 45000

100 15000 68000 125 32000 145000

Type OS

Time/Current Characteristics 80-125 Amp

atunimmodiallhommualsio: IIIIIMMIIM111111111111111111111111111111111

1111111111111111111111111111

Iminesemimies=somism

In1111111111111111 ...T.Z1======== mauls awn umemmEmmtainimus 11111111111LINIIIMIIIIIINNINI

114111111111111MOR

11111111/1111

111111111111111litll...1111

........___41MIN MINIUMMINIIIIMMILIISIMMININ111111MIMMININ

111111111111111111711111111

11111111111111111111

100M 25


Type 05 Cut-off Current Characteristics 80-125 Amp

100

100M125 100

80 Imusumomil IIIIM/111111111%1115011 BMW IIMMEMOMINMEMAIMPPMINWIIMMOINNOMMIN

NIMINIMMIUMKEPPMIIPP" "."..11111111M 111111111111MIPP"-Adr"-IIIMIIIINIMIIIIIIIIIIM101111111111

Type OS

I2t Values*

1-0 10

PROSPECTIVE CURRENT kA RMS SYMMETRICAL/

TOO

Current Rating

Amp

Pre-Arcing 12,

(A2 Sec)

Total I2t (A2 sec)

12, values at 440 Volt when tested under 8588 conditions. XS125 at 415 Volt.

80 14000 40000

100 17000 60000

100M125 32000 128000




4 Relays

CRITEC - DAR-275V - Surge Diverter Alarm Relay

SUPPLIED BY: ERICO 6 Chilvers Road, Thornleigh 2120, New South Wales AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (02) 9479 8500 FAX: (02) 9484 9188

CROMPTON INSTRUMENTS - 252-PSGW - Station Mains Phase Failure Relay

SUPPLIED BY: CROMPTON INSTRUMENTS 31 Brennan Street, Bellbird Park 4300, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (07) 3818 6493 FAX: (07) 3818 6659

FINDER - 38.51 24VDC - Pump Manual Run Relay

SPRECHER & SCHUH - CS7C - 40E24V - All Pumps Stop Relay c/w - CS7-PV-20


PHONE: (07) 3909 4999 FAX: (07) 3399 9712

MULTITRODE - MRTA-5 - Level Relays

MULTITRODE - 0.2/1-'x' - Single Point Probes

SUPPLIED BY: MULTITRODE Pty. Ltd. 130 Kingston Road, Underwood 4119, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (07) 3808 4011 FAX: (07) 3808 0011




0111, DA

DIN Decoupling Inductor/ DINLINE Alarm Relay & Surge Counter

Decoupling inductors are installed between spark gap and MOV protection devices to help ensure correct coordination. As the decoupling inductors are installed in series with the load, two units are available, a compact unit for circuits up to 35A and a larger unit for 63A circuits.

The DAR (DINLINE Alarm Relay) can be connected to TDF units to provide potential free change-over alarm contacts. The TDS SC (Surge Counter) unit is

designed to provide visual indication of the number of surges registered. It uses a current `sansformer through which the ground conductor :onnecting to one, or all, of the surge protection nodules is fed. Current diverted by the operation of the surge module, which exceeds a 300A trip threshold, will be registered on the counter.

Asia/Australia Europe

Latin America

Use for decoupling of spark gaps and MOVs - allowS correct' coordination of different SPD technologies

35 mm2tunnel terminals -accepts large cable size

63A model features top and bottom terminals - flexible installation

The DINLINE Alarm Relay (DAR) is used with TDF products where alarm contacts are required for remote signaling

The Tps-SC Surge Counter provides a norresettable record of the number of surges diverted

DDI 35

DDI 63

DDI 63

Model DDI 35 DDI 63 DAR275V TDS SC

1701250 Item Number for Europe 700465 700475 700900 Nominal Voltage Un 20- 110V - - -, 100-240V- - System Compatibility(1) TN C, TN -S, TN-C-S & TT

Max. Cont. Operating Voltage tic 500V- 200V--- 275V Stand-off Voltage 275V Operating Current @ Un 20mA -

Frequency 0 to 60Hz -

Max. Line Current I, 35A @ 40°C 63A @ 40°C Temperature Increase 45° C @ max line current (Id

Inductance 7.5pH 4.5m0

15pH

1.71n0 - Resistance

Technology CT - trip threshold 300A 8/20ps Red/Green LEDs

Change-over contact' Maximum count 9999 Non-resettable

Status

Dimensions 2 M. 90 mm x 68 mm x 36 mm

(3.5" x 2.6" x 1.4") approx. 4 M. 90 mm x 68 mm x 72 mm

(3.5" x 2.6" x 2.8") approx.

2 M.

90 mm x 68 mm x 36 mm

(3.5" x 2.6" x 1.4") (excluding CT)

Weight 0.45 kg (1 Ib) approx. 1 kg (2.2 Ib) approx. 0.2 kg (0.44 Ib)

Enclosure DIN 43 880, UL94V-0 thermoplastic, IP 20 (NEMA 1)

Connection 535 mm' (#2AWG) solid 525 mm' (#4AWG) stranded

1 mm' to 6 mmi(#18AWG to #10)

Mounting 35 mm top hat DIN rail

Back-up Overcurrent Protection 35A l 63A I -

Temperature -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F) -35°C to +55°C (-311 to +131°F) Humidity 0% to 90% Approvals CE CSA22.2

C -Tick, AS 3260, CE

-

(1) Form C = Change-over contact (Form C dry contact), 400V-/3A 1 mm' to 6 mm' (#18AWG to #10AWG) connecting wire

40 www.erico.com



`.1-.7;i:ire, Alt

Application

The Crompton Protector Phase Balance module provides

continuous surveillance of a 3 phase, 3 or 4 wire system and protects against:-

Phase Loss Phase Reversal Sequence Phase Unbalance

System Under Voltage

The protector de-energizes a relay should any one of the

above faults occur. It is fitted with an adjustable time delay to eliminate premature operation on short duration supply fluctuations.

A red LED indicates that the supply is within limits and that the output relay is energized. N.B. the relay will not energize if the supply is connected in the wrong sequence.

The phase unbalance feature protects motors of any size, from full load to no-load for

Excessive temperature rise due to unbalanced supplies (e.g. a 10% unbalanced supply can increase the temperature rise by 150%) The regener,ated voltage generated during a single phase failure when running at low load.

Principle of operation

The Protector comprises monitoring circuits for voltage phase reversal and phase unbalance. Outputs from these circuits are fed to a comparator which changes state under fault conditions.

When the comparator switches, the output relay will de- energize after a preset time delay and the red LED will also de-energize in series.

The relay and LED will automatically energize again when all the supply parameters have returned to safe and acceptable limits

Protector Trip elay

Phase Balance Relay

Phase loss and unbalanced Phase loss, unbalanced and undervoltage

Product Code

252-PSF

252-PSG

Specification This model is U.R. and C.U.R approved.

System Frequency: Nominal Voltage :

Burden: Voltage Withstand:

Set Points Unbalance: Time Delay:

Under Voltage: (Type 252-PSG only)

Weight: Output Relay Type: Rating a.c.:

d.c.: Operations: Reset:

3 phase, 3 or 4 wire 50 of 60Hz 100, 110, 120, 220, 230,.240, 380, 400, 415 & 440V 3VA 1.2 x continuously 1.5 x for 10 x 10 seconds

Adjustable 5% to 15% Up to 10 seconds adjustable (not operative if voltage falls below 70% of the nominal voltage or set point on type 252-PSG)

Internally preset at 15% of nominal voltage (other values between 10% and 30% available on request) Approximately - 0.3 kg

DP changeover 240V, 5A non-inductive 24V, 5A resistive 0.2 million at the above load Automatic

Connection Diagram Relay

Contact Set 2 Contact Set 1

14 11 12 PROTECTOR

21 024

L1 L2

22 21 24 to

%Unbal 5/ 15

'SET

5

Seconds 0/ '10

DELAY L3

Input

252-PSF & 252-PSG



J & P Richardson Industries Pry Lid

5 Soft Starter

EMOTRON - MSF 2.0 - Pump Soft Starter c/w 01-2138-00 - Remote Keypad Mounting Kit

SUPPLIED BY: SIEMENS 153 Campbell Street , Bowen Hills 4006, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (07) 3332 8300 FAX: (07) 3332 8301




Valid for the following Soft starter Models: MSF-017 to MSF-I400

MSF SOFT STARTER

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Document number: 01- 1363 -01 Edition: r3

Date of release: 2003-02--03 10 Copyright Emotion AB 2000 Emotron retain the right to change speci6cations and illustrations in the text, without prior notification. The contents of this document may not be copied without the explicit permission of Emotron AB,



3. HOW TO GET STARTED

II 11113 l Fj f 111V511

11 12 1.3 r.

R7.7.21 11: ,,41:1 5970

11 13 13 ;4 15 10 17 19 13 ,11 IG

03-F17

1."&. 6 Standard wiring.

This chapter describes briefly the set-up For basic soft start and soft stop by using the default "Voltage Ramp" function.

WARNING! Mounting, wiring and setting the device into operation must be carried out by properly trained personnel. Before set-up, make sure that the Installation is according to chapter 6. page 24 and the Checklist below.

3.1 Checklist Mount the soft starter in accordance with chapter 6. page 24. Consider the power loss at rated current when dimensioning a cabinet, rnax ambient temperature is 40 °C (see chapter 12. page 74). Connect the motor circuit. according to Fig. 6. Connect the protective earth. Connect the control voltage to terminals 01 and 02 (100 - 240 VAC or 380-500 VAC). Connect relay KI (PCB terminals 21 and 22) to the contactor - the soft starter then controls the contactor. Connect PCB terminals 12 and 13 to, e.g., a 2-way switch (closing non-return) or a PLC, etc., to obtain control of soft start/soft stop.') Check that the motor and supply voltage corresponds to values on the soft starter's rating plate. Ensure the installation complies with the appropriate local regulations.

.t) The menu 006 1111155 be put to 01 for starr/stop conuttatul froni keyboard.

10 HOW TO GET STARTED

3.2 Main functions/Applications

WARNING! Make sure that all safety measures have been taken before switching on the supply.

Switch on the control voltage (normally 1 x 230 V), all segments in the display and the two LED's will be illuminated for a few seconds. Then the display will show menu 001. An illuminated display indicates there is

supply voltage on the PCB. Check that you have mains voltage on the mains contactor or on the thyristors. The settings arc carried out according to following:

The first step in the settings is to set menu 007 and 008 to "ON" to reach the main functions 020-025 and motor data 041-046.

NOTE The main function Is chosen according to the application. The tables in the applications and functions selection (table 1, page 15), eves the Information to choose the proper main function.

3.3 Motor Data Set the data, according to the motor type plate to obtain optimal settings for starting, stopping and motor protection.

NOTE! The default settings are for a standard 4-pole motor ace. to the nominal power of the soft-starter. The soft starter will run even If no specific motor data is selected, but the performance will not be optimal.



0 Nominal motor voltage

Default: 400 V

Range: 200-700 V

0 4 2 0 0

4 5 Nominal motor current

Default: Nominal current soft starter

Range: 25% - 150% of insoft in Amp

0 4

Nominal motor power

2121 Default: Nominal power soft starter

Range: 25% - 300% of Pnft in kW

lo 141g

4 5 0 Nominal motor speed

Default: Nominal speed soft starter

Range: 500-3600 rpm

014 5 0 0

8 Nominal motor cos phi

Default: 0.86

Range: 0.50-1.00

[61

Nominal frequency

Default: 50 Hz

Range: 50/60 Hz

NOTE! Now go back to menu 007 and set It to 'oF'F" and then to menu 001.

3.4 Setting of the start and stop ramps

The menu's 002 and 003 can now he set to adjust the start ramp up time and the stop ramp down time.

00 2 g

1101

Default: 10 sec

Start time ramp 1

Range: 1-60 sec

Estimate the starting-time for the motor/machine. Set "ramp up time" at start (1-60 sec). Key "ENTER. " to confirm new value. Key "NEXT -4. ", "PREV 4- " to change menu.

010 4 0 0

o F

Stop time ramp 1

Default: oFF

Range: oFF. 2-120 sec

Set "ramp down time" at stop (2-120 s).

"oFF" if only soft start requires.

HOW TO GET STARTED 11



3.5 Setting the start command As default the start command is set for remote operation via terminal 11, 12 and 13. For easy commission- ing it is possible to set the start command on the start key on the keyboards. This is set with menu 006.

[61o161(,),

Selection of control mode

Default: 2

Range: 1,2,3

Menu 006 must be set to 1 to be able to operate from keyboard.

NOTE! Factory default setting Is remote control (2).

To start and stop from the keyboard, the "START/ STOP" key is used.

To reset from the keyboard, the "ENTER / RESET" key is used. A reset can he given both when the motor is running and when the motor is stopped. A reset by the keyboard will not start or stop the motor.

3.6 Viewing the motor current Set the display to menu 005. Now the Motor current can be viewed on the display.

0 5 0 0

RMS current read-out

Default:

Range: 0.0-9999 Amp.

NOTE! The menu 005 can be selected at any time when the motor Is running.

12 HOW TO GET STARTED

3.7 Starting

WARNING! Make sure that all safety measures have been taken before starting the motor In order to avoid personal Injury.

Start the motor by pressing the "START/STOP" key on the keyboard or through the remote control, PCB terminal 11, 12 and 13. When the start command is

given, the MAVIS contactor will be activated by relay K.1

(PC:13 terminal 21 and 22), and the motor then starts softly.

Current (A)

FLC

03-F116

Time

Fig 7 Examplc of start ramp with main fimrtioa voltage ramp.



4. APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION

This chapter is a guide to select the correct soft starter rating and the selection of the Main function and additional functions for each different application.

To make the right choice the following tools arc used:

The norm AC53a. This norm helps selecting the soft starter rating with regard to duty cycle, starts per hour and maximum starting current. The Application Rating List. With this list the soft starter raring can be selected depending on the kind of application used. The list use 2 levels of the AC53a norm. See table 1, page 15. The Application Function List. This table gives an complete overview of most common applications and duties. For each applications the menu's that can be used are given. See table 2, page 17. Function and Combination matrix. With these tables it is easy to see which combinations of Main and additional functions are possible, see table 3, page .19 and table 4, page 19.

4.1 Soft starter rating according to AC53a

The 1EC947-4-2 standard for electronic starters defines AC53a as a norm for dimensioning of a soft starter.

The MSF soft starter is designed for continuous running. In the Applications table (table 1, page 15) two levels of AC53a are given. This is also given in the technical data tables (see chapter 12. page 74).

21.03; AC53a 5 - 30 : 50 - 10

IWYNA,

Starts per hour

On-load factor (en-load duty cycle as percent. age of operation cycle)

Start time (seconds)

Start current (multiple of FLC)

Rated FLC (Full Load Current) of starter under prescribed conditions

Fig. 8 Rating example AC53a.

The above example indicates_ a current rating of 210 Amps with a start current ratio of 5.0 x FLC (1050A) for 30 seconds with a 50% duty cycle and 10 starts per hour.

NOTE! If more than 10 starts/hour or other duty cycles are needed, please contact your supplier.

Starts per hour

Star t

Duration

Run I hoc

Time

TIME

Duty Cycle = (Start Duration r Run Time)

(Start Duration Run Time 4 Oft Time) tos-reol

Fig. .9 Duty cycle, non bypass.

4.2 Soft starter rating according to AC53b

This norm is made for Bypass operation. Because the MSF soft starter is designed for continuous operation this norm is not used in the selection tables in this chapter.

a. : AC-53b I : 0 '440

Off time (seconds between starts)

Start time (seconds)

Start current (multiple of (CI.) Rated RC (Full Load Cur- rent) of starter under prescribed conditions

Fig. 10 Raring example

U...I

D C_)

Start Duration

Off Time

TIME (034151,)

Fig. 11 Duty cycle, bypassed

The above example indicates a current rating of 210 Amps with a start current ratio of 5.0 x FLC (1050A) for 30 seconds with a 24-minute period between starts.

APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION 13



4.3 MSF Soft starter ratings According to the norms AC53a and AC53b a soli starter can have many current ratings.

NOTE! Because the MSF soft starter Is designed for continuous operation the norm AC53b Is not used In the application rating list.

With help of the Application Rating List with typical starting currents and categories in the ACS3a level (see table 1, page 15 and table 2, page 17) it is easy to select the proper soft starter rating with the application.

The Application Rating List uses two levels for the AC53a norm:

AC53a 5.0-30:5040 (heavy duty) This level will be able to start all applications and follows directly the type number of the soft starter. Example: MSF 370 is 370 Amps FLC and then 5

time this current in starting. AC 53a 3.0-30:50-10 (normal /light duty) This level is for a bit lighter applications and here the MSF can manage a higher FLC. Example: MSF 370 in this norm manage 450 Amps FLC and the 3 times this current in starting

NOTE! To compare Soft Starters its important to ensure that not only FLC (Full Lond Current) Is compared but also that the operating parameters are Identical.

4.4 The Application Ratings List Table 1 gives the Application Ratings List. With this list the rating for the soft starter and Main Function menu can be selected.

Description and use of the table: Applications. This column gives the various applications. If the machine or application is not in this list, try to identify a similar machine or application. Win doubt pleas contact your supplier. AC53a ratings. The rating according to AC53a norm is here classi- fied in 2 ratings. The first for normal/light duty (3.0-30:50-10) and the second for heavy duty (5.0-30:50-10) Typical Starting current. Gives the typical starting current for each application Main Function menu. The Main Function menu is advised here. "25;=1", means: program selection 1 in menu 25. Stop function. Gives a possible Stop function if applicable. "36;=1 / 38-40", means: program selection 1 in menu 36, also menus 38 to 40 can be selected.

14 APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION

EXAMPLE: Koller Mill:

This is an application for heavy duty, Typical starting current of 450%. Main function Torque ramp start (menu 25) will give the best results. Stop function Dynamic Brake (menu 36, selection 1) can be used. As well as the Slow Speed at start and stop (menu 38-40) can be used for better start and stop performance.



'Ma, lLr;iuw List

Applications AC53a 3.0-30:50-10 (normal/light)

AC 53a 5.0-30:50-10

(heavy)

Typical starting

current %

Main function Menu nr.

Stop function Menu nr.

General & Water

Centrifugal Pump

Submersible Pump

Conveyor

Compressor: Screw

Compressor, Reciprocating

Fan

Mixer

Agitator

x 300 22 22

x 300 22 22

x 300-400 25; =1 36:=1 / 38-40

x 300 25

x 400 25; =1

x 300 25:=2 x 400-450 25:=1 -

x 400 25 ; =1 -

Metals & Mining

Belt Conveyor

Dust Collector

Grinder

Hammer Mill

Rock Crusher

Roller Conveyor

Roller Mill

Tumbler

Wire Draw Machine

x 400 25:=1 36:=1 / 38.40

x 350 25:=1

x 300 25:=1 36:=1

x 450 25:=1 36; =2

x 400 25:=1 .

x x 350 25:=1 36:=1 / 3840 x 450 25; =1 36; =1 or 2

x 400 25;=1 -

x 450 25; =1 36:=1 or 2

Food Processing

Bottle Washer

Centrifuge

Dryer

Mill

Palletiser

Separator

Slicer

x 300 25;=2 x 400 25;=-1 36:=1 or 2

x 400 25:=2

x 450 25:=1 36;=1 or 2

x 450 25;=1

x 450 25;=1 36; =1 or 2

x 300 25:=1

Pulp and Paper

Re-Pulper

Shredder

Trolley

x 450 25;=1

x 450 25; =1

x 450 25; =1

Petrochemical

Ball Mill

Centrifuge

Extruder

Screw Conveyor

x 450 25;=1

x 400 25:=1 36:=1 or 2

x 500

400

25:=1

25:=1. x

Transport & Machine Tool

Ball Mill

Grinder

Material Conveyor

Pallet iser

Press

Roller Mill

Rotary Table

Trolley

Escalator

x 450 25:=1

x 350 25:=1 36:=1

x 400 25:=1 36:=1 / 38-40

x 450 25:=1

x 350 25:=1

x 450 25:=1

x 400 25:=1 36:=1 / 38-40

x 450 25:=1

x 300.400 25:=1

Lumber & Wood Products

Bandsaw

Chipper

Circular Saw

Debarker

Planer

Sander

x 450 25:=1 36;=1 or 2

x 450 25:=1 36:=1 or 2

x 350 25:=1 36;=1 or 2

a 350 25;=1 36;=1 or 2

x 350 25:=1 36:=1 or 2

x 400 25:=1 36; =1 or 2

APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION 15



4.5 The Application Functions List This list gives an overview of many different applications/duties and a possible solution with one of the many MSF fUnctions.

Description and use of the table: Application /Duty. This column gives the various applications and level of duty. If the machine or application is not in this list, try to identify a similar machine or application. If in doubt pleas contact your supplier. Problem. This column describes possible problems that are familiar for this kind of application. Solution MSF. Gives the possible solution for the problem using one the MSF function. Menus. Gives the menu numbers and selection for the MSF function. "25;=1", means: program selection 1 in menu 25. "36;=-4 / 34,35", means: program selection I in menu 36, menus 34 and 35 are related to this function.

16 APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTIONS SELECTION,



5. OPERATION OF THE SOFT STARTER

Fig. 12 IVISF soft starter models.

5.1 General description of user interface

WARNING! Never operate the soft starter with removed front cover.

To obtain the required operation, a number of parameters must be set in the soft starter.

Setting/configuration is done either from the built- in keyboard or by a computer/control system through the serial interface or bus (option). Controlling the motor i.e. start/stop, selection of parameter set, is done either from the keyboard, through the remote control inputs or through the serial interface (option).

Setting

WARNING! Make sure that all safety measures have

been taken before switching on the supply.

Switch on the supply (normally 1 x 230 V), all segments in the. display will light up for a few seconds. Then the display will show menu 001. An illuminated display indicates there is supply voltage on the PCB.

Check that you have voltage on the mains contactor or on the thyristors. To be able to use all extended functions and optimize of the performance, program the motor data.

5.2 PPU unit

03-F28

1

la B. a °o ::::,), ,...

8. a VALUE

01 InRUIP. allaSea 02 Stest, anal( 03 Step, o.m 04 SW. amp!) 06 CumlAir ...le. 00 Contr0.005 07 Ea WO. Antian.

B. Et La 1.11 fit

....) chop. taw. 5) tot.)

/ / /I A30

, Z -/. - Z

,START'

/4-7-77 100

.. Z I__ / 4- -+

NEXT STOP ,,.

/ / / / PREY

. .... + ENTER

11111 RESET

Fig. 13 PPU unit.

The programming and presentation unit (PPU) is

build-in operator panel with two light emitting diodes, three + four seven-segment LED-displays and a keyboard.

OPERATION OF THE SOFT STARTER 21



5.3 LED display The two light emitting diodes indicates start/stop and running motor/machine. When a start command is

given either from the PPU, through the serial interface (option) or through the remote control inputs, the start/stop-LED will be illuminated.

At a stop command the start/stop-LED \vill switch oft When the motor is running, the running-LED is

flashing during ramp up and down and is illuminated continuously at full motor voltage.

Voltage

Running-LEO, flashing

Start/stop- LECkon

Running- LED.Cri

Running-LED, flash ng'

StarUsterp- LED,otf

Time

Running- LED,olf

Fit,. 14 LED indication at dijiyent operation situation.

5.4 The Menu Structure The menus are organised in a simple one level structure with the possibility to limit the number of menus that are reachable by setting the value in menu 007 to "oFF" (factory settingj. With this setting only the basic menus 001, 002, 003, 004, 005, 006 and 007 can be reached.

This to simplify the setting when only voltage start/ stop ramps are used.

If menu 007 is in "on" and menu 008 "oFF" it is

possible to reach all viewing menus and alarm lists as well.

Key lock status

RMS currents and voltages in each phase

Viewed soft starter data

Reset to' factory settings

Serial communication 1

111.114)

Initial voltage

002 Start ramp time Step down voltage at stop

00i1stb13 ramp time

r005 8MS current 1 6001Control mode

Menu expander

008 Menu expander

Automatic return menu

"JOG" enable

105

103-1041

Run at F1 &F4 alarm I 101-1021

Machine protection 1 089-0991

Main supply protection F081-0431

Motor protection 1 071 -077551

Dual ramp start/stop 011-0141

1 018-0181 lnit ial and end torque at start

020-0251Main functions

1 030.0401 Additional functions

Nominal motor parameters

Relay K1 &K2 functions

Analogue output

Digital input

Parameter set

Fig 15 Alont structure.

22 OPERATION OF THE SOFT STARTER



5.5 The keys The function of the keyboard arc based on a few simple rules. At power up menu 001 is shown automatically. Use the "NEXT " and "PREV -4- "keys to move between menus. To scroll through menu numbers, press and hold either the "NEXT " or the "PREV

" key. The "+" and "-" keys arc used to increase respectively decrease the value of setting. The value is

flashing during setting. The "ENTER " key con- firms the setting just made, and the value will go from flashing to stable. The "START/STOP" key is only used to start and stop the motor/machine. The 110j and [] keys are only used fOr JOG from the keyboard. Please note one has to select enable in menu 103 or 104, sec § 7.25, page 61.

flthk j The keys

Start/stop motor operation. [START

STOP i

Display previous menu. I ....... PREV

Display next menu. [NEXT

Decrease value of setting.

Increase value of setting.

OMB

[ ÷ Confirm setting just made. Alarm reset.

ENTER 410Ba

RESET

JOG Reverse

JOG Forward

'Ed* 6 CourroVmodr$

5.6 Keyboard lock .The keyboard can be locked to prohibit operation and parameter setting by an unauthorised. Lock keyboard by pressing both keys "NEXT -6.- " and "ENTER

" for at least 2 sec. The message Loc' will display when locked. To unlock keyboard press the same 2

keys "NEXT --* " and "ENTER 4_1" for at least 2

sec. The message 'link,' will display when unlocked. in locked mode it is possible to view all parameters

and read-out, but it is forbidden to set parameters and to operate the soft starter from the keyboard.

The message ' -Loc' will display if trying to set a

parameter or operate the soft starter in locked mode. The key lock status can be read out in menu 221.

Locked keyboard Info

2210

no Default: no

Range: no. YES

no Keyboard is not locked

YES Keyboard is locked

5.7 Overview of soft starter operation and parameter set-up.

Tible with the possibilities to operate and set parameters in soft starter.

Control mode is selected in menu 006 and Parame- ter set is selected in menu 061. For the keyboard lock function, see § 7.30, page 65.

Operation/ Set-up

Control mode

Start/Stop JOG fwd/rev Alarm reset

Setting of parameters

Parameter set with external selection

Menu 061=0

Parameter set with Internal selection

Menu 061=1-4

Keyboard Menu 006=1

Unlocked keyboard.

Keyboard Keyboard Keyboard ----- Keyboard

Locked _______ _________ - __ -_ -- _____

Remote Menu 006=2

Unlocked Unlocked keyboard Remote Remote Remote and

keyboard Remote Keyboard

Locked keyboard

Remote Remote Remote Remote ------

Serial comm. Menu 006=3

Unlocked keyboard Serial comm Serial comm Serial comm.

and keyboard ------ Serial comm

Locked keyboard

Serial comm Serial comm Serial comm ------ Serial comm

OPERATION OF THE SOFT STARTER 23



6. INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

Mounting, wiring and setting the device into operation most he carried out by trained personnel (electricians specialised in heavy current technology):

In accordance with the local safety regulations of the electricity supply company. In accordance with DIN VDE OM for setting up heavy current plants.

Care must be taken to ensure that personnel do not come into contact with live circuit components.

WARNING! Never operate the soft starter with removed front covet

6.1 Installation of the soft starter in a cabinet

When installing the soft starter: Ensure that the cabinet will he sufficiently ventilated, after the installation. Keep the minimum free space, see the tables on page 25. Ensure that air can flow freely from the bottom to the top.

NOTE! When Installing the soft starter, make sure It does not come Into contact with live components. The heat generated must be dispersed via the cooling fins to prevent damage to the thyristors (free circulation of air).

MSF-017 to MSF-835 soft. starters are all delivered as

enclosed versions with front opening. The units have bottom entry for cables etc. see Fig. 25 on page 29 and Fig. 27 on page 31. MSF-1000 and MSF-1400 are delivered as open chassis.

NOTE! The soft starter should be wired with shielded control cable to fulfill EMC regulations acc. to § 1.5, page 6.

NOTE! For UL-approval use 75°C Copper wire only.

MSF-017 to MSF-250

Fig. 16 MSF-017 to MSF-250 dimensions.

24 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

rig. 17 Hole patter,: for il4SF-017 to il4SF-250 (backside view).

034'122_1

18 Hole pattern for114ST-170 to A4S17-250 with upper 11101/11ling bracket instead of !)1N -rail.



MSF-017 to MSF-250

Tilde 7 AIS1- -01 7 to MSF-250.

MSF model

Class Connection Conv./ Fan

Dimension HxWxD (mm)

Hole dist. w1 (mm)

Hole dist. hi (mm)

Dlam./ screw

Weight (kg)

-017, -030 -045, -060, -075, -085

-110, -145

-170, -210. -250

IP 20

IP 20

IP 20

IP 20

Busbars

Busbars

Busbars

Busbars

Convection

Fan

Fan

Fan

320x126x260

320x126x260

400x176x260 500x260x260

78.5

78.5

128.5

208.5

265

265

345

445

5.5/M5

5.5/M5

5.5/M5 5.5/M5

6.7

6.9

12.0

20

1:Jblr S MSF-01710 Al.SP.250

MSF model

Minimum

above 1)

free space

below

(mm):

at side

Dimension Connection busbars Cu

Tightening torque for bolt (Nm)

Cable PE-cable Supply and PE

-017, -030, -045 100 100 0 15x4 (M6), PE (M6) 8 8 0.6 -060, -075, -085 100 100 0 15x4 (M8), PE (M6) 12 8 0.6

-110445 100 100 0 20x4 (M10), PE (M8) 20 12 0.6

-170, -210, -250 100 100 0 30x4 (M10). PE (M8) 20 12 0.6

1) Above: wall-soft starter or soft starter-soft starter

MSF-310 to MSF-1400

'Ethic 9 MSF-310 to MSF -1400 src Fig. 20 or, page 26.

MSF model

Class Connection Corm/ Fan

Dimension HxWxD (mm)

Hole dist. wl (mm)

Hole dist. h1 (mm)

Dlam./ screw

Weight (kg)

-310 IP 20 Busbars Fan 532x547x278 460 450 8.5/M8 42

-370, -450 IP 20 Busbars Fan 532x547x278 460 450 8.5/M8 46




-1000, -1400 !POO Busbar Fan 900x875x336 Fig 23 8.5/M8 175

1:,ble 10 MS12-.110 to MS1:- 1400.

MSF model

Minimum free space (mm): Dimension Connection, busbars Al

Tightening torque for bolt (Nm)

above 1) below at side Cable PE-cable Supply and PE

-310, -370, -450 -570, -710, -835 -1000, -1400

100

100

100

100

100 100

0

0

100

40x8 (M12) 40x10 (M12) 75x 10 (M12)

50

50

50

12

12

12

0.6 0.6 0.6

1) Above: Wall-soft starter or soft starter-soft starter

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 25



Fig 19 MSF -310 to MSF -8.35.

Fig. 20 Hole pattern for StfeW attachment, MSF-310 ro MS17-835. Hole distance (nun).


MSF e t

-310 to -450 44 39

-570 to -835 45.5 39

Observe that the t vo supplied mom Ling hooks (see S 1.8, page 7 and Fig. 2 on page 7 must be used for mounting the soft starter as upper support (only MSF- 31.0 to MSF-835).

Fig. 21 Mistral- distances :14.517 -310 to MSP -835,

'Ethic 11 Busbar didamet

MSF model Mt. hl (mm)

Dist. wl (mm)

DIst. w2 (mm)

Dist. w3 (mm)

-310 to -450

-570 to -835

-1000 -1400

104

129

33

35

55

206

239.5

322.5

379

444

590.5



L

F

F

0

875

F. 22 MST: -100010 -1400

825

0

0

590.5 5

0

O

ei

03-F1.3

Fig. 23 Hole partcrrr bli S bar :111.51' -1000 to -1400.




6.2 Connections

Fig. 24 Connection of MSF-017 to -085.

Connection of MSF-017 to MSF-085

Device connections I. Protective earth, (PE), Mains supply, Motor

(on the right and left inside of the cabinet) 2. Protective earth, (PE), Control voltage 3. Control voltage connection 01, 02 4. Mains supply LI, 12, L3

5. Motor power supply Tl, T2, T3 6. Current transformers (possible to mount outside

for bypass sec § 7.12, page 43) 7. Mounting of EMC gland for control cables




_I_. giffigig6 CID CI CI

171:g. 25 Comteciott of msr-r I0 to 1145F-145.


Device connections 1. Protective earth, (PE), Mains supply, Motor

(on the left inside of the cabinet) 2. Protective earth _L (PE), Control voltage 3. Control voltage connection 01, 02 4. Mains supply Ll, L2, L3 5, Motor power supply T1, T2, T3 6. Current transformers (possible to mount outside

for bypass sec Q 7.12, page 43) 7. Mounting of EMC gland for control cables




o - 3 2

UUU UULJULJU

HEHHITHEE n IIIIII 111111W111111

03-F104

1B1

6

1

uuuuuuuuuuuuuuu . .

I Ii 161---1 [ ig - ...._

CC LJ Lri I Li 1 l I 1

0

--,,i.: -. 0 11

NPA MS K"NW* I.:It:mak:2

.2iii Cliir; iinmia NM .:--.-.:1

'., ill LIMMOMMPII .....IPP--

11. 0 ,..1, ..

INIL...?....

Ti I Wee ,:-..-0:- 1"

la !

:,.

i

V .

ic . el.

li10!U!OEdE[dW 0 O

5

4

1

Fig. 26 Cowl:Trim of iliSF-170 to MSF-250


Device connections 1. Protective earth, (PE), Mains supply, Motor

(on the left inside of the cabinet) 2. Protective earth J.- (PE), Control voltage 3. Control voltage connection 01, 02 =1, Mains supply Ll, L2, L3 5. Motor power supply Tl, T2, T3 6. Current transformers (possible to mount outside

for bypass see S 7.12, page 43) 7. Mounting of EMC gland for control cables




Fig. 27 Con:Jailor, of msr- 170 to MSF-1400.

Connection of MSF -310 to MSF -1400

Device connections 1. Protective earth, 4- (PE), Mains supply and

Motor 2. Protective earth, 4_ (PE), Control voltage 3. Control voltage connection 01, 02

4. Mains supply LI, L2, L3

5. Motor power supply Tl, T2, T3

6. Current transformers (possible to mount outside for bypass see 5 7.12, page 43)

7. Mounting of EMC gland for control cables




6.3 Connection and setting on the PCB control card

IA* 28 Connections on ihc PC13, control card.

Vac 12 PCB Tilmiliols

Terminal Function Electrical characteristics 01

Supply voltage 100-240 VAC ±10%/380.500 VAC ± 10% 02 PE Gnd

11 Digital inputs for start/stop and reset. 0-3 V --> 0; 8-27 V-> 1. Max. 37 V for 10 sec.

Impedance to 0 VDC: 2.2 Kt 12

13 Supply/control voltage to PCB terminal 11 and 12, 10 k5-2 potentiometer. etc.

+12 VDC ±5%. Max. current from +12 VDC: 50mA. Short circuit proof.

14 Remote analogue input control, 0.10 V, 2-10 V, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA/digital input.

Impedance to terminal 15 (0 VDC) voltage signal.; 125 kt), current signal: 100 U.

1.5 GND (common) 0 VDC

16 Digital inputs for selection of parameter set.

0-3 V --> 0; 8.27 V--> 1. Max. 37 V for 10 sec. hived- ance to 0 VDC: 2.2 kfL 17

18 Supply/control voltage to PCB terminal 16 and 17, 10 kfl potentiometer, etc.

+12 VDC ±5%. Max. current from +12 VDC = 50mA. Short circuit proof.

19 Remote analogue output control Analogue Output contact: 0-1.0.V. 2-10V; min load impedance 70052 0-20mA and 4-20mA;max load impedance 75011

21. Programmable relay K1. Factory setting is "Opera- tion" indication by closing terminal 21 - 22.

1-pole closing contact, 250 VAC 8A or 24 VDC 8A resistive, 250 VAC, 3A inductive. 22

23 Programmable relay K2. Factory setting is 'Full voltage" indication by closing terminal 23-24.

1-pole closing contact, 250 VAC 8A or 24 VDC 8A resistive, 250 VAC, 3A inductive. 24

31 Alarm relay K3, closed to 33 at alarm. 1-pole change over contact, 250 VAC 8A or 24 VDC 8A resistive, 250 VAC. 3A inductive. 32 Alarm relay K3, opened at alarm.

33 Alarm relay K3, common terminal. 69-70 PTC Thermistor input Alarm level 2.4 Itc2 Switch back level 2.2 ka

71-72* Clickson thermistor Controlling soft starter cooling fine temperature MSF-310 - MSF1400

7374* NTC thermistor Temperature measuring of soft starter cooling fine

75 Current transformer input, cable S1 (blue) Connection of L1 or T1 phase current transformer

76 Current transformer input, cable S1 (blue) Connection of L3, T3 phase (MSF 017 - MSF 250) or L2. 12 phase (MSF 310 - MSF 1400)

77 Current transformer Input, cable S2 (brown) Common connection for terminal 75 and 76

78* Fan connection 24 VDC

79* Fan connection 0 VDC

*Internal connection, no customer use.




6.4 Minimum wiring

LI. L2 L3 Pt

00

100.440- si.O%

PE

Li 2L3 PE 01.02 PC 21 K1 22 23LK

4 33TH3 211 32 69 70

Ti 72 13 PE 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 75 76 77

O

44_1

star I /stop

03-F25

Fig. 29 11,7ring-circuit, "'Minimum wiring'.

The figure above shows the "minimum wiring". See S 6.1, page 24, for tightening torque for bolts etc. I. Connect Protective Earth (PE) to earth screw

marked 4- (Pp. 2. Connect the soft starter between the 3-phase mains

supply and the motor. On the soft starter the mains side is marked LI, L2 and L3 and the motor side with Ti, T2 and- T3.

3. Connect the control voltage (100-240 VAC) for the control card at terminal 01 and 02.

4. Connect relay K1 (terminals 21 and 22) to the control circuit.

5. Connect PCB terminal 12 and 13 (PCB terminal 11-12 must be linked) to, e.g. a 2-position switch (on/oFF) or a PLC, etc., to obtain control of soft start/stop. (For start/stop command from keyboard menu 006 must be set to 01).

6. Ensure the installation complies with the appropriate local regulations.

NOTE! The soft starter should be wired with shielded control cable to fulfill EMC regulations acc. to § 1.5, page 6.

NOTE! If local regulations say that a mains contactor should be

used, the K1 then controls it. Always use standard commercial, slow blow fuses, e.g. type g1, gG to protect the wiring and prevent short circuiting. To protect the thyristors against short. circuit currents, superfast semiconductor fuses can be used If

preferred. The normal guarantee Is valid even If superfast semiconductor fuses are not used. All signal Inputs and outputs are galvanically Insulated from the mains supply.




6.5 Wiring examples Fig. 30 gives an wiring example with the following functions.

Analogue input control, sec § 7.7, page 40 Parameter set selection, see § 7.20, page 54 Analogue output, see § 7.18, page 52 PTC input, see § 7.21, page 55

For more information see § 6.3, page 32.

CI

L2

H

PC

11713 C 0102Pt 23 " 22

11 72 73 PC 1.112 13 14 15

231_,,...2...2A 33L;11.1

16 17 la 19

3' 69 70

76 77 75

992

.:%-- cut /slop P51. Perornolcitai PSt PS2

0700 000o 1

z closed coca

PIC Ar4/ocve, O.

2.107

An :dovecot ()V

0000 cissoo

4 closed dosed

0.300,4

03-F18

Fig, .30 Analogue input contwl, parameter set, analogue output and PTC inpnt.

LI

12

3 1(

PC

0

1, 213P0 010397 4722 231 H214 33 433 12 69 70

7 1 1 2 ( 3 71 . 11 13 13 14 15 16 11 111 16 75 76 77

-1-3,

sort :stop

03-F20

Jr', 37 Poneardireverse wiring circuit.




7. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

This chapter describes all the parameters and functions in numerical order as they appear in the MSE Table 1.3

gives an overview of' the menus, sec also Chapter 13. page 79 (set-up menu list).

Yid le 13 Set-up ,Wernt

Menu number

Parameter group Menu numbers See §

Basic functions 001-008 Basic

Ramp up /down parameters 001-005 7.1

Start/Stop/Reset command 006 7.2

Menu Expansion 007-008 7.3

Extended functions 011-199

Voltage control dual ramp 011-014 7.4

Torque control parameters 016-018 7.5

Main functions 020-025 7.6 - 7.10

Additional functions 030-036 7.11 - 7.14

Slow speed and Jog functions 037-040, 57-58, 103-104

7.15, 7.19, 7.25

Motor Data Setting 041-046 7.16

Outputs Relays 051-052 7.17

Analogue output 054-056 7.18

Input Digital input 057-058 7.19

Parameter set selection 061 7.20

Motor protection 071-075 7.21

Main protection 081-088 7.22

Application protection 089-099 7.23

Resume alarms 101; 102 7.24

Auto return menu 105 7.26

Factory defaults 199 7.28

View functions 201-915

Main view 201-208 7.29

RMS current per phase 211-213 7.29

RMS voltage per phase 214-216 7.29

Keyboard lock status 221 7.30

Alarm list 901-915 7.31

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 35



7.1 Ramp upidown parameters

Fig. 32 Mom numbers for start/stop ramps, tallied voltage at start rind titp down voltage at stop.

Determine the starting time for the motor/machine. When setting the ramp times for starting and stopping, initial voltage at start and step down voltage at stop, proceed as follow:

0 011 ° 0

3 0 Setting the initial voltage at start ramp 1

Default: 30%

Range: 25 - 90% U Set the initial voltage. Normally the factory setting, 30% of U, is a suitable choice.

Setting of start ramp 1

0 0

r_____. 10 Default: 10 sec

Range: 1-60 sec

Set "Ramp up time" at start.

-0-1-0- Pi 0°

1 0 0 Setting of step down voltage stop ramp 1

Default: 100%

Range: 100-40% of Un

Step down vo tage at stop can be used to stop smoothly.

36 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

1 I 141(0)

o F F

Setting of stop ramp 1

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 2-120 sec

oFF Stop ramp disabled

2-120 Set "Ramp down time" at stop

7.1.1 RMS current [OM

010 5 0°

1 --1

I 1

RMS current

Default: -- Range: 0.0-9999Amp

Read-out of the RMS motor current.

NOTE! This is the same readout as function 201, see § 7.28, page 63.



7.2 Start/stop/reset command Start/stop of the motor and reset of alarm is done either from the keyboard, through the remote control inputs or through the serial interface (option). The remote control inputs start/stop/reset (PCB terminals 11. 12 and 13) can be connected for 2-wire or 3-wire control.

006 g

Selection of control mode

2 Default: 2

Range: 1,2,3

1

START/STOP/RESET command via the keyboard. - Press the "START/STOP" key on

the keyboard to start and stop the soft starter.

- Press "ENTER/RESET" key to reset a trip condition.

2

Via Remote control. START/STOP/ RESET commands. The following control methods are possible: - 2-wire start/stop with automatic

reset, see. § 7.2.1, page 37. - 2-wire start/stop with separate

reset, see § 7.2.2, page 37. - 3-wire start/stop with automatic

reset at start, see § 7.2.3, page 37.

WARNING! The motor will start If terminals 11, 12, 13 Is In start position.

3

START/STOP/RESET commands via serial interface option. Read the operating instruction supplied with this option.

NOTE! A reset via the keyboard will not start or stop the motor.

NOTEI Factory default setting Is 2, remote control.

-16 start and stop from the keyboard, the "START! STOP" key is used.

To reset from the keyboard, the "ENTER i-Ji RESET" key is used. A reset can be given both when the motor is running and when the motor is stopped. A reset from the keyboard will not start or stop the motor.

7.2.1 2-wire start/stop with automatic reset at start

12 13

Start/ Reset

43417 \ Stop

p11

F. 114:;441c; u 071

L) t 1 1 cs

Closing PCB terminals 12 and 13, and a juniper between terminal 11 and 12. will give a start command. Opening the terminals will give a stop. If PCB terminals 12 and 13 is closed at power up a start command is given (automatic start at power up). When a

start command is given there will automatically be a

reset.

7.2.2 2-wire start/stop with separate reset

Closing PCB terminals 11, 12 and 13 will give a start and opening the terminals 12 and 13 will give a stop. If PCB terminals 12 and 13 arc closed at power up a start command is given (automatic start at power up). When PC13 terminals 11 and 13 are opened and closed again a

reset is given. A reset can be given both when_ the motor is running and stopped and doesn't affect the start/stop.

7.2.3 3-wire start/stop with automatic reset at start.

PCB terminal l2 and 13 are normally closed and PCB terminal 11 and 13 are normally open. A start command is given by momentarily closing P03 terminal 11 and 13. To stop, PCB terminal 12 and 13 are momentarily opened.

When a start command is given there will automatically he a reset.. There will not he an automatic start at power up.




7.3 Menu expansion setting. In order to use the viewing menus and/or the extended functions menu 007 must be set to "On", then one reach read out of the viewing menus 207- 915. To be able to set any extended functions in the menus 011-199 menu 008 must be set to "on" as well.

lb 0 71°

r

oFF Selecting of extended functions and viewing functions

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF Only function 1-7 are visible

on - View functions 201-915 are visible - Extended functions (menu 008) selectable

018 ° 0

o FF Selecting of extended functions

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF Only view function 201-915 are visible.

on All the function menus are visible

NOTE! Menu 007 must be "on".

7.4 Voltage control dual ramp To achieve even smoother ramps at start and or stop, a

dual ramp can be used.

Fig. 33 Menu numbers for dual voltage tamp at start/stop, initial voltage at start and step down-voltage at stop.

The settings are carried out by beginning with the settings in menus 001-004 and 007-008 and proceed with the following steps:


piiiii 0 _i... __. 0

9 01

Setting the initial voltage at start ramp 2

Default: 90%

Range: 30-90% Un

Set the start voltage for start ramp 2. The initial voltage for start ramp 2 is limited to the initial voltage at start (menu 001), see § 7.1, page 36.

1 ,

0 0

FF Setting of start ramp 2

Default: oFF


oFF Start ramp 2 disabled

1-60 Set the start ramp 2 time. A dual voltage ramp is active.

011 0°

40 Setting of step down voltage In stop ramp 2

Default: 40%

Range: 100-40% Ur,

Set the step down voltage for stop ramp 2. The step down voltage for stop ramp 2 is limited to the step down voltage at stop (menu 003).

011 4 g

-- --- oFF

--- Setting of stop ramp time 2

Default: oFF


oFF Stop ramp 2 disabled

160 Set the stop ramp 2 time. A dual voltage stop ramp is active.



7.5 Torque control parameters 7.6 Current limit (Main Function) See also 6 7.10, page 42 and chapter 4. page 13 for more information on the Torque control setting.

10160

1

I 1 Initial torque at start

0 Default: 10

Range: 0 - 250% of Tn

Insert initial torque at start in percent of nominal shaft torque (Tn), see chapter 13. page 79.

0 1 ° 0

1 5 End torque at start

0! Default: 150


Insert end torque at start in percent of nominal shaft torque.

0180

I

0 End torque at stop

Default: 0


Insert end torque at stop in percent of the nominal motor torque.

The Current Limit function is used to limit the current drawn when starting (150 - 500% of In). This means that current limit is only achieved during set start-lip tnne.

TWo kinds of current limit starts arc available. Voltage tamp with a limited current. If current is below set current limit, this start will act exactly as a voltage ramp start. Current limit start. The soft starter will control the current up to set current limit immediately at start, and keep it there until the start is completed or the set start-up time expires.

Sec Fig. 34 Current limit.

NOTEI Make sure that nominal motor current In menu 042 is correctly inserted.

7.6.1 Voltage ramp with current limit The settings arc carried out in three steps: 1. Estimate starting-time for the motor/machine and

select that time in menu 002 (see 5 7.1, page 36). 2. Estimate the initial voltage and select this voltage in

menu 001 (see 5 7.1, page 36). 3. Set the current limit to a suitable value e.g. 300% of

In in menu 020.

[012mg Voltage ramp with current

o F

limit at start

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 150 - 500% In

oFF Voltage Ramp mode with current limit disabled. Voltage Ramp enabled.

150-500 Current limit level in Voltage ramp mode.

NOTE! Only possible when Voltage Ramp mode is enabled. Menus 021-025 must be "oFF".

Current

Current limit at start

Voltage ramp

Time a

03-F109

Fix. 34 Current limit




7.6.2 Current limit The settings are carried out in two steps: I. Estimate starting time for the motor/machine and

select that time in menu 002 (sec § 7.1, page 36). 2. Set the current limit to a suitable value e.g. 300% of

In in menu 021.

0 2 110°

o F

Current limit at start

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 150 - 500% In

o FF Current limit mode disabled. Voltage Ramp enabled.

150-500 Current limit level in current limit mode.

NOTE! Only possible when Voltage Ramp mode Is enabled. Menus 020, 022.026 must be "oFF".

NOTE! Even though the current limit can be set as low as 150% of the nominal motor current value, this minimum value cannot be used generally. Considerations must be given to the starting torque and the motor before setting the appropriate current limit. "Real start time" can be longer or shorter than the set values depending on the load conditions. This applies to both current limit methods.

Current

Current Limit

FLC

Starting time Time

03-F110

Fig, 35 Current, Ihnit

If the starting time is exceeded and the soft starter is

still operating at current level, an alarm will be activated. It is possible, to let the soft starter to either stop operation or to continue. Note that the current will rise uncontrolled if the operation continues (see 5

7.24.2, page 61).


7.7 Pump control (Main Function) 13y choosing pump control you will automatically get a

stop ramp set to 15 sec. The optimising parameters for this main function arc start and stop time; initial torque at start and end torque at start and stop. End torque at stop is used to let go of the pump when it's no longer producing pressure/flow, which can vary on different pumps. See Fig. 36.

Fig. 36 Pump control

Pump application The pump application is using TOrque ramps for quad- ratic load. This gives lowest possible current and linear start and stop ramps. Related menus arc 2, 4 (sec §, 7.1, page 36), 16, 17 and 15 (see 5 7.5, page 39).

01212 g

I

1

o F F

Setting of pump control

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF Pump control disabled. Voltage Ramp enabled.

on Pump control application is enabled.

NOTE! Only possible when Voltage Ramp mode is enabled. Menu 020-021, 023-025 must be "oFF".



7.8 Analogue Input Control (Main Function)

Soft starting and soft stopping can also be controlled via the Analogue Input Control (0-10 V, 2-10 V, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA). This control makes it possible to connect optional ramp generators or regulators.

After the start command, the motor voltage is controlled through the remote analogue input.

WARNING! The remote analogue control may not be used for continuous speed regulation of standard motors. With this type of operation the increase In the temperature of the motor must be taken Into consideration.

To install the analogue input control, proceed by: 1. Connect the, ramp generator or regulator to termi-

nal 14 (4.) and 15 ().

Fig. 37 Wiring for iinalogur input.

2. Set Jumper J1 on the PCB control card to voltage (U) or current control (1) signal position, see Fig. 38 and Fig. 24 on page 28. Factory setting is voltage (U).

Fig. 38 Setting voltage or current for analogue input.

r012P1g

o I

FIF i

Selection of Analogue Input control

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1, 2

oFF Analogue input disabled. Voltage Ramp enabled.

1 Analogue input is set for 0-10V/ 0-20mA control signal

2 Analogue input is set for 2-10V/ 4-20mA control signal.

NOTE! Only possible when Voltage Ramp mode is enabled. Menu 020-022, 024, 026 must be "oFF"

7.9 Full voltage start, D.O.L. (Main Function)

The motor can be accelerated as if it WaS connected directly to the mains. For this type of operation:

Check whether the motor can accelerate the required load (D.O.L.-start, Direct On Line start). This function can be used even with shorted thyristors.

0'2 I

4 ° 0

o F F

Setting of D.O.L start

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF D.O.L. start disabled. Voltage Ramp enabled.

on D.O.L. start enabled

NOTE! Only possible when Voltage Ramp mode Is enabled. Menu 020-023, 025 must be "oFF".

6-7xInorn

etc

Time

03-F115

Fig. 39 Full voltage start.




7.10 Torque control (Main function) This main function can be used to make a start according to a pre-defined torque reference curve. Two different load characteristics, linear and square, are possible to select.

At start/stop the torque controller will follow the selected characteristic.

A torque start/stop behaviour can be seen in Fig. 40.

A perfect start and stop with torque ramps have a

good linearity of current. To optimise this, use the setting of initial torque (menu 16) and end torque (menu 1$). See also § 7.5, page 39.

Example: Default for initial torque is 10% so if starting a more heavy load this will result in a small current peak in beginning of ramp. By increasing this value to 30/ 70% the current peak will not appear.

The end torque is increased mainly if the application has a high inertial load., like planers, saws and centrifuges. A current peak will appear in the end of ramp because the load is pushing the speed more or less by itself. By increasing this level to 150-250% the current will be linear and. low.

(0121510

Torque control at start/stop

o F F

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1, 2

oFF Torque control is disabled Voltage Ramp enabled.

1 Torque control with linear torque characteristic

2 Torque control with square torque characteristic

NOTE Torque control mode Is only possible when Voltage Ramp mode Is enabled (menu 020-024 are 'oFF").

Torque

2.5T,;-

2 T

1.5 T

0.5 Tr,

End torque

Nominal Torque

1 Linear

2 Square

Initial torque - Star t time

1

End torque at stop

Stop time Time

034'37

Fig. 40 Torque control at start /stop.

Time 03-F113 03-F114

Fig. 41 Current and speed in torque control.




7.11 Torque boost The Thrque Booster enables a high torque to be obtained by providing a high current during 0.1 - 2 sec at start. This enables a soft start oldie motor even if the break away torque is high at start. For example in crushing mills applications etc.

When the torque booster function has finished, starting continues according to the selected start mode.

Torque boost Current limit

Full speed Load current

03-F40 Time

Fig. .42 The pritrriple of the lat.-Tie Booster when starting the

motor in voltage ramp wade.

See 4.6, page 19, which main function that can he

used with the torque boost.

0 30 0 0

0 1 F

Torque boost active time

,

,

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 0.1 - 2 sec

oFF Torque boost disabled

0.1-2.0 Set the Torque boost time.

0310

,

, 3 010 Torque boost current limit

Default: 300

Range: 300 - 700% of In

The Torque boost current controller use selected value as the motor current reference.

NOTE! Check whether the motor can accelerate the load with "Torque booster", without any harmful mechanical stress.

7.12 Bypass In cases of high ambient temperatures or other reason it may sometimes be necessary to use a by-pass contactor to minimize the power loss at nominal speed (see Tech- nical Data). By using the built-in Full Voltage Relay function an external contactor can be used to Bypass the soft starter when operating at nominal speed.

Bypass contactor can also be used if soft stop is

required. Normally a Bypass contactor is not necessary as the device is designed for continues running conditions, see Fig. 29 on page 33 for wiring example.

NOTE! If one like to use the alarm functions, the extended functions or the viewing functions the 2-pcs current transformers must be mounted outside the soft start as shown In Fig. 44 and Fig. 45 on page 46. For this purpose an optional extension cable for the current transformers Is

available. Code No 01-2020-00.

032 g

I

OIFIF Setting of Bypass

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF Bypass disabled

on

Bypass enabled. Program either relay K1 or K2 to function 2 to control the bypass contactor, see menu 51/52.

CAUTION! If the current transformers are not mounted as In Flg. 43 on page 44 and § 6.2, page 28, the alarm and viewing functions will not work. Do not forget to set menu 032 to ON, otherwise there will be an F12 alarm and at the stop command will be a freewheeling stop.

For further information see chapter 6.2 page 28.




L1

L2

13

PE

11 12 L3 PE 01 02 PE 21 3 K224 3 3 69 70

T1 T2 T3 PE 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 75 76 77

o start /stop

11 T./ i3 E

gtorent tre storrner position onnec Ion

or MSF.017 to A1Sf250. see -ig. 44.

for RISF310 to At SF..1400, ;roe Fig. 45.

03-F19

Fig. 43 Bypass wiring example MSF 310-1400.




Ti

SOFTSTARTER

T2

Blue to terminal 75

Brown to terminal 77

U V

MOTOR

T3

Blue to terminal 76


03-F56_1

Fig. 44 Current transformer position when Bypass ArISF-017 to MSF-250.

SOFTSTARTER

Blue to terminal 75

St k.

T2 T3 Blue to terminal 76

NNN U


V

MOTOR


W

03-F57...1

Fig. 45 Cumin transformer position Oren Bypass MSF-310 to MSF- 1400.




7.13 Power Factor Control During operation, the soft starter continuously monitors the load on the motor. Particularly when idling or when only partially loaded, it is sometimes desirable to improve the power factor. If Power factor control (PFC) is selected, the soft starter reduces the motor voltage when the load is lower. Power consumption is

reduced and the degree of efficiency improved.

Setting of PFC

033

o F

,

Fl Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF PFC disabled

O11

PFC enabled. The Full voltage relay function does not work.

NOTE! If the PFC is used the EMCdirectIve is not fulfilled.

7.14 Brake functions There are two built in braking methods for applications were the normal stop ramp is not enough.

Dynamic DC-brake Increases the braking torque by decreasing speed. Soft brake Gives a high torque at the start of the braking and then also increasing torque by decreasing speed.

In both methods the MSF detects when the motor is

standing still, so rotating in wrong direction is avoided.

Dynamic Vector Brake Possible to stop motors with high inertia loads from close to synchronous speed. At 70% of the nominal speed a DC-brake is activated until the motor is standing still or the selected Braking Time has expired (see menu 34, next

Page). No contactor needed. For extra safety, the soft starter has a digital input signal for monitoring standstill so that at real motor standstill will stop the output voltage immediately (see § 7.19, page 53).

Soft, brake Even very high inertia loads can be stopped The Soft brake is a controlled reversing of the motor as the MSF measures the speed during braking. Two contactors are needed which can be placed on the in- or output of the soft starter. On the input the first contactor is connected to relay Ki which is

also used as a mains contactor. At 30% of the nominal speed a DC-brake is activated until the motor is standing still or the selected Braking Time has expired (menu 34, next page).


For extra safety, the soft starter has a digital input signal for monitoring standstill. So that the output voltage is stopped immediately (sec menu 57-58, §

7.19, page 53).

See Fig. 47 on page 47 for the following set-up sequence:

Soft brake is activated if menu 36=2 and menu 34 has a time selected (see next page). Menu 51 and 52 are automatically set to 5 and 4 to get the correct relay functions on K.1 and K2 (see §

7.17, page 51). Relay KI should be used to connect a contactor for supply Ll, L2,13 to MSF or motor. Relay K2 is used to connect phase shifting contactor to change Li, L2 and 13 to MSF or motor. At start KI is activated and connects LI, L2. L3 then the motor starts. At stop K1 opens and disconnects Li, L2, and L3 and after is K2 connects with the other phase sequence and the braking of the motor is active.

NOTE! Soft brake uses both programmable relays. For other functions, see also the function table In chapter 7. page 35.

NOTE! For several start/stops it Is recommend to use the PTC input.

A WARNING! If the Soft Brake function has been selected once and after that the Bypass function

' is selected, then the relay functions on K1 and K2 remain In the Soft Brake functionality. Therefore It

Is necessary to change the relay functions In menu 51-52 manually to the Bypass functions (see § 7.17, page 51) or reset to default In menu 199 (see § 7.26, page 63) and select the Bypass function again.

FON41°0

o F F

Braking time

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1- 120 sec

oFF Brake function disabled

1-120 Brake time

Torque

Softbrake

Dynamic DC

Nom. speed 03-F121

1:4!. 44 fItakiirq rhut:



Braking Strength

1 0 0 Default: 100

Range: 100 - 500%

036 ° 0

Brake method

Default: 1

Range: 1, 2

Dynamic vector brake, active

2 Soft brake active

11

L2

L3

N

PE

Q1 (twd)

Q2(rev)

U

L1 L2 L3 PE 01 02 PE 2 K1 22 23 K2 24 31 32 69 70

It T2 T3 PE 11 12 .13 14 15 16 17 18 19 75 76 77

14,1 II

0 stmt /stop

f.

03-F106

Fig. 47 Sofi brake wiring example.




7.15 Slow speed and Jog functions The soft starter is able to run the motor at a fixed slow speed for a limited period of time.

The slow speed will be about 14% of the full speed in the forward direction and 9% in the reverse direction.

The following fimctions arc possible: Slow speed controlled by an external signal. The digital input is used to run at slow speed at a

start or stop command for a selected number of pulses (edges) generated by an external sensor (photo cell, micro switch, etc.). See § 7.19, page 53 for more instructions. Slow Speed during a selected time period. The slow speed will he active after a stop command for a selected time period. See 5 7.19, page 53 for more instructions. Slow Speed using the "JOG"-commands. The slow Speed can be activated via the JOG keys on the keyboard or externally via the analogue input. Sec § 7.25, page 61 for more instructions.

7.15.1 Slow speed controlled by an external signal:

With these setting it is possible to have an external pulse or edge signal controlling the time that the Slow Speed is active either after a Start command or a Stop command or at both commands. The following menu's are involved:

Menu Function, See page

57 Digital input selection page 53

58 Pulse selection page 53

37 Slow speed torque page 49

38 Slow speedtime at start page 49

39 Slow speed time at stop page 49

40 DC-Brake at slow speed page 49

Installation is as follows: 1. Set the analogue input selection for Slow Speed

operation. Menu 57=2. See 5 7.19, page 53. See Fig. 37 on page.41 for a wiring example.

2. Select in menu 38 (see § 7.152, page 49) the Slow Speed at Start time. This time will now be the absolute maximum time for Slow Speed to be active after a start command, in case the external signal will not appear.

3. Select in menu 39 (see 5 7.15.2, page 49) the Slow Speed at Stop time. This time will now be the absolute maximum time for Slow Speed to be active after a stop conunand, in case the external signal will not appear.

4. Select in menu 57 (sec § 7.19, page 53) the number of edges to be ignored by the Slow Speed input, before a start or stop is executed at slow speed. The edges are generated by an external sensor (photo cell, micro switch, etc.).


The Slow Speed torque (menu 37) and DC-Brake after Slow Speed (menu 40) can he selected if needed. (see § 7.15.4, page 49).

When the number °ledges exceeds or the time expire, a start according to selected main function is made.

At stop, the motor will murip down (if selected) and DC brake (if selected) before a slow speed forward at stop will begin. Slow speed will last as long as the number of edges on the external input is below parameter value in menu 036 and the max duration time doesn't expires. When the number of edges exceeds or the time expire, a stop is made.

In Fig. 48 on page 48 the selected number of edges are 4. It is recommended to select DC-brake (se 5 7.14, page 46) before a slow speed at stop if it is a high inertia load. See Fig. 29 on page 33 for wiring diagram. In case one use DC-brake, see § 7.15.4, page 49.

d

Slow RUPIlp tins rull voitoge Vetsd at matt "'""rag ta start

Slott consnond

CIAVied

CA11:11111i 14,011 U S:11113i

;- Romp lithe &OW PI stop spood inc Wine a[ luep DC.Istoice

Tune when S4:041 is ieflOted

03444

Fig. 48 Slow speed controlled by an external signal.

This additional function can be used together with most of the main functions (see § 4.6, page 19).

loldN ° , 0

Slow speed torque

i

Default: 10

Range: 10-100

Select the magnitude of the slow speed torque.



7.15.2 Slow speed during a selected time It is possible to have a slow speed in forward direction before a start and after a stop. The duration of the slow speed is selectable in menus 038 and 039.

It is recommended to select DC brake (see § 7.14, page 46) before a slow speed at stop if it is a high inertia load. This slow speed function is possible in all control modes, keyboard, remote and serial communication.

[01318 g

oF Fl Slow speed time at start

Default: oFF

Range: off, 1- 60 sec

oFF Slow speed at start is disabled

1-60 Set slow speed time at start.

roidiq

1

Slow speed time at stop

[ 0.1 F I ,

I

Default: oFF

Ranger oFF, 1 - 60 sec

OFF Slow speed at stop is, disabled

1-60 Set stow speed time at stop.

0.14 nr,

Speed

ttotnia.4 sp.-, n

Slow 50....td

f ....:vaed Rang RI at Ftal app Koala tatta Staa: apaad Tam, takstas t Sta. I tanning IA stop. Ira et :ton

SIOD

sluttne DC

commancl Stopped 03..F41 Slap caaattand

Fig. 49 Slow speed .at start /.crop during a selected time.

The Slow speed torque (menu 37) and the DC-Brake after Slow speed (menu 40, §, 7.15.4, page 49) can be selected if needed.

7.15.3 Jog Functions The Jog commands can he used to let the motor run at a Slow speed (forward or reverse) as long as the Jog command is active.

The Jog commands can be activated in 2 different ways:

Jog keys The Jog-Forward and Jog-reverse keys on the control panel. The keys can he programmed separate for each function. See § 7.25, page 61 for more instructions External Jog command The external command is given via terminal 14 at the digital input. Only 1 fimction (forward or reverse) can be programmed to the digital input at the time. See § 7.19, page 53 for more instructions.

7.15.4 DC-brake after slow speed at stop [040) A DC-brake after a slow speed at stop is possible to have, i.e. for a, high inertia load or for a precise stop.

The current is controlled and the reference value for the normal DC-brake fianction is used (see 5 7.15.4, page 49). The duration for the DC-brake is possible to select.

This DC-brake function is not applied when the "JOG rArj " and "JOG " keys are used.

0140 0

0 F

DC-Brake at slow speed

F

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1-60

oFF DC-brake after slow speed at stop disabled.

1-60 DC-brake duration time after slow speed at stop.

FUNCTIONAL. DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 49



7.16 Motor data setting The first step in the settinp is to set menu 007 and 008 to "on" to be -able to reach the menus 041-046 and enter the motor data.

NOTE! The default factory settings are for a standard 4-pole motor ace. to the nominal current and power of the soft starter. The soft starter will run even If no specific motor data Is selected, but the performance will not be optimal.

r0 4,1 °0

14 0 0 Nominal motor voltage

Default: 400 V

Range: 200-700 V

Make sure the soft starters maximum voltage rating is suitable for chosen motor voltage.

014 2 0 0

Nominal motor current

Default: Nominal soft, starter current

Range: 25% - 150% of lnsoft in Amp.

ibil4T*0)

7. Nominal motor power

Default: Nominal soft starter power

Range: 25% - 300% of Pnsoft in kW

0 44 O

0

1 4 0 Nominal motor speed

Default: Nnsoft in rpm

Range: 500-3600 rpm


[614150

0. 6 Nominal motor cos phi

Default: 0.86

Range: 0.50-1.00

0 4 0 0

Nominal frequency

Default: 50 Hz

Range: 50/60 Hz

NOTE! Now go back to menu 007, 008 and set It to "oFF"

and then to menu 001.



7,17 Programmable relay K1 and K2 The soft starter has three built-in auxiliary relays, K3 (change over contacts), is always used as an alarm relay. The other two relays, K1 and K2 (closing contacts), arc programmable.

K I and K2 can be set to either "Operation", "Full Voltage" or "Pre-alarm" indication. If DC-brake is

chosen the relay K2 will be dedicated to this function.

Motor voltageU N

Function Operation

Run

Function Fullvolt age

1Time

Time

Time

II .44 al I

i Starting time voltage

Full

Stopping time

Start delay 0,1sec.

Fig, 50 Start/stop sequence and relay fraction "Operation." and "Full votive".

051 0°

Setting of K1 indication

Default: 1

Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.

K1 is set for "Operation"

2 K1 is set for "Full Voltage"

3 K1 is set for "Power pre-alarm"

4 No function

5 K1 is set for "Run"

052 g

2 Setting of K2 indication

Default: 2

Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

1 K2 is set for "Operation"

2 K2 is set for "Full Voltage"

3 K2 is set for "Power pre-alarm"

4 K2 is set for "Softbrake"

5 K2 is set for "Run"

WARNING! If the Soft Brake function has been selected once and after that the Bypass function Is selected, then the relay functions on 1(1. and 1(2

remain in the Soft Brake functionality. Therefore it is necessary to change the relay functions in menu 61-62 manually to the Bypass functions (see §

7.12, page 43) or reset to default In menu 199 (see § 7.28, page 63) and select the Bypass function again.




7.18 Analogue output The soft starter can present current, voltage and power on an analogue output terminal, for connection to a

recording instrument or a PLC. The output can be

configured in 4 different ways, 0-10V, 2-10V, 0-20mA or 4-20 mA. To install the instrument proceed as follows:

1. Connect the instrument to terminal 19 (+) and 15 (-).

F. 5I Wiring for analogue output.

2. Set Jumper J2 on the PCB board to voltage (U) or current (1) signal position. Factory setting is voltage (U). Sec Fig. 52 on page 52 and Fig. 24 on page 28.

Fig. 52 Se tin.s, of ctirreni or voltage output.

3. Set the parameter in menu 054.

[015 4 g

0 Analogue output

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1, 2

oFF Analogue ouput is disabled

1 Analogue output is set to 0-10V/0-20mA

2 Analogue output is set to 0-10V/4-20mA


4. Choose a read-out value in menu 055

PP151g

1 Analogue output value

Default:

Range: 1, 2, 3

I. RMS current, default range 0-5x In

2 Line input RMS voltage, default range 0-720V

3 Output shaft power, default range 0-2xPn

5. Set analogue output gain to adjust the range of chosen analogue. output value in incurs 056.

0 5 6 0 0

1 o Analogue output gain

Default: 100%

Range: 5.150%

Example on settings:

Set value (scale usenie Pscaie

100% 0-5x1r, 0-720V 0-2x13,-,

50% 0-2.5x1, 0-360V 0-Pa



7.19 Digital input selection The analogue input can be used as a digital input. This is programmed in Menu 57. There arc 4 dill rent functions;

Rotation sensor input (Or braking functions. See 5 7.14, page 46. Slow speed external controlled. See § 7.15.1, page 48. Jog functions. forward or reverse enabled. Sec § 7.25, page 61.

Fig. 53 shows how to set the input for voltage or current control, with jumper J1 the control board. The default setting for J1 is voltage control.

Fig. 53 Setting off 1 for current or voltage control.

Fig. 54 shows a wiring example for the analogue input as it is used for digital input.

Fig. 54 Wiring for slow speed external input.

NOTEI If the Main Function Analogue control Is programmed (see § 7.8, page 41) the analogue Input can not be

used for digital signal Input. The menu 57 is then automatically set to OFF.

0 5 7 ° 0

Digital

0 1 F Input selection

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1-4

oFF No digital input control

1 Rotation sensor for brake functions

2 Slow speed function

3 Jog forward command

4 Jog reverse command

NOTE! Jog forward, reverse has to be enabled, see § 7.25, page 61.

Depending on the selection made in menu 57, menu 58 is used to program the number of the edges. The edges can be generated by an external sensor (photo cell, micro switch etc.).

0 8 ° o

Digital input pulses

Default: 1

Range: 1-100

If Menu 57=1 A positive or negative edge at analogue input from a rotation sensor will give a signal to stop the braking voltage. If Menu 57=2 The number of edges to be ignored by the slow speed input, before a start or stop is executed at slow speed.




7.20 Parameter Set Parameter Set, an important function which can be handy when using one soft starter to switch in and start different motors, or working under variable load conditions. For example; starting and stopping conveyor belts with different weight on the goods from time to ci me.

For sets of parameters can he controlled either from the keyboard, the external control inputs or the serial interface (option). lip to 51 different parameters can be set for each Parameter Sec.

1

Parameter Set 4

1

Parameter Set 3

Parameter Set 2

001, 002, 003, 004, 006, 011, 012, 013, 014, 016, 017, 020, 021, 022, 023, 024, 025, 030, 031, 032. 033, 034, 035, 036, 037. 038, 039, 040, 041, 042, 043, 044, 045, 055, 056, 057, 058, 074, 075, 081, 082, 083, 084, 085, 086, 091, 092, 093, 094, 095 096, 097, 098, 099, 101, 102. 103, 104

03-148

Common for all parameter set

007, 008, 046, 051, 052, 061, 071, 072, 088, 089, 105, 111, 112, 113, 114, 199, 206

Fig. 55 Parameter overview

When 'Parameter set' in menu 061 is set to 0 (external selection), only parameters in Menu 006 (Control mode) and 061 (Parameter set) can he changed. All other parameters are not allowed to change.

it is possible to change parameter set at stop and at full voltage running.

54. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

folsdril ° 0

,

Parameter set

Default: 1

Range: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4

0 Parameter set are selected by the external input 16 and 17 (see below).

1, 2, 3, 4 Selection of parameter set 1-4.

Fig. 56 Connection of external control inputs.

Parameter Set PS1 (16-18) PS2 (17-18)

1 Open Open ') Closed Open 3 Open Closed 4 Closed Closed



7.21 Motor protection, overload (F2 alarm)

In many cases it is convenient to have a complete starter. The soft starter have a possibility to use either an input PTC signal from the motor, an internal thermal model of the motor for thermal protection or both together at the same time. Slight overload for long time and several overloads of short duration will be detected with both methods.

0-17 Fir 0

[ Motor PTC Input

Default: no

Range: no, YES

no Motor PTC input is disabled

YES

Motor PTC input is activated: - Connect the PTC to terminals 69

and 70, see table 12, page 32 and § Fig. 30. page 34.

- A to hot motor will give an F2 alarm. The alarm can only be resetted after cooling down of the motor.

NOTE! Open terminals will give an F2 alarm immediately. Make sure the PTC Is always connected or the terminals are shorted.

NOTE! The internal motor thermal protection will still generate an alarm if it is not selected oFF.

1°171210

Internal motor thermal protection

[ 1 0 Default: 10


oFF Internal motor protection is disabled.

240

Selection of the thermal curve according to Fig. 57 - Check that menu 042 is set to the

proper motor current (see § 7.16, page 50).

- If the current exceeds the 100% level an F2 alarm is activated.

- The motor model thermal capacity must cool down to 95% before reset can be accepted.

- Used thermal capacity in menu 073 in § 7.21, page 55.

NOTE! If 'Bypass' Is used check that the current transformers are placed and connected correctly (see Fig. 43 on

page 44).

CAUTION! Used thermal capacity is set to 0 if the control board loses its supply (terminal 01 and 02). This means that the Internal thermal model starts with a 'cold' motor, which perhaps In reality Is not the case. This means that the motor can be

overheated.

Overload time sec 100000

10000

1000 -

100

10

1

Fig. 57 'The theonal (taw

i LEA M ilk."L=mr.SE Cii."4=11%M=IMECCIMI MIIM...N111111

"--441110=IWIlk77-----twalra-=L-T1---:=.19 11111111111111.."4111111111111101111161118 617.1.11111111111... `411111112011111...

a

1

40s 30s

. 20s

lOs

5s

2s

Current (x In

10 03-F50

m)

FUNCTIONAL. DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU 55



loi71310

[ 0

Used thermal capacity

Default: -

Range: 0-150%

Read-out of the used thermal capacity. If menu 072 'Internal motor thermal protection' is selected oFF, the capacity is shown as if the default class 10 was selected.

017 4 ° o

o F FI Starts per hour limitation

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1-99/hour

oFF Starts per hour limitation is disabled.

1-99 Sets the start per hour limitation alarm. If the selected number is exceeded, alarm F11 occurs.

017 5 0°

o F F

Locked rotor alarm

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1.0-10.0 sec

oFF Locked rotor alarm is disabled

1.0-10.0 An F5 alarm is given when the rotor locks. The alarm is active during starting and running.


7.22 Mains protection

08 1 ° o

11 i

0 Voltage unbalance alarm

Default: 10

Range: 2 -25% Un

Insert limit in % of nominal motor voltage. Max unbalance in voltage between the 3 input phases is compared with the selected value. This is a category 2 alarm.

0 8 2 ° o

o F F

Response delay voltage unbalance alarm

Default: oFF


oFF Unbalance voltage alarm is disabled

1-60 Set the response delay time for unbalanced voltage alarm F8.

0830

1

1 1 1 5 Over voltage alarm

Default: 115

Range: 100 -150% Un

Insert limit in % of nominal motor voltage. Max voltage of the 3 input phases is compared with the selected value. This is a category 2 alarm.

(01841° 0

delay

o F F

Response over voltage alarm

Default: oFF


oFF Overvoltage alarm is disabled

1-60 Set the response delay time for over voltage alarm F9.



10181510

o F F

Under voltage alarm

Default: 85

Range: 75400 Un

Insert limit in % of nominal motor voltage. Min voltage of the 3 input phases is compared with the selected value. This is a category 2 alarm.

i 0-8 - I 61 0°

F , Response delay under

F voltage alarm

Default: oFF


oFF Under voltage alarm is disabled

1-60 Set the response delay time for under voltage alarm F10

10187 g

_ Ell Phase sequence

Default:

Range: L123, L321

L123 is the direct phase sequence. L321 is the reverse phase sequence.

01818 0 0

o F F

Phase reversal alarm

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF Phase reversal alarm is disabled

on

Sets the phase reversal Alarm. - Switch on the power supply first.

The phase sequence is stored as the correct sequence.

- Sets the menu 088 to "on". - Any reversal of phase sequence will

cause alarm F16.

NOTE! The actual phase sequence can be viewed In menu 87.

7.23 Application protection (load monitor)

7.23.1 Load monitor max and min/protection (F6 and F7 alarms)

MSF has a built in load monitor based on the output shaftpower. This is a unique and important function which enables protection of machines and processes driven by the motor connected to the soft starter. Both a Min and Max limit is possible to select.

In combination with the pre-alarm function, see

5 7.23.2, page 58, this create a powerful protection. An auto set function is also included for an automatic setting of the alarm limits. A start-up delay dine can be selected to avoid undesired alarms at start-up, see Fig. 58 on page 60.

NOTE! The load monitor alarms are all disabled during a

stop ramp.

018 9]°

I

1 1 0 Auto set power limits

Default: no

Range: no. YES

no Auto set is disabled

YES Auto set is activated if ENTER is pressed.

0900

0 Output shaftpower In %

Default:

Range: 0-200%

Measured output shaftpower in % of nominal motor power.

NOTE! System must be In full voltage running before an

auto set Is permitted.

The actual power is regarded as 1.00xPact. The set levels are

Power max alarm 1611140921: 1.15xP actual Power IllaX pre-alarm limit[094 1.100 actual Power min pre-alarm limit[0961: 0.90xP actual Power min alarm limit[098): 0.85xP actual

A successful auto set shows a message 'Set' for 3 s and if something goes wrong a message 'no' will be showed.




0 91 °°

-T- - -- 1

I

-----

1 --- --

0 Start delay power limits

Default: 10 sec

Range: 1-250 sec

From start co remand during selected delay time, all power load monitor alarms and pre-alarms are disabled.

0 9 ° o

1151 ) Max power alarm limit

Default: 115

Range: 5-200% Pn

Insert limit in % of nominal motor power. The actual power in % of nominal motor power, could be read out in menu 090. If output shaft power exceeds selected limit, an F6-alarm occurs after the response delay time. The 'Auto set' function in menu 089, affect this limit even if the alarm is set "oFF" in menu 093. This is a category 1 alarm.

0 9 3 ° o

o F F

Response delay max alarm

Default: oFF


oFF Max Alarm is disabled.

0.1-25.0 Sets the response delay of the Max Alarm level.

SS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SET-UP MENU

7.23.2 Pre-alarm It could be usetiil to know if the load is changing towards a load alarm limit. It is possible to insert both a

Max and Min pre-alarm limit based on the motor output shaft power. lithe load exceeds one of these limits, a pre-alarm condition occurs.

it should be noted that it is not normal alarms. They will not be inserted in the alarm list, not activating the alarm relay output, not displayed on the display and they will not stop operation. But it is possible to activate relay K I or K2 if a pre-alarm condition occurs. To have pre-alarm status on any of these relays, select value 3 in menu 051 or 052 (sec § 7.17, page 51).

A start-up delay time can be selected in menu 091 to avoid undesired pre-alarms at start-tip. Note that this time is also shared with power Max and Min alarms.

NOTE! The pre-alarm status is always available on the serial communication.

0 9 4 ° o

limit

1 I

1 1 0 I

Max power pre-alarm

Default: 110

Range: 5 -200% Pn

Insert limit in % of nominal motor power. The actual power in % of nominal motor power, could be read out in menu 090. If output shaft power exceeds selected limit, a pre-alarm occurs after the response delay time. The 'Auto set' function in menu 089, affect selected limit even if the pre-alarm is set "oFF" in menu 095.

0950

o F 1 Max pre-alarm response

delay

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 0.1 - 25.0 sec

oFF Max Pre-Alarm is disabled.

0.1-25.0 Sets the response delay of the Max Pre-Alarm level.



(o[61610

19 °1

Min power pre-alarm limit

Default: 90%

Range: 5 -200% Pn

Insert limit in% of nominal motor power. The actual power in % of nominal motor power, could be read out in menu 090. If output shaft power goes below selected limit, a pre-alarm occurs after the response delay time. The 'Auto set' function in menu 089, affect selected limit even if the pre- alarm is set "oFF" in menu 097.

0 911 g

o F

Min pre-alarm response delay

F

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 0.1 - 25.0 sec

oFF Min Pre-Alarm is disabled.

0.1-25.0 Sets the response delay of the Min Pre-Alarm level. The Min Pre-alarm is disabled during a stop ramp down.

Min power alarm limit

0 9j8 0 0

----- -- -- -- ------.

i8. 5 Default: 85

Range: 5-200% Pn

Insert limit in % of nominal motor power. The actual power in % of nominal motor power, could be read out in menu 090. If output shaft power goes below selected limit, an F7-alarrn occurs after the response delay time. The 'Auto set' function in menu 089, affect this limit even if the alarm is set 'oFF' in menu 099. This is a category 1 alarm.

161 19j° 1 0

o1FF Min alarm response delay

Default: oFF


oFF Min. Alarm is disabled

0.1 -25.0. Sets the response delay of the Min Alarm level. The Min alarm is disabled during a stop ramp down.




cr)

92 Max Alarm (115%)

Start ramp

94 Max Pre-alarm (110%)

100% Default:PNONi or

Autoset.PMOM ENTARY

96 Min Pre-alarm (90%)

98 Min Alarm (85%)

Max Alarm 193 Resvr Delay (1s)

Max Pre-alarm

Min Pre-alarm

Min. Alarm

Under load situation Overload situation

95 Response Delay (1s)

97 Response Delay (1s)

93 REEF E Delay (1s)

95 Response Delay (Is)

91 Start Delay(10s)

03-F96



7.24 Resume alarms

7.24.1 Phase Input failure Fl Multiple phase failure. Shorter failure than 100ms is ignored. If failure duration time is between 100 ins and 2 s, operation is temporary stopped and a soft start is made if the failure disappears before 2 s. if failure duration time is longer than 2 s, an F I alarm is given in cat. 2. Single phase failure. During start up (acceleration) the behaviour is like multiple phase failure below When full voltage running there is a possibility to select the behaviour.

1101° i 0

) Run at single phase loss

0 I

Default: no

Range: no, YES

no Soft starter trips if a single phase loss is detected. Alarm Fl (category 2) will appear after 2 sec.

YES

Soft starter continues to run after a

single phase loss. - Alarm Fl appears after 2 sec. - If the loose phase is reconnect the

alarm is reset automatically. - If running on 2 phases, a stop com-

mand will give a Direct on line, stop (freewheel)

7.24.2 Run at current limit time-out. F4 In modes 'Current limit at stare and 'Voltage ramp with current limit at start' an alarm is activated, if still operating at current limit level when selected ramp time exceeds. If an alarm occurs there is a possibility to select the behaviour.

1 0J2 0 0

limit

njo Run at current time-out

Default: no

Range: no, YES

no Soft starter trips if the current limit time-out. is exceeded. Alarm F4 (category 2) appears.

YES

Soft starter continues to run after the current limit time-out has exceeded: - Alarm F4 appears - The current is no longer controlled

and the soft starters ramps up to full voltage with a 6s ramp time.

- Reset the alarm with either ENTER/ RESET key or by giving a stop command.

7.25 Slow speed with JOG Slow speed with "JOG" is possible from the "JOG" keys, but also from terminals, see menu 57 page 53 and serial comm. The "JOG" is ignored if the soft starter is

running. The slow speed "JOG" function has to he

enabled for both forward and reverse directions in menus 103 and 104, see below.

NOTE! The enable functions Is for all control modes.

(103)0

1

0 JOG forward enable

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF JOG forward disabled

on JOG forward enabled

1 4 °o

1 .

o,F F

JOG reverse enable

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, on

oFF JOG reverse disabled

on JOG reverse enabled

Fig. 59 The 2 jog keys.




7.26 Automatic return menu often it is desirable to have a specific menu on the display during operation, i.e. IL MS current or power con, sumption. The Automatic return menu fiinction gives the possibility to select any menu in the menu system.

The menu selected will come. up on the display after 60 sec. if no keyboard activity. The alarm messages

(F1 -F16) have a priority over menu 105 (as they have for all menus).

1011 5 °

F

1 Automatic return menu

F '

Default: oFF

Range: oFF, 1-999

1-999 Pressing "+"/"-" will lead through the menu system.

7.27 Communication option, related Parameters

The following parameters have to be set-up: - Unit address.

- Baud rate. - Parity - Behaviour when contact broken.

Setting up the communication parameter must he

made in local 'Keyboard control' mode. See §, 7.2, page 37.

111 °

I

1

1 1 Serial comm unit address

Default: 1

Range: 1-247

This parameter will select the unit address.

1120

I 9.6 Serial comm baudrate

Default: 9.6

Range: 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 kBaud

This parameter will select the baudrate.


- ---- Serial comm parity

11 ° 0

------- 0

Default: 0

Range: 0.1

This parameter will select the parity. 0 No parity. 1 Even parity.

Serial comm. broken alarm If control mode is 'Serial comm. control' and no contact is established or contact is broken the Soft starter consider the contact to be broken after 15 sec, the soft starter can act in three different ways:

I Continue without any action, at all. 2 Stop and alarm after 15 sec.

3 Continue and alarm after 15 sec.

If an alarm occurs, it is automatically reset if the communication is re-established. It is also possible to reset

the alarm from the soft starter keyboard.

114 ° 0

Serial comm. contact Interrupted

Default: 1

Range: oFF, 1, 2

This parameter will control the behaviour in the soft starter when the serial comm. is interrupted. oFF No alarm and continue operation. 1 Alarm and stop operation. 2 Alarm and continue operation.



7.28 Reset to factory setting [199] When selecting reset to factory settings:

All parameters in all parameter sets will have default factory settings. Menu 001 will appear on the display. Note that the alarm list, the power consumption and the operation: time will not have default settings.

1'19 9 ° o

n o Reset to factory settings

Default: no

Range: no, YES

no No reset

YES Reset all functions to the factory defaults incl. all 4 Parameter Sets.

NOTE! Reset to factory settings Is not allowed at run.

7.29 View operation

General The soft start includes as standard a numerous metering functions which eliminates the need of additional transducers and meters.

Measured values - Current RMS 3-phase current and per phase

- Voltage RMS 3-phase voltage and per phase

- Output shaft power /torque kW/Nm - Power factot - Power consumption in kWh - Operation time in hours

Viewing of the measured values. After setting motor data, and extended functions one can set menu 008 in oFF and will then automatically move to menu 201, the first menu viewing the, measured values and thus eliMinate to scroll through menu Oil to menu 199.

2 ,

01 ° 0

i . 0

RMS current

Default -

Range: 0.0 - 9999Amp

Read-out of the RMS motor current.

NOTE! Thls is the same read-out as menu 005 see § 7.1.1, page 36.

2 0i2 0

0.0 RMS main voltage

Default: -

Range: 0-720V

The RMS input main voltage.

203 o o

0. 0 Output motor shaftpower

Default: -

Range: -9999 -+9999kW

Viewing will show negative value if generator mode.

204 ° o

1

--------- 0 0

.1

Power factor

Default: -

Range: 0.00-1

View the actual power factor.

NOTE! The power factor viewing will not work at bypass even If the current transformers are mounted outside the soft start.

1210 oo

N. 0 0 0 Total power consumption

Default:

Range: 0.000 -2000MWh

View the tota power consumption.




[21016

No1 Reset of power consumption

Default: no

Range: no, YES

no No reset of power consumtion.

YES Reset power consumption in menu 205 to 0.000.

216710 ..... ..-..J , 0

I

0. ,

Motor shaft torque

Default: -

Range: -9999'- + 9999Nm

Viewing will show negative value if generator mode.

210 E3' ° o

1 0 I I 1

Operation time

Default: -

Range: Hours

Operation time is calculated when the soft starter is in RUN mode. After 9999 hours the display will show two values. Example: 12467 hours shows 1 1 sec

2467 5sec

21-11-110

0. RMS current in phase L1

0 Default: -

Range: 0.0 - 9999A trip

View the current in phase L1.


I 1

12

0. 0 RMS current In phase

Default: -

Range: 0.0- 9999Amp


F2Ti. 31g

0.0 RMS current in phase L3

Default: -

Range: 0.0 - 9999Amp


2 1 4 g

Main voltage L1-L2

Default: -

Range: 0-720V

View main voltage L1-L2.

215 Main voltage L1-L3

Default: -

Range: 0 - 720V


1211 6 0°

L2-13

I

Main voltage

Default: -

Range: 0 - 720V




7.30 Keyboard lock The keyboard can be locked to prohibit operation and parameter setting by an unauthorised. Lock keyboard by pressing both keys "NEXT " and "ENTER

" for at least 2 sec. The message '- Lac' will display when locked. To unlock keyboard press the same 2 keys "NEXT " and "ENTER " for at least 2 sec. The message 'unto' will display when unlocked.

In locked mode it is possible to view all parameters and read-out, but it is forbidden to set parameters and to operate the soft starter from the keyboard.

The message '-Loc' will display if trying to set a

parameter or operate the soft starter in locked mode. The key lock status can be read out in menu 221.

2210

I

I

n 1 o Locked keyboard Info

Default: no

Range: no. YES

no Keyboard is not locked

YES Keyboard is locked

7.31 Alarm list The alarm list is generated automatically. It shows the latest 15 alarms (F I - F16). The alarm list can be useful when tracing a failure in the soft starter or its control circuit. Press key 'NEXT " or "PREV " to reach the alarm list in menus 901-915 (menu 007 has to be ON).

9 011 o o

Fill Default:

1

-

Range: F1 -F16

View actual. alarm




8. PROTECTION AND ALARM

The soft starter is equipped with a protection system for the motor, the machine and for the soft starter itself. Three categories of alarm are available:

Category 1 Alarm that stops the motor and need a separate reset before a new start can he accepted. Category 2 Alarm that stops the motor and accepts a new start command without any separate reset. Category 3 Alarm that continues to run the motor.

All alarm, except pre-alarm, will activate the alarm relay output K3, flash a red fault number on the display and it will also be placed in the alarm list. As long as the alarm is active, the display is locked in the alarm indication.

The relay output 1C3 can be used in the control circuit for actions needed when alarm occurs.

If more than one alarm. is active, it is the last alarm that is presented on the display.

8.1 Alarm description

8.1.1 Alarm with stop and requiring a separate reset

Operation will stop for a category I alarm. A separate reset is needed before a new start command is accepted. It is possible to reset from keyboard (pushing "ENTER/RESET") regardless of selected control mode. It is also possible to reset the alarm from the actual control mode (i.e. if control mode is serial communication, a reset is possible to do from serial communication).

A reset is accepted first when the alarm source goes back to normal.

When a reset is made, the alarm relay output K3 is deactivated, the alarm indication on the display disappear and the original menu shows.

After a reset is made the system is ready for a new start command.

8.1.2. Alarm with stop and requiring only a new start command

Operation will stop for a category 2 alarm. A restart can be done and at the same time the alarm relay output K3 is deactivated, the alarm indication on the display disappear and the original menu shows.

It is still possible to reset the alarm in the same way as for category 1 alarms (see 8.1.1), if a start is not required at the time.

66 PROTECTION AND ALARM

8.1.3 Alarm with continue run Operation will continue run for a category 3 alarm. Some different reset behaviour is possible (see remarks for the specific alarms in 5 8.2, page 67).

Automatic reset when the alarm source goes back to normal. Automatic reset when a stop command is given. Manual reset during run.

When the reset occurs, the alarm relay output K3 is deactivated, the alarm indication on the display disappear and the original menu shows.



8.2 Alarm overview

Display Indication Protective function Alarm category Remark

Fl Phase input failure.

Cat 3. Run with auto reset,

Single phase failure when full voltage running if menu 101 'Run at phase loss' = YES. If the fault phase comes back, an automatic reset is made.

Cat 2. Stop with reset in start. Multiple phase failure or single phase failure when not full voltage running or if menu 101 ' Run at phase loss' = no.

F2 Motor protection, overload.

Cat 1. Stop with manual reset.

If menu 071 'Motor PTC input' = YES, cool down the motor. If menu 071 'Motor PTC input' = no, the internal model has to 'cool' down.

F3 Soft start overheated Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. If not cooled down, a reset will not be accepted.

F4 Full speed not reached at set current limit and start time.

If menu 102 'Run at current limit time-our = no. Cat 2. Stop with reset in start.

The current limit start is not corn- pleted.

If menu 102 'Run at current limit time-out' = YES. Cat 3. Run with manual reset.

When start time expired, a 6 sec ramp is used to reach full voltage, without control of the current. Reset the alarm with either a manual reset or a stop command.

F5 Locked. rotor. Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. Motor and/or machine protection.

F6 Above max power limit. Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. Machine protection.

F7 Below min power limit. Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. Machine protection.

F8 Voltage unbalance. Cat 2. Stop with reset in start. Motor protection.

F9 Over voltage. Cat 2. Stop with reset in start. Motor protection.

F10 Under voltage. Cat 2. Stop with reset in start. Motor protection.

Fll Starts / hour exceeded. Cat 2. Stop with reset in start. Motor and/or machine protection.

F12 Shorted thyristor. Cat 3. Run with manual reset.

When stop command comes, the stop will be a 'Direct On Line' stop, and the soft starter will be resetted. After this fault it is possible to start only in 'Direct On Line' mode. One or more thyristors probably damaged.

F13 Open thyristor. Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. One or more thyristors probably damaged.

F14 Motor terminal open. Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. Motor not correctly connected.

F15 Serial communication broken.

If menu 114 Serial comm. contact broken = 1. Cat 2. Stop with reset in start.

Serial communication broken will stop operation. Run from keyboard if necessary.

If menu 114 Serial comm. contact broken = 2. Cat 3. Run with auto reset.

Serial communication broken will not stop operation. Stop from keyboard if necessary.

F16 Phase reversal alarm. Cat 1. Stop with manual reset. Incorrect phase order on main voltage input.

PROTECTION AND ALARM 67



9. TROUBLE SHOOTING

9.1 Fault, cause and solution

Observation Fault Indication Cause Solution

The display is not illuminated. None No control voltage. Switch on the control voltage.

The motor does not run.

Fl (Phase input failure)

Fuse defective. Renew the fuse.

No mains supply. Switch the main supply on.

F2 (Motor protection, overload)

Perhaps PTC connection. Perhaps incorrect nominal motor current inserted (menu 042).

Check the PTC input if PTC protection is used. If internal protection is used, perhaps an other class could be used (menu 072). Cool down the motor and make a reset.

F3 (Soft start overheated)

Ambient temperature to high. soft starter duty cycle exceeded. Perhaps fan failure.

Check ventilation of cabinet. Check the size of the cabinet. Clean the cooling fins. If the fan(s) is not working cor- rest, contact your local MSF sales outlet.

F4 (Full speed not reached at set current limit and start time)

Current limit parameters are perhaps not matched to the load and motor.

Increase the starting time and/or the current limit level.

F5 (Locked rotor)

Something stuck in the machine or perhaps motor bearing failure.

Check the machine and motor bearings. Perhaps the alarm delay time can be set longer (menu 075).

F6 (Above max power limit) Overload

Over load. Check the machine. Perhaps the alarm delay time can be set longer (menu 093).

F7 (Below min power limit). Under load

Under load. Check the machine. Perhaps the alarm delay time can be set longer (menu 099).

F8 (Voltage unbalance) Main supply voltage unbalance. Check mains supply.

F9 (Over voltage) Main supply over voltage. Check mains supply.

F10 (Under voltage) Main supply under voltage. Check mains supply.

F11 (Starts/ hour exceeded)

Number of starts exceeded according to menu 074.

Wait and make a new start. Perhaps the number of starts / hour could be increased in menu 074.

113 (Open thyristor) Perhaps damaged thristor ps a damagy.

Make a reset and a restart. If the same alarm appears immediately, contact your local MSF sales outlet.

(Motor terminal open) Open motor contact, cable or motor winding.

If the fault is not found, reset the alarm and inspect the alarm list. If alarm larm 112 is found, a thyristor is probably shorted. Make a restart. If alarm F14 appears immediately, contact your local MSF sales outlet.

68 TROUBLE SHOOTING




The motor does not run.

F15 (Serial communication broken)

Serial communication broken.

Make a reset and try to establish contact. Check contacts, cables and option board. Verify - System address (menu 111).

Baudrate (menu 112). - Parity (menu 113). If the fault is not found, run the motor with keyboard control if urgent (set menu 006 to "1"). See also manual for serial communication.

F16 (Phase reversal)

Incorrect phase sequence on main supply. Switch L2 and L3 input phases.

- - - -

Start command comes perhaps from incorrect control source. (I.e. start from keyboard when remote control is selected).

Give start command from correct source (menu 006).

-Loc System in keyboard lock. Unlock keyboard by pressing the keys 'NEXT' and 'ENTER' for at least 3 sec.

The motor is run- ging but an alarm is given.

Fl (Phase input failure)

Failure in one phase. Perhaps fuse defective.

Check fuses and mains supply. Deselect 'Run at single phase input failure' in menu 101., if stop is desired at single phase loss.

F4 (Full speed not reached at set current limit and start time)

Current limit parameters are perhaps not matched to the load and motor.

Increase the starting time and/or the current limit level. Deselect 'Run at current limit time-out' in menu 102, if stop is desired at current limit time-out.

112 (Shorted thyristor)

Perhaps a damaged- thyristor.

When stop command is given, a free wheel stop is made. Make a reset and a restart. If alarm 114 appears immediately, contact your local MSF sales outlet. If it is urgent to start the motor, set soft starter in 'Direct On Line' (menu 024). It is possible to start in this mode,

By pass contactor is used but menu 032 'Bypass' is not set to "on".

Set menu 032 'Bypass' to "on".

F15 (Serial communication broken)

Serial communication broken.

Make a reset and try to establish contact. Check contacts, cables and option board. Verify - System address (menu 111). - Baudrate (menu 112). - Parity (menu 113). If the fault is not found, run the motor with keyboard control if urgent, see also manual for serial communication.

TROUBLE SHOOTING 69




The motor jerks etc.

When starting, motor reaches full speed but it jerks or vibrates.

If 'Torque control' or 'Pump control' is selected, it is necessary to input motor data into the system.

Input nominal motor data in menus 041-046. Select the proper load characteristic in menu 025. Select a correct initial- and end torque at start in menus 016 and 017. If 'Bypass' is selected, check that the current transformers are correct connected.

Starting time too short. Increase starting time.

Star brig voltage incorrectly set. Adjust starting voltage.

Motor too small in relation to rated current of soft starter.

Use a smaller model of the soft starter.

Motor too large in relation to load of soft starter. Use larger model of soft starter.

Starting voltage not set correctly

Readjust the start ramp.

Select the current limit function.

Starting or stopping time too long, soft does not work.

Ramp times not set correctly. Readjust the start and/or stop ramp time.

Motor too large or too small in relation to load. Change to another motor size.

The monitor funs- tion does riot work. No alarm or pre-alarm

It is necessary to input nominal motor data for this function . Incorrect alarm levels.

Input nominal motor data in menus 041.046. Adjust alarm levels in menus 091 - 099. If 'Bypass' is selected, check that the current transformers are correct connected.

Unexplainable alarm. F5, F6, F7, F8. F9, F10 Alarm delay time is to short.

Adjust the response delay times for the alarms in menus 075, 082, 084, 086, 093 and 099.

The system seems locked in an alarm.

F2 (Motor protection, overload)

PTC input terminal could be open. Motor could still be to warm. If internal motor protection is used. the cooling in the internal model take some time.

PTC input terminal should be short circuit if not used. Wait until motor PTC gives an OK (not overheated) signal. Wait until the internal cooling is done. Try to reset the alarm after a while,.

F3 (Soft start overheated)

Ambient temperature. to high. Perhaps fan failure.

Check that cables from power part are connectedin terminals 073, 074, 071 and 072. MST-017 to MSF5 should hand short circuit between 071 and 072. Check also that the fan(s) is rotating.

Parameter will not be accepted.

. . . _ lithe menu number is one of 020 - 025, only one can bee selected. In other words only one main mode-is possible at a time.

Deselect the other main mode before selecting the new one.

If menu 061, 'Parameter set' is set to "0", the system is in a remote parameter selection mode. It is now impossible to change most of the parameters.

Set the menu 061, 'Parameter set' to a value between "1" - '4" and then it is possible to change any parameter.

During acceleration, decelera- tion, slow speed, DC brake and Power factor control mode, it is impossible to change parameters.

Set parameters during stop or full voltage running.

If control source is serial comm., it is impossible to change parameters from keyboard and vice versa.

Change parameters from the actual control source.

Some menus include only read out values and not parameters.

Read-out values can not be alte- red. In table 13. page 35, read-out menus has '---' in the factory setting column.

-Loc Keyboard is locked. Unlock keyboard by pressing the keys 'NEXT' and 'ENTER' for at least 3 sec.

70 TROUBLE SHOOTING



10. MAINTENANCE

In general the soft starter is maintenance free. There are however some things which should be checked regularly. Especially if the surroundings are dusty the unit should be cleaned regularly.

WARNING! Do not touch parts Inside the enclosure of the unit when the control and motor voltage Is

switched on.

Regular maintenance Check that nothing in the soft starter has been damaged by vibration (loose screws or connections). Check external wiring, connections and control signals. Tighten terminal screws and bushar bolts if necessary. Check that PCB boards, thyristors and cooling fin are free from dust. Clean with compressed air if necessary. Make sure the PCB boards and thyristors are undamaged. Check for .signs of overheating (changes in colour on PCB boards, oNidation of solder points etc.). Check that the temperature is within permissible

Check that the cooling fan/s permit free air flow Clean any external air filters if necessary.

In the event of fault or if a fault cannot be cured by using the fault-tracing table in chapter 9. page 68.

MAINTENANCE 71



11. OPTIONS

The following= option arc available. Please contact your supplier for more detailed information.

11.1 Serial communication For serial communication the MODBUS RTU (R.S232/RS485) option card is available order number: 01-1733-00.

Fig. 60 Option R5232/485

11.2 Field bus systems Various option Cards are available for the following bus systems:

PRORBUS DP order number: 01-1734-01 Device NET, order number: 01-1736-01 LONWORKS: 01-1737-01 HP 10: 01-1738-01 INTERBUS -S: 01-1735-01

Each system has his own card. The option is delivered with an instruction manual containing the all details for the set-up of the card and the protocol for programming.

Fig. 61 Option Prolibus

72 OPTIONS

11.3 External PPU. The external PPU option is used to move the PPU (keyboard) from the soft starter to the -filint of a panel door or control cabinet.

The maximum distance between the soft starter and the external PPU is 3 m. The option can be Factory mounted (01-2138-01) or it can be built in later (01-2138-00). For both versions instruction /data sheet are available.

Fig. 62 Shows an example of the External PPU after it has been built in.

11.3.1 Cable kit for external current transformers

This kit is used for the bypass fimction, to connect the external current transformers more easy. order number: 01-2020-00.

Fig. 63. Cable kit



11.4 Terminal clamp Data: Single cables, Cu or Al Cables MSF type Cu Cable Bolt for connection to busbar Dimensions in min Order No. single Data: Parallel cables, Cu or Al Cables MSF type and Cu Cable Bolt For connection to btisbar DittlellSk OW In tom Order No: parallel

95-100 nun2 310 MIO 33x84A7 mm 9350

205-300 inm2 310 to -835 M10 35x87x65 9351

Fig. 64 f1,c terwith2tdartip.

OPTIONS 73



12. TECHNICAL DATA

3x200-525 V 60/60 Hz Model MSF017 MSF-030 MSF-045 MSF-060

Soft starter rating according to AC36a, see °hooter 4. page 13

5.0.30:5040 heavy

3.0-30:6040 normal/light

6.0-30:6040 heavy

3.030:60-10 normal/light

6.0-30:50-10 heavy

3,0-30:6040 normal/light

5.0-30:50-10 heavy

3.030:5040 normal/light

Rated current of soft starter (A) 17 22 30 37 45 60 60 72

Recommended motor size (kW) for 400 V 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 30 37

Recommended motor size (kW) for 525 V 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 37 45

Order number: supply voltage (100.240V) 01-1301:01 01-1302-01 0.1-1303-01 01430401

Order number: supply voltage (380-500V) 01-1301-02 01-1302-02 014303-02 01-1304-02

3x200-690V 50/60Hz Model MSF-017 MSF-030 MSF046 MSF-060


Motor power for 690V 15 18.5 2 2 30 37 55 55 75' I

01-1324-01 Order number: supply voltage (100-240V) 01-1321-01 01-1322-01 01-1323-01

Order number: supply voltage (380.500V) 011321-02 01-1322-02 01-1323-02 01-1324-02

Electrical Data

Recommended wiring fuse (Al 1) 25/50 1 32 35/80 I 50 50/125 J 80 63/160 I 100

Semi-conductor fuses, if required 80 A 125 A 160 A 200 A

Power loss at rated motor load (W) 50 I 70 90 I 120 140 1 180 180 J 215

Power consumption control card 20 VA 20 VA 25 VA 25 VA

Mechanical Data

Dimensions in mm HxWx0 320x126x260 320x 126x 260 320x 126x 260 320x 126x 260

Mounting position (Vertical/Horizontal) Vertical Vertical Vert. or iloriz. Vert, or Horiz.

Weight (kg) 6.7 6.7 6.9 6.9

Connection busbars Cu. (bolt) 1504 (MO) 15x4 (MO) 15x4 (M6) 15x4 (M8)

Cooling system Convection Convect len Fan Fan

General Electrical Data

Number of fully controlled phases 3

Voltage tolerance control Control +/- 10%

Voltage tolerance motor Motor 200-525 +/- 10%/200.690 + 5%, -10%

Recommended fuse for control card (A) Max 10 A

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Frequency tolerance +/ 10%

Relay contacts 3 x 8A. 250 V resistive load. 3A 2SOVAC inductive (PF=0.4)

Typo of protection/Insulation

Type,of casing protection IP 20

Other General Data

Ambient temperatures

In operation 0,- 40 °C

Max. e.g. at 50% IN 50 °C

In storage (-25) - (+70) °C

Relative air humidity 95%, non -condensing

Max. altitude without derating (See separate: Technical information 151) 1000 m

Norma/Standards, Conform to: IEC 947-4-2, EN 292, EN 60204, UL5O8

EMC. Emission EN 50081-2, (EN 50081-1 with bypass contactor)

EMC, Immunity EN 50082-2

1) Recommended wiring fuses for: Heavy (first column): ramp/direct start Normal /light (second column): ramp start

NOTES Short circuit withstand MSF017-060 6000 nes A when used with K5 or RKS fuses.

*2-polc mow!

74 TECHNICAL DATA



3x200-625 V 60/60 Hz Model MSF-075 MSF085 MSF.110 MSF-146

Soft starter rating according to AC35a, see chapter 4. page 19

5.0-30:5040 heavy

3.0-30:5040 normnlilight

6.0-30:5040 heavy

3.0-30:60-10 normal/light

5.0.90:6040 heavy


6.0-30:5040 heavy



Recommended motor size (kW) for 400 V 37 45 45 55' 55 75 75

Recommended motor size (kW) for 525 V 45 55 55 75* 75 90 90 110

Order number for supply voltage (100-240 V) 01-1305-01 01-1306-01 01-1307-01 01-1308-01

Omer number for supply voltage (380-550 V) 01-1305-02 01-1306-02 01430702 01-1308-02

3x200-690 V 50/60 Hz Model IVISF-075 NISF-085 MSF-110 MSF-145


Motor power for 690V 55 75 75 90 90 110 132 160*

Older number for supply voltage (100-240 V) 01-1325-01 01-1326.01 01-1327-01 01. 1328-01

Order number for supply voltage (380-550 V) 01-1325-02 01. 1326-02 01-1327-02 01-132802

Electrical Data

Recommended wiring fuse (A) 1) 80/200 I 100 100/250 I 125 125/315 I 180 160/400 I 200

Semi-conductor fuses, if required 250 A 315 A 350 A 450 A

Power loss at rated motor load 1W) 230 I 260 260 I

290 330 1 400 440 I 470

Power consumption control card 25 VA 25 VA 25 VA 25 VA

Mechanical Data

Dimensions in mm HxWx0 320x126x260 320x126x260 400x176x260 400x176x260

Mounting position (Vertical/Horizontal) Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Horiz.

Weight (kg) 6.9 6,9 12 12

Connection. busbars Cu, (bolt) - 15x4 (M8) 15x4 (M8) 20x4 (M10) 20x4 0110)

Cooling system Fan Fan Fan Fan


Number of fully controlled Phases 3


Voltage tolerance motor Motor 200.525 +/ 10%/200-690 -t- 5%. -10%


Frequency 50/60 Hz

Frequency tolerance +/- 10%

Relay contacts 8A. 250,V resistive load, 3A. 250 V inductive load (PF=0.4)

Type of protection/Insulation

Type of casing protection I

IP 20

Other General Data

Ambient temperatures In operation 0 - 40 °C

Max. e.g. at 80% IN 50 °C

In storage (-25) - (+70) °C

Relative air humidity 95%, non-condensing

Max. altitude without derating (See separate: Technical information 151) 1000 in

Norms/Standards; Conform to: IEC 947.4-2, EN 292, EN 602041, UL508

EMC, Emission EN 50081-2, (EN 50081-1 with bypass contactor)

EMC, Immunity EN 50082-2

1) Recommended wiring fuses tor: Heavy (first column): ramp/direct start Normal/Light (second column): ramp start

NOW Short oirouit withstand MSF07544510000 rms'A when used with K5 or RKS fuses.

* 2 -pole motor

TECHNICAL DATA 75



3x200-525 V 50/60 Hz Model MSF-170 MSF-210 MSF-250 MSF-310 MSF-370

Soft Matter rating according to AC36a, see chapter 4. page 13

5.0-30:

heavy

3.0-30:

normal/light

5.0-30:

heavy

3.0-30: 604.0

normal /light

6.0-30: 60-10 heavy

3.0-30: 50-10

normal/light

6.0-30: 60-10 heavy

3.0-30: 60.10

normal /light

5.0-30: 60-10 heavy

3.0-30: 50-10

normal/light

Rated current of soft starter (A) 170 210 210 250 250 262 310 370 370 450

Recommended motor size (kW) for 400 V 90 110 110 132 132 160' 160 200 200 250

Recommended motor size (kW) for 525 V 110 132 132 160 160 200 200 250 250 315

Order no. for supply voltage (100-240V) 01. 1309-11 01-1310-11 01-1311-11 01-1312-01 01.131301

Order no. for supply voltage (380.550V) 01-1309-12 01-1310-12 01.1311-12 01-1312-02 01-1313-02

3x200-690 V 50/60 Hz Model MSF170 MSF-22.0 MSF-250 MSF-310 MSF.370

Rated current of soh starter (A) 170 210 210 1 250 250 262 310 370 370 450

Motor power for 690 v 160 200 200 I 250 250 250 315 355 355 400

Order no. for supply voltage (100.240V) 01-132901 01. 1330-01 01133101 01-1332-01 01-1333-01

Order no. for supply voltage (380-550V) 01.1329-02 014330-02 01-133102 01-133202 01. 1333-02

Electrical Data

Recommended wiring (use (A) 1) 200/4001 200 250/4001 315 250/500 315 315/6301 400

800 A

400/8001 500

1000 A Semi-conductor fuses, if required 700 A 700 A 700 A

Power loss at rated motor load (W) 510 630 630 1 750 750 W 930 1 1100 1100 1 1535

Power consumption control card 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA

Mechanical Data

Dimensions mm HxWxO incl. brackets 500x260x260 500x260x260 500x260x260 532x547x 278 532x 547x 278

Mounting position (Vertical/Horizontal) Vert. or Hartz. Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or Hort/ Vert. or itoriz. Vert. or Horiz.

Weight (kg) 20 20 20 ' 42 46

Connection, Busters Al /Cu (bolt) 30x4 (M10) 30x4 (M10) 30x4 t M10) 40x8 (M12) 40x8 (M12)

Cooling system Fan Fan Fan Fan Fan


Number of fully controlled phases 3


Voltage tolerance motor Motor 200.525 +/- 10%/200-690 + 5%. -10%


Frequency 50/60 Hz

Frequency tolerance +1- 10%

Relay contacts 8A. 250 V resistive load, 3A. 250 V inductive load (PF.0.4)

Type of protection/Insulation

Type of casIng'protection. I

IP 20

Other General bag

Ambient temperatures In operation 0 - 40 °C

Max. e.g. at 80% IN 50'C

In storage (-25) (+70) °C

Relative air humidity 95%, non-condensing

Max. altitude without Berating (See separate: Technical information 151) 1000 m

Norms/Standards, Conform to: IEC 947.4-2, EN 292. EN 60204-1. (01508, only MSF-170 to MSF-250)

EMC. Emission EN 50081-2, (EN 50081-1 with bypass contactor)

EMC. Immunity EN 50082-2

11 Recommended wiring fuses'for: Heavy (first column): ramp/direct start NormaViIght (second column): ramp start

NOTEI Short circuit withstand 613F170.250 18000 ems A when used with K6 or RK6 fuses.

* 2-pole motor

76 TECHNICAL DATA



3x200-525V 60/60Hz Model MSF-450 MSF-570 MSF-710 MSF-835 MSF 1000 MSF-1400

Soft starter rating according to AC36a, see chapter 4. page 13

6.0-30:

heavy

3.0-30: 60-10

norma/ tight

6.0-30:

'' heavy

3.0-30: 50.10

normal/ lied

6.0-30:

;;;,.. 3.0-30: 50.10

normal/ light

6.0-30:

"

3.0-30: 60-10

norrnal/ light

6.0-30: 60-10 heavy

3.0-30:

5""0 normal/ light

6.0-30: 60-10 heavy

3.0-30: 60-10

norrnal/ light

Rated current of soft starter (A) 450 549 570 710 710 835 835 980 1000 1125 1400 1850

Recommended motor size (kW) for 400 V 250 315 315 400 400 450 450 560 580 630 800 930

Recommended motor size (kW) for 525 V 315 400 400 500 500 560 600 630 660 710 1000 1250

Omer no. for supply voltage (100-240V) 01-1341-01 01-1315-01 01-1316-01 01.1317-01 01-1318-01 01-1319-01

Order no. for supply voltage (380.550V) 01-1314.02 01-1310.02 01-1316.02 01-1317-02 01-1318-02 01-131902

3x200-690V 50/60Hz Model MSF -450 N1SF-570 MSF-710 MSF-835 MSF 1000 MSF -1400 Rated current of soft starter (A) 450 549 570 640 710 835 835 880 1000 1125 1400 1524

Motor power for 690V 400 560 560 830 710 800 800 1000 1120 1400 1600

Order no. for supply voltage (100.240V) 01-1334-01 01-1335.01 01-1338-01 01-1337-01 01-1338-01 01-1339-01

Order no. for supply voltage (380.550V) 01-1334-02 01-133502 01-1336-02 01-1337-02 01-1338.02 01-1339-02

Electrical Data

Recommended wiring fuse (A 1) 500/1 K 1 630 630/1 hi 800 800/1 k I 1 k 1 11/1.2k1 1 k 1k/1.4 11 1.2 k 1.4 k/1.81 1.8 k

Semi-conductor fuses, if required 1250 A 1250 A 1.800 A 2500 A 3200 A 4000 A

'Poway loss at rated motor load (W) 1.400 I 1730 1700 1 2100 2100 1 2500 2500 I 2875 3000 1 3375 4200 I 4950

Power consumption control card 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA 35 VA

Mechanical Data

Dimensions mm HxWx0 incl. brackets 532x547x278 687x640x302 687 ;640x302 687x640x302 90058755336 900x875x336

Mounting position (yortical/ilorizontel) Vert. or Horiz. Vert. or lionz, Vert. or NOti2. Vert. or Hertz. Vert. or Heriz. Vert. or Hartz,

Weight (Kg) 46 64 78 80 175 175

Connection, Busbars Al (bolt) 40x8 (M12) 40x10 (M12) 40x 10(M12) 40x10 (M12) 75x10 (M12) 75x 10(M12)

Cooling system Fan Fan Fan Fan Fan Fan


Number Of fully controlled phases 3


Voltage tolerance motor Motor 200-525 +/- 1014/200-690 + 5%. -.10%


Frequency 50/60 Hz

Frequency tolerance -1/- 10%

Relay contacts SA, 250 V resistive load. 34. 250 V inductive load (PF.0,4)

Typo otptection/Insulation

Type of casing protection I

IP00 1

IP 20

Other General Data

Ambient temperatures In operation 0 - 40 C Max. e.g. at 80%1N 50 C In storage I.25) - (470) C

Relative air humidity. 95%, non-condensing

Max. altitude without Berating (See separate: Technical information 151) 1.000 m

Norrns/Standards..Conform to: IEG 947-4.2, EN 292, EN 60204-1

EMC, Emission EN 50081-2. (EN 50081-1 with bypass contactor)

EMC, Immunity EN.50082-2

1) RecomMended wiring fuses for: Heavy (firSt column): ramp/direct Start Normal/Light (second column): ramp start

TECHNICAL DATA 77



Semi-conductor fuses Always use standard commercial fuses to protect the wiring and prevent short circuiting. To protect the thyristors against short-circuit currents, superfast semiconductor fuses can be used if. preferred (e.g. Bussmann type FWP or similar, see table below).

The normal guarantee is valid even if superfast semiconductor fuses are not used.

Type FWP Bussmann fuse

A 12t (fuse) x 1000

MSF-017 80 2.4

M SF-030 125 7.3

M SF-045 150 11.7

M SF-060 200 22

MSF-075 250 42.5

MSF-085 300 71.2

MSF-110 350 95.6

MSF-145 450 137

MSF-1708 700 300

MSF-2108 700 300

MSF-250B 800 450

M SF-310 800 450

MSF-370 1000 600

M SF-450 1200 2100

MSF-570 1400 2700

MSF-710 1800 5300

MSF-835 2000

MSF-1000 2500

MSF-1400 3500

78 TECHNICAL DATA



13. SET-UP MENU LIST

enu number Function/Parameter Range Par.set Factory

setting Value Page

001 Initial voltage at start 25 - 90% of U 1 - 4 30 page 36

002 Start time ramp 1 1- 60 sec 1 - 4 10 page 36

003 Step down voltage at stop 100 - 40% U 1 - 4 100 page 36

004 Stop time ramp 1 oFF, 2 - 120 sec 1- 4 oFF page 36

005 Current 0.0 - 9999 Amp ------- - page 36

006 Control mode 1, 2, 3 1 - 4 2 page 37

007 Extended functions & metering oFF, on ---- oFF page 38

008 Extended functions OFF, on - - oFF page 38

011 Initial voltage start ramp 2 30 - 90% U 1 - 4 90 page 38

012 Start time ramp 2 oFF, 1- 60 sec 1- 4 oFF page 38

013 Step down voltage stop ramp 2 100 - 40% U 1 - 4 40 page 38

014 Stop time ramp 2 oFF, 2. 120 sec 1. 4 oFF page 38

016 Initial torque at start 0. 250% Tn 1 - 4 10 page 39

017 End torque at start 50 - 250% Tn 1 - 4 150 page 39

018 End torque at stop 0-100% Tn 1 - 4 0 page 39

020 Voltage ramp with current limit at start oFF, 150 - 500% In 1 - 4 oFF page 39

021 Current limit at start oFF, 150 - 500% In 1 - 4 oFF page 40

022 Pump control oFF, on 1 - 4 oFF page 40

023 Remote analogue control oFF, 1, 2 1 - 4 oFF page 41

024 Full voltage start D.O.L oFF, on 1- 4 oFF page 41

025 Torque control oFF, 1, 2 1 - 4 oFF page 42

030 Torque boost active time oFF, 0.1 - 2.0 sec 1 - 4 oFF page 43

031 Torque boost current limit 300 -700%1,, 1 - 4 300 page 43

032 Bypass oFF, on :L - 4 oFF page 43

033 Power Factor Control PFC oFF, on 1 - 4 oFF page 46

034 Brake active time oFF, 1 - 120 sec 1 - 4 oFF page 47

035 Braking strength 100 - 500% 1 - 4 100 page 47

036 Braking methods 1, 2 1 - 4 1 page 47

037 Slow speed torque 10 - 100 1 - 4 10 page 49

038 Slow speed time at start oFF, 1 - 60 sec 1 - 4 oFF page 49

039 Slow speed time at stop oFF, 1 - 60 sec 1 - 4 oFF page 49

040 DC-Brake at slow speed oFF, 1-60 sec 1 - 4 oFF page 49

041 Nominal motor voltage 200 - 700 V 1 - 4 400 page 50

042 Nominal motor current 25-15 0% mp

In sort in A

1 - 4 1,50, in Amp page 50

043 Nominal motor power 25 - 300% of Pnsott in kW 1 - 4 Pnft in kW page 50

044 Nominal speed 500 - 3600 rpm 1- 4 Nnsari in rpm page 50

045 Nominal power factor 0.50 - 1.00 1 4 0.86 page 50

046 Nominal frequency 50, 60 Hz - 50 page 50

SET-UP MENU LIST 79



Menu number

Function/Parameter Range Par.set Factory setting

Value Page

051 Programmable relay K1 1, 2, 3, (4), 5 1 page 51

052 Programmable relay K2 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ---- 2 page 51

054 Analogue output oFF, 1, 2 1 - 4 oFF page 52

055 Analogue output value 1, 2, 3 1 - 4 1 page 52

056 Scaling analogue output 5 - 150% 1- 4 100 page 52

057 Digital input selection oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 1 - 4 oFF page 53

058 Digital input pulses 1-100 1 - 4 1 page 53

061 Parameter set 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 ------- 1 page 54

071 Motor PTC input no, YES ------- no page 55

072 Internal motor thermal protection class oFF, 2 - 40 sec ----- 10 page 55

073 Used thermal capacity 0- 150% ------- -- - - - - -- page 55

074 Starts per hour limitation oFF, 1- 99/hour 1 - 4 oFF page 55

075 Locked rotor alarm oFF, 1.0 - 10.0 sec 1 4 oFF page 55

081 Voltage unbalance alarm 2 - 25% Un 1. 4 10 page 56

082 Response delay voltage unbalance alarm oFF, 1 - 60 sec 1 - 4 oFF page 56

083 Over voltage alarm 100 - 150% U1, 1 - 4 115 page 56

084 Response delay over voltage alarm off, 1- 60 sec 1- 4 off page 56

085 Under voltage alarm 75 -100%14 1 - 4 85 page 57

086 Response delay under voltage alarm oFF, 1 - 60 sec 1 - 4 oFF page 57

087 Phase sequence L123, L321 ------ - page 57

088 Phase reversal alarm oFF, on - - - -- oFF page 57

089 Auto set power limits no, YES ------- no page 57

090 Output shaft power 0.0 - 200.0% Pn -- page 57

091 Start delay power limits 1 - 250 sec 1 - 4 10 page 58

092 Max power alarm limit 5 - 200% Pn 1 - 4 115 page 58

093 Max alarm response delay oFF, 0.1 - 25.0 sec 1 - 4 oFF page 58

094 Max power pre-alarm limit 5 - 200% Pn 1 - 4 110 page 58

095 Max pre-alarm response delay oFF, 0.1- 25.0 sec 1 - 4 oFF page 58

096 Min pre-alarm power limit 5 - 200% Pn 1 - 4 90 page 58

097 Min pre-alarm response delay oFF, 0.1 - 25.0 sec 1- 4 oFF page 59

098 Min power alarm limit 5 - 200%Pn 1 - 4 85 page 59

099 Min alarm response delay oFF, 0.1. 25.0 sec 1- 4 oFF page 59

101 Run at single phase input failure no. YES 1 - 4 no page 61

102 Run at current limit time-out no, YES 1 - 4 no page 61

103 Jog forward enable oFF, on 1 - 4 oFF page 61

104 Jog reverse enable oFF, on 1 - 4 oFF page 61

105 Automatic return menu off, 1.999 ------ oFF page 62

111 Serial comm. unit address 1 - 247 ------- 1 page 62

112 Serial comm. baudrate 2.4 - 38A kBaud ------- 9.6 page 62

80 SETUP MENU LIST



enu nMumber

Function/Parameter Range Par.set Factory set ting .

Value Page

113 Serial comm. parity 0, 1 -------- 0 page 62

114 Serial comm. contact broken oFF, 1, 2 ------ 1 page 62

199 Reset to factory settings no, YES no page 63

201 Current 0.0 - 9999 Amp . page 63

202 Line main voltage 0 . 720 V ----- page 63

203 Output shaft power -9999 - 9999 kW ------- ----- page 63

204 Power factor 0.00 - 1.00 - page 63

205 Power consumption 0.000 - 2000 MWh ------ _ __. page 63

206 Reset power consumption no, YES ------ no page 64

207 Shaft torque -9999 - 9999 Nm page 64

208 Operation time Hours ------ - - page 64

211 Current phase L1 0.0 - 9999 Amp - --------- page 64

212 Current phase L2 0.0 - 9999 Amp ------ ........__. page 64

213 Current phase L3 0.0. 9999 Amp --- -- -- page 64

214 Line main voltage L1 - L2 0 - 720 V ------ ------- page 64

215 Line main voltage L1 - L3 0 - 720 V ---- page 64

216 Line main voltage L2 - L3 0 - 720 V - -------- page 64

221 Locked keyboard info no, YES -- - no page 65

901 Alarm list, Latest error Fl - 116 - - - - -- -- page 65

902 -915 Alarm list, Older error in chronological order Fl - 116 _ _ ._ _ page 65

Explanation of units: U Input line voltage Un Nominal motor voltage. In Nominal motor current. Pn Nominal motor power. Nn Nominal motor speed. Tn Nominal shaft torque. lnsoft Nominal current soft starter. Pnsoft Nominal power-soft starter. Nnsoft Nominal speed soft starter.

Calculation, shaft torque

T

60A-211)

NOTE! The six main functions for motor control, menus 020-025, can only be selected one at a time.

SET-UP MENU LIST 81



14, INDEX

Numerics 2-wire start/stop 3-wire start/stop

A

Above max power limit Alarm category Alarm list

Alarm reset Ambient temperatures . 10, 20, 77 analogue control Analogue input Analogue output Analogue output gain Analogue output value Auto set power limits automatic reset Automatic return menu

B

Basic parameter setting Below min power limit Brake method Braking. Strenght Braking time I3usbars

Bypass Bypass contactor

C

Cabinet Checklist Clickson thcrntistor Combination matrix Complaint Confirm setting Connections Control mode Control voltage control voltage Control voltage connection Cooling fins cos phi Current Current in phase LI

Current in phase L2

Current in phase L3

Current limit Current limit time-out Current transformer

D

D.O.L start DC-brake DC-Brake at slow speed Decrease value Decrease value of setting

82 INDEX

17

67 67

65 23

74, 75,

32 32, 41

32, 52 52 52 57

37 62

10 67 47 47 46

25, 26

43 44

10

32 19

7

23 28, 32 23, 37

32 33

28, 31

24 50

63

64 64

64 39 61

45

41

46 49 23 23

Device connections 28, 31

different operation situation 22 Digital inputs 32 Dimension 25.74 DIN VIDE 0100 24

Direct On Line start 41

Dismantling 2

Display next window 23 Display previous window 23 Dual voltage ramp 38

E

Electrical characteristic 32 Electrical Data 74, 75, 76, 77 EMC 74, 73, 76, 77

Emergency 2

End torque 39

F

Factory settings 63

Features 9

Forward/reverse 34

Free circulation of air 24 frequency 50

Frequency inverter 20 Front cover 21

Full speed not reached 67

Full voltage 51

Full voltage start 41

Function 79

G

General Data 74 General description 21

H

Heat dissipation )0 High ambient temperatures 43

Increase value 23

Increase value of setting 23 Initial torque 39

Initial voltage at start tamp 1 36 Initial voltage at start ramp 2 38

INSPECTION AT DELIVERY 7

Installation 24

tnsulation test 20

,1

JOG Forward 23,61 JOG fivd/rev 23

JOG Reverse 23,61 Jumper J 41

Jumper J2 52

K

Keyboard 23

Keyboard lock keys

L

LED display Live circuit components Load monitor Locked rotor Low load

M

Main &unctions

Mains contactor Mains supply Mains voltage MAINTENANCE Matrix Max power alarm limit Max power pre-alarm limit Max pre-alarm response delay

Mechanical Data 74, 75, Menu

001

002 003 004 005 006 007 008 011 012 013 014 016 017 020 021 022 023 024 025 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046

23, 65 23

22 24

57

67 20

81

10

28, 31

10

71

19

58 ..... 58

58 76, 77

36 11, 36

36 11, 36 12, 36 12, 37

38 38 38 38 38

38 39 39 39 40 40 41

41

42 43 43 43 46 46

47 47 48 49 49 49

11, 50 50

11, 50 11, 50 11, 50 11,50



051 052 054 055 056 057 058 061

071 072 073 074 075 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 101

102

103

104 105 199

201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 211 212 213 214 215 216 221 901 RMS current read-out

Menu expansion Menu Structure MM alarm response delay Min power alarm limit Mill power pre-alarm limit Min pre -alarm response delay Minimum free space Motor

51

51

52 52 52 53

53 54 55

55 56

56 56 56 56

56

56 57

57 57

57

57

57 58

58

58

58 58

59

59 59

61

61

61

61

62 63

63 63 63 63 63 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64

23,65 65 12

38 22 59 59 59 69

24, 25 31

Motor current Motor data

Motor power Motor power supply Motor protection, overload Motor shaft torque Motor speed Motor terminal open Motor voltage MOUNTING MOUNTING/WIRING

N

Next Nominal frequency Nominal motor cos phi Nominal motor current Nominal motor power Nominal motor speed Norms /Standards 74, 75, NTC thermistor

0 Open thyristor Operation Operation time Operation/Sec-up Operator panel Output motor shaftpower Output shaftpower Over voltage

Parallel Parallel cables Parameter. Parameter Set PFC Phase compensation capacitor ..... Phase input failure Phase loss

Phase reversal alarm Phase sequence Pole-changing contactor Potentiometer Power consumption Power factor Power Factor Control Power loss PPU unit Pre-alarm Prevent damage to the thyristors Previous Programmable relay Programming and presentation (PPU) protection/insulation ... 74, 75, Protective earth PTC PTC Thermistor input Pump control

50 50

50 28, 31

55, 67 64

50 67 50 24 24

23

11

11

11

1

76, 77 32

67 51

63, 64

21

63 57, 63 56, 67

20 73

79

32, 54

46 20 67

6l 67 57

20

32

63

63

46 10

21

51, 58 .... 24

23

51

unit 21

76, 77 28, 31

55 12 40

Q Quick Set-up

R

Rating plate 10

Recyclable material 2

Regular maintenance 71

Relay K1 32, 51

Relay K2 32 Relay K3 32 Remote 23 Reset 23 reset Response delay max alarm 58 RMS current 16, 63 RMS main voltage 63

Rotating loads 20 Running motors 20 Running -LED 22

$ Safety 2, 6 Safety measures 10

Scrapping Selection of control mode 12 Semiconductor fuses 33, 78 Serial conun. 23 Serial communication broken 67

Shaftpower 57, 63 Shielded motor cable 20 Shorted thyristor 67 Simple soft start and soft stop 10

Slip ring motors 90 Slow blow fuses 33 Slow speed time at start 49 Slow speed time at stop 49 Slow speed torque 48

Small motor 20 Softbrake 51

Softstart overheated 67 Spare parts standard coirunereial fuses 78 Standard wiring 10, 33 Standards 6

Seta command 22 Saar delay power limits 58 Start ramp 1 16 Start ramp 2 38 Start the motor 12

Start time ramp 11

Start/Stop 12,23 Start/stop combination 19

Start/stop/reset from keyboard 12

Start/stop-LED 92

Starting 12

STARTING/OPERATING 79 Starts per hour 67 Starts per hour limitation 56 Step down voltage in stop ramp 2 38 Step down voltage stop ramp 1 36 Stop command 22 Stop ramp 1 36

INDEX 83



Stop ramp time 2 38 Stop time ramp l I 1

storage 7

Supply voltage switch

12, 74 2

Switch the device off 2 Switch-off procedures 2

TECHNICAL DATA 74 Terminal 12 Terminal clamp 78 Terminals Thermal capacity 56 Thermal protection 55 Tightening torque 25 Torque boost active time 43 Torque boost current limit 43 Torque booster 43 Torque control 42 Trained personnel 2, 10

Transport . 7 TROUBLESHOOTING 68 Two speed motor

U

Under voltage 57, 67

Unpacking 7

V

VIEW OPERATION 63 Voltage 63 Voltage unbalance 56, 67

Weight 74 Wiring circuit Wiring example 34

84 INDEX



J & P Richardson Industries Po; Ltd

6 Instruments

DAN FOSS - MBS 3000 060C-103 - Pressure Transmitter

SUPPLIED BY: Danfoss (Australia) Pty Ltd. Unit 3/8 Navigator Place, Hendra 4011, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (07) 3630 1899 FAX: (07) 3630 2122

CONTROL LOGIC - TH635 - Pump Hour Runmeter

SUPPLIED BY: CONTROL LOGIC QLD 34 Thompson Street, Bowen Hills 4006, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (07) 3252 9611

FAX: (07) 3252 8776




Data sheet MBS 3000 pressure transmitter for industrial applications

Introduction Designed for use in severe industrial environments

Enslosure and wetted parts of acid- resistant stainless steel (AISI 316L)

All standard output signals: 4-20 mA, 0-5 V,

1-5 V,1 -6 V, 0-10 V

A wide range of pressure and electrical connections

Temperature compensated and laser calibrated

Typical applications: - Pumps - Compressors - Pneumatics - Water treatment

Dimensions

Orderin Type code Page 4 8 2 5 7 1 3

AMP Superseal 1.5 series (male)

AMP Econoseal J series (male)

IEC 947-5-2 M12x1, 4-pin

ISO 15170-A1-3.2-Sn (Bayonet plug)

DIN 43650, Pg 9 2 m screened cable

Ordering

23

,T, 11

51-1

1/4- 18 NPT 1/2 - 14 NPT DIN 3852-E-G1/4 Gasket:

DIN 3869-14

G' /4A (EN 837)

G (EN 837)

G 1hA (EN 837)

Type code page 4

AC04 y AC08 GB04 ABO4 ABO6 ABO8

CDantossAlS 11-2002 DKACT.PD.P20.K2.02 520B1374



Data sheet Pressure transmitter for industrial application MBS 3000

Technical data Main specifications Pressure connections see page 1

Measuring ranges [bar] 0-1 0-1.6 0-2.5 0-4 0-6 0-10 0-16 0-25 0-40 0-60 0-100 0-160 0-250 0-400 0-600

Output signals 4-20 mA 0-5 V 1-5 V 1-6 V 0-10 V

Electrical connections see page 3

Performance (IEC 770)

Accuracy t0.5% FS (typ.) ±1% FS (max.)

Non-linearity (best fit straight line) 5 ±0.5% FS

Hysteresis and repeatability < ±0.1% FS

Thermal zero point shift .5 ±0.1% FS/10K (typ.) 5 ±0.2% FS/10K (max.)

Thermal sensitivity (span) shift 5 ±0.1% FS/10K (typ.) 5. ±0.2% FS/10K (max.)

Response time < 4 ms

Overload pressure 6 x FS (max. 1500 bar)

Burst pressure 6 x FS (max. 2000 bar)

Durability, P: 10-90% FS >10x106 cycles

Electrical specifications Nom. output signal (short-circuit protected)

4- 20 mA 0-5, 1-5, 1-6 V d.c. 0-10 V d.c.

Supply voltage [U9], polarity protected 9 32 V d.c. 9 -) 30 V d.c. 15 30 V d.c.

Supply - current consumption - 55 mA 58 mA

Supply voltage dependency 5 ±0.05% FS/10 V

Current limitation (linear output up to 1.5x nom. range) 34 mA (typ.) -

Output impedance - 52552

Load [RL] (load connected to OV) RL 5 (1.18-9V)/0.02 RL 10 kit RL 1516.2

Environmental conditions Medium temperature range -40 +85°C

Ambient temperature range (depending on electrical connection) see page 3

Compensated temperature range 0 --) +80°C

Transport temperature range -50 -4 +85°C

EMC - Emission EN 61000-6-3

Electrostatic discharge Air mode 8 kV EN 61000-6-2

Contact mode 4 kV EN 61000-6-2

- EMC Immunity RF field 10 V/m, 26 MHz - 1 GHz EN 61000-6-2

conducted 10 Vr,,, 150 kHz - 30 MHz EN 61000-6-2

Transient burst

surge

4 kV (CM),Clamp EN 61000-6-2

1 kV (CM,DM), Rg = 4251 EN 61000-6-2

Insulation resistance > 100 MO at 100 V d.c.

Mains frequency test 500 V, 50 Hz SEN 361503

Vibration stability Sinusoidal 15.9 mm-pp, 5Hz-25Hz

IEC 60068-2-6 20 g, 25 Hz - 2 kHz

Random 7.5 g ,,,,, 5 Hz - 1 kHz IEC 60068-2-34, IEC 60068-2-36

Shock resistance Shock 500 g / 1 ms IEC 60068-2-27

Free fall IEC 60068-2-32

Enclosure (depending on electrical connection) see page 3

Mechanical characteristics

Materials Wetted parts DIN 17440-1.4404 (AISI 316 L)

Enclosure DIN 17440-1.4404 (AISI 316 L)

Electrical connections see page 3

Weight (depending on pressure connection and electrical connection) 0.2-0.3 kg

2 DKACT.PD.P2O.K2.02 Danfoss 11 -2002




Electrical connections Type code, page 4

1 2 5 7 8 3

DIN 43650, Pg 9

.... ,

AMP Econoseal J series (male)

,------ni tied MN!)

IEC 947-5-2 M12x1

/^-- I

1111.1311

IkkAll=f

ISO 15170-A1-3.2-Sn (Bayonet plug)

1

/A

AMP 1.5

\,' , -

Superseal series (male)

I f) -4r_

N.,,,,,,,.'

2 m screened cable

li

tO

,..= r.

I

A,

m 21 .- 111

mn -0

r i

Ambient temperature

-40 --) + 85 °C -40 --) + 85 °C -25 -) +85 °C -40 -4 +85 °C -40 -> +85 °C -30 -) +85 °C

Enclosure

IP 65 IP 67 IP 67 IP 67 / IP 69K IP 67 IP67

Materials

Glass filled polyamid, PA 6.6

Glass filled polyamid, PA 6.6"

Nickel plated brass, CuZn/Ni

Glass filled polyester, PBT

Glass filled polyamid, PA 6.62)

Polyolifin cable with PE shrinkage tubing

Electrical connection, 4-20 mA output (2 wire)

Pin 1: +supply Pin 2: _ supply Pin 3: Not used Earth: Connected to MBS housing

Pin 1: +supply Pin 2: +supply Pin 3: Not used

Pin 1: +supply Pin 2: Not used Pin 3: Not used Pin 4: _ supply

Pin 1: +supply Pin 2: _ supply Pin 3: Ventilation Pin 4: Not used

Pin 1: +supply Pin 2: +supply Pin 3: Not used

Brown wire: +supply Black wire: _ supply Red wire: Not used Orange: Not used Screen: Not connected to MBS housing

Electrical connection, 0-5V 1-5V, 1-6V, 0-10V output

Pin 1: +supply Pin 2: _ supply Pin 3: Output Earth: Connected to MBS housing

Pin 1: +supply Pin 2: _ supply Pin 3: Output

Pin 1: +supply Pin 2: not used Pin 3: Output Pin 4: _ supply

Pin 1: +supply Pin 2: Output Pin 3: Ventilation Pin 4: -supply

Pin 1: +supply Pin 2: _ supply Pin 3: Output

Brown wire: Output Black wire: _ supply Red wire: + supply Orange: Not used Screen: Not connected to MBS housing

') Female plug: Glass filled polyester, PBT 2) Wire: PETFE (teflon)

Protection sleeve: PBT mesh (polyester)

C Danfoss 11-2002 DKACT.PD.P20.K2.02 3




Ordering of standard MBS 3000 with DIN 43650 plug Pg 9

Pressure connection

Pressure range Pe

Type Code no

G V. A

(EN 837)

0 - 1 bar MBS 3000 1011-1 A604 060G1113

0 - 1.6 bar MBS 3000 1211-1 A604 06061429

0 - 2.5 bar MBS 3000 1411-1 A604 060G1122

0 - 4 bar MBS 3000 1611-1 ABO4 06061123

0 - 6 bar MBS 3000 1811-1 ABO4 06061124 0 - 10 bar MBS 3000 2011-1 A504 06061125

0 - 16 bar MBS 3000 2211-1 ABO4 06061133

0 - 25 bar MBS 3000 2411-1 ABO4 06061430 0 - 40 bar MBS 3000 2611-1 ABO4 06061105

0 - 60 bar MBS 3000 2811-1 ABO4 06061106

0 - 100 bar MBS 3000 3011-1 ABO4 06061107

0 - 160 bar MBS 3000 3211-1 ABO4 06061112

0 - 250 bar MBS 3000 3411-1 ABO4 06061111

0 - 400 bar MBS 3000 3611-1 ABO4 060G1109

0 - 600 bar MBS 3000 3811-1 ABO4 06061110

Ordering of special versions MBS 3000

I I I

Pressure connection(see page 1) A B 0 4 Measuring G 1/4 A (EN 837)

range A B 0 6 G 3/8 A (EN 837) 0 - 1 bar 1 0 A B 0 8 G V, A (EN 837) 0- 1.6 bar 1 2 A C 0 4 1/4 -18 NPT 0 - 2.5 bar 1 4 A C 0 8 ... 1/2-14 NPT 0 - 4 bar 0 - 6 bar 0- 10 bar

1 6 18 2 0

G B 0 4 ... DIN 3852-E-G1/4, Gasket: DIN 3869-14 NBR

0 - 16 bar 2 2 0 - 25 bar 2 4 0 - 40 bar 2 6 0 - 60 bar 2 8 0- 100 bar 30 Electrical connection (see pages 1 and 3) 0- 160 bar 32 Plug, DIN 43650, Pg 9 0 - 250 bar 34 *)Plug, AMP Econoseal, J series, male, 0 - 400 bar 36 excl. female plug 0 - 600 bar 3 8 Screened cable, 2 m

*)Plug, IEC 947-5-2, M12 x 1, male, excl. female plug

Pressure reference

Plug ISO 15170-A1-3.2-Sn, male, excl. female plug

Gauge (relativ) Absolute

*) Plug, AMP Superseal 1.5 series male, excl. female plug

Gauge versions only available as sealed gauge versions

Output signal 4 - 20 mA 0- 5V 1- 5V 1- 6V 0 - 10 V

Dantoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochures and other printed material. Dantoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This also applies to products already on order provided that such alterations can be made without subsequential changes being necessary in specifications already agreed. All trademarks in this material are property of the respective companies. Dantoss and the Dantoss logotype are trademarks of Dantoss A/S. All rights reserved.

DK-6430 Nordborg Denmark

4 DKACT.PD.P20.K2.02 ©Dantoss 11-2002



Panasonic 5deas for Me

57.5 2.264

24 mm inch

.945

48 1.890

TH64 series (with reset button)

TH63 series (without reset button)

RoHS Directive compatibility information http://www.nais-e.com/

Features 1. Compact to save panel space The 24 x 48 mm hour meters are just half the DIN 48 x 48 standard size. They help save the panel space.

UL File No.: E42876 GSA File No.: LR39291 E 2. Reset button The hour meters can be reset to zero (TH64 series). 3. Wide-ranging measurement display The measurement can be displayed from 0.1 hour up to 99999.9 hours (TH63 series). The dial size is the same as that of 48 x 48 DIN size hour meters (TH14 and TH24 series). 4. Easy to install The flat terminals (#187) are used for easier wiring. There is no need to undo the lock spring. 5. High-performance sync motor with 50/60 Hz selector The noise-resistant, accurately turning motor is employed to provide for longer period of measurement. The power frequency can be selected for 50 or 60 Hz.

6. Rotary indicator The rotary indicator makes one turn every 72 seconds for monitoring. 7. Compliant with UL, CSA and CE.

Typical applications Management of small generators and food processing machines; hour counting for leased equipment; maintenance management of various equipment, etc.

?ecifications Ratedoperating -viiltage .- 12 V'AC,24 .V AC, 48V AC;i1-00-VAt ,:"1 10 V1,1,0,i1:1-5 to 120V Ac, 200,V AC 220.V2AC; 240,1rAG' -Allowable`operating.voltage range 85 to 115% of rated operating voltage

Rated frequency 50/60 Hz (selectable by switch)

Counting range - ' . 0 to 99999.9 hours (TH63 series) 0 to 9999.9 hours (TH64 series)

Minimum time display 0.1 hours (6 min)

Rated power consumption Approx. 1.5 W

'Insulation resistance (Initial value)' Min. 100 MD, Between live and dead metal parts (At 500 V DC)

Breakdown voltage (Initial value) 2,000 Vrms, Between live and dead metal parts

Max temperature rise 55°C 131°F

Vibration resistance- Functional 10 to 55 Hz: 1 cycle/min double amplitude of 0.5 mm (10 min on 3 axes)

Shock resistance - Functional Min 98 m/s (10 G} (4 times on 3 axes)

Destructive Min 980 m/s' (100 G) (5 times on 3 axes)

Ambient temperature -10 to +50°C +14 to +122°F Ambient humidity Max. 85% RH (non-condensing)

Weight Approx. 80 g 2.82 oz

Product types ' Type Operating voltage Part number Operating-voltage Part number periting voltage ' Part number]

TH63, series -

(without reset button)

100V AC TH631 24V AC TH634 115 to 120V AC TH637 200V AC TH632 48V AC TH635 220V AC TH638 12V AC TH633 110V AC TH636 240V AC TH639

TH64 series (with reset button)

100V AC TH641 24V AC TH644 115 to 120V AC TH647 200V AC TH642 48V AC TH645 220V AC TH648 12V AC TH643 110V AC TH646 240V AC TH649

Notes) 1. Only the metallic-looking (silver) panel mounting type is available. 2. Standard products are UL-recognized as well as CSA-certified. There is no need to add "U" at the end of the part number. Just specify the

standard part number when ordering.

All Rights Reserved © COPYRIGHT Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.



TH63TH64 Applicable standard

Safety standard : EN61010-1 Pollution Degree 2/Overvoltage,,Calegory II

(EMI)EN61000-6-4 Radiation interference electric field strength EN55011 Groupl ClassA Noise terminal voltage EN55011 Group1 ClassA (EMS)EN61000-6-2 Static discharge immunity EN61000-4-2 4 kV contact

8 kV air RF electromagnetic field immunity EN61000-4-3 10 V/m AM modulation (80 MHz to 1 GHz)

EMC ' EFT/B immunity 10 V/m pulse modulation (895 MHz to 905 MHz)

EN61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line) Surge immunity EN61000-4-5 1 kV (power line) Conductivity noise immunity EN61000-4-6 10 V/m AM modulation (0.15 MHz to 80 MHz) Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN61000-4-8 30 A/m (50 Hz) Voltage dip/Instantaneous stop/Voltage fluctuation immunity EN61000-4-11 10 ms, 30% (rated voltage)

100 ms, 60% (rated voltage) 1,000 ms, 60% (rated voltage) 5,000 ms, 95% (rated voltage)

Dimensions

Reset button (only for TH64 type)

24 .945

HOUR ittETER

LAMM] [i]

Rotary indicator

48 4.5 1.890 .177

Frequency selector lever / No.187 quick connect terminal

53 2.087

66 2.598

mm inch General tolerance: ±0.5 ±.020

Wiring diagram

Operating power supply

Panel cutout dimensions

Panel (thickness: 1 to 9 mm .039 to .354 inch

For .anel thickness of

5 to 9 mm .197 to .354 inch)

Mountin (included)

mm inch

sprin

Mounting 1. Cut a 22.213 x 451.6 mm (.874112 x

1.772124 inch) opening in the panel. 2. Swing the mounting spring to the rear

of the hour meter and fit the hour meter into the panel opening. (There is no need to detach the mounting spring from the hour meter.) If the panel is 5 to 9 mm .197 to .354 inch thick, move the mounting spring to the other hole toward the rear of the hour meter.

3. Swing the mounting spring to the front of the hour meter to secure the hour meter to the panel.

4. Wire the supplied quick connectors and connect to the hour meter. Be sure to use the supplied insulating sleeves to cover the connectors.




PRECAUTIONS IN USING THE HOUR METERS 1. Frequency setting Frequency is specified for AC motor-driven hour meters. Before installing, be sure to check your local power frequency. 2. Connections TH13,23,14,24,40,50,63,64

'''."----,,,... For measuring energized time of load For measuring operation time of load

Single phase - - slcho (Linked

Hour meter ,,,,,,,,,,,.

Load Lora:11

Three phases - --

vSvrti:cciluiLcitrIPed Hour meter H Hour motet 1 -. Load Load

Note) Make the connection with the accompanying flat connector first and then with the hour meter's terminal (#187). In such case, be sure to cover the connection with the accompanying insulating sleeve.

TH70, TH8

Note) Solder the lead wires in position.

3. Safety precautions Do not use the hour meters in the following places. Where ambient temperature is below -10° or above +50°C In wet, dusty or gaseous environments Where exposed to vibrations and shocks Outdoors, or where exposed to rain or direct sunlight

4. Compliant with CE. LH2H Ambient conditions:

Overvoltage category III, contamination factor 2, indoor use. Ambient temperature and humidity -10 and +55°C and 35% to 85 %RH respectively.

TH13, 23, 14, 24, 40, 50, 63, 64 Ambient conditions:

Overvoltage category II, contamination factor 2, indoor use. Ambient temperature and humidity -10 and +50°C and below 85%RH respectively.

5. Reset-type hour meter Precautions for use If the number indications are off before use, press the reset button and confirm that all zeroes ("0") are displayed. Resetting caution Exercise due caution as an insufficient amount of pressure on the reset button may result in abnormal readings.

6. Acquisition of CE marking Please abide by the conditions below when using in applications that comply with EN 61010-1/IEC 61010-1 1) Ambient conditions

Overvoltage category II, pollution level 2

Indoor use Acceptable temperature and humidity range: -10 to +55°C, 35 to 85%RH (with no condensation at 20°C) Under 2000 m elevation

2) Use the main unit in a location that matches the following conditions.

There is minimal dust and no corrosive gas. There is no combustible or explosive gas. There is no mechanical vibration or impacts. There is no exposure to direct sunlight. Located away from large-volume electromagnetic switches and power lines with large electrical currents.

3) Connect a breaker that conforms to EN60947-1 or EN60947- 3 to the voltage input section.

4) Applied voltage should be protected with an overcurrent protection device (example: T 1A, 250 V AC time lag fuse) that conforms to the EN/IEC standards. (Free voltage input type)





7 Pushbuttons / Switches

SPRECHER & SCHUH - D7P-F3-PX10 - Start Pushbutton(Green)

SPRECHER & SCHUH - D7P-F4-PX10 - Stop Pushbutton(Red)

SPRECHER & SCHUH - D7P-MT34-PXOIS - All Stop Pushbutton c/w D7- 15YE112

SPRECHER & SCHUH - D7P-F6-PX10 - Stop Pushbutton(Blue)

SPRECHER & SCHUH - D7P-F6-PX10 - Stop Pushbutton(Yellow)


PHONE: (07) 3909 4999 FAX: (07) 3399 9712

KRAUS & NAIMER - CA10-A220-600-FTZ- Station Local / Remote Switch

SUPPLIED BY: KRAUS & NAIMER Pty. Ltd. 22 Brookes Street, Bowen Hills 4006, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (07) 3252 8344 FAX: (07) 3252 1497




D7P-F3-PX10

D7M-F4-MX01

D7P-E4-PX01

D7P-E402-PX01

137M-F301-MX10

schuosprec h her+

gli

D7 Control. and indication products 22.5 mm Complete panel mounted standard operators

Non-Illuminated momentary pushbuttons

Bil Metal or plastic options

111 Improved momentary action for fast response

IA Low mounting depth from panel

Pushbuttons

Description

With Green insert

With Red insert

With Blue insert

Contact Plastic body Cat. No. ')

Metal body Price S Cat. No. ')

1;161601::0(6..14

774:4444.t1011,

Extended pushbutton Plastic body Description. Contact Cat. No. ')

With Red insert ..g.lnitrE4LPX0

Price

Dimensions in (mm)

Metal body Price S Cat. No. ')

.7M=E0MX0V4

Price $

With Red insert labelled "stop"

Non-Illuminated momentary pushbuttons with labelled inserts

Laser etched markings for improved abrasion resistance

ji Dimensions n (mm)

Pushbuttons Plastic body Metal body

Description Contact Cat. No. ') Price $ Cat. No. ') Price $ .-.4,r4fR,,,....,,.rA, 1... ,.,.

With Green insert labelled "Start" _r____ 1;.0,51FI.Q1i-P.g:17,0, . D ZitT,F3 0,1A99,..0 IZ, ''`''=

With Red insert labelled "Stop" ---,4--- DIFIF402=1?)( "bifili:424iitil ir:;:?-?;:f." ,,... ;,.4,,..,

With Blue insert labelled "Reset ____-,_ l'i 7P;F667=4PX>1 PYItiF091i.t7i,*;Pkj"

Note: ') Add suffix "bx" for special box/hang-sell packaging eg: D7P-F3-PX1Obx

Price Schedule 'A2' GST not included

_ - Dimensions in (mm)

2 - 5



I D C

CA4/CA4-1 CAD11/CAD12

Type Angles Stages

S00 9

CL4 SOO 8 CA10-CA25 SO 12 CA10S-CA25S SO 60°

SO 12 CL10 SO 10 CA10B-CA25B S1 12

S1 12

S1 60° S2 12

C315 S3 12 S2 12

S3 12

2



Function/Type

I

Escutch. l

I Handle

, , .

Code Stages Double Latching

Connection Diagram

L350 L630 L1000 L1250

1°

L351 L631 L1001 L1251

,Alik4- IT 211" "~

.2-

,,_

L1600 .

'4240L600 A291:600 A2927600

4 I G 8 I 0 12 0 T I 1

16 32 48

0 ,,

4 .-4

; ce 1

: ,5=

L2000 A290=600 '

5 G 10 0 \'r \'t

20 40

° .

0 4 I e I

L350/L351 ' A220=606= 'A221 -600 A222-600

'

.A220-600 0,

-6A221-6000= A222 '

2 4 6 8 - 2 4 6

2 4 5 7 8 10 II

i'l Y \ii 11 3 6 9 12

0 , 2

V e ce

te 1

1\1 ) 2 10 18 26

L400 ° , ,

V e eo ce- e

L600 ,A220=600, A22f.2I600

- .

A223-600

3 6 9 0 12 0

3 9 15 21 27 33 39 45

i\fl ji II Y 2 " 26 39

°' 2

V g- e e o'

L630/L631 :A220-600 :A221-600 A222-600

4 8 12 0

2 0 5 7 8

1 1 I

I I I

. , 2

V te go. e

L800 ,A2207'600; ' A221-600 '

4 8 12 IP

I 9 17 25 33 41

1\ti 1fl il 15 32 48

°. 2

V re e e

L1000/L1001 A220t600I A221-600

6 12 0

1 2 4 5

\i 1 \t l'

3 6

°. V

' ce Qe

L1200 _A220-600. 6 1 1

I \t 24

°. 2

V re`

L1250/L1251

L1600

A220-600

A220=600

8

8 |

Ir 7 32

°. 2

v . .

0 ; re

L2000 A220-600

..

. .

_

.

10 1

t 18

'4, , 2

V , ,w; I

I

.

.

26 0



Z6

Z Z

ZZ

06/Z3 06/ZZ

Z3

ZZ

06/ZZ ocr ez

ZZ

ZZ

ww

/9i.

ZZ/9 I.

ZZ/9 I.

ZZ/9 L

ww

A-EHJ 61,1J

,

A-17SA

'A-171J Vld

A-Z1J ?id

A-ZSA ZS A

A-61J -

Eld .

A- [1J Lid

.A7 I- SJ ,

LSd

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

,.

-

< -

tt.

'

1.'

.

Dibitant

t

g 1.1

ow ......

,,,

_ -

- -

,. -

' -

,

1.

,

.........- -

a tzmi

kloftr, '

) ;1.0i, --,-,i,

..,

... .,,,, VI ao,

- 1 II 44

ono SEVO

-01. VO -CIVO

no I.-WO

17V3 apoo sleup.wal




8 Terminals

PHOENIX CONTACT - UT4-HESI LED 24 (5x20) - Fused Terminal with LED 24v

PHOENIX CONTACT - M205 - Fuse Cartridges

PHOENIX CONTACT - UT4-MT P/P - Disconnect Terminals

PHOENIX CONTACT - UT4-MTD-PE/S - Earth Terminals

PHOENIX CONTACT - UBE - Group Marker Carrier

PHOENIX CONTACT - PS6 - Test Plug Adaptor

PHOENIX CONTACT - SZS 0.6 x 3.5 - Screw Driver

PHOENIX CONTACT - FBS - Plug-In Bridge

PHOENIX CONTACT - MSTB 2.5/20-ST-5.08 - Disconnect Plugs

PHOENIX CONTACT - MSTB 2.5/10-ST-5.08 - Disconnect Plugs

PHOENIX CONTACT - UMSTBVKZ 2.5/20-G-5.08 - Disconnect Blocks

PHOENIX CONTACT - UMSTBVKZ 2.5/10-G-5.08 - Disconnect Blocks

PHOENIX CONTACT - KGS-MSTB 2.5/20 - Cable Housing

PHOENIX CONTACT - KGS-MSTB 2.5/10 - Cable Housing

PHOENIX CONTACT - CP-MSTB + CR-MSTB - Coding Pins

SUPPLIED BY: PHOENIX CONTACT Pty. Ltd.

2/20 Graystone Street, Tingalpa 4173, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (07) 3890 4255 FAX: (07) 3890 3834




UT 4-HESI (5X20)

Order No.: 3046032

http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UlD=3046032

rri PHOENIX Lld CO INTAa Extract from the online catalog

Fuse modular terminal block, Connection method: Screw connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm2- 6 mm2, AWG: 26 - 10, Nominal current: 6.3 A, Nominal voltage: 500 V, Width: 6.2 mm, Fuse type: G / 5 x 20, Fuse type: Glass, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, Color: black

Conirnercial:dati:

EAN ' 4017918956578

Pack 50 pcs.

Customs tariff 85369010

Weight/Piece 0.018103 KG

Catalog page information Page 44 (CL-2009)

PlOdupt notes

WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003

http:// . :

Voivw.doi;VnloaeLphoenixcontaat.tom Please note that the flata given here has been taken from the online catalog. ForcomprehensiVe: information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and COnditions Use apply to Internet:doVVnlOads.

Technical: data

General

Number of levels

Number of connections

Color

2

black

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.de

Page 1 / 5

May 6, 2009



UT 4-HESI (5X20) Order No.: 3046032 http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UlD=3046032

Insulating material

Inflammability class acc. to UL 94

Dimensions

Width

Length

Height NS 35/7,5

Height NS 35/15

Technical data

Fuse

Fuse type

Rated surge voltage

Pollution degree

Surge voltage category

Insulating material group

Connection in acc. with standard

Nominal current IN

Nominal voltage UN

Connection data

Conductor cross section solid min.

Conductor cross section solid max.

Conductor cross section stranded min.

Conductor cross section stranded max.

Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.

Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max

Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve min.

Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule without plastic sleeve max.

Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve min.

Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule with plastic sleeve max.

2 conductors with same cross section, solid min. 1 0.14 mm2

2 conductors with same cross section, solid max. ; 1.5 mm2

PA

VO

6.2 mm

57.8 mm

73 mm

80.5 mm

G/ 5 x 20

Glass

4 kV

3

III

I I

IEC 60947-7-3

6.3 A

500 V (if used as fuse terminal block)

500 V (if used as disconnect terminal block)

0.14 mm2

6 mm2

0.14 mm2

26

10

0.14 mm2

4 mm2

0.14 mm2

4 mm2


Page 2 / 5

May 6, 2009




2 conductors with same cross section, stranded 0.14 mm2 min.

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded 1.5 mm2 max.

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 0.14 mm2 ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 1.5 mm2 ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 0.5 mm2 TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.

Type of connection

Stripping length

Internal cylindrical gage

Screw thread

Tightening torque, min

Tightening torque max

Certificates / Approvals

Ala us SP

Certification

CSA

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

CUL

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

UL

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

2.5 mm2

Screw connection

9 mm

A4

M3

0.6 Nm

0.8 Nm

KEMA EUR cchlie Gl

CB, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, KEMA, LR, UL

600 V

6.3 A

26-10

600 V

6.3 A

26-10

600 V

6.3 A

26-10


Page 3 / 5

May 6, 2009



UT 4-HESI (5X20) Order No.: 3046032 http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?Ul D=3046032

Drawings

Application drawing

Fuse terminal blocks in interconnected arrangement, block consisting of 5 fuse terminal blocks

Circuit diagram

O O

I

Fuse terminal block in single arrangement, block consisting of one fuse terminal block and 4 feed-through terminal blocks


Page 4 / 5 May 6, 2009



UT 4-MT CX ) 0 BD gairA% Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation at http://www.download.phoenixcontact.com. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.

Extract from the online catalog

- 4* Universal terminal block with screw connection, cross Cis =ate / section: 0.14 - 4 mm2, AWG: 26 - 10, width: 6.2 mm,

Order No.

Ord designation

color: Gray

3046139

UT 4-MT

EAN 4017918975562

Pack 50 Pcs.


Catalog page information Page 20 (NTK-2005)

Technical data

General Number of levels 1

Number of connections 2

Color gray

Insulating material PA

Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 VO

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG

http://www.phoenixcontact.com

Page 1/7 Aug 12, 2005



UT 4-MT 0 C____30 EllzoliVIZ a )O Dimensions Width 6.2 mm

Length 56.8 mm

Height NS 35/7,5 47.5 mm

Height NS 35/15 55 mm

Technical data Maximum load current 16 A

Rated surge voltage 8 kV

Contamination class 3

Surge voltage category III


Connection in acc. with standard IEC/ DIN VDE

Nominal current IN 16 A

Nominal voltage UN 500 V

Open side panel nein

Connection data Conductor cross section, rigid min. 0.14 mrn2

Conductor cross section, rigid max. 6 mm2

Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.14 mm2

Conductor cross section, flexible max. 4 mm2

Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min. 26

Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max 10

Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without 0.25 mm2

plastic sleeve min.

Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without 4 mm2

plastic sleeve max.

Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic 0.25 mm2 sleeve min.

Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic 4 mm2

sleeve max.

2 conductors with same cross section, solid min. 0.14 mm2

2 conductors with same cross section, solid max. 1.5 mm2

2 conductors with same cross section, flexible, min. 0.14 mm2

2 conductors with same cross section, flexible max. 1.5 mm2

2 conductors with same cross section, flexible, TWIN 0.5 mm2

ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.

2 conductors with identical cross section, flexible TWIN 2.5 mm2 ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.

2 conductors with same cross section, flexible, ferrules 0.25 mm2

without plastic sleeve min.

2 conductors with same cross section, flexible, ferrules 1.5 mm2 without plastic sleeve, max.

Type of connection Screw connection

Stripping length 9 mm

Internal cylindrical gage A4

Screw thread M 3

Tightening torque, min 0.6 Nm

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontact.com

Page 2/7 Aug 12, 2005



UT 4-MT OC:i0111=`&0=0 Certificates

CUL Nominal voltage UN 600 V


AWG/kcmil 26-10

UL Nominal voltage UN 600 V


AWG/kcmil 26-10


http://www.phoenixcontact.com Page 3/7 Aug 12, 2005



UT 4-MT

Drawings

Circuit diagram

Approval logo

IND us




UT 4-MT )(DEINN11140=C)

Accessories

Item Designation Description

Assembly 0801762 NS 35/ 7,5 CU UNPERF DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width

2000MM 35 mm, length: 2 m

1207640 NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 755MM NS 35 DIN rail, height 7.5 mm, length 755 mm

1207653 NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 955MM NS35 DIN rail, height 7.5 mm, length 955 mm


0801733 NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

0801681 NS 35/ 7,5 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

1201756 NS 35/15 AL UNPERF 2000MM

DIN rail, deep-drawn, high profile, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, material: Aluminum, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length 2 m

1201895 NS 35/15 CU UNPERF DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, height 15 2000MM mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

1207679 NS 35/15 PERF 755MM NS 35 DIN rail, height 15 mm, length 755 mm



1201730 NS 35/15 PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, perforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

1201714 NS 35/15 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

1201798 NS 35/15-2,3 UNPERF DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, 2.3 mm thick, height 15

2000MM mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

Bridges 3030336 FBS 2-6 Plug-in bridge for cross-connections in the terminal center, 2-

pos., color: Red

3030242 FBS 3-6 Plug-in bridge for cross-connections in the terminal center, 3- pos., color: Red





3047060 RB UT 10-(2,5/4) Reducing bridge, for connection from UT 10 to UT 4 or UT 2,5


http://www.phoenixcontact.com Page 5/7 Aug 12, 2005



UT 4-MT )0 Ilcomfra 0 DO Marking 0811228 X-PEN 0,35

1051016 ZB 6,LGS:FORTL.ZAHLEN

5060935 ZB 6/VVH-100:UNBEDRUCKT

1050499 ZB 6:SO/CMS

Marker pen without ink cartridge, for manual labeling of markers, labeling extremely wipe-proof, line thickness 0.35 mm

Zack strip, 10-section, printed horizontally: with the numbers, 1-

10, 11-20 etc. up to 991-1000, color: white

Zack strip, unprinted: For individual labeling with M-PEN, ZB-T or CMS system, large batch, sufficient for labeling 1000 terminal blocks, for a terminal width of 6.2 mm, color: White

Zack strip, 10-section, divisible, special printing, marking according to customer requirements

Plug/Adapter 0201689

0201676

0201663

0201744

MPS-IH BU

MPS-IH RD

MPS-IH WH

MPS-MT

3030925 PAI-4

3030996 PS-6

Test plug, consisting of: Metal part for 2.3 mm diameter socket hole

Test adapter, for 4 mm diameter test plug PS and safety test plug, makes contact in the bridge shaft

Modular test plug, for individual assembly of test plug strips, for UT, ST, DT and QT terminal blocks, can be labeled with ZBF 6, color: Red

Tools 1205053 SZS 0,6X3,5 Screwdriver, bladed, matches all screw terminal blocks up to 4.0

mm2 connection cross section, blade: 0.6 x 3.5 mm, without VDE approval


Page 6/7 Aug 12, 2005



MPHNIX Lk/COCENTACT Extract from the online catalog

MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08

Order No.: 1757093

The figure shows a 10-position version of the product


Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn

l'Commerci'af data

GTIN (EAN)

sales group

Pack

Customs tariff

Weight/Piece

Catalog page information

4017918029623

E111

50 pcs.

85366990

0.01727 KG

Page 198 (CC-2009)

iProciuct notes


http // www.download.phoenixcontact.cbm Please note that-the data giVen here has been taken from the Online icatalog. , Fori,Comprehehskie informatiOn and data, please refer to the'uer documentation. The General Terms and ConditionS' of Use apply to Internet downloads:

TecIMICal data

Dimensions / positions

Pitch

Dimension a

Number of positions

Screw thread


5.08 mm

45.72 mm

10

M3

0.5 Nm

PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http://www.phoenixcon.com

Page 1 / 8

Jun 30, 2010



MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093 http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UlD=1757093


Technical data


Rated surge voltage (111/3)



Rated voltage (111/2)



Nominal current IN

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal cross section

Maximum load current

Insulating material



Stripping length

Nominal voltage, UUCUL Use Group B

Nominal current, UUCUL Use Group B

Nominal voltage, UUCUL Use Group D

Nominal current, UUCUL Use Group D

Connection data







Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule 0.25 mm2 with plastic sleeve min.

Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule ! 2.5 mm2 with plastic sleeve max.

0.6 Nm

I

4 kV

4 kV

4 kV

320 V

630 V

EN-VDE

12A

250 V

2.5 mm2

12 A (with 2.5 mm2 conductor cross section)

PA

VO

j A3

7 mm

250 V

12A

1 300 V

10A

0.2 mm2

2.5 mm2

0.2 mm2

2.5 mm2

0.25 mm2

2.5 mm2

Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min. 1 24

Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max 1 12


Page 2 / 8

Jun 30, 2010





2 conductors with same cross section, solid max. 1 1 mm2




2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 1 mm2 ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.


2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 1.5 mm2 TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.

Minimum AWG according to UUCUL

Maximum AWG according to UUCUL

30

12

Certificate Apjarbial

Anus usie

Certification

CSA

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

CUL

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

UL

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

CB, CSA, CUL, GOST, UL, VDE-PZI

300 V

10A

28-12

300 V

10A

30-12

300 V

10A

30-12


Page 3 / 8

Jun 30, 2010




Item

Bridges

Designation

1733172 EBP 3- 5

1733185

1733198

1733208

General

EBP 4- 5

! EBP 5- 5

EBP 6- 5

1733169 1 EBP 2- 5

KGS-MSTB 2,5/10 1783740

Marking

1051993 B-STIFT

0805108 i SK 5,08/2,8:50

0804293 I SK 5,08/3,8:FORTL.ZAHLEN

0803883

Plug/Adapter

SK U/2,8 WH:UNBEDRUCKT

Description

Insertion bridge, fully insulated, for plug connectors with 5.0 or 5.08 mm pitch, no. of positions: 3




1 Insertion bridge, fully insulated, for plug connectors with 5.0 or 5.08 mm pitch, no. of positions: 2

. .

Cable housing, Number of positions: 10, Dimension a: 50 mm, Color: green

Marker pen, for manual labeling of unprinted Zack strips, smear- ; proof and waterproof, line thickness 0.5 mm

Marker card, special printing, self-adhesive, labeled acc. to customer requirements, 14 identical marker strips per card, max. 25-position labeling per strip, color: White

, .

Marker card, printed horizontally, self-adhesive, 12 identical decades marked 1-10, 11-20 etc. up to 91-(99)100, sufficient for 120 terminal blocks

Unprinted marker cards, DIN A4 format, pitch as desired, self- 1 adhesive, with 50 stamped marker strips, 185 mm strip length, can

be labeled with the CMS system or manually with the M-PEN

1734634

Tools

CP-MSTB

1205053 1 SZS 0,6X3,5

Keying profile, is inserted into the slot on the plug or inverted header, red insulating material

Screwdriver, bladed, matches all screw terminal blocks up to 4.0 mm2 connection cross section, blade: 0.6 x 3.5 mm, without VDE approval


Page 4/8 Jun 30, 2010




Additional products

Item Designation

General

1823927 ICC 2,5/10-STZ-5,08

1762457 , MDSTB 2,5/10-G1-5,08

1762583 MDSTBV 2,5/10-G1-5,08

1770795

1757323

1768024

1765030

MSTB 2,5/10-G-5,08-LA

MSTBA 2,5/10-G-5,08

MSTBA 2,5/10-G-5,08-LA

MSTBHK 2,5/10-G-5,08

1788800 MSTBVK 2,5/10-G-5,08

1788619 MVSTBU 2,5/10-GB-5,08

1769544 j SMSTB 2,5/10-G-5,08

1767452 SMSTBA 2,5/10-G-5,08

3002034 f UK 3-MSTB-5,08

Description

Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Corresponding male crimp contacts with current [A] and conductor cross section range [mml data: 10A/ICC -MT 0,5-1,0 (3190577); 10A/ICC-MT 0,5-1,0 BA (3190603); 12A/ICC-MT 1,5-2,5 (3190580); 12A/ICC- MT 1,5-2,5 BA (3190593). BA = Bandkontakte

Header, Nominal current: 10 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering, In combination with MVSTB or FKCV plug components, both an MVSTBW (or FKCVW) and an MVSTBR plug (or FKCVR) must be used. Combination with TMSTBP plug components is not possible!


Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Assembly: Soldering

Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering


Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: DIN rail

Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: SnAssembly: DIN

I rail

Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Direct mounting



Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Special and hybrid connection, Screw connection, Cross section: 0.2 mm2- 4 mm2, AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.08 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5


Page 5 / 8

Jun 30, 2010




3002076

3002102

UK 3-MVSTB-5,08

UK 3-MVSTB-5,08-LA 24RD

Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12

A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2,

AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.1, Color: gray


A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mmz, AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: gray

3002063 UK 3-MVSTB-5,08/EK Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2, AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.1, Color: blue

3002131 UK 3D-MSTBV-5,08 Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Special and hybrid connection, Screw connection, Cross section: 0.2 mm2- 4 mm2, AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.08 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5

3002144 UK 3D-MSTBV-5,08-LA 24RD Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Screw 1 connection, Screw connection, Number of positions: 1, Cross

section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2, AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.1 mm,

Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5

3002173 i UK 3D-MSTBV-5,08/EK Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Screw connection, Screw connection, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2, AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.1 mm, Color: blue, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5

2770888 I UKK 3-MSTB-5,08 End cover, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross 1 section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2, AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS

35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: gray

1876615 UKK 3-MSTB-5,08-PE Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12


AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: green-yellow

2770846 j UKK 3-MSTBVH-5,08 Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12


AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: gray

1788198 UMSTBVK 2,5/10-G-5,08 Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: DIN rail

1873016 ZFKK 1,5-MSTBV-5,08 Feed-through modular terminal block, Connection method: Special and hybrid connection, MSTB plug entry, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 2.5 mm2, Width: 5.1 mm, Color: gray


Page 6 / 8 Jun 30, 2010




I Diagrams/Drawings

Dimensioned drawing


Page 7 / 8

Jun 30, 2010



FBS 10-8

Order No.: 3030323


PHCENIX CONTACT


Cross connector/jumper for modular terminal block, Number of positions: 10, Color: red

Comniercial da6

EAN 4017918188634

Pack 10 pcs.




ropluCt notes.


http // Www download phoenixcontact com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the

I online catalog For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads


Page 1 / 2

Oct 23, 2009



PINCENIX CONTACT


SZF 1- 0,6X3,5

Order No.: 1204517


Screwdriver, blade: 0.6 x 3.5 x 100 mm, length 180 mm

tOmmerciaLdaii

GTIN (EAN) 4017918018948

sales group C200

Pack 10 pcs.




,Technical dati

F.PITclict mites


t

I littlb ii -.: ' '

www download phoenixcontact corn PleaSe note that the-data given-

' here'has been ,taken from the online catalog -for comprehensive,, information and data, please refer -,

l to the user documentation The -

General Terms and Conditions of- --

I Use apply to Internet downloads -

General

Length (b)

Width (a)

Design

181 mm

26 mm

Phillips


Page 1 / 3

Jun 30, 2010



SZF 1-0,6X3,5 Order No.: 1204517 http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UlD=1204517

Blade thickness

Blade width

Blade height

Weight

Test standard

Certificates i Approvals

0.6 mm

3.5 mm

100 mm

34 g

DIN 5264

Certification

Diagrams/Drawings .,

Dimensioned drawing

0,6.1 1. J 3,5

GOST


Page 2 / 3

Jun 30, 2010



PS-6/2,3MM RD

Order No.: 3038736

The illustration shows the version PS-5/2,3 MM RD

http lleshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UlD.3038736

PHCENIX CONTACT


Test plugs, Color: red

Comniercial,data

GTIN (EAN) 4017918904166

sales group A691

Pack 10 pcs.




rProduct,note-si::


http // ' - .

www download phoenocContact corn Please note thatthe data

,here- has been taken from the online catalog For comprehensive

'InfOrmation and data, please refer to the user doCumentation The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internetclownloads


Page 1 / 2

Jun 30, 2010



MPHCENIX Lid CO INTACT Extract from the online catalog

UBE/D + ES/KMK 3

Order No.: 1004076


Terminal strip marker carriers for marking terminal group, for mounting on the terminal strip NS 32 or NS 35/7.5, lettering field size: 40 x 17 mm

Commercial data

EAN

Pack

Customs tariff

Weight/Piece

Technical data

General

Color

Base element material


Ambient temperature (operation)

Components

4017918011888

10 pcs.

85369010

0.0105 KG

PTO


http // www download phoenixcontact corn Please note that the data given here has been taken from the

! online catalog For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation The General Terms and COnditions of Use apply to Internet doWnkiads

gray

PA

V2

-40 °C ... 100 °C

free from silicone and halogen


Page 1 / 2

May 7, 2009



UT 4-MTD

Order No.: 3046184


PNCENIX CONTACT


Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Screw connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm2 - 6 mm2, AWG 26 - 10, Width: 6.2 \U.,, mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15

Commercial. iata

EAN ' 4017918956592

Pack 50 pcs.




Technical data

EP,roduct.pojeal.:.:


http // www download phoenixcontact com Please note -that the data given '

here haS been taken from the online catalog For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation The _

General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads

General

Number of levels


Color

2

gray

PHOENIX CONTACT Deutschland GmbH http://www.phoenixcontact.de

Page 1 / 7

Mar 24, 2010



UT 4-MTD Order No.: 3046184 http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UlD=3046184

Insulating material


Dimensions

Width

Length

Height NS 35/7,5

Height NS 35/15

Technical data


Rated surge voltage

Pollution degree




Nominal current IN

Nominal voltage UN

Open side panel

PA

VO

6.2 mm

57.8 mm

47.5 mm

55 mm

41 A (with 6 mm2 conductor cross section)

8 kV

3

III

IEC 60947-7-1

32 A

Connection data







0.14 mm2

6 mm2

0.14 mm2

6 mm2

26

10

Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule 0.14 mm2 without plastic sleeve min.

Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule 4 mm2 without plastic sleeve max.


Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule 4 mm2 with plastic sleeve max.

0.14 mm2



2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.

0.14 mm2


Page 2 / 7

Mar 24, 2010




2 conductors with same cross section, stranded 1 1.5 mm2 max.

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 1 0.5 mm2 TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.


2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 1.5 mm2

ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.

Type of connection

Stripping length


Screw thread



2.5 mm2

Screw connection

9 mm

A4

M3

0.6 Nm

0.8 Nm

Certificates rApFirOVals

CSII US e4

Certification

Certification Ex:

CSA

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

CUL

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

UL

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

clfe3me

CB, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, LR, UL, VDE-PZI

IECEx, KEMA-EX

600 V .t.

30 A

26-10

600 V

30 A

26-10

600 V

30 A

AWG/kcmil 26-10


Page 3 / 7

Mar 24, 2010




Accessories


Assembly

3022276 CLIPFIX 35-5 Snap-on end bracket, for NS 35/7.5 or NS 35/15 DIN rail, can be fitted with Zack strip ZB 5 and ZBF 5, terminal strip marker KLM 2 and KLM, parking facility for FBS...5, FBS...6, KSS 5, KSS 6, width: 5,15 mm, color: gray

3047141 D-UT 2,5/4-TWIN End cover, Width: 2.2 mm, Color: gray

0801762 NS 35/ 7,5 CU UNPERF DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 2000MM mm, length: 2 m




0801733 NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, galvanized and passivated with a thick layer, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m


1201756 NS 35/15 AL UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, deep-drawn, high profile, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, material: Aluminum, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length 2 m

1201895 NS 35/15 CU UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

1207679 NS 35/15 PERF 755MM NS 35 DIN rail, perforated, height 15 mm, length 755 mm


1207695 ; NS 35/15 PERF 1155MM NS 35 DIN rail, perforated, height 15 mm, length 1155 mm


1201714 ; NS 35/15 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

1201798 NS 35/15-2,3 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, 2.3 mm thick, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

Bridges

3030336 FBS 2-6 Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 2, Color: red








Page 4 / 7

Mar 24, 2010




3047060

Marking

1051993

0811228

1051016

1051032

1051029

1051045

1050499

RB UT 10-(2,5/4)

B-STIFT

X-PEN 0,35

ZB 6,LGS:FORTL.ZAHLEN

ZB 6,LGS:GLEICHE ZAHLEN

ZB 6,QR:FORTL.ZAHLEN

ZB 6,QR:GLEICHE ZAHLEN

ZB 6:SO/CMS

1051003 ZB 6:UNBEDRUCKT

Plug/Adapter

0201731 MPS-IH BK

0201702 j MPS-IH GN

0201676 MPS-IH RD

0201663 MPS-IH WH

0201744 MPS-MT

3030925 PAI-4

3030996 I PS-6

Tools

1205053 SZS 0,6X3,5

Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 2, Color: red

Marker pen, for manual labeling of unprinted Zack strips, smear- ; proof and waterproof, line thickness 0.5 mm


Zack strip, 10-section, printed horizontally: with the numbers, 1-10, 11-20 etc. up to 991-1000, color: white

Zack marker strip, labeled horizontally: 10-section, with identical numbers, 1/1/1, 2/2/2 etc. up to 1000/1000/1000, color: white

Zack strip, 10-section, printed vertically: with consecutive numbers, 1-10, 11-20 a.s.o. up to 991-1000, color: white

Zack marker, labeled vertically: 10-section, with identical numbers, 1/1/1, 2/2/2 etc. up to 1000/1000/1000, color: White


Zack strip, unprinted, strips with 10 labels for individual labeling with M-PEN or CMS system, for terminal block width: 6.2 mm, color: white

Insulating sleeve, for MPS metal part, Color: black

Insulating sleeve, for MPS metal part, Color: green

Insulating sleeve, Color: red

Insulating sleeve, for MPS metal part, Color: white

Metal part

Test adapter, Color: gray

Test adapter, Color: red


Circuit diagram


Page 5 / 7

Mar 24, 2010



Module no:0921011 Labelld :0921011 Operator:Phoenix 15:22:45, Donnerstag, 28. Juni 2001

ST-SI-UK 4

Light Current Description indicator --"[mA]

Voltage [V AC/DC]

Fuse plug, for x 20 mm, 26.5

cartridge fuse inserts 5

mm high, color: black

Fuse plug, as above, however with light indicator:

5 -15

15 - 30

2-7.5

3.5 - 7.5

30 - 60 2.5 - 5.5

110 -250 0.5-1

Type Order No Era Pkt

ST-SI-UK 4 !max.: 6.3 A 1)2) 09 21 01 1 50

ST-SILED 12-UK 4

Imax.: 6.3 A 1)2) 09 21 02 4 50

ST-SILED 6.3A1)2) 09 21 03 7 50 24-UK 4

ST-SILED 6.3A1)2) 09 21 04 0 50 60-UK 4

ST-SILA 6.3A1)2) 09 21 05 3 50 250-UK 4

TetiMical data

Insulation material


Temperature indices RTI / Ti

Approval data (UL and CSA)

Nom. voltage / nom. current

1) With single arrangements. 2) Max. power dissipation see info.

PA

V2

130 / 120

UL: [V] / 300 / 6.3 [A]

CSA: [V] / 300 / 10 [A]

Phoenix Contact Elektronischer Katalog Page 1 / 1



MPHCENIX CO AC


SZF 1-0,6X3,5

Order No.: 1204517

http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?Ul D=1204517

Screwdriver, blade: 0.6 x 3.5 x 100 mm, length 180 mm

tOmmercial data,

GTIN (EAN) 4017918018948

sales group C200

Pack 10 pcs.

Customs tariff r 82054000


Catalog page information ; Page 8 (NTK-2010)

[Product notes


http:// wwwdownload.Rhoenixccintact:com,,: Please-note that the data given

:here:has been taken from the catalog. For coMprehensive

'information and data, please:refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and conditions of USe 'apply to Internet:downloads:

Tecnnicardata-

General

Length (b)

Width (a)

Design

181 mm

26 mm

Phillips


Page 1 / 3

Jun 30, 2010




Blade thickness

Blade width

Blade height

Weight

Test standard

0.6 mm

3.5 mm

100 mm

34 g

DIN 5264

Certificates / Approvals

Cgu.

Certification

Diagrani&Drawings

GOST

Dimensioned drawing

0,61 1

I. 3,5





Addres

PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA 586 Fulling Mill Road Middletown, PA 17057,USA Phone (800) 888-7388 Fax (717) 944-1625 http://www.phoenixcon.com

© 2010 Phoenix Contact Technical modifications reserved;

PH NIX COPTAC1


Page 3 / 3

Jun 30, 2010



MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08

Order No.: 1757093

The figure shows a 10-position version of the product

http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?Ul D=1757093

MPHCENIX LidCONTACT Extract from the online catalog

Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V,

Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn

Commercial 'data

GTIN (EAN)

sales group

Pack

Customs tariff

Weight/Piece


4017918029623

E111

50 pcs.

85366990

0.01727 KG

Page 198 (CC-2009)

FProducfnotes.


http:// vvv.m.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The. General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to fl:,krnet downloads.

TeChnicalfilata

Dimensions / positions

Pitch

Dimension a

Number of positions

Screw thread


5.08 mm

45.72 mm

1 10

M3

0.5 Nm


Page 1 / 8

Jun 30, 2010





Technical data








Nominal current IN

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal cross section


Insulating material



Stripping length

Nominal voltage, UUCUL Use Group B

Nominal current, UUCUL Use Group B

Nominal voltage, UUCUL Use Group D

Nominal current, UUCUL Use Group D

Connection data





0.6 Nm

4 kV

4 kV

4 kV

320 V

630V

EN-VDE

12A

250V

2.5 mm2

12 A (with 2.5 mm2 conductor cross section)

PA

VO

A3

7 mm

250V

12A

300 V

10 A

0.2 mm2

2.5 mm2

0.2 mm2

2.5 mm2

Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule I 0.25 mm2 without plastic sleeve min.




2.5 mm2

0.25 mm2

2.5 mm2

Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min. I 24



Page 2 / 8

Jun 30, 2010





2 conductors with same cross section, solid max. I 1 mm2



2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.


0.25 mm2

1 mm2


Minimum AWG according to UUCUL

Maximum AWG according to UUCUL

30

12

[Certipcates / Approvals

cilia us E4 /..)x clte

Certification

CSA

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

CUL

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

UL

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

CB, CSA, CUL, GOST, UL, VDE-PZI

300 V

10A

28-12

300V

10A

30-12

300 V

10A

30-12


Page 3 / 8

Jun 30, 2010




Accesiories

Item Designation

Bridges

1733172 EBP 3- 5

1733185 EBP 4- 5

1733198 EBP 5- 5

1733208

General

1733169

1783740

Marking

EBP 6- 5

EBP 2- 5

KGS-MSTB 2,5/10

Description

I Insertion bridge, fully insulated, for plug connectors with 5.0 or 5.08 mm pitch, no. of positions: 3





Cable housing, Number of positions: 10, Dimension a: 50 mm, Color: green

1051993 B-STI FT Marker pen, for manual labeling of unprinted Zack strips, smear- ; proof and waterproof, line thickness 0.5 mm

0805108 SK 5,08/2,8:SO I Marker card, special printing, self-adhesive, labeled acc. to customer requirements, 14 identical marker strips per card, max. 25-position labeling per strip, color: White

0804293 SK 5,08/3,8:FORTL.ZAHLEN I Marker card, printed horizontally, self-adhesive, 12 identical decades marked 1-10, 11-20 etc. up to 91-(99)100, sufficient for 120 terminal blocks

0803883 SK U/2,8 WH:UNBEDRUCKT Unprinted marker cards, DIN A4 format, pitch as desired, self- ! adhesive, with 50 stamped marker strips, 185 mm strip length, can

be labeled with the CMS system or manually with the M-PEN

Plug/Adapter

1734634

Tools

1205053

CP-MSTB

SZS 0,6X3,5

Keying profile, is inserted into the slot on the plug or inverted header, red insulating material



Page 4 / 8 Jun 30, 2010




Additional nrotincts

Item Designation

General

1823927 1 ICC 2,5/10-STZ-5,08

1762457 MDSTB 2,5/10-G1-5,08

Description

Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Corresponding male crimp contacts with current [A] and conductor cross section range [mml data: 10A/ICC-MT 0,5-1,0 (3190577); 10A/ICC-MT 0,5-1,0 BA (3190603); 12A/ICC-MT 1,5-2,5 (3190580); 12A/ICC- MT 1,5-2,5 BA (3190593). BA = Bandkontakte


1762583 MDSTBV 2,5/10-G1-5,08 1 Header, Nominal current: 10 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering, In combination with MVSTB or FKCV plug components, both an MVSTBW (or FKCVW) and an MVSTBR plug (or FKCVR) must be used. Combination with TMSTBP plug components is not possible!


1757323 MSTBA 2,5/10-G-5,08 Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Soldering

1768024 MSTBA 2,5/10-G-5,08-LA 1 Header, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Assembly: Soldering

1765030 MSTBHK 2,5/10-G-5,08 I Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: DIN

I rail

1770795 MSTB 2,5/10-G-5,08-LA

1788800 MSTBVK 2,5/10-G-5,08

1788619 MVSTBU 2,5/10-GB-5,08

1769544 SMSTB 2,5/10-G-5,08

1767452

3002034 1 UK 3-MSTB-5,08

SMSTBA 2,5/10-G-5,08


Plug component, Nominal current: 12 A, Rated voltage (111/2): 320 V, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Color: green, Metal surface: Sn, Assembly: Direct mounting



Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Special and hybrid connection, Screw connection, Cross section: 0.2 mm' - 4 mrn2, AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.08 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5


Page 5 / 8 Jun 30, 2010



MSTB 2,5/10-ST-5,08 Order No.: 1757093 http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?Ul D=1757093

3002076 I UK 3-MVSTB-5,08 Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12

A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2, AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.1, Color: gray

3002102 I UK 3-MVSTB-5,08-LA 24RD I Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12

A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2, AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: gray

Feed-through modular terminal block, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2, AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.1, Color: blue

3002131 UK 3D-MSTBV-5,08 Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Special and hybrid connection, Screw connection, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2, AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.08 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5

Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Screw connection, Screw connection, Number of positions: 1, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2, AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.1 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5

3002173 I UK 3D-MSTBV-5,08 EK Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Screw

3002063 UK 3-MVSTB-5,08/EK

3002144 I UK 3D-MSTBV-5,08-LA 24RD

2770888 ' UKK 3-MSTB-5,08

1876615 UKK 3-MSTB-5,08-PE

2770846 UKK 3-MSTBVH-5,08

1788198 j UMSTBVK 2,5/10-G-5,08

1873016 ZFKK 1,5-MSTBV-5,08

connection, Screw connection, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2, AWG 24 - 12, Width: 5.1 mm, Color: blue, Mounting type: NS 32, NS 35/15, NS 35/7,5

End cover, Nominal current: 12 A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2, AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: gray


A, Nominal voltage: 320 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2, AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: green-yellow


A, Nominal voltage: 250 V, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 4 mm2, AWG: 24 - 12, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, NS 32, Pitch: 5.08 mm, Width: 5.08, Color: gray


Feed-through modular terminal block, Connection method: Special and hybrid connection, MSTB plug entry, Cross section: 0.2 mm2 - 2.5 mm2, Width: 5.1 mm, Color: gray

PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA http: / /www.phoenixcon.com

Page 6 / 8

Jun 30, 2010




1,Diagrams/Drawings

Dimensioned drawing


Page 7 / 8

Jun 30, 2010



FBS 10-8

Order No.: 3030323

http lleshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UlD=3030323

MPHCEMIX LidCOPMILT Extract from the online catalog

Cross connector/jumper for modular terminal block, Number of positions: 10, Color: red

`Commercral "data,

EAN 4017918188634

Pack 10 pcs.

Customs tariff I 85389099



[Product notes


http: // wWw.download:phoenbccontact.corn Please note that'the data given here has been taken from the.

:online catalog. FOr Comprehehafve -informetion and:data, pleaSe', refer to the user documentation The Gerteral Terms and Conditions of :Use apply to .Interhet downloads.


Page 1 / 2

Oct 23, 2009



PS-6/2,3MM RD

Order No.: 3038736

The illustration shows the version PS-5/2,3 MM RD


MPHCENIX CONTACT


Test plugs, Color: red

Commercialdata

GTIN (EAN) 4017918904166

sales group A691

Pack 10 pcs.




Product notes


http:// viww.doyvnload.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has beeh taken frorn the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads


Page 1 / 2

Jun 30, 2010



UT 4-MT =0111MIcr."(0 Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation at http://www.download.phoenixcontact.com. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to.Internet downloads.


4Cii 4M,

- et, s ; 7:"

rt:ZZ, CK> ^

^ ISS1 ' 7 . 4-- 112), -'

' - ,

, N.,

t"r

' - '1°;" , 114'

Order No.

Ord designation

Universal terminal block with screw connection, cross section: 0.14 - 4 mm2 , AWG: 26 - 10, width: 6.2 mm, color: Gray

3046139

UT 4-MT

EAN 4017918975562

Pack 50 Pcs.



Technical data

General Number of levels 1

Number of connections 2

Color gray

Insulating material PA

Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 VO


Page 1/7 Aug 12, 2005



UT 4-MT OCDOESVA`cr"0=0 Dimensions Width 6.2 mm

Length 56.8 mm

Height NS 35/7,5 47.5 mm

Height NS 35/15 55 mm

Technical data Maximum load current 16 A

Rated surge voltage 8 kV

Contamination class 3

Surge voltage category III


Connection in acc. with standard IEC/ DIN VDE



Open side panel nein

Connection data Conductor cross section, rigid min. 0.14 mm2

Conductor cross section, rigid max. 6 mm2

Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.14 mm2

Conductor cross section, flexible max. 4 mm2



Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without 0.25 mm2

plastic sleeve min.

Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule without 4 mm2 plastic sleeve max.

Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic 0.25 mm2

sleeve min.

Conductor cross section flexible, with ferrule with plastic 4 mm2

sleeve max.



2 conductors with same cross section, flexible, min. 0.14 mm2

2 conductors with same cross section, flexible max. 1.5 mm2

2 conductors with same cross section, flexible, TWIN 0.5 mm2

ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.

2 conductors with identical cross section, flexible TWIN 2.5 mm2

ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.

2 conductors with same cross section, flexible, ferrules 0.25 mm2 without plastic sleeve min.

2 conductors with same cross section, flexible, ferrules 1.5 mm2 without plastic sleeve, max.

Type of connection Screw connection

Stripping length 9 mm

Internal cylindrical gage A4

Screw thread M 3

Tightening torque, min 0.6 Nm


Page 2/7 Aug 12, 2005



UT 4-MT OCD01:11=71%0=0

Certificates

CUL Nominal voltage UN 600 V


AWG/kcmil 26-10

UL Nominal voltage UN 600 V


AWG/kcmil 26-10

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co, KG

http://www.phoenixcontact.com

Page 3/7 Aug 12, 2005



UT 4-MT

1*Drawings

0=0E1=00=0

Circuit diagram

Approval logo

imin US


Page 4/7 Aug 12, 2005



UT 4-MT OCDO EIMAI§OC_DO

to Accessories


Assembly 0801762 NS 35/ 7,5 CU UNPERF DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width

2000MM 35 mm, length: 2 m




0801733 NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m


1201756 NS 35/15 AL UNPERF 2000MM

DIN rail, deep-drawn, high profile, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, material: Aluminum, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length 2 m

1201895 NS 35/15 CU UNPERF DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, height 15 2000MM mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m





1201714 NS 35/15 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

1201798 NS 35/15-2,3 UNPERF DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, 2.3 mm thick, height 15

2000MM mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

Bridges 3030336 FBS 2-6 Plug-in bridge for cross-connections in the terminal center, 2-

pos., color: Red






3047060 RB UT 10-(2,5/4) Reducing bridge, for connection from UT 10 to UT 4 or UT 2,5


Page 5/7 Aug 12, 2005



UT 4-MT 0=0 EUM1NOCDO Marking 0811228

1051016

5060935

1050499 ZB 6:SO/CMS

X-PEN 0,35


ZB 6/WH-100:UNBEDRUCKT


Zack strip, 10-section, printed horizontally: with the numbers, 1-

10, 11-20 etc. up to 991-1000, color: white

Zack strip, unprinted: For individual labeling with M-PEN, ZB-T or CMS system, large batch, sufficient for labeling 1000 terminal blocks, for a terminal width of 6.2 mm, color: White


Plug/Adapter 0201689

0201676

0201663

0201744

MPS-IH BU

MPS-IH RD

MPS-IH WH

MPS-MT

3030925 PAI-4

3030996 PS-6

Test plug, consisting of: Metal part for 2.3 mm diameter socket hole

Test adapter, for 4 mm diameter test plug PS and safety test plug, makes contact in the bridge shaft

Modular test plug, for individual assembly of test plug strips, for UT, ST, DT and QT terminal blocks, can be labeled with ZBF 6,

color: Red

Tools 1205053 SZS 0,6X3,5 Screwdriver, bladed, matches all screw terminal blocks up to 4.0

mm2 connection cross section, blade: 0.6 x 3.5 mm, without VDE approval


Page 6/7

Aug 12, 2005



PHCENIX CONTACT


UT 4-MTD ;.

Order No.: 3046184 va,

http://eshop. phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?Ul D=3046184

Feed-through modular terminal block, Type of connection: Screw connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm2 - 6 mm2, AWG 26 - 10, Width: 6.2 mm, Color: gray, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15

Commercial data

EAN 401 7918956592

Pack 50 pcs.


Weight/Piece J 0.011431 KG

Catalog page information I

Page 56 (CL-2009)

rproduct-notes. .7.77.771 WEEE/RoHS-compliant since: 01/01/2003

.http:// wmN.download:phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken:ffom the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to theusersdoCOmentatidnThe: General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet doWnloads.

Technical data

General

Number of levels


Color

1

I 2

gray


Page 1 / 7

Mar 24, 2010




Insulating material


Dimensions

Width

Length

Height NS 35/7,5

Height NS 35/15

Technical data


Rated surge voltage

Pollution degree




Nominal current 1,,

Nominal voltage UN

Open side panel

PA

VO

6.2 mm

57.8 mm

47.5 mm

55 mm

41 A (with 6 mm2 conductor cross section)

8 kV

3

III

!EC 60947-7-1

32 A

800 V

ja

Connection data

Conductor cross section solid min. 1 0.14 mmz

Conductor cross section solid max. 6 mmz

Conductor cross section stranded min. 1 0.14 mm2

Conductor cross section stranded max. 6 mm2



Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule 0.14 mm2 without plastic sleeve min.

Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule 4 mm2 without plastic sleeve max.

Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule 0.14 mm2 with plastic sleeve min.

Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule 4 mm2 with plastic sleeve max.

2 conductors with same cross section, solid min.


0.14 mm2

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded 1 0.14 mm2 min.


Page 2 / 7

Mar 24, 2010








2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 1.5 mm2 ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.

Type of connection

Stripping length


Screw thread



Screw connection

9 mm

A4

M3

0.6 Nm

0.8 Nm

Certificates.! Approvais,

Ccia US el Certification

Certification Ex:

CSA

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

CUL

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

UL

Nominal voltage UN

Nominal current IN

AWG/kcmil

cDne GL

CB, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, LR, UL, VDE-PZI

IECEx, KEMA-EX

600 V

30 A

26-10

600 V

30 A

26-10

600 V

30 A

26-10


Page 3 / 7

Mar 24, 2010



UT 4-MTD Order No.: 3046184 http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoerthdtreeViewaick.do?UlD=3046184

,ACcessories

Item

Assembly

3022276

Designation

CLIPFIX 35-5

Description

Snap-on end bracket, for NS 35/7.5 or NS 35/15 DIN rail, can be fitted with Zack strip ZB 5 and ZBF 5, terminal strip marker KLM 2 and KLM, parking facility for FBS...5, FBS...6, KSS 5, KSS 6,

: 1 width: 5,15 mm, color: gray :

3047141 |

D-UT 2,5/4-TWIN 1 End cover, Width: 2.2 mm, Color: gray :

0801762 NS 35/ 7,5 CU UNPERF 1 DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 2000MM mm, length: 2 m

1207640 NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 755MM 1 NS 35 DIN rail, height 7.5 mm, length 755 mm

1207653 NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 955MM 1 NS35 DIN rail, height 7.5 mm, length 955 mm

1207666 NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 1155MM 1 NS 35 DIN rail, height 7.5 mm, length 1155 mm

0801733 NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM 1 DIN rail, material: Steel, galvanized and passivated with a thick , i layer, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

0801681 NS 35/ 7,5 UNPERF 2000MM 1 DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35

,

i mm, length: 2 m

1201756 NS 35/15 AL UNPERF 2000MM I DIN rail, deep-drawn, high profile, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, i material: Aluminum, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length 2 m

1201895 NS 35/15 CU UNPERF 2000MM 1 DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, height 15 1 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

1207679 NS 35/15 PERF 755MM I NS 35 DIN rail, perforated, height 15 mm, length 755 mm


1207695 NS 35/15 PERF 1155MM 1 NS 35 DIN rail, perforated, height 15 mm, length 1155 mm

1201730 NS 35/15 PERF 2000MM 1 DIN rail, material: Steel, perforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, 1 length: 2 m

1201714 NS 35/15 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 15 mm, width 35 I mm, length: 2 m

1201798 NS 35/15-2,3 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, 2.3 mm thick, height 15

mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m

Bridges


3030242 FBS 3-6 I Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 3, Color: red




3030365 FBS 20-6 1 Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 20, Color: red

3032224 FBS 50-6 1 Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 50, Color: red


Page 4 / 7

Mar 24, 2010



UT 4-MTD Order No.: 3046184 http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UI D=30461 84

3047060 RB UT 10-(2,5/4)

Marking

1051993

0811228

1051016

1051032

1051029

1051045

B-STIFT

X-PEN 0,35


ZB 6,LGS:GLEICHE ZAHLEN

ZB 6,QR:FORTL.ZAHLEN

ZB 6,QR:GLEICHE ZAHLEN

1050499 ! ZB 6:SO/CMS

1051003

Plug/Adapter

0201731

0201702

0201676

0201663

0201744

3030925

3030996

Tools

ZB 6:UNBEDRUCKT

MPS-IH BK

MPS-IH GN

MPS-IH RD

MPS-IH WH

MPS-MT

PAI-4

PS-6

1205053 SZS 0,6X3,5

Cross connector/bridge, Number of positions: 2, Color: red

Marker pen, for manual labeling of unprinted Zack strips, smear- ! proof and waterproof, line thickness 0.5 mm


Zack strip, 10-section, printed horizontally: with the numbers, 1-10, 11-20 etc. up to 991-1000, color: white

Zack marker strip, labeled horizontally: 10-section, with identical numbers, 1/1/1, 2/2/2 etc. up to 1000/1000/1000, color: white

Zack strip, 10-section, printed vertically: with consecutive numbers, 1-10, 11-20 a.s.o. up to 991-1000, color: white

Zack marker, labeled vertically: 10-section, with identical numbers, 1/1/1, 2/2/2 etc. up to 1000/1000/1000, color: White


Zack strip, unprinted, strips with 10 labels for individual labeling with M-PEN or CMS system, for terminal block width: 6.2 mm, color: white

Insulating sleeve, for MPS metal part, Color: black

Insulating sleeve, for MPS metal part, Color: green

Insulating sleeve, Color: red

Insulating sleeve, for MPS metal part, Color: white

Metal part

Test adapter, Color: gray

Test adapter, Color: red


iagrams rawipgs,

Circuit diagram

0


Page 5 / 7

Mar 24, 2010




Approbationslogos (EX-Bereich)


Page 6 / 7

Mar 24, 2010



Ertionwc Extract from the online catalog

UBE/D + ES /KM K 3

Order No.: 1004076


Terminal strip marker carriers for marking terminal group, for mounting on the terminal strip NS 32 or NS 35/7.5, lettering field size: 40 x 17 mm

ommercial data

EAN 4017918011888

Pack 10 pcs.



[Product notes


http:// wwiv.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from'the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer

.to the user documentation: The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.

General

Color

Base element material


Ambient temperature (operation)

Components

gray

PA

V2

-40 °C ... 100 °C

free from silicone and halogen

PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG http://www.phoenixcontaade

Page 1 / 2

May 7, 2009



UT 4-HESI (5X20)

Order No.: 3046032


rn PH CE NIX Lid CCP NTACT Extract from the online catalog

Fuse modular terminal block, Connection method: Screw connection, Cross section: 0.14 mm2- 6 mm2, AWG: 26 - 10, Nominal current: 6.3 A, Nominal voltage: 500 V, Width: 6.2 mm, Fuse type: G / 5 x 20, Fuse type: Glass, Mounting type: NS 35/7,5, NS 35/15, Color: black

Commercial data

EAN

Pack

Customs tariff

Weight/Piece


1 4017918956578

50 pcs.

85369010

0.018103 KG

Page 44 (CL-2009)

iProduct notes


http:// www.download.phoenixcontact.com Please note that the data given here has been taken from the online catalog. For comprehensive information and data, please refer to the user documentation. The General Terms and Conditions of Use apply to Internet downloads.

Technical data

General

Number of levels


Color

2

black


Page 1 / 5

May 6, 2009



UT 4-HESI (5X20) Order No.: 3046032 http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?U10=3046032

Insulating material


Dimensions

I PA

VO

Width ! 6.2 mm

Length 57.8 mm

Height NS 35/7,5 I 73 mm

Height NS 35/15 80.5 mm

Technical data

Fuse

Fuse type

Rated surge voltage

Pollution degree




Nominal current IN

Nominal voltage UN

G/5x20

Glass

4 kV

3

I III

IEC 60947-7-3

6.3 A

500 V (if used as fuse terminal block)

500 V (if used as disconnect terminal block)

Connection data

Conductor cross section solid min. 0.14 mm2

Conductor cross section solid max. 1 6 mm2









0.14 mm2

6 mm2

26

10

0.14 mm2

4 mm2

0.14 mm2

4 mm2

2 conductors with same cross section, solid min. 1 0.14 mm2

2 conductors with same cross section, solid max. I 1.5 mm2 _ _


Page 2 / 5

May 6, 2009



UT 4-HESI (5X20) Order No.: 3046032 http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoeribdtreeViewClick.do?UlD=3046032

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded min.

0.14 mm2


2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, i 0.14 mm2 ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 1 1.5 mm2 ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, I 0.5 mm2 TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.


Type of connection I Screw connection

Stripping length


Screw thread



9 mm

A4

M3

0.6 Nm

0.8 Nm

Certificates tApkovals

KEMA eva us SP EUR grne Gl

CB, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, KEMA, LR, UL Certification

CSA


Nominal current IN 6.3 A

AWG/kcmil 26-10

CUL


Nominal current IN 6.3 A -}-

AWG/kcmil 26-10

UL

Nominal voltage UN I 600 V

Nominal current IN 6.3 A

AWG/kcmil 26-10


Page 3 / 5

May 6, 2009




Application drawing

[1] [I]

Fuse terminal blocks in interconnected arrangement, block consisting of 5 fuse terminal blocks

Circuit diagram

I I [1] I

Fuse terminal block in single arrangement, block consisting of one fuse terminal block and 4 feed-through terminal blocks


Page 4 / 5

May 6, 2009



J & P Richardson Industries Ply Lid

9 Earth / Neutral Links

DORE - 165E6 -6 Hole Earth Link

DORE - 165N6 -6 Hole Neutral Link

SUPPLIED BY: Dore Electrics 20 Devlan Street, Manfield 4122, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (07) 3349 5300 FAX: (07) 3349 5344

CLIPSAL - L7- Filtered Supply Neutral Link

SUPPLIED BY: Clipsal Electrical Accessories 919 Nudgee Road, Nudgee

4014, Queensland AUSTRALIA PHONE: (07) 267 8044 FAX: (07) 398 8753

File: Swbd Manual Revision 0 Date:! 1 /3/2010



DORE ELECTRICS

EARTH & NEUTRAL BARS 165

EARTH LINKS - 2 MAIN SCREWS FOR 165 AMP CABLE - 2 SCREWS PER TUNNEL FOR 16MM CABLE

EN1

1/7/98

PART No. -._

. No. OF HOLES TRADE PRICE

165E6 6 7.80

165E12 12 10.50

165E18 18 15.20

165E24 24 18.00

165E30 30 __ _ 22.80 . 165E36 36 , 30.00

165E42 42 34.00

165E48 48 37.20

165E54 54 44.00

165E60 60 47.00

165E72 72 52.00

165E80 80 58.00

165E8'4 84 60.00

NEUTRAL LINKS - 2 MAIN SCREWS FOR 165 AMP CABLE - 1 SCREW PER TUNNEL FOR 16MM CABLE

165N6 6 7.60

165N12 12 10.20

165N18 18 14.88

165N24 24 17.60

165N30 30 22.80

165N36 36 , 29.36

165N42 42 33.20

165N48 48 36.20

165N54 54 43.00

165N60 60 45.80

165N72 72 50.80

165N80 80 5 6.60

165N84 84 58.60

MTG. FEET E/N FEET FIT ALL SIZES

SALES TAX 22% -- ,iOT INCLUDED.

PRICES SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.

$1.10 EACH

SCHEDULE 1

PG 18



ICLIPSAL NEUTRAL /ACTIVE /METER LINKS

Clipsal Links are produced from Impact Resistant materials to prevent cracking in transit or during installation.

The transparent covers enable you to check wiring and locate the sealing screw at a glance. The sealing screw (nylon with brass insert) resists stripping. Voltage and amperage ratings are clearly marked on both the cover and brass bar.

All links are available with black or red covers and bases for neutral, active or meter applications as required by local authorities.

T-Type- 500 Volt 140 Ampere

L4T35 500V 140A 4 Hole Neutral Link with two screws per tunnel. Black base and cover.

L4T35R 500V 140A 4 Hole Active Link. Red base and cover.

Dimensions: 65 x 46 x 43mm. Mounting centres: 28mm. 1 tunnel 8.7mm diameter accommodate 1 x 25mm2 cable. 3 tunnels 7.7mm diameter accommodate 1 x 25mm2 cable. Certificate of Suitability No. CS2252N.

Mini Links with Cover

500V 100A 2 screws per tunnel.

L5 500V 100A 5 Hole Neutral Link with two screws per tunnel. Black base and cover.

L5R 500V 100A 5 Hole Active Link. Red base and cover.

Dimensions: 65 x 46 x 43mm. Mounting centres: 46mm. 3 tunnels, 6.3mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2.

2 tunnels, 5.8mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2.

L5BW 500V 110A 5 Hole Back Wiring Neutral Link with two screws per tunnel. Black base and cover.

L5BWR 500V 110A 5 Hole Back Wiring Active Link. Red base and cover.

Dimensions: 65 x 46 x 43mm. Mounting centres: 46mm. 5 tunnels, 7mm diameter accommodate 1 x 25mm2. Transparent black cover, with cut outs.



Dimensions: 65 x 46 x 43mm. Mounting centres: 46mm. 3 tunnels, 6.3mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cable. 3 tunnels, 5.8mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cable.

L6/25 500V 110A 6 Hole Neutral Link with 2 screws per tunnel. Black base and cover.

L6/25R 500V 110A 6 Hole Active Link. Red base and cover.

Dimensions: 65 x 46 x 43mm. Mounting centres: 46mm. 2 tunnels, 7.5mm diameter accommodate 2 x 25mm2 cable. 1 tunnel, 5.5mm diameter accommodates 1 x 16mm2 cable. 3 tunnels, 4.7mm diameter accommodate 3 x 10mm2 cable. Transparent black cover with cut-outs.





Dimensions: 65 x 46 x 43mm. Mounting centres: 46mm. 3 tunnels, 6.3mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cable. 4 tunnels, 5.8mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cable.

L7BW 500V 100A 7 Hole Back Wiring Neutral Link with two screws per tunnel. Black base and cover.

L7BWR 500V 100A 7 Hole Active Link. Red base and cover.

Dimensions: 65 x 46 x 43mm. Mounting centres: 46mm. 2 tunnels, 6.3mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cables. 5 tunnels, 5.8mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cables. Transparent black cover, with cut-outs.


Dimensions: 86 x 57 x 40mm. Mounting centres: 59 x 67mm. 3 tunnels, 6.3mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cable. 5 tunnels, 5.8mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cable. Transparent black cover with cut-outs.

L10 500V 100A 10 Hole Neutral Link with two screws per tunnel.

3 tunnels, 6.3mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cable. 7 tunnels, 5.8mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cable. Dimensions: 86 x 57 x 40mm.

L1OBW 500V 100A 10 Hole Back Wiring Neutral Link with two screws per tunnel.

Dimensions: 86 x 57 x 40mm.

L12 500V 100A 12 Hole Neutral Link with two screws per tunnel.

2 tunnels, 6.3mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cable. 4 tunnels, 5.5mm diameter accommodate 1 x 16mm2 cable. 6 tunnels, 4.5mm diameter accommodate 1 x 10mm2 cable. Dimensions: 86 x 57 x 40mm.

L14 500V 100A 14 Hole Neutral Link with two screws in 8 tunnels and one screw in 6 tunnels.






, -

Catalogue Number

4.7mm' for 10mm2

cable

6.3mm for 16mm2

cable

5.7mm for 16mm2

ceble;'

7mm for 25Mm2-

cable

L5 L5BW L6 16/25 L7

.

''L7BW

D

Catalogue 6.3mm 5.5mm 4.,5irlin Number fOr 16rnm2' for 16mm2 for 10mm2

cable cable 'cable

L8 L10 L1OBW L12 L14 L16 L18

10 12




10 Power Supply

POWERBOX - PB251-24CM-CCT - RTU Power Supply 24VDC 10A

SUPPLIED BY: POWERBOX AUSTRALIA Pty Ltd. 433 Logan Road, Stones Corner 4120, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: 3394 8372 FAX: 3394 8373

File: Swbd Manual Revision 0 Date:II/3/2010



PB251 Series 220-330 WATTS DC UPS

Features Ultra-low noise output Independent battery charging output DC output OK & battery OK alarms & LEDs Battery-LVD and alarm Over-temperature protection Battery fuse fail LED

Specffications INPUT Voltage:

Line regulation:

Current:

Inrush current:

Frequency:

OUTPUT

Voltage

Current

190 to 264 vac, or 190 to 400VDC

0.2%typical

1.4A maximum

10A maximum .....

45 to 65 Hz

See table

See table

Load regulation

Current limit type - load cct

Current limit type - batt. cct

Short circuit protection

Over-voltage protection

Ripple & noise

100 MHz bandwidth

ENVIRONMENTAL

0.5%typical

Constant current

Constant current

Indefi nice, auto-resetting

17.5 to 20V latching (13.8Vdc output) 31.5 to 39V latching (27.6Vdc output)

28mVp-p (13.8Vdc output) 55mVp-p (27.6Vdc output)

Operating temperature

Over-temperature protection

0 to 70°C ambient with derating, 5...90% relative humidity (non-condensing)

Automatic & auto-resetting

Cooling requirement Natural convection

Efficiency

Selection Table

80% minimum

STANDARDS & APPROVALS

Safety

EMC

Complies with AS/NZS 60950, class 1,

NSW Office of Fair Trading Approval N20602

Emissions comply with AS/NZS CISPR11,

Group 1, Class B. Complies with ACA EMC

Scheme, Safety & EMC Regulatory Compliance

Marked

Isolation i/p-o/p i/p-ground o/p-ground

4242VDC for 1 minute 2121VDC for 1 minute 707VDC for 1 minute

- - ALARMS & BATTERY FUNCTIONS

Converter ON/OK alarm Indicated by voltage-free changeover relay

contacts &

green LED ON=PSU OK

Battery low (& fuse) alarm 10.2 to 12.6V for 12V battery, adjustable 20.4

to 25.2V for 24V battery, adjustable Indicated by voltage-free changeover relay contacts &

green LED: ON=BATT OK

Low voltage disconnect 9.6 to 12V for 12V battery, adjustable 19.2 to 24V2 for 4V battery, adjustable

Charger over-load protection Auto-resetting electronic circuit breaker

Reverse polarity protection

Battery to load voltage drop

MECHANICAL _ .

Case size

Case size with heatsink

Internal battery fuse

0.2 to. 0.25V typical

264 L x 172 W x 67 H mm

264 Lx 186W x 67 H mm

Rack size 232 D x 19" W x 2RU H

Weight 1.9 kg

Weight with heatsink 2.1 kg

Weight (rack mounted version) 5.5 kg

MODEL NUMBER PB251-12CM

OUTPUT OUTPUT Note: Non standard battery

VDC 13.8V

(LOAD 'BATT POWER charging current available on

16A 2A 220W request. ie PB251-12CM-H-10 for 10A.

PB251-12CM-H 13.8V 20A 2A 275W

PB251-24CM 27.6V 11A 2A 300W

PB251-24CM-H 27.6V 12A 2A 330W

PB251-12RML 13.8V 20A 4A 275W

PB251-128 13.8V 20A 4A 275W

PB251-24RML 27.6V 12A 2A 330W

powsuirinla,



PB251 Series 275-330 WATTS DC UPS

Technical Illustrations

P B2 51 t*CM (-H) M EC KA NICAL OUTLINE

0EAT5471::P825 I only

NOTES:

I. SlcultingCentreS: Suolie fix KI.Naitre S ardard IGSLBOInn) *Wray: 25 4N SOwn

2. 243 Orel ck,./Iholto on balern of bine. 5 o Mord 130* 11Ornrncer0 AtenTtle: 22I x 80 nmIcentres

3. AC Min: I OAC 111 s 1 2C603203awinla 4. Ot4p4 and tottery 4W P1.99121e Satyr Terninal Bbd

StitliLla fa up to 4 so rnrnnie.

5. APPTIP 611' PW994,1t ScreveTa-niraleb.d. watora opt. 1.514 nunwie

80 80 SurdNOVoNling N

100 221

2

a

i

I

254

Pi 1 .11

r.

...

Ni

26.7.:; ,.,-6

euSI

24 1

264

8

ffEcrromai

4

=

8

428.00

TOP 2,10

OUT PUT ill ATTER T ER VI N.1 TIONS

1S4 4

Wi

"7:7_(-1.trEd

ALARM TER /ANI.P.110,IS

01.4..K..20PK.K_V2

I 7 2

186 (P8251.04-11 Orly)

PB251-"RML & -12B MECHANICAL OUTLINE

0 0 El 0

Pomp sum,

0 PC OT

0 sPiii.mr Of.

0

.0 . k. .

0

0 0 ,01T4GT 10A0 (Mg NI BATTERY CORM 1 0 451 50 483.00

FRONT VIEW

11171:1111:11:11:11

C11150001:10

O

O

REAR VIEW (PB251, RML)

U

0

0 a

00 COO

0

o o o

o

0 4=1-

REAR VIEW (P8251 I 8)

NOTES:

I. 2RU x 19' rack enclosure per IEC 297

2. Mounting slots are suitable for M6 hardware.

3. Input connector is a 10A Class 11E( 60320 inlet_

4. 2 meter IEC mains cord with Australian plug A supplied with unit.

5. P8251 -128 alarm terminal is D8 2S lemak. 6. P8251.128 output and battery connector is Hirose pn. HS 28R -4A.

Mating connector is Hirose pn. HS 28P-9A (not suppEwth.

7. P8 251,3ML alarm and output terminals are M3.5 screws

suitable for ring or fork lugs up to 8 rum wide.

0

P8251,1ML ALARM AND OUTPUT TERMINALS

a I a I ra q3I e a NO E 1 NC INC C INC 1

DC OE BATT OK

ale ale a

j. 2_ u__! LOAD 3ATTERYl

PS251.128 OUTPUT & BATTERY CONNECTOR

PINI: OUTPUT

OUTPUT

P1113: BATTERY

PIN4: BATTERY

P8251 -128 ALARM CONNECTOR

Your dependable power partner - www.powerbox.com.au

PIN I: COMMON

0 PIN 6: DC OK (NC)

PIN 15: BATTERY OK (NO)



J & P Richardson Indusiries Pry Lid

1 I Power Quality

CRITEC - TDS 1100 SR 277 - Surge Diverter

CRITEC - TDF-10A-240V - Surge Reduction Filter RTU

SUPPLIED BY: ERICO 6 Chilvers Road, Thornleigh 2120, New South Wales AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (02) 9479 8500 FAX: (02) 9484 9188




e . - 0 . I e -

D

D ::1 e

-

I

.

. -

I ' , e

:

I - a 0 0

0 " 0 .

0 , 0. - 0. 0

O ' . . tAt,1

CRITEC® TDS1100 TDS Surge Diverter

TDS1100 Series

Surges and voltage transients are a major cause of expensive electronic equipment failure and business disruption. Damage may result in the loss of capital outlays, such as computers and communications equipment, as well as consequential loss

of revenue and profits due to unscheduled system down-time.

The TDS1100 series of surge suppressors provide economical and reliable protection from voltage transients on power distribution systems. They are conveniently packaged for easy installation on 35 mm DIN rail within main distribution panelboards.

CRITEC® TD technology helps ensure reliable and continued operation during sustained and abnormal over-voltage events. Internal thermal disconnect devices

help ensure safe or at end-of-life. A visual indicator flag provides user-feedback in the event of such operation. As standard, the TDS1 100 provides a set of voltage-free contacts for remote signaling that maintenance is due.

The convenient plug-in module, and separate base design, facilitates replacement of a failed surge module without needing to undo installation wiring.



ESE CRITEC TDS1100 TDS Surge Diverter

TDS1100 Series

Model , TDS11002SR:150 120-150V-

TDS.14002SR240 220-240V-

TDS:11002SR277 240-277V-

TDS11002SR560 480-560V- Nominal Volt... L,,

Max. Cont. Opr-ating VlItage ' /c .

.170V-- : , 275V- 320V,-. 610V- Stand off Voltage 240V- 440V- 480V- 700V- Frequency 0 - 100Hz

Short Circuit Current Rating Isc 25kAIC Required Back-up Fti-e 125AgL 'if supply > 100A Technology Used TD with thermal disconnect ',Pititection , *

i.J._,I:A 8/20ps Maximum Dischaig,. .-_.:f ft'. IL illi......

Nominal Discharge Cthrentln 90kA 8/20ps I 40kA 8/20p j 40kA 8/20p 40kA 8/20ps Single mode (L-G, L-N or N-G) Protection Modes

Voltage Protection Level Up .© 3kA < 400V, < 700V < 800V <,1.6kV, Voltage Protection Level Up CO 20kA < 650 < 1000 < 1.1kV < 2kV

arms:an r i n motors., ,,,°,,,...-..

Li- h ,H1_ it / rE,I,

Change -c. E 250V max 1.5 mm (#14AWG) termina !

Status Indication

Physical;Data . ,.i Dimensions

ma:: 2 modules wide, 90 mm x 68 mm x 35 mm

Weight 0.24 kg- -:approx.

Enclosure DIN 43 880, UL94V-0 thermoplastic, IP 20 (NEMA-1)

Connection s35 mrn' (#2AWG)5olid s25 rnm2(#4AWG) stranded

Mounting 35 mm top hat DIN rail

Temperature 1C°C to +80°C (-40°F to +176°F, Humidity 0 to 90%

Approvals CE, IEC'' 61643-1, UL® 1449 Pending .

Surge Rated to Meet IEC 6164' I Class Land ll .. ANSI/IEEE 062A1-1991 Cat A,,Cat B, Cat C ,:--

Ordering Information

'DESCRIPTION .

TDS1102SR150 TDS Surge Diveriti, Ut. 170V, In 50kA, ImaA 100kA, ReiikAe

.TDS1102SR240 ;IDS SurgeDivertti, Lic 275V, In.40kA, Imax 100kA, Reiiiote

TDS Surge Diverter, Uc 320V, In 40kA, 'max 100kA, Remote TDS1102SR277

TDS:1102SR560 TDS -Surge Diverter, 11c 610V, In 40kA,,Imax,100kA, .Rernote,,

TDS150150M 150V Replacement Surge Module

TDS150240M.: , 240V Replacement airge,ModUle .. ,

TDS150277M 277V Replacement Surge Module

TDS150560M,- 560V ReplaCement Surge Module

Due to a policy of continual product development, specifications are subject to change without notice.

WARNING ERICO products shall be installed and used only as indicated in ERICO's product instruction sheets and training materials. Instruction sheets are available at www.erico.com and from your ERICO customer service representative. Improper installation, misuse, misapplication or other failure to completely follow ERICO's instructions and warnings may cause product malfunction, property damage. serious bodily injury and death.

IEC is a registered service mark of Independent Electrical Contractors, Inc.

UL is a registered trademark of The Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

Copyright 02005 ERICO International Corporation. All rights reserved. CADDY. CADWELD, CRETEC, ERICO, ERITECH, ERIFLEX, and LENTON are registered trademarks of ERICO International Corporation.

www.erico.com

E5555 E 711.T06ENWW 004W86



J & P Richardson Industries Ph: Ltd

12 Accessories

CLIPSAL - 15/15+90B (SHROUD) - 1 Phase Outlet 15A

CLIPSAL - 15+449A+449AP - Laptop GPO

SUPPLIED BY: Clipsal Electrical Accessories 919 Nudgee Road, Nudgee 4014, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (07) 267 8044 FAX: (07) 398 8753

MENNEKES - 3658 (3P+N+E 63A) -3 Phase N&E Appliance Inlet, Generator Power - c/w 40787 - Protective Cover

SUPPLIED BY: DSKH Australia Pty Ltd. Unit 4/5 Cessna Drive, Caboolture 4510, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: 1800 010 113

FAX: 1800 010 118

CORTEC - VPCI-110 OR 111 - Corrosion Inhibitor

SUPPLIED BY: CORTEC CORPORATION Pty Ltd. Unit 2/33 Gympie Way, Willetton 6155, Western Australia AUSTRALIA

PHONE: 9457 7796 FAX: 9457 7147

MOORE INDUSTRIES - ECT/4-20mA/4-20mA - Signal Isolators, 2 Wire Input Loop

SUPPLIED BY: MOORE INDUSTRIES PACIFIC Inc. 320 Boundary Road, Spring Hill 4000, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: 3230 5692 FAX: 3230 5656

ADAM - 6017- Remote I/O 8AI 2d0 Modbus/TCIP

SUPPLIED BY: Advantech Co. Ltd. Unit 1/14 Leighton Place, Hornsby 2077, New South Wales AUSTRALIA

PHONE: 1300 308 351




MOULDED MOUNTING BLOCKS

IVIOULDED'IVIOUNTING'BIOCKS .i';';'

Cat. No. Length Width Depth Mounting Centres

------------ /- A

i

B

- ' 1) f

47 103mm 49mm 25mm 78mm apart

708 99mm 52mm , 25mm 55mm apart , " -

.,,,,,,,f ,-,,, ':, ; .,....;_,

70/1 - 80mm - 37mm 25mm . , 55mm apart .-..-:

, 70/2 -- . - . -0Onlm..--, -- - 3imm' , - ° , 25mm ' . -

.

:70inm apart ,

70/0 '.' 116tOm -- 36mm . - 25mm . -97mm apart

447 ,''' - ; . 119thin - 52mm - '-'25mni - - ' ' 98mm apart

448 120mm --". 120mm ' , ' : 28mm -- 84mm x 46mm 0

t t,

'''1--

4:19A':, ' ' -122mm 78m m : ' ' 32mm , 84mm 4..

C2015D4M0

DESCRIPTION

198mm 79inm ' - . 25mm ' -155mm x 50mm, ' "---0.---... re'

-.4' +.1.----,

.....-,;.w.,....g... .. --- - 3013-- '

>_,gg ,

'11; ,.. ,,,. ---.' ;,.. ' ' ''.;.q. ' .- ' ,..

'..--. 4 gi,--... , ,,,,,,

- .- - , .

.- .! .

.

47 ' ' A

1Gang Surface Mounting Blodk, with metal inserts, impact resistant --

(suits Cat. No. 16 combs or others with 98 x 45mm flush plates and 78mm

mounting centres). '

.

.

7 OB :."=:; ,

- B

_ , - 2- , - . _ - . --r_ .- -, ,-- . - -

1 Gang Surface Mounting BloCk,with metal inserts, impact resistant o 1 ' ,

(suit's 31B, 32B and brands of switches with 95 x 48mm flush plates and ° : .

, 55mm mounting centres) . ., . . ,

1. ,: - S., ,.:`,:f? . '' '

--,-.

w- efli, " 4'1 ' ' '0 't'

' ' -IV 0

, ' il,..; 4, :::'-' '!'

7,0/1 s ' , C

1 Gang Surface Mounting Block, with metal inserts, impact resistant

(suits arChitFave switches with 76 x 32mm flush plates and 55mm '

. . -

mounting centres). ° . -- - - -

c. /, )1 am*

E

41111111-21-'7"

letw%

I _.'""; ' 4

G

i.,.:,

4:

: 7"'''

11-

- -

, -',;;. - ,,,,,, -.

Li" IA ,

',-- qt, _ 6 .._

°.,,,-

'

'.;

'17s1

to,

.;.

70/2 , -,

'

D

2 Gang Surface Mounting Block, with metal inserts, impact resistant .L ' '.

(suits architrave switches with 86"x 32mm flush plates and 70mm " - ,

mounting centres) , .- . °. -°:-

70/3 ' '

3 Gang Surface Mounting Block, with metal inserts, impact resistant . _.,

(suits architrave switches with 113 x 32mm flush plates and97mm

Mounting centres). .""- ' ' . "-, . : ' , - '° -

447 -,,f '

. ,-. , ,-, . F

"98mm

. .

, 1 Gang Surface Mounting Block, with metal inserts, 3 mounting screw ' ' °

positions (suits 40, 400 aid switches With 115 x 48mm flush plates and 1

mounting centres) ' . ' °: ,, -:'! °", ° ;,.- -.,,...; -, :

& Id ' . - .,.

, - ,, -

r e-,,- g, ... .

, g

r, ,,,, ... 1 k. ..; 448 , G

2 Gang Surface Mounting Block, with metal inserts, 8 mounting screw- "- .

positions (suits all switches and socket outlets with 115 x 115mm flush . ...

plates and 84'X46mm mounting centres). - ' , ' °--.-

i", ,.h ,i'449A',.* .. '

- ,.-..,,!1,

.449k4, H

,. t .. . ,_ ..,.

1 Gang Surface Mounting Block, with metal' inserts, 6 mounting screw ' : ,

positions, 12 combined'cableYconduit cut-outs (sUitsallswitchesand socket

Outlets with 115 x 73mm flush plates and 84mm mounting cerities)

.- I:--- __ f .

H

C2015D4MB,

..

; .

Mounting Block, enables surface wiring with either conduit or mini duct,

entries on all sides four sturdy fixing points for easy mounting plenty -

of wiring room (suits-C2015D4 Series outlets and can also be used with '

. C2015D4P for additional safety on conducting surfaces). - - .

.,......% kii L P* 2015D4MB ...,,,.1 -- .

N;;



CEE plugs and inlets 16A up to 125A Other voltages and frequencies available on request.

single part body, screw terminals

, IP 44

I ii,g4S,Ig:tref7-37'W' ithareZAT screwless with insulation displacement technique

L IP 44

single part body, screw terminals

64 IP 67

gr.reiatilrinaa with rubberised grip area,

for toughest conditions

..,:,....,.. ......,.......-,..,

_ii1O.Ni, AIM 16 247 16 250 16 256 32 259 32 262 32 268

;7400V : 248 249..fr' 251 252:i 257 4;35 260 261N

..,, 263 26.4: 269 43

16

16

16

32

32

32

947 948 - 951 - - Jpq 711 712 - 717 719-

34g

16

16

16

32

32

32

66 1P67

with screw terminals, central fixing, 61 mm 0 mounting hole

277 280 286 289 292

298

278

281

287

290

293

299

.Z.'4,411 288M! 29141ii

294'24

!Er:17'A 63

63.

63 125

-12'5

*1'25

331)

13201

13204 13210 13215 13217 13223

13202 13205 13211

13216 13218 13224

1320',..1 13206- 132-121

132.19g'i 132254

As IP 44

EalriinWitit`

As IP 44

51170174.7,i4ta1rp:TATT4

with hinged lid

16

1,6

32- 32

-32

As IP 44

Rargiknte.cilifat-"W,

IP 44

1.001-,Ci),-V474,1r1Pliku

6

400V4 919 924

_931r4 9-4

:16; 843 i

&16:

844

802

- 800 4

, 80.1,1"11

803

804,°;1

lk :16 ;5.7

32

461P 67

392 398 401

404 410

393 .

399 402

405 411

394'4'4

400 A .40314 4061

400V 810 812 -l'',-A3, - 837 813,'A - - 816 817 - 838 819cr::: - 82,1:L;

Mal inv-itTIM ;,',1.6. 825 826 ','

-1-,( - 839

00: - _ '

32 831 - 840 - -

400V

8271 -

834

split body, -1118XI

screw 16

terminals 16

32

its IP 44 32

ErtideArtaltiP 7'""-TZ-Tr7tE.

with rubberised grip area, for toughest conditions

A\ IP 44

Kid? with external

,Litglalart 147 148 149,7

151 15253

1.N 159 160

163 - .1,Pf

`..=+.1...

'E=1 13101 13102

13105 13111 03'

;125 1125' ., ;125

L=1-11(3 v,

strain relief ,, 16 3794 le 1 3807

3819 ;.:32j.34 3829

3839

itSJ 3851

EA,W1...,310.W 3 1410 1411

891

3312 3981 3980 - 3306 - 3646 : 3987.4 - 3424 32,66,.:i3

64 IP 67

13180.' 13112d

3796 3811

3823 3830 3844 3855

gRAIFOLIWeigrAtjs 111.,r100`.

with screw terminals, central fixing, 70 mm 0 mounting hole

As iP 44

offigftwiwiutiriwts

t."141, t6,

A\ IP 44

66 IP 67

Ar,...agtahrmtuntegagAsts .

As IP 44

64 IP 67

16

932

:97 935 938

939 - - 1

."j33.5

PEO4 ..1940 3,0 348';,"'M

16

:1153.

;1251 ft 25.

41.

331

334 340

343 346 352

1216

355

359

362 366

1,63

63

11-2 5

7,§1" 822

332 335 341

344 347 353

1107 356 360

363 367

1981 :

1984 410 168N,

=2:1 = illam,---"CW/7117

, .33 ',3:' 835 836 ,;- 6 44 - 3704 -3656.

= _ - 3658 11125.` El - 3665 - 3413 3583 '.'.*

125 - -- 1983



CEE connectors 16A up to 125A 63A: SoftCONTACT, 125A: TorsionSpringCONTACT

Other voltages and frequencies available on request.

single part body, screw mf terminals

1

509 .512 518 521

4 524

KIX .30v

th IP 44 530

onnectors Statairi",WgragreNTA screwless with tih.103M 11 V

insulation displacement technique

ne0tor,s,tiAreol?'i- single part body, screw terminals

66 IP 67

onnectorsigowgrireFLXWM. with rubberised grip area,

for toughest conditions

979

725

510 513 519 522 5

5 1

L Fit400VIN

400VIR

Ceo,Aneftp.,6,ITT:0-FOr77.-

split body, screw terminals

Pr ME r J EKES® Plugs for the world

,ee, IP 44

on et o s Rowe TOR,%tr

with rubberised grip area,

for toughest x. conditiohs

17

WINO m 4 v .m.230NrAttir400V.4 179

121

180 193

122 125

:?:531 14101 14102 14105 14111

ri'400V

661.114,411 rPe

767 31 539 540 542 543

414 00V17

548 551

554

560

549 552

555 561

54441

AN, IP 44

FC7c=t17.1;wer:ICiP with external strain relief

L'Ags 11' 1 ov 3859 3869 3879 3887 3896 3905

16 IP 67

ItAURPORM19011n3OV N4001/3

'Powe rTO P Xtra

14201

14204

14210 14215 14217 14223

14202 14205 14211

14216 14218 14224

ZE:

;44206 14212

16 IP 67

fAn ledrconnediarT1'?

4\ IP 44

23 r , 400V8 3860 3873 3883 3888 3899 3909

-3W ,13/3711

3861

PowerTOP Xtra is rubberised for the best grip. Improved impact resistance even under humid conditions. Highly heat-resistant contact carrier, frame terminals, cable gland and sealing, strain relief and protection against kinking. Enclosure with thread lock, two safety slides and plugs with nickel-plated contacts. Connectors 63A with SoftCONTACT and 125A with TorsionSpringCONTACT.

Sta rTO P®

with SafeCONTACT, screwless with insulation displacement technique, cable gland with seal-

ing, strain relief and protection against kinking, 2-part enclosure with thread and locking slider.

SoftCONTACT

TorsionSpringCONTACT

7



VpClim EMITTING SYSTEMS & ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS

CF)-1 1 0 Emitter, Patented

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Cortec® VpCI -1 10 emitters are designed to provide corrosion protection for metal components and parts enclosed in non-ventilated control boxes, cabinets, or tool boxes up to 10 cubic feet (283 liters) in volume. The Vapor phase Corrosion Inhibitor (VpCI) emits vapors which form a molecular layer on internal metal surfaces to protect critical, complex, and expensive electronic equipment and other metal components during operation, shipping, or storage. VpCI-110 is a small foam emitter through which corrosion inhibitors are slowly released, and moisture and air pollutants can enter to be

absorbed. It provides long-term protection against corrosion even in the presence of adverse conditions including salt, moisture, airborne contaminants, H2S,

503, NH3, and others.

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS VpCI -1 10 can be effectively used for:

Operations, packaging, and storage electrical equipment Marine navigation and communication electronic equipment Aerospace electrical controls Electric motors

Switching equipment Fuse boxes and power boxes Medical equipment Electrical wireways and terminal boxes Scientific and measuring instruments Telecommunications equipment Remote electronics devices Tool-boxes, parts-storage, and other containers holding metals

FEATURES Economical to use Provides continuous protection for up to 24 months during operation and/or shutdown Effective in polluted and humid environments Does not interfere with electrical, optical, or mechanical performance Multimetal protection Quick and easy installation Non-toxic and safe to handle Compact and space-saving Free of nitrites, halogens, and phosphates No spraying, wiping, or dipping required Low VOC values Meets Southern California Clean Air Act and other National and local regulations Self-stick back Self-stick date label Accepted by FDA for corrosion protection of electrical and electronic equipment within food processing plants Canadian Food Inspection Agency acceptance for indirect food contact NSN 6850-01-456-2971 Conforms to MILI-22110C Federal Standard 101, Ardec Technical Report 99- 05, Picatinny Arsenal, New Jersey, USA

aniL e.= r e CORPORATION

erelaarrnemay San VpCIN MCfoThamoiaOces

© EC



METHOD OF APPLICATION VpCI -1 10 is extremely simple and convenient to install. The device should be installed at the earliest possible time. Simply select a space within enclosure where corrosion protection would be useful. Verify the surface is

clean and free of debris. Peel off the protective peel strip from the bottom of the device and attach it to the clean surface.

VpCI -1 10 emitters can be installed in any position. For volumes greater than 10 cubic feet (283 liters), use more than one device. If the enclosure is not totally airtight, or if the access doors are opened frequently, replace the Vp0-110 device more often than every 2 years. After periods of heavy maintenance replace the device. For additional protection spray the enclosure very lightly with ElectriCorr® VpCI-238 or VpCI -239.

SPECIFICATIONS Packaging

Protection

Standard Size

12 individually wrapped emitters per carton up to 10 ft3 (283 liters) per device Foam device with adhesive backing 2.5" D x 2" H

(6.4 cm D x 5 cm H)

FOR INDUSTRIAL USE ONLY

KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN

KEEP CONTAINER TIGHTLY SEALED

NOT FOR INTERNAL CONSUMPTION

CONSULT MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION

LIMITED WARRANTY All statements. technical inforrnolion end recommendations contained herein are based on tests Cod. Corpootion believes to be reliable, but the accuracy or completeness thereof is not guaranteed.

Cod. Corporation warrants Cod." products will be free from defects when shipped to customer. Con. Corporation's obligation undo this warronty shall be limited to replacement of product that proves to be defective. To obtain replocernent product under this warranty, the customer must notify Conec Corporation of the claimed defect within six months after shipment of product in customer. All freight charges for replacement products shall be paid by customer.

Con. Corporation shall have no liability for any injury, loss or domoge *rising out of the use of or the inability to use the produds.

BEFORE USING, USER SHALL DETERMINE THE SUITABILITY OF THE PRODUCT FOR ITS INTENDED USE, AND USER ASSUMES ALL RISK AND LIABILITY WHATSOEVER IN CONNECTION THEREWITH. No representation or recommendation not contained herein shall have any force or eff act unless in o written document signed by on officer of Corox Corporation.

THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO CASE SHALL CORTEC CORPORATION BE UABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

Distributed by:

CORTEC CORPORATION

&At:mart* Sab itrerftrC, riereteie

4119 White Bear Parkway, St. Paul, MN 55110 USA Phone (651) 429-1100, Fax (651) 429-1122 Toll Free (800) 4-CORTEC, E-mail [email protected] Internet http: / /www.CortecVCl.com

printed on recycled paper 10 100% post consumer Revised 3/3/09. Cofer Corporation 2001-7009. All rights reserved. Supersedes: 5/31/06 EledriCorr° and Cortec ore trademarks of Con. Corporation

0 2009. Cotton Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Copying of these materials in any (Om without the writucn authorization of Conec Corporation is strictly prohibited.



ADAM6015 ADAM-6017 ADAM-6018

7-ch Isolated RTD Input Module 8-ch Isolated Analog Input Module with 2-ch DO

8-ch Isolated Thermocouple Input Module with 8-ch DO

rittit ri

WO& 6995 17C E FCC 1:11

Specifications Analog Input

Channels 7 (differential)

Input Impedance > 10 Mil Input Connections 2 or 3 wire

Input Type PI, Balco and Ni RTD

RID Types and Temperature Ranges

Pt 100 -50° C - 150° C

0° C - 100° C

0° C - 200° C

0° C - 400° C

-200° C - 200° C

P11000 -40° C - 160° C

Supports both IEC 60751 ITS90 (0.03851 ca/i2/ °C)

and JIS C 1604 (0.03916 f2/i2/°C) Balco 500 -30° C - 120° C

Ni 518 -80° C - 100° C

0° C - 100° C

Accuracy ± 0.1 % or better

Span Drift ± 25 ppm/° C

Zero Drift ± 6 pV/° C

Wire Burn-out Detection

Ordering Information ADAM-6015 7-eh Isolated RTD Input

Module

ADAM-6017 CE FCC


Channels 8 (differential)

Input Impedance > 10 Mf2 (voltage)

120 II (current)

mV, V, mA

t150 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V

±5 V, ±10 V, 0-20 mA,

4-20 mA

±0.1% or Better (voltage)

±0.2% or Better (current)

±25 ppm/° C

±6 pVr C

Input Type

Input Range

Accuracy

Span Drift

Zero Drift

Digital Output

Channels 2

Open Collector to 30 V, 100 mA max. load

Power Dissipation 300 mW for each module

Ordering Information ADAM-6017 8-ch Isolated Al with 2-ch

DO Module

ADANI C E FCC


Channels

Input Impedance

Input Type

Thermocouple Type and Range:

J 0 - 760° C

K 0 - 1,370° C

T -100 - 400° C

E 0 - 1,000° C

R 500 - 1,750° C

S 500 - 1,750° C

B 500 - 1,800° C

8 (dillerenlial)

>10 Mf2

Thermocouple

Accuracy ±0.1% or Better

Span Drift ±25 ppm/° C

Zero Drift ±6 tiV/° C

Wire Burn-out Detection

Digital Output

Channels 8

Open Collector to 30 V, 100 mA max. load

Power Dissipation 300 mW for each module

Ordering Information ADAM-6018 8-ch Isolated

Thermocouple Input w/

8D0

Common Specifications General

LAN 10/100Base-T(X)

Power Consumption 2 W IQ 24 Voc

Connectors 1 x RJ-45 (LAN), Plug-in

screw terminal block (I/O

and power)

Watchdog System (1.6 second)

and Communication

(programmable)

Power Input 10 - 30 VDc

Supports Peer-to-Peer

Supports GCL

Supports Modbus/TCP, TCP/IP, UDP and

HTTP Protocols

Analog Input

Resolution 16 -bit Sampling Rate 10 sample/second (total)

CMR @ 50/60 Hz 90 dB

NMR @ 50/60 Hz 60 dB

Protection Over Voltage ±35 Voc

Protection Isolation Protection 2,000 Vec

Built-in TVS/ESD Protection

Power Reversal Protection

Environment

Operating -10 - 70° C

Temperature

Storage Temperature -20 - 80° C

Humidity (Operating) 20 - 95% RH

(non-condensing)

Humidity (Storage) 0 - 95% RH

(non-condensing)

711111111rW ̀ Onl'inelt Mafi a www.advantech.com/products



Ili MOORE INDUSTRIESWORLDWIDE

ECT-DIN

Description

to

costs.

Output-Loop (12-42Vdc)

Input-Loop (5.5VIp)

Line/Mains

Features

environments.

COUS 1.1.

E

206-710-09F



ECT-DIN

POWERED

+24V ISOLATOR

opt° isolation

RECEIVER 4-20mA TRANSMITTER

+ 4V

ISOLATED 4-20mA

IN

SUPPLY

XMITTER

maximum)

INTEGRATOR

PID

4-20mA

ECT

- PS

4-20mA

PS

DCS

XMITTER

+ 24V +

ECT DCS

isolefion

ps -4- 24V +

PS



ECT-DIN

Performance

Protection:

Performance (continued) Overrange:

Ambient Conditions

scale Burden:

0.02A

Limiting:

= ohms

Ambient Conditions

(Continued)

Adjustments Span:

ECT 4-20MA

0-10V ohms

12-42DC DIN

Powered) 0-150AC Isolator/Converter

0-5AAC supply

FLB2



ECT-DIN

NON-

XMITTER

NON- ISOLATED

mA

-IN

ECT RECEIVER

+OUT +

ISOLATED mA

' i

.

... ECT

.....

fmcarmunts I .

ECT °-2:-----

....

acoalosnlil ejnia

. ECT r-9.-----

- I. ICCel MILCIF;j

mi.

- -- ECT H._ H M.

1111"° ElHocusurFA

otmon

,,, ,', All ,. f.o ,. 0 0 0 : 0 0

ZED MOORE) INOUSTRIS

8



ECT-DIN -- Performance Accuracy:

Ripple:

Burden:

Performance (continued)

Limiting:

Ambient Conditions

Ambient Conditions

(Continued)

30V/m@20-1000MHz

Adjustments Trim:

Weight

. :.': -: L..7., -, - ,-

ECT

Powered) Isolator/ Converter

into 5.5VLP



ECT-DIN

IMPORTANT:

NON- ISOLATED

XMITTER

+IN

NON- ISOLATED

mAN

-IN

1

ECT

CT/PT OUT

A 4 sworn

CT/PT -OUT

POWER

NON- ISOLATED

\ XMITTER

+OUT ECT

isolason

RECEIVER -4II +TX

NON- ISOLATED

mAN

ISOLATED 4-20mA

+IN -OUT

NON- ISOLATED

XMITTER

A OUT RECEIVER

N

NON- ISOLATED

mAN

-IN

ECT

tf7-{

POWER

ISOLATED 4-20mA

A OUT

B OUT

-OUT

ISOLATED 4-20mA

RECEIVER 2

NON- ISOLATED

XMITTER

A IN OUT

NON- ISOLATED

mNV

+OUT RECEIVER

ISOLATED

isamion mA NON-

ISOLATED

XMITTER -OUT

POWER

A IN

8 W

NON- ISOLATED

mAN

ECT ISOLATED 4-20mA

A OUT

+OUT

DCS

POWER

OUT

ISOLATED 4-20mA



ECT-DIN

Performance Stability:

Isolation:

output

Ripple:

Performance (continued)

Ambient Conditions

Overrange:

maximum

Effect:

maximum

Ambient Conditions

(Continued)

Adjustments

Weight

10V/m@20-1000MHz

20-1000MHz

Zero:

ECT 4-Wire CHANNEL:

4-20MA CHANNEL: 4-20MA

24DC, 117AC,

DIN

Isolator/ 1-5V 0-10V 0-10V into

230AC, -TX

Converter

Externally-

CHANNELS:

CHANNELS: 2X1-5V minimum vibration

2X4-20MA 2X0-10V minimum

2x1-5V

available)

2X4-20MA -EP

housing)



ECT-DIN

36mm

45mm

2-WIRE MODELS

4-WIRE MODELS

51mm

12110,10012121 L--

ECT =MAL =LOOM

IUMOORE

ACC ONO

01101401110211313

MODELS

80mm

130mm

110mm

Output

Output

Input

Rii °MOORE INDUSTRIES

WORLDWIDE www.miinet.com

...nuousw




13 Telemetry Equipment

LOGICA CMG -MD3311EAL/271D-0-7- Telemetry Unit

SUPPLIED BY: LOGICA 349 Coronation Drive, Milton 4064, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: 3327 5222 FAX: 3217 8955

POWER BOX - PBIH-24129-CC - Radio 24V / 13.8VDC Converter

SUPPLIED BY: POWERBOX AUSTRALIA Pty Ltd. 433 Logan Road, Stones Corner 4120, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: 3394 8372 FAX: 3394 8373

YUASA - UXHSO-12 - Batteries

SUPPLIED BY: YUASA Pty Ltd 37-65 Cobalt Street, Carole Park

4300, Queensland AUSTRALIA PHONE: 1300 364 877 FAX: 3361 6705

WAVECOM - GSM Modem

WAVECOM - GSM Antenna

SUPPLIED BY: InterCEL Pty Ltd 33 Glenvale Cres, Musgrave Victoria AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (03) 9239 2000 FAX: (03) 9561 2614

TRIO - DR900-07A02-DO - Radio

TRIO - YAGI ANTYAI3A809B - Antenna

SUPPLIED BY: TRIO DATACOM 41 Aster Avenue, Currum Downs 3201, Victoria AUSTRALIA

PHONE: 8773 0100

FAX: 9775 0606 POLYPHASER CORP. - IS-SONX-C2 - Radio Coax Surge Protection Unit

SUPPLIED BY: RF Industries 30 Rauberbs Road, Banyo 4014, Queensland AUSTRALIA

PHONE: (07) 3261 9400 FAX: (07) 3522 5505




BATTERY CHARGERS

Yuasa Smart Shot Automatic 12V 1.5 Amp 5 Stage Battery Charger

Port No. YUA1201501

Yuasa's Automatic 12V 1.5 Amp battery charger incorporates superior 5 stage charging technology. This high power unit provides error proof operation to fully

charge sealed maintenance free and conventional lead acid batteries

Provides up to 16 volts to enable recovery of sulfated batteries during pre-qualification stage

28 day Charge Recycle - re-evaluates battery status for long term storage

Designed to prevent overcharging

AC power LED indicator

Charging and float mode LED display


Spark-free operation

Battery accessory leads and fused ring connectors included

Steel construction for durability

3 year limited warranty

Yuasa Smart Shot 900 Automatic 12V 900mA Battery Charger

Pori No. YUA I 200901

Yuasa's Automatic 900mA 12V battery charger is the industry's most powerful plug-in wall charger. Combining the latest technology and a host of user-friendly features, this compact, high-power unit provides optimum amperage return

and is designed to fully charge and maintain conventional and sealed maintenance free batteries.

Fully automatic three level charge cycle for effective charging

Reaches 14.4 volts peak, then automatically switches to float

Designed to prevent overcharging

AC power LED indicator

Charging and float mode LED display


Spark-free operation

Durable construction for longer life

Battery accessory leads and fused ring connectors included

12 ft. output cord


ilnek4sit



PREFACE: A Practical Understanding of Lead Acid Batteries 2

SECTION ONE: Battery Basics and Safety About this book 3 About YUASA 3 Features and Benefits 4 The Lead Acid Battery 5-6 The Yuasa Battery Line 7 Yuasa's Conventional Battery 7 Yu Micron Battery 7 Yu Micron CX Battery 8 Sealed (MF) VRLA and High Performance Batteries 8 Battery Safety 9

SECTION TWO: Selecting and Installing a New Battery Selecting the Proper Battery 10 About Sensors 11

Battery Activation for Conventional and Yu Micron Types 12 Activating Standard Batteries 12

SECTION THREE: Inspecting, Testing and Charging The Discharge - Charge Cycle 13 Reasons for Self-discharge 14-15 Ampere-Hour and Cold Cranking Amps 16 Inspecting a Battery 16-17 Battery Testing Devices 17 Battery Testing 18 Chargers and Charging 19-20 Charging a New Standard Battery 20-21 Quick Charges 21

SECTION FOUR: Maintenance and Storage Monthly Maintenance for Conventional and Yu Micron Types 22 Storage 22 Sulfation and Freezing 22-23

SECTION FIVE: Sealed VRLA Batteries New Generation Battery Technology 24 Sealed VRLA Battery Construction 24 Features 24-25 How a Sealed VRLA Battery Differs from Conventional Types 25 Activation and Installation 26 To Activate a Sealed VRLA Battery 26-27 Measuring Voltage 28 Discharge Characteristics 29 Self-discharge 30 Choosing a Charger 30 Charging a Newly Activated Sealed VRLA Battery 31

Routine Charging 32 Charging Instructions for Sealed VRLA Batteries with Voltage of 11.5 or Less 33 Routine Maintenance for Sealed VRLA Batteries 33

GLOSSARY 34-40



D

A Practical Understanding of Lead Acid Batteries

Lead acid batteries are relatively simple in design. Dissimilar metal plates are immersed in an electrolyte solution consisting of sulfuric acid and water. These are then insulated from each other with a permeable, non-conductive material, which allows the transfer of ions. The transfer of ions occurs during the discharge and recharge of the battery. Also occurring is the change in specific gravity or density of the electrolyte. During the discharge period, sulfuric acid is drawn from the electrolyte into the pores of the plates. This reduces the specific gravity of the electrolyte and increases the concentration of water. During the recharge, this action is reversed and the sulfuric acid is driven from the plates,

back into the electrolyte, increasing the specific gravity.

During the discharge, lead sulfate is being formed on the battery plates. Although this is the normal activity within the battery during discharge, a timely recharge is

required to drive out the sulfuric acid into the electrolyte. Without this recharge, the lead sulfate will continue to

develop and become difficult if not impossible to breakdown during recharge. Once this advanced sulfation develops, permanent capacity loss or total failure of the battery is likely. Besides the sulfation concerns, many other detrimental actions are taking place inside the battery while in a discharged condition.

The corrosive effect on the lead plates and connections within the battery is greatly increased due to the reduced specific gravity of the electrolyte. The corrosion of the

plates will typically result in a gradual reduction in performance followed by battery failure. The corrosion associated with the inter cell connectors and the connecting welds will in many instances result in a sudden battery failure. The corroded connector may have sufficient integrity to support low drain accessories such as lights and instruments, but lack the necessary strength to provide the high discharge current required to start the vehicle. This corrosive effect can also dissolve the lead into solution, which in turn may compromise the plate insulators and result in micro shorts. Another condition that frequently occurs in a discharged battery is freezing. In a deeply discharged battery, the electrolyte has a

reduced specific gravity and becomes a higher percentage of water than sulfuric acid. During this condition, the battery may freeze at temperatures as high as 32°F. The electrolyte in a fully charged battery will not freeze in temperatures down to -65°F.

Deep discharge can be created by a multitude of conditions, but the predominant reason is neglect. During long periods of storage, the battery state of charge must be checked and maintained per the battery manufacturers recommendations. Other conditions that can drain the battery are inoperative or inadequate charging systems on vehicles, parasitic or key off drains, loose or dirty terminal connections, etc. Although many of these conditions can be corrected, often the problems you cannot correct may be overcome by a periodic charging schedule. You can establish a routine by which you check and charge your battery or choose to permanently attach a Yuasa Automatic Charger while the vehicle is not in use.

When charging your battery, always refer to the instructions on both the battery and the charger. While maintaining your battery at a full state of charge will insure optimum life, overcharging may significantly reduce it. With a conventional type battery that offers access to the cell compartments, the periodic addition of distilled water may be required. Water loss is normal in

these batteries through the process of electrolysis and evaporation. Low electrolyte levels that expose the lead plates to the air will result in permanent damage to the

battery. Maintain the electrolyte levels above the minimum fill lines on the battery and at or below the maximum line. A sealed VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) battery should be maintained with the same care as a conventional type battery with the exception of the addition of distilled water. Sealed VRLA batteries have a predetermined quantity of electrolyte added at the factory or in the field using the acid bottle specified for the battery. Once activated, the battery is permanently sealed and must never be opened.

A little bit of care and understanding of how your battery operates and is maintained will insure maximum service life.



to)

Battery Basics and Safety

About this book ,,..

If you're looking-far more than eve6,daj? information about batteries, read on . .

Maybe you're a retailer, the expert. whose, battery knowledge and recommendations' guide ..

customers every day -Perhaps you are a technician or dealer - the person vehicle

,. owners turn; ta 'with questions Or maAie 'you're-an' enthusiast set on "knowing everything ' , ..

bike . _about your bike and how to keep it running.

Whatever your reason for wanting Jo boost your' battery IQ, YUASA is Pleased to provide ,.. .. , , , ..

this copy of the ultimate battery book .

It's in=de$tli inforMaticiii: haw 4,-citte-rieSork, maintenance aiia;i'ri.-Stallattoil tips and how

to get maximum power and life from your battery We'll- talk aboat;chargers and:tester's' Ok course; we'll also fill you in On the-complete line of YUASA.batte chargers and accessories

About YUASA

The first thing you need to know about batteries is YUASA -You' might say that when it Comes

to,powersportsVehicle batteries, we wrotethe-bookl We're the largest manufacturer and distributor

of ,small engine starting 'batteries in North America:

if you purchased a motorcycle, snowmobile; personal watercraft, ATV, riding mower orgar'clen

tractor manufactured in the U S, chances are the battery that starts it was made by Yuasa, In

fact, our batteries are original equipment in.just about every major make of powersports vehicles

If you've bought a replacement battery for your powersports vehicle, most likely it was made by

Yuasa Altogether, we manufacture approximately three million batteries a year for. small

engine starting applications at our Reading, Pennsylvania plant.



0

tit


Features and Benefits Component ,-:' Features Benefits

Cast Grid Special Grid Design Severe vibration resistance & improved conductivity

Active Material Proprietary Formulation Reduced shedding, maximum utilization, & long service life

Pasted Plates Specified Thickness & Weight

Ensures vibration resistance through precise compression & proper service life through specified active material balance

Dried-Charged Plates

Tank Formed & Dried Plates

Properly dried plates in a sealed battery have a virtually limitless shelf-life, while

still retaining 70-80% state of charge when filled with acid

Top Lead Connections

Through-Partition-Construction, Large Straps

Shorter current path for increased electrical conductivity & higher starting

currents, heavier parts for maximum durability

Case-Cover Seal

Thermal Bonded Plastic Air tight seal to prevent air ingress & acid seepage

Terminal- Cover Seal

Patented Poly-Seal Terminal

Eliminates acid seepage, reduces corrosion, & extends battery life

Case & Cover Polypropylene Superior resistance to gasoline & oil, impact resistant in extreme

weather conditions

Additive Sulfate Stop (Some models)

Sulfate stop added to reduce the solubility of lead into the acid, which then reduces

battery sulfation potential

Yu Micron

Separator Leaf Separator Polyethylene leaf with glass mat sheet bonded for compression to withstand

severe vibration conditions

YTX

Separator Absorbed Glass Mat Absorbs acid while creating cell compression for extreme vibration resistance

Top Lead Alloy Calcium Alloy Increased weld strength & severe vibration resistance

Vent System Valve & Flame Arrestor Valve relieves excess pressure to prevent bursting, flame arrestor frit prevents

internal combustion

High PerfOrtnance Maintenance Free

Grid System Computer-Designed Radial Grids

Increased conductivity for higher starting wattage, increased vibration resistance

Separator Puncture Resistant AGM Material

High puncture resistant separator for increased service in high vibration applications



z

UI


The Lead Acid Battery Let's look first at battery basics: what battery is and how it works.

a Starting your vehicle depends on a battery.

Lead acid batteries are used as a power source for vehicles that demand a constant and uninterruptible source of energy. Just about every vehicle today does. For example, street motorcycles need lights that operate when the engine isn't running. They get it from the battery. Accessories such as clocks and alarms are battery-driven.

Technically speaking, the battery is an electrochemical device that converts chemical energy to electrical energy. The first thing you notice inside a battery is

the cells. Each cell has about two volts (actually, 2.12 to 2.2 volts, measured on a DC scale). A 6- volt battery will have three cells. A 12-volt battery, six cells.

Standard Features HEAT SEALED CASE TO COVER protects against seepage and

corrosion - bonded unit gives extra strength.

PATENTED SEALED POST prevents acid

seepage, reduces

corrosion - extends

battery life.

THRU-PARTITION CONSTRUCTION provides shorter current path with less resistance than

"over the partition" construction - you get more

cranking power when you need it!

POLYPROPYLENE COVER AND CONTAINER gives greater resistance to gas and oil - and impact in extreme weather conditions!

SPECIAL SEPARATOR provides high cranking power.

SPECIAL ACTIVE MATERIAL is compounded to

withstand vibration, prolong battery life

and dependability.

SPECIAL GRID DESIGN withstands severe vibration, assures maximum conductivity.

HEAVY DUTY GLASS MAT resists shedding of active material even

under severe vibration.



V eao


The cells consist of lead plates that are positive and negative charged. Inside the cell they're stacked alternately - negative, positive, negative. Insulators or sep-

arators - usually fiberglass or treated paper - are placed between the plates to prevent contact. Cranking current increases as the plate surface area in the battery increases - the more plates in a cell, or the larger the plates, the greater the current capacity (or flow of electricity). Typically, capacity increases as the amount of active material increases in the battery.

The alternate plates in each cell are connected at the

top into two groups, one positive and one negative. Each cell's groups of plates are then connected in series - positive to negative - to those in the next cell.

Basically, that's the internal hardware. Next, a solution of sulfuric acid and distilled water - the electrolyte - is

added. And the action starts. A reaction between the lead plates and the electrolyte sets off a chemical change. This in turn creates the electrical charge in a

battery.

That's the process, in a nutshell, that makes every battery work. So, are all batteries the same?

Obviously not. Actually, there can be a number of differences, and they go far beyond things like box size or terminal location. That's true for different brands, as well as for different lines produced by the same manufacturer. Take two types of YUASA batteries, for example: our Conventional and Yu Micron batteries.

What's different? First there's cranking power: YuMicron has more because YuMicron batteries boost plate surface area with thin, high-tech separators that make room for two extra plates in each cell. YuMicron also has a special intercell connector that minimizes resistance to further maximize power. It has a special glass mat that resists

vibration damage.

Just for the record, let's state how the Conventional and YuMicron batteries aren't different: they're both lead-antimony batteries, for openers (other batteries in YUASA's line, including the YuMicron CX, use lead-calcium technology). They have certain things in common that we think should be part of every battery: like sealed posts to resist corrosion, tough polypropylene covers and containers, and heat sealed construction for a strong, bonded unit. And both share certain design features, like special separators and through-partition construction.

Now, does all this mean YuMicron is automatically a better choice than the conventional battery? Of course not.

It all depends on what you need to do. Some of the YuMicron features might not be a big deal to a lawn tractor owner, but a feature like our unique cover design that minimizes electrolyte spillage is going to be really important to the guy on a watersport vehicle or ATV.

Each YUASA line of batteries has its unique features that account for differences in price and differences in

performance - and that's what makes it the right battery for a particular vehicle. Buy what you need. Don't pay for what you don't need.

POINTS TO REMEMBER

A battery converts chemical energy ̀ to electrical energy.

71 Each cell has approximately 2,volts:3 cells for a 6-volt battery, 6 cells for.'a 12.volt battery.

1 Inside each cell are electrically charged positive and negative lead plates, isolated from each other by separators. Chemical action between plates and electrolyte creates an electrical charge.

Current is the flow of electricity..



z

f.0 Battery Basics and Safety

The YUASA battery line... The right battery for the right job - that's where it all starts. YUASA's comprehensive line has the right small engine starting battery... whatever the vehicle, however tough the application.

YUASA's Conventional Battery

\.:11 ,pia -14

YuMicron

MAIK is u""

yiyiAL,CL2 pAit1C t);9-L

The industry standard for motorcycles, snowmobiles and riding mowers, our Conventional Battery is anything but conventional. This workhorse is engineered to protect against seepage and corrosion... withstand vibration... and deliver high cranking power, even when the weather's dealing its worst. It's the rugged, reliable and dependable battery that customers are looking for!

These features are built into our conventional manifold vented battery... and every battery in the YUASA line:

* Patented separators provide high cranking power * Through-partition construction delivers

maximum power Unique sealed posts resist corrosion - for longer battery life Polypropylene cover and container resist damage from gas, oil, impact Heat-sealed, bonded unit construction protects against seepage and corrosion

Personal watercraft, snowmobiles and ATVs make special demands - and YUASA's YuMicron Battery meets them head-on. The high-tech, power-boosting design also makes YuMicron ideal for accessory-laden touring bikes and modified machines.

Heavy duty glass mat resists vibration damage Special thin YuMicron Separator packs in extra plates, delivers up to 30% more cranking power than conventional types Through-the-wall intercell connector minimizes internal resistance, maximizes power

O Sulfate Stop curbs plate sulfation - and provides longer life




Yu Micron CX

For top power, less maintenance and longer life, Yu Micron CX is the battery of choice. The first motorcycle battery built on lead-calcium technology, Yu Micron CX is specially designed for today's big, complex machines, where higher cranking power is a must. It delivers all the

features of the standard Yu Micron - plus...

Unique CX design for higher cold cranking amps Lead-calcium technology reduces water loss - and servicing - by 66% compared to lead antimony And, CX substantially reduces self-discharge - for longer time between charges

Sealed (MF) VRLA and High Performance

Sealed (MF) VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) means a battery that's perfect for people who have better things to do than battery maintenance! Our permanently sealed VRLA battery never needs refilling; however, it still needs periodic charging. Ideal for motorcycles, scooters, ATVs, riding mowers and personal watercraft.

Spill-proof design means virtually no possibility of leaks

Advanced lead-calcium technology pumps up

starting power Sulfation retardant dramatically reduces battery-killing plate sulfation And, sealed VRLA batteries hold voltage longer and need less charging in standby or storage mode High Performance version provides greater cranking power with 12 extra plates per battery



0

Ef)


Battery Safety As with anything, with batteries you have to know what you're doing. Batteries can be dangerous. But they don't have to be if some simple safety precautions are followed.

Basically, working with batteries poses two hazards: potentially explosive gases that are given off during charging, and sulfuric acid, which is very corrosive.

Here's an 8-point list that'll help keep those hazards under control:

1. ABSOLUTELY NO SMOKING, SPARKS OR OPEN FLAMES AROUND BATTERIES. Batteries can produce hydrogen and oxygen; if they ignite the battery can rupture.

2. On conventional batteries, loosen vent caps when charging and ventilate the entire charging area. A build-up of hydrogen and oxygen levels in the battery - or in the room where it's being charged - can create a hazard.

3. If a battery feels hot to the touch during charging, stop charging and allow it to cool before resuming. Heat damages the plates, and a battery that's too hot can rupture.

4. Never put the red sealing cap back on the battery once you take it off. If you do, gases trapped inside can explode. Make sure the vent tube isn't kinked or blocked, for the same reason.

5. Properly connect charger to battery: positive to positive, negative to negative. Unplug the charger or turn it off before you disconnect the leads; that cuts down on the chance of sparks.

6. Always wear eye protection, protective gloves and protective clothing.

7. Clean up acid spills immediately, using a water and baking soda solution to neutralize (1 lb. baking soda in 1 gal. water).

8. Make sure acid container is clearly marked and the work area is well lighted.

If sulfuric acid is swallowed or splashed in the eyes, take immediate action. While the diluted sulfuric acid used as electrolyte can burn the skin, this type of injury is generally less serious. Sulfuric acid in the eyes can cause blindness. Serious internal injuries or death can result from ingesting sulfuric acid.

Antidotes: External - flush with water. Internal - drink large quantities of milk or water,

followed by milk of magnesia, vegetable oil or beaten eggs. Call a poison control center or doctor immediately.

Eyes - flush for several minutes with water, get immediate medical attention.

POINTS TO4EMEMBER- ,

:73 Ventilate battery',, charging area. Charging gives off gases - no smoking, sparks or flames. Safety glasses or face shields, protect against eye damage.

Li Acid swallowed or in the eyes requires immediate antidotes and medical care. All, safety considerations are important... review them frequently.



Selecting and Installing a (u) New Battery Selecting the Proper Battery Selecting the right battery is an important decision. You'd be amazed how often the "problem" with a battery is that it's the wrong one for the application.

To make doubly sure you're on track, you'll need one of two things - either the latest YUASA Battery Specifications and Applications book, or the original equipment (OE) microfiche. Of course, you can always go to the old battery you're replacing. The trick, though, is to make sure it's the original. Otherwise, you may be simply repeating the same problem that caused the battery to need replacing.

OK, let's say you're replacing the battery on an '81 Kawasaki -a KZ1000-C Police, 1000cc.

Referring to the YUASA Battery Specifications and Applications book, you first look under the Kawasaki listing. Then find the right engine size - 1000cc, where you find the KZ1000-C Police. You're looking for an '81, so the place to be is '80 to '81. The chart on this page shows what it looks like.

If this were a sensor-equipped battery - which it isn't - the applications book would mark it with a footnote (t). That tells you to order it with a sensor.

What's the right battery? You'll see there are three of them: a High Performance Maintenance Free YTX2OHL-BS, a

Maintenance Free VRLA YTX20L-BS, and a YuMicron YB16L-B battery. Any of these will do fine. If your machine has increased compression modifications to the engine, for example, you might want the additional

POINTS TO REMEMBER.

cranking power. And if the added benefit of never adding water again appeals to you, go with the High Performance Maintenance Free or the Maintenance Free

VRLA style batteries.

A few words of advice: always double-check that you have the right battery for your application before you charge and install it. If you have any questions, check out our website at www.yuasabatteries.com or contact us toll free at 1-866-431-4784.

Warning: In the event you want to upgrade to a sealed VRLA battery, please ensure you have the proper charging voltage. Always refer to your service manual.

IV' L...... II

cc Model Year

" ',...

TORCY

petiolifgrnhance

Maintenance

Free

- W.. ,11k 4., ,I. , r

- -

Maintenance

Free Yukon VRLA

:

Conventional

KAWASAKI

1000 121000-P Poke '02,03

1,21ocio-F, Police 12-'01

YTX28HL-8S

YTX2OHL-BS ' YfX201 8S

Y1X201.8S ' -

YI318L A

Y8161.8-

-

121000C Poke '80-'81 YTX2OHL-8S * YTX201-8 ' 02100 -C Police, 21-R 78-79

121000. LTD 77-'80

1Q1000-F ST, Shaft 79-10

071000-6 Classic '80

h21000. LTD, CSR '81-13

1Q1000-R Replica '82283

Z1000 D3-'04

YTX14AHL-BS

YTX14AHL BS

YWOHL-8S ' YTX14A141-8S

YTX28HL-138*

YTX20HL-8S *

YTY201.8S "

YIVOL 8S ' Y1X201 8S ' YT09-8S

Y8141 A2

Y8141-112

Y816L 8

Y8141-A2

Y818L A

YB18L -A

-

-

-

-

-

.0 Check current Applications Book or microfiche for right replacement battery.

O There may be two or more "right" batteries - choose by performance needs.

O Double check numbers before activation and installation.



2 U sea

Selecting and Installing a New Battery

About Sensors Many of today's motorcycles use batteries equipped with sensors. They're either built in the battery, or packed with it.

A sensor is a "low fuel" warning light. It tells you when you're getting low - in this case, on electrolyte. The sensor causes a warning light to flash, signaling that it's time to add water to the battery. The cutaway views below show what a sensor looks like.

Sensors are sort of particular: they don't go with just any battery. Which means it's important to replace the old battery and sensor with the correct YUASA sensor battery listed in the applications book. So, sensor rule

one is this: replace both battery and sensor at the same time.

"But the sensor's original equipment," you say. Doesn't matter. Being OE doesn't mean it 's OK in another manufacturer's battery. In fact, OE sensor plugs vary consid- erably in length, size and diameter. A plug that's too long can short out a battery and mess up the electrical system. If the plug's short, the warning light will flash way too early.

Note, too, that even YUASA's sensor batteries are not interchangeable; they have different vent locations, sensor wire lengths and diameter of cylinder connectors.

CUT-AWAY VIEW OF SENSOR,

0

COVER ..

MAX

ACID LEVEL

MIN "tlE- LEAD

'POINTS TO REMEMBER

Replace battery and sensor at same time. 71 Original, equipment sensor isn't "OK" for a new battery.

Sensor batteries and sensors are not interchangeable - check APplications Book.



BM tft

Selecting and Installing a New Battery

Battery Activation for Conventional and Yu Micron Types Sealed at the factory, a new YUASA battery has an indefinite shelf life as long as it remains sealed, with the red cap in place, and is stored at room temperature. Once it's unsealed, a battery should be activated, charged and installed. The plates of an unsealed, uncharged battery begin to oxidize. That makes it more difficult to charge later. (We talk more about sulfation later in this book.) And if it's charged and sits

around, it starts to discharge and sulfate; how fast depends on temperature.

Here are the steps for activating most batteries, including YUASA's Conventional, Yu Micron, Yu Micron CX. (Sealed VRLA - YT or YI - batteries are activated differently, see page 26.)

Activating Standard Batteries

1. Right before adding electrolyte, remove filling plugs. Also remove the sealing tube - the red

cap - and throw it away. (Putting this cap back on after the battery's filled with acid can cause an explosion.)

2. Place battery on a

level surface. Fill battery with electrolyte (a sulfuric acid dilution with a specific

gravity of 1.265). Do not use water or any other liquid to activate.

Electrolyte should be between 60°F and 86°F before filling. Fill to UPPER LEVEL as indicated on battery.

NOTE: Never activate a battery on the vehicle. Electrolyte spillage can cause damage.

3. Let battery stand for at least 30 minutes. Move or gently tap the battery so that any air bubbles between the plates will be expelled. If acid level has

fallen, refill with acid to upper level.

4. A battery must be completely charged before installation. Charge for three to five hours at the current equivalent of 1/10 of its rated capacity found in the

Yuasa Applications Book.

YUMICRON Battery Specifications

BATTERY

TYPE

CAPACITY

AH

(10H-R)

DIMENSIONS - INCHES

(i 1/16 IN)

YB2.5L-C 2.5 3 3/16 23/4 4 1/8

YB2.5L-C-1 2.5 3 3/16 23/4 4 1/8

Rated YB3L-A 3 3 7/8 2 1/4 4 3/8

Capacity YB3L-B 3 3 7/8 21/4 4 3/8

YB4L-A 4 4 3/4 23/4 3 5/8

YB4L-B 4 4 3/4 2 3/4 3 5/8

YB5L-B 5 4 3/4 2 3/8 51/8

5. During charging, batteries can spit electrolyte out the open vent. Take care to loosely refit vent caps.

6. Check during initial charging to see

if electrolyte level has

fallen, and if so, fill with acid to the UPPER LEVEL. After adding, charge for another hour at some

rate as above to mix water and acid. Note: this is the last time electrolyte should be added, but distilled water should be added as required.

7. When charging's done, replace plugs firmly. Do not apply excessive pressure. Finger tighten only. Do not over-tighten.

8. Wash off spilled acid with water and baking soda solution, paying particular attention that any acid is

washed off the terminals. Dry the battery case.



Inspecting, Testing and Charging

441

The Discharge - Charge Cycle As we mentioned earlier, an electrochemical action within the battery produces electricity. To understand it, let's look inside a battery again: you'll see cells made up of lead plates. Some plates are positive charged. Others are negative charged. There's also the electrolyte - a sulfuric acid solution that conducts the current. It sets off the chemical process that takes place in the battery.

So what goes on when a battery discharges?

The electrolyte reacts chemically with the lead plates - and it's not exactly a match made in heaven: it turns them into lead sulfate. If sulfate reminds you of sulfation, you're right on target: this build-up of sulfate crystals is exactly what battery-killing sulfation is.

In the process, the electrolyte - which contains hydrogen, sulfur and oxygen - gives up its sulfur and some of its

oxygen. The electrolyte turns to water. Now you know why a discharged battery - filled with water instead of electrolyte - can turn into an ice block when the temperature drops even into the 20s. On the other hand, a properly-charged battery won't freeze until the

mercury gets way down in the minus range.

The chemical process causes free electrons to slowly gather on the negative plates. They just hang there until a load is placed on the battery -a light or starter's

switched on - which causes a swarm of electrons to rush

to the positive plates.

If the chemical process just went on and on, unchecked, the lead plates would soon turn totally to lead sulfate, the electrolyte would become pure water,

POINTS TO. REMEMBER

ri Deep discharge or prolonged discharge leads to harmful sulfation.

ri A discharged battery freezes much faster than a charged battery.

I:1 Charging can reverse discharging.

n Charging gives off hydrogen and oxygen, which are explosive.

and the chemical and electrical activity inside the battery would come to a standstill. It's bad for a battery. So is allowing a battery to remain discharged for a

prolonged period. Recharging becomes hard or impossible.

The good news: except in extreme cases, the process of discharging can be reversed. You work that magic by putting a larger voltage on the battery - for example, 14v on a 12v battery. That's charging.

Here's what goes on when a battery charges:

The electrical charge flowing back in causes the lead sulfates to send their sulfate back into the electrolyte. As a result, both the electrolyte and the plates -return to their original composition.

You'll notice bubbles in an actively-charging battery. That's called gassing. It occurs because hydrogen and oxygen gases are liberated as the charging current breaks down the water.

Several things are actually happening here. The process breaks down water into hydrogen and oxygen vapor, which escapes out the vent tube. You have to replace that loss. Add distilled water to each cell after charging. Then give the battery a "mixing charge" for another hour. The hydrogen and oxygen gases that are given off can also build up pressure in the battery - which is why batteries are vented, and why the vent tubes can't be bent or blocked. Very importantly, hydrogen and oxygen are very explosive. It bears repeating that sparks, flames and cigarettes around charging batteries can be a one-way ticket to trouble.



z Inspecting, Testing and Charging

Reasons for Self-discharge Batteries have a natural tendency to discharge. There are a number of reasons why: self-discharge, high temperatures, drain from electrical accessories on a

vehicle, and short trips that aren't enough to recharge the battery.

Months'on Storage Shelf

2 4 6 8 ,10 16 :'18

40

vi 60

o. 80

0 , E 1004-

lead- Calcium

Lead-Antiniony

Self-Discharge: Self-discharge goes on all the time. It's a battery fact of life that they get weaker from "just sit-

ting." How rapidly batteries self-discharge depends, first of all, on battery type. Lead-calcium batteries, such as

YUASA's CX, YT, YI, discharge more slowly than conventional batteries. At room temperature lead-calcium discharges at 1/300 volt per day. Conventional lead-antimony batteries discharge at 1/100 volt per day.

Temperature: Outside temperature plays a big part, too. As the mercury goes up, batteries discharge faster.

Particularly in hot climates, that can mean trouble: every 18°F doubles the discharge rate, so a battery at 95°F discharges twice as fast as one at 77°F. And temperatures

Days Stored - -

From 100% Charged to 100% Discharged .0, 100.. 200 300.400 500 600 700:800 WO 1000

104°F

a t 77°F Pniffit-----7-1

32°F

1

Lead-Antimony P1 Lead-Calcium

of 130°F are battery-killing. Been in a closed-up garage or storage building on a hot summer day recently? In

many parts of the country, it's no trick for inside temperatures to reach that.

Accessories: Electrical accessories on some of today's newer and bigger bikes - clocks and computer memory, for example - will discharge the battery continuously, even when the ignition's off. The drain can be considerable. You can find out the drain, in milli-amperes, by disconnecting the negative terminal and putting a multimeter in line. It should look like this:

Checking Current Drain Negative Battery Cable

Motorcycle Battery

Keep in mind that at the same time accessories are drawing on the battery, the battery's self-discharging, too. The charts below show how fast a battery is discharged by self-discharge and by current drain:

Multimeter

Approx. Number of Days From100%

Temperature - Charged to 100% Discharged

Lead=Antimony Lead-Calcium Battery Battery

104°F

77°F

32°F

100 Days

200 Days

550 Days

Curvont li

300 Days

600 Days

950 Days

4ir3O-NISIL-A) Days From s'' Days From

Discharging 100% Charged to 100% Charged to Ampere' 50% Discharged 100% DisCharged

7 mA

10 mA

15 mA

20 mA

30 mA

60 Days

42 Days

28 Days

21 Days

14 Days

119 Days

83 Days

56 Days

42 Days

28 Days




12 Dayix x_24 Hotirs-i- 8 64:AH'

'8 64 AH - 20 AH1Y50-NOL2A1='41.0%:A:Vailable Capaiity'

12 Days - 200 Days -to 100% Loss ='6.0% Available Capacity

'Current Drain :''..--,43.0%'Available Capciiity

Self-discharge :71-6.0% AVailable Capacity

Loss in 12 Dayi, 49.0%vailable Capacity

Let's see what happens as the two work together to discharge a battery:

The battery, starting out 100% charged, has a 30mA discharge rate from electrical accessories on the motorcycle.

At an average outdoor temperature of 77°F a lead- antimony battery loses about half its capacity in only 12 days due to the combination of self-discharge and current drain. In another 12 days, it's completely dead. In other words, it doesn't take long for the double whammy of self-discharge/accessory drain to knock out a battery for good.

If current drain is measurable when the motorcycle is

.POINTS TO-REMEMBER

turned off, you can do one of two things: disconnect the battery when the vehicle is in storage, or charge the battery every two weeks to a full charge. However, cycling - or continually recharging the battery - will shorten its life. Check the battery's condition with either a hydrometer or voltmeter (or a multimeter). The

section on Testing a Battery has details.

Short Trips: What if you use the vehicle now and then - a couple of times a week for errands, or even daily for a short trip to work?

You can't assume that occasional use or short trips (under 15 or 20 miles) will keep the battery charged. In fact, they're probably going to add to drain, because the bike's charging system doesn't have enough time to make up for losses from normal starting and self-discharge. You're going to have to charge the battery more often. Maybe every month or so, depending on temperature.

Does the surface the vehicle's parked on, or a battery's sitting on, contribute to how well it holds a charge? You sometimes hear "experts" say parking on concrete will accelerate discharge. Bet them it's not so. Then collect. Concrete, macadam, wood, dirt, stones, sand - makes no difference. A battery discharges at the same rate, no matter what surface it's on.

And here's a hint: if a battery suddenly dies and there's no apparent reason for it, check the electrical system before you buy a new battery. One of life's little let- downs is to shell out dollars for a new battery when you didn't need to - and then still have the problem.

71 Conventional lead-antimony batteries discharge @ 1/100 volt per day.

3 Lead-calcium batteries discharge more slowly @ 1/300 volt per day.

3 Higher. temperatures mean faster discharge.

Ii Temperatures over 130°F kill batteries.

71 Self-discharge and short trips, cause drain. 3 The more electrical accessories you add to a bike, the greater the

current drain.



17=3

Eli


Ampere-Hour and Cold Cranking Amps There are two battery ratings you need to know: capacity, or ampere-hour rating, and cold cranking amps, or cold start rating.

Ampere-hour rating (in the YUASA Applications book it's abbreviated as AH) is a battery's ability to deliver current for an extended period of time. Because low temperatures slow down the chemical reaction inside a

battery, a battery will have a lower ampere-hour rating in cold temperatures than in warm ones.

Most small engine batteries are rated at 10 hours. That says they have to last at a given discharge rate that long. A 14 ampere-hour battery, for example, discharges at a rate of 1.4 ampere-hours for 10 hours. At this point, cell voltage has dropped to

1.75v per cell (10.5v for a 12v battery, or 5.25v for a

6v battery). Usually, the larger the plates, the greater the ampere-hour rating.

Cold start rating - the high rate or the cold cranking amps, abbreviated C.C.A. in the YUASA applications book - tells how well a battery can be expected to

stand up to low temperatures. This rating depends on the number of plates and their surface area. The rating's arrived at by discharging a cold (0°F) battery at a

high rate - for example, 150 amperes - while discharge is monitored with a voltmeter.

Generally, as displacement per cylinder increases, so

does the cranking current - but since starting systems

differ by model and manufacturer, the best advice is to check the application book for OE replacement. If a

special application demands higher cranking power, select an appropriate alternate unit from the YUASA battery line. Once again, match battery features to needs. Cold start rating is important in a snowmobile. A lawn tractor owner probably doesn't care... unless he plows snow, too.

POINTS TO REMEMBER

Capacity or ampere-hour rating: a battery's ability to discharge current over time.

Cold cranking amps measure battery high rate performance in cold weather.

Inspecting a Battery It's good policy to always inspect a battery before you test it. Here's how:

1. Make sure the battery top is clean and dry. That's

not just because of looking pretty: a dirty battery actually discharges across the grime on

top of the case. Use a soft brush and any grease-cutting soap or baking soda solution. Make sure plugs are finger tight

so cleaning materials don't get into cells and neutralize the acid.

2. Inspect battery terminals, screws, clamps and cables for problems: breakage, corrosion or loose connections. Clean the terminals and clamps with a

wire brush and coat terminals with no ox grease.

3. Inspect case for obvious damages such as cracks or for leaks; look for discoloration, warping or raised top, which may indicate that battery has overheated or been overcharged.



2

4.9


4. Check electrolyte level and add distilled water if necessary. Don't add acid - only water. Before any tests, charge the battery so the water and electrolyte mix.

POINTS TO REMEMBER

Inspect before you test. II Dirt on top of case causes discharge. 0 Look for obvious damage to battery and connectors. 0 Add water if electrolyte is low. 71 Make sure vent tube is clear.

5. Check the vent tube. Make sure-it's not kinked, pinched or otherwise obstructed. On a motorcycle, it

should exit away from the drive chain and from below the swing arm. Small cuts in the tube near the battery vent are OK; they're an "emergency escape" for gas in

case the tube becomes obstructed.

Battery Testing Devices How much of a charge does a battery have? There are two easy and reliable ways to find out: 1) a hydrometer, which comes in floating ball and calibrated float types, or 2) a voltmeter (or multimeter, which gives DC voltage readings).

Which is best?

If you're choosing between two hydrometers, opt for the calibrated float type. It gives you an exact specific gravity reading (that is, the density of the

electrolyte compared to water); that's much more accurate than floating balls. For readings on calibrated float and floating ball hydrometers, see "Methods of Checking Battery Condition" chart on the next page.

A voltmeter or multimeter can be used where a hydrometer can't. Most sealed VRLA or low maintenance batteries have to be tested with a voltmeter.

Hydrometer

Yuasa Multimeter

Battery testing requires a voltmeter that can measure DC voltage. Remember to always connect a voltmeter parallel to the circuit being tested, observing polarity; otherwise, the pointer will travel in the wrong direction. It's a good idea to periodically check a

voltmeter against another one of known accuracy.



2

(LP 15E!


Battery Testing There are two types of battery tests: unloaded and loaded. An unloaded test is made on a battery without discharging current. It's simplest and most commonly used. If you need a precise reading, loaded testing is the

answer. It's more accurate.

UNLOADED TESTING: Check charge condition using either a hydrometer or voltmeter. With a voltmeter, voltage readings appear instantly to show the state of charge. Remember to hook the positive lead to the battery's positive terminal, and the negative lead to the negative terminal.

A hydrometer measures the specific gravity of each cell.

The specific gravity tells the degree of charge; generally, a specific gravity of about 1.265 to 1.280 indicates a full charge. A reading of 1.230 to 1.260 indicates the battery should be charged before testing. The chart below shows the charge level as

measured by syringe float hydrometer, digital voltmeter and five-ball hydrometer.

.

State'of? iti4e, -,' ''.Digital .hcFfgf,°_:- Hydrometer Voltmeter'

- . ..5-Ball Hydroineter.

100% Charged

w/Sulfate Stop

100% Charged

75% Charged

50% Charged

25% Charged

0% Charged

1.280

1.265

1.210

1.160

1.120

less than 1.100

12.80v

12.60v

12.40v

t 12.10v

p 11.90v

less than 11.80v

5 Balls Floating

4 Balls Floating

3 Balls Floating

2 Bolls Floating

1 Balls Floating

0 Balls Floating

.

A battery's specific gravity changes with temperature. Ideally, readings should be taken at 77°F. Is it really going to matter if you're off a couple of degrees one way or another? Probably not. If you're working somewhere

that's uncomfortably hot or cold, it's time to use the old conversion factors: add .001 to the specific gravity reading for each 3°F above 77°F or subtract .001 from the specific gravity reading for each 3°F below 77°F. Cell voltage can be found by adding .84 to the specific gravity.

Note, too, that YUASA's "Sulfate Stop," a chemical additive that increases battery life by drastically reducing sul-

fate buildup, changes the specific gravity readings; they'll be higher than with ordinary batteries.

Test sealed VRLA types with a voltmeter or multimeter. If the stabilized open circuit voltage is

below 12.5v, the battery needs charging. For a stabilized open circuit reading, first allow the battery to remain in

an open circuit condition for at least 1 - 2 hours.

LOADED TESTING: There are two types of loaded tests

for motorcycle batteries. You'll need a voltmeter or multimeter.

Low-load test: Basically, this means turning on the bike's lights and taking a voltage reading at the battery. Remember, hook positive (+) to positive (+), negative (-) to negative (-). The battery in a 12v system should have at least 11.5v DC with the lights on. A 6v system should have at least 5.75v DC. If voltage drops below these lev-

els, it's time to charge.

High-rate discharge test: This is the best test of battery condition under a starting load. Use a load testing device that has an adjustable load. Apply a load of three times the ampere-hour rating.

At 14 seconds into the test, check battery voltage: a

good 12v battery will have at least 10.5v, and a good 6v battery, at least 5.25v. If the reading's low, charge.

POINTS TO REMEMBER

Use a voltmeter or hydrometer to test state of charge. CI In extreme cold or heat, you'll have to adjust hydrometer readings. n Battery can, be tested with or without electrical load applied. El Unloaded testing is simplest. 1 Applying a load and reading voltage atbattery is more accurate.



0 ato


Chargers and Charging There's a simple rule of thumb about batteries, and if you're a dealer or a mechanic, you know that people ignore it all the time: for a battery to operate the way it's

supposed to, it has to be fully charged before it's used... and kept fully charged throughout its life.

A charger basically brings a new battery, or a battery that has been discharged, to full capacity. Plugged into a

wall socket, it sends direct current, flowing in the opposite direction of the discharge, into the battery.

Charging actually reverses the destructive chemical process that goes on as a battery discharges: the lead plates and electrolyte, which were being transformed into lead sulfate and water, are restored to their original composition. If a battery has been damaged - for example, it's badly sulfated, or the plates have been damaged from overheating or freezing - it may not accept a charge.

TYPES OF CHARGERS: There are five basic types of battery chargers. With all of them, hook the positive charger lead to the positive battery terminal, and the negative to the negative. Some chargers on the market deliver a low charging voltage that can't fully charge the battery; avoid them if you're buying a charger. A 12 volt, 900 mA charger will meet most needs.

Of course, too much of a charge can be a problem, too - it can "cook" a battery. For small engine starting batteries, don't use a charge greater than 2 to 2.5 amps for maintenance purposes. A badly discharged battery with very high internal resistance may never accept a charge from a standard charger. It would then require special charging equipment.

ALWAYS OBSERVE PROPER SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN CHARGING BATTERIES

TRICKLE CHARGER: This is the charger a consumer - as opposed to a battery retailer or garage - will usually have. It charges the battery at a fixed rate. Different ampere-hour batteries have different charge rates. For most motorcycle and other small engine starting batteries, charge them at 1 /10 of the rated ampere-hour values in the Yuasa Applications Book, see example on page 12 for ratings.

Battery voltage increases with the amount of charge. Find charging time for a completely discharged battery by multiplying the ampere-hour rating by 1.3 when charging with standard current. The chart on page 21 shows the approximate time needed to fully charge lead-antimony batteries using a trickle or taper charger.

The chart on page 32 shows the approximate time needed to fully charge sealed VRLA batteries.

Test the battery during charging, and continue charging until all cells are gassing. Use either a voltmeter (or multimeter) or hydrometer. The specific gravity of the electrolyte in all cells in a fully-charged battery should come to at least 1.265 in a conventional battery and 1.280 in a YuMicron and sealed VRLA battery with Sulfate Stop.

-:Electrolyte Temperature:- State

of ' Charge ot&' Icx&'

YuMicron Conventional. YuMicron Conventional

80°F 40 °F

1 28/ 129

75% 1 22/ 1 21/ 1 23/ 1 22/ 123 122 124 123

AssrAssi

50% 1 17/ 1 16/ 1 18/ 1 17/ 118 117 119 i 1 18

25% 113/ 112/ 1 14/ 113/ 114 113 115 114

0% 1.11/ 1.10/ or less or less

1.12/ 1.11/ or less I I or less

I

During charging, check the electrolyte level periodically and add water - preferably distilled - to keep the electrolyte level up to the line. if the battery becomes hot to the touch, stop charging. Resume after it has cooled.

Note that permanently sealed batteries - YUASA's sealed VRLA battery, for example - generally can be test-

ed only with a voltmeter or multimeter. These batteries are fully charged when the voltage peaks and then begins to fall.

Unless using an automatic charger, do not hook a battery to a trickle charger and leave it unchecked for longer than overnight. After about eight hours maximum, careful monitoring is

required.

Caps need to be replaced finger tightened after charging's done.



Eft


TAPER CHARGER: Similar to the trickle charger, the automatic taper charger charges at a fixed voltage. As the battery's voltage increases with the amount of charge, the current drops accordingly.

A drawback of both the automatic taper and trickle chargers is speed... they don't have it. As the chart on

page 21 shows, it can take days to bring a discharged battery up to 100%. Here, too, check batteries for overheating as they charge.

CONSTANT CURRENT CHARGER: A professional- quality charger, the constant current makes charging simple. It maintains a constant supply of current to the battery at all levels of charging. You select the charging current. As the battery voltage increases with the amount of charge, this charger automatically increases the charging voltage to maintain the current output.

CHARGER /MAINTAINER: This type of charger monitors the voltage constantly during charging and

POINTS TO REMEMBER

standby modes. When battery voltage reaches a speci-

fied low level, the charger/maintainer then delivers a full

charge. Then when the battery gets to the specified volt-

age, it automatically drops to a float charge.

HIGH RATE CHARGER: Not for use with small engine

starting batteries. They force a high current into the battery, which can lead to overheating and plate damage.

State of Sealed CX & Charge VRLA Yu Micron Conventioncd

100% 13.0v

75% 12.8v

50% 12.5v

25% 12.2v

0% 12.0v or less

12.6v

12.4v

12.1v

11.9v

11.8v or less

Fully charge battery when new and keep it fully charged.

J Test charging batteries as necessary for overheating, water and state of charge.

Trickle and taper chargers are generally slow.

Constant current and pulse chargers are professional quality.

3 High rate charger can cause battery damage.

Charging a New Standard Battery The most important thing to remember about charging a

new battery is do it!

A battery out of the box with only adding electrolyte is

approximately 80% charged. Our recommendation is to

initial charge, bringing the battery to 100% before use.

This completes the electrochemical process. However, a

long ride with a regulated charging system may also bring the battery's capacity to a higher level.

Note: See "Section 5" for charging sealed VRLA batteries.



Pal V/


The rule of thumb is to charge a new battery for three to five hours at a rate equal to 1/10 of its rated capacity. But

there are a lot of exceptions to that rule, as this table shows:

Quick Charges

What about quick charging? The quick answer is

don't. We don't recommend it, and here's why: only the surface area of the battery plates can be quick charged. A lower current charges the battery more uniformly. That means better performance. Also, excessive charging rates increase the chance of overheating, which can mean battery damage.

_,Battery Tipes -12N12 12N14 1%18;

75%

50%

25%

0%

75%

50%

25%

0%

-ApproximateCharge Times (Hours) Using a "Trickle" (0.25 Amp) Charger

13

25

38

50

-

APproximate`Charge Times (Hoqs) Using a Amp Taper Charger

23

45

68

90

6

11

15

20

7

13

18

23

10

19

27

35

Approximate Charge Times (Hours) Using a 1 AMp Constant Current Charger

3

6

9

13

REMEMBER

4

9

13

18

6

11

17

23

,

'10: A, new "battery after:CictiNiOtion.ii'amirokimately, 80%-charged. , . . ,

,

0 Initial charging is-always recommended. NEVER quick chargé.

w at -a rated a Charge a- ne battery ata rate equal to 1/10 of i ts capaCity., , .



2 Maintenance and Storage

03)

Monthly Maintenance for Con Batteries don't demand a lot of attention. But not giving your battery the attention it needs can leave you stranded... or poorer by the cost of a new battery.

How often should you maintain a battery? About monthly under usual conditions. However, recharging is necessary when lights get dim, when the starter sounds weak, or when the battery isn't used for more than two weeks.

Important as it is, there's really not much to battery maintenance. Basically, just follow the procedure outlined in the section "Inspecting a Battery."

That means:

Check electrolyte level.

Keep the top free of grime. Check cables, clamps and case for obvious damage or loose connections.

o Clean terminals and connectors as necessary.

Make sure exhaust tube is free of kinks or clogs.

Replace caps, finger tighten only.

Then, test the battery with either a hydrometer or voltmeter. Keep it charged to 100%.

Storage If the vehicle is in storage or used infrequently, disconnect the battery cable. That eliminates drain from electrical equipment. Check battery every two weeks and charge as necessary.

ventional and Yu Micron Types For extended storage, remove the battery from the vehicle and charge to 100%. Charge the battery every month if

stored at temperatures below 60°F. Charge every two weeks if stored in a warm area (above 60°F). Make sure

batteries are stored out of reach of children.

Sulfation and Freezing Two of the biggest battery killers - sulfation and freezing - aren't a problem if the battery is properly maintained and water level is kept where it should be.

Sulfation: This happens because of 1) continuous discharging, or 2) low electrolyte levels.

Let's back up just a minute: we said earlier that discharge turns the lead plates into lead sulfate. This lead sulfate is actually a crystal. If the discharge continues uninterrupted, the sulfate crystals grow and blossom into sulfation - and a problem. The section titled "Reasons for Self-discharge" has the gory details.

Much the same happens if the fluid level is too low, which exposes the plates to air. Then the active lead material oxidizes and sulfates, and it doesn't take long before it won't hold a charge. (Low electrolyte levels cause another problem, too: acid in the electrolyte becomes more concentrated, causing material to cor- rode and fall to the bottom. In sufficient quantity, it will short out the battery.)

Keeping a battery charged, disconnecting the battery cable during storage, and keeping electrolyte levels up eliminate the problem. For added protection, YUASA's Yu Micron, Yu Micron CX

and Sealed VRLA batteries are treated with a special chemical formula called "Sulfate Stop." This dramatically reduces sulfate crystal buildup on plates. The result: longer battery life.

How good is Sulfate Stop?

We simulated a constant discharge condition on two batteries with a 10-watt bulb.

Even after being totally drained for a week, the battery with Sulfate Stop made a 90% recovery.

The untreated battery: useless.



VI

Maintenance and Storage

Freezing: It shouldn't bother you - unless a battery is

inadequately charged. Looking one more time at the

discharge process, remember that electrolyte acid becomes water as discharge occurs. Now, it takes Arctic temperatures

to freeze acid. But water... as we all know, freezing starts

at 32°F. A sign of this is mossing - little red lines on the

plates. Freezing can also crack the case and buckle the

plates, which means the battery is permanently damaged.

A fully-charged battery can be stored at sub- freezing temperatures with no damage. As the

chart at right shows, it takes -75°F to freeze electrolyte in

a charged battery. But at just a couple degrees below freezing - at +27°F - a discharged battery's electrolyte turns to ice. That's a difference of more than 100°F between the low temperatures a charged and discharged battery can stand.

, -

POINTS TO REMEMBER'

0. Monthly maintenance an:die-Sting are a must: - ,

At temperatures such as these, incidentally, the self- discharge rate of a battery is so low that a recharge usually isn't needed for months. But to stay on the safe side, test.

Frooxing Specific- Gravity of Eledrolyte Freezing point_

1.265 -75°F

1.225 -35°F

1.200 -17°F

1.150 + 5°F

1.100 +18°F

1.050 +27°F

1 Most important: make surebattery is charged and fluid level is correct.

ID Disconnect cables or,pull battery for storage.

Keep fully charged to prevent sulfation and freezing.



(69

tei)

New Generation Battery Technology

Sealed VRLA Batteries

Yuasa's innovative sealed VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) batteries are a new generation made possible by advanced gas recombinant technology. These include the YT and YI series batteries. We refer to them as "sealed VRLA batteries" here.

Sealed VRLA batteries are easy to activate and maintain. But, keep these points in mind:

1. There are important differences in activating a sealed VRLA battery. Be sure to follow the instructions in this section.

2. While Yuasa sealed VRLA batteries dramatically reduce the need for maintenance, they do need periodic charging. It's important to remember this and to know how to go about it.

3. When considering upgrading to a sealed VRLA battery that did not come OE in your vehicle, check to make sure your charging system has a regulated output between 14.0 - 14.8v.

Let's take a closer look at Yuasa's innovative sealed

VRLA batteries... and what makes them special.

Features

The sealed VRLA battery is the battery for vehicles that may be stored for long periods (riding mowers, personal watercraft, or scooters or cycles during the off-season, for example), or where spills could be a problem (ATVs or personal watercraft). YUASA's sealed VRLA batteries deliver:

O No topping - Fill it just once, to activate. No need to check electrolyte level or add water ever again.

o Reduced self-discharge - Grids manufactured from a special lead-calcium alloy hold the charge longer - a real plus with storage or occasional use.

o Easy, instant activation - The "one-push" electrolyte container makes filling a snap.

Enhanced safety - A safety valve vents gases produced by overcharging. In case of fire, the flame arrestor disk minimizes explosion risk.

SEALED VRLA BATTERY CONSTRUCTION

PATENTED SEALED POST prevents acid seepage, reduces corrosion - extends battery life.

SAFETY VALVE/ FLAME ARRESTOR relieves excess pressure.

THRU-PARTITION CONSTRUCTION provides shorter current path with less

resistance than "over the partition" construction - you get more cranking power when you need it!

HEAT SEALED CASE TO COVER protects against seepage and corrosion - bonded unit gives extra strength.

POLYPROPYLENE COVER AND CONTAINER assures reserve electrolyte capacity for cooler operating temperatures, gives greater resistance to gas and oil - and impact in extreme conditions!

SPECIAL ACTIVE MATERIAL is compounded to withstand vibration, prolong battery life and dependability.

SPECIAL GRID DESIGN withstands severe vibration, assures maximum conductivity.

SPECIAL SEPARATOR makes the battery spill-proof. Valve regulated design eliminates water loss and the need to refill with acid.



z

sz


Compact design - High efficiency in a small

package, with no vulnerable exhaust tubes or other protrusions to break or kink.

How a Sealed VRLA Battery Differs from Conventional Types

Some of a sealed VRLA battery's differences are obvious. It's noticeably more compact. The reason: no free elec-

trolyte, making it more "volume efficient" - a fancy way of saying it can be smaller. Since the battery is filled with electrolyte just once (at activation), then sealed, you won't find a row of filling plugs. Instead, a single sealing plug strip permanently covers filler ports. Also, there are no vent tubes - after all, these batteries are sealed!

But as with any magic, there's more than meets the eye.

The heart of a sealed VRLA battery is what you don't see.

1. The plates are comprised of special lead-calcium alloy grids and charged active material. Lead-calcium reduces self-discharge - the battery holds its charge longer. The construction of the sealed VRLA battery causes freed gas to recombine inside the battery instead of being vented... allowing the battery to be sealed.

2. Separators are made of a special fiber with superior heat and acid resistance. These special separators make the battery non-spillable.

3. Sealed YRLA batteries have an internal safety valve. If battery pressure soars due to accidental overcharging, it

opens to release excess gas, preventing a battery rupture.

The unique design affects what happens inside the battery.

POINTS TO REMEMBER

The basic discharge-charge cycle is still going on... that's what makes any battery tick. But to understand what's different, let's do a little review:

A battery is basically a box containing lead plates. Some plates have a positive (+) charge, some negative (-). They're immersed in a current-conducting electrolyte solution that sets off the electrochemical process that produces electricity. Think of a battery as a machine that produces electricity through a continuous process of charging and discharging.

During discharge, sulfuric acid electrolyte solution reacts with the lead plates, turning them into lead sulfate. The

electrolyte - sulfuric acid solution mode up of hydrogen, sulfur and oxygen - gives up its sulfur and some of its

oxygen and turns to water.

Pb02 + Pb + 2 H2 SO4 2 PbSO4 + 2 H20

The process reverses with charging. Electrolytes and plates return to their original composition. The charging current breaks down water into its component gases: hydrogen (from the negatively charged plate) and oxygen (from the positive plate). Gases escape out the vent tube. With a conventional battery, water is added to replace that loss.

Here's the real secret of a sealed VRLA battery: the negative plate never becomes fully charged... so, no hydrogen gas. The positive plate still makes oxygen, but instead of being forced out the vent tube, it reacts with the charged active material to become water again. That's "gas recombinant technology." That's the magic of YUASA's non-spillable, sealed VRLA battery.

Gas Recombinant technology produces a more compact batte

After` activation, no need to check electrolyte or add, water.

O Sealing strip is permanently inserted'- its never removed.

Gas is recombined in the battery; there's no vented gas and vent tube.




Activation and Installation Activating sealed VRLA batteries is easy, although a little

different from conventional activation. For problem-free start-up and operation, follow the procedure outlined here. A few things to keep in mind before you get rolling:

O Store the battery in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight.

* Do not remove the foil sheet covering the filler port until activation.

o After removing the electrolyte container cap strip, do not peel, pierce or otherwise open the sealed electrolyte receptacles. Don't separate the individual cells.

o Read electrolyte handling instruction and precautions on the label.

ELECTROLYTE FOR YTX12-BS BATTERY

POISON Sum*, L.

O Use only the electrolyte container that comes with the battery. Sealed VRLA battery electrolyte is a higher concentration of sulfuric acid. All sealed

VRLA battery electrolyte containers aren't the same.

Each contains the proper amount of electrolyte for its

specific battery.

* Always wear plastic gloves and protective eyewear. No Smoking, see page 9 for full safety

instructions.Of course, don't forget safety precautions when storing or handling electrolyte solution.

To Activate a Sealed VRLA Battery 1. Place the battery on a level surface. Battery must be

out of the vehicle.

2. Remove electrolyte container from vinyl bag. Remove

the strip of caps. Put the strip aside - you'll use this later as the battery sealing plug. Use only the dedicated container that comes with the battery. It contains the proper amount of electrolyte for your specific model - important to service life and operation. Do not pierce or otherwise open the sealed cells of the electrolyte

container. Do not attempt to separate individual cells.

3. Place electrolyte container, sealed top of the cells down, into the filler ports of the battery. Hold the container level,

push down to break the seals. You'll see air bubbles as the

ports fill. Do not tilt the electrolyte container.

Warning: Improper activation or excessive overchargering (possibly by equipment failure) could cause damage to the battery or vehicle by forcing acid out of the safety vent.

Save this strip

See next page.




4. Check the electrolyte flow. Keep the container in place for 20 minutes or longer until it empties completely. If no air bubbles are coming up from the filler ports, or if container cells haven't emptied completely, tap the container a few times. Don't remove the container from the battery until it's empty. The battery requires all the electrolyte from the container for proper operation. Make sure the electrolyte container empties completely.

5. Remove the container. For batteries 3 - 12 AH, let stand for at least 30 minutes. For batteries greater than 12 AH, allow the battery to stand a minimum of 1 HOUR. This allows the electrolyte to permeate into the plates for optimum performance. Yuasa sealed VRLA batteries have the amp hours printed right on the front of the battery.

Place cap strip loosely over filling holes

6. Newly activated sealed VRLA batteries require an initial charge. After adding electrolyte, a new battery is approximately 80% charged. Place cap strip loosely over the filling holes as shown in drawing above. Immediately charge your battery after the "stand" period, to bring it to a full state of charge. See "Charging a Newly Activated Sealed VRLA Battery" on page 31.

After charging is completed, press down firmly with both hands to seat the caps (don't pound or hammer).

The battery is sealed. There is no need to remove the strip of caps or add electrolyte for the life of the battery.

7. The graph below shows an open circuit voltage characteristic of a sealed VRLA battery just after the electrolyte is filled.

If the battery is only filled with electrolyte, but not being given a supplementary charge, the open circuit voltage will be somewhere around 12.5 to 12.6v, as shown in the graph below. The reasons for the voltage being low are that:

o The capacity reached by filling with electrolyte is about 80% of the fully charged capacity.

The electrolyte around the plates gets its

concentration lowered temporarily.

Characteristics

6

Standin Time (minutes

Remember: unlike a conventional

battery, the sealed VRLA battery won't

be topped off during its life. Never pry off

sealing caps: it's dangerous and

damaging.



Ed


Measuring Voltage How healthy is your sealed VRLA battery? Since a sealed

VRLA battery is sealed - and the sealing caps are never

removed - you won't be able to check the state of the

charge by the old hydrometer-and-specific-gravity test.

Rather, use a voltmeter or multimeter to measure DC volt-

age. It should be of class 1 accuracy or better. Some

basics to keep in mind:

Check voltage using a voltmeter. Readings for a

charged, newly-activated battery should be 12.8v

or higher after the battery is charged and sits for at least 1 - 2 hours. If less, it needs an

additional charge.

The graph top right shows open circuit characteristics

of the sealed VRLA battery after end of charging

using a constant current charger set to the standard

current of the specific battery. As shown, the open

circuit voltage is stabilizing 30 minutes after end

of charge.

Therefore, to determine the state of charge and the

health of the battery, measure the open circuit

voltage 1 hour after end of charge.

o For a battery that has been in use, refer to the graph

bottom right to determine state of charge from

open circuit voltage.

POINTS TO, REMEMBER,

cMCrilIttf Ambient Ternpe rcst'ure -

Charge I Open Circuit 77°F (25°C)

18

17

-5- 1-6

0,a, 15

4 14

1,3

12

11

10 10 20 35 40 50 60 Elapsed Time (minutes

O Use a voltmeter to determine state of charge. Because sealing caps are never removed, you can't test specific gravity.

O Don't use a quick charge for initial activation. I A battery that has just been activated or charged needs to stabilize

1 hour for an accurate voltage reading.



z EL° a

tit


Discharge Characteristics Think about what types of vehicles a sealed VRLA battery

goes into: most aren't like the family car, driven day-in, day-out. They're probably used once in a while, or

maybe even stored for weeks or months at a time.

That demands a special kind of battery - one with

extra power to reliably start that engine, every time. In

YUASA's sealed VRLA batteries, the plate groups are spe-

cially designed to deliver that. The graph to the right

shows the increase in discharge time of a sealed VRLA

battery compared to a conventional Yumicron battery at both cold and room temperatures. The graph below

shows the cold temperature performance of the sealed

VRLA battery as the load increases. "C" equals the

Amp Hour Capacity Rating of the battery.

10

2

20A Discharge Charactenstics

-L-- Sealed VRLA - Conventional

{ 14°F (-10°C) 77°F (25°C)

1 2 3 4

Discharge Duration (minute)

' C =-10 hOli-ArEit6 capacity)

01C

(10 hour rate discharge characteristics)

Starting the engine is a big part of the battery's job, but

not all. Electrical accessories and safety systems - lights

and horn - need a stable supply of electricity. Now you're concerned with the battery's "low rate discharge

characteristics." This steady, low rate discharge is

measured in "10-hour rate discharge." The graph above shows the discharge characteristics of YUASA's

YT or YI sealed VRLA batteries at different current rates.

Note that battery capacity is a function of the current

being used (or discharge current) x time.



U to)


Self-discharge Constant self-discharge is a fact of life for all batteries. They lose strength as they sit there doing nothing. The good news is that lead-calcium technology in a sealed VRLA battery slows down the self-discharge process substantially. Conventional lead-antimony batteries discharge at about 1/100 volt a day... the lead-calcium sealed VRLA battery, 1/300 volt per day. Looking at it another way, a conventional battery fully charged and stored for a month will lose roughly a third of its

charge; the sealed VRLA battery handled the same way would lose about 10%.

Remember, too, ambient temperature affects battery discharge. Higher the temperature, quicker the discharge - for all batteries.

So, the sealed garage or storage shed with the sun beat- ing down on it isn't doing any favors to the battery in

your vehicle. Excessive heat will prematurely shorten the life of the battery.

Some people figure sealed VRLA batteries are so good, there's no need to worry about routine charges. Flattering, but wrong. Forgetting routine charging can mean a one-way ticket to the battery graveyard.

POINTS TO REMEMBER

0 "High rate diicharge" sealed VRLA batteries deliver extra starting powe'r. 0 Lead-calcium technology substantially slows self-discharge. 1 Routine charging is required to maintain a full charge.

Lead-calcium technology definitely slows self-discharge, but a combination of heat and idleness will still drain a

sealed VRLA battery, like the conventional one. You'll find step-by-step charging instructions later in this section.

Rolastion

100

90

G. 80 a:

cw 70

.E a

,60 ce

50

40 0

Sealed VRLA Standard - - 32°F

I (0°C)

32°F

(0°C)

77°F (25°C)

77°F (25°C)

104°F (40°C)

04°F 1 l'

(40°C)

2

Storage Period (month)

Choosing a Charger Match your sealed VRLA battery to the right charger. The wrong one can cause permanent damage and poor performance.

Yuasa offers a complete line of chargers to activate and maintain your battery to factory specifications.

0 Do not use a larger than recommended amp charger to

reduce charging time. That permanently damages the battery and voids the warranty.

o To find recommended current output in amps, divide battery amp hour capacity rating by 10. Example: 14 AH ÷ 10 = 1.4 amp current.

Yuasa sealed VRLA batteries have the amp hours printed right on the front of the battery. If you're not sure, refer to application manuals at the dealer. Select the charger that comes closest to the value of that figure.

Yuasa 900 mA Yuasa 1.5 Amp Automatic Charger Automatic Charger




Charging a Newly Activated Sealed VRLA Battery Sealed VRLA batteries require an initial charge. If you are using a constant current charger, refer to the standard (STD.) charging method printed on the battery. If you are

using an automatic type taper charger, check to make sure that the charger current (amps) is equal to or greater than

the standard (STD.) charging method listed on the battery.

CHARGING INSTRUCTIONS FOR NEWLY ACTIVATED SEALED VRLA BATTERIES

THIS IS A SEALED BATTERY; THE SEALING CAPS SHOULD BE CONSIDERED PERMANENTS' DO NOT REMOVE THE CAPS TO ADD WATER OR TO CHARGE THE BATTERY; CHARGE AT

CHARGING 12V AT THE AMPERAGE AND HOURS STATED BELOW.

METHOD STD.: 1.8A x 5-10h or QUICK:9.0A x 1.0h

These batteries are a sealed VRLA construction - which means: NEVER REMOVE THE SEALING STRIP AFTER CHARGING IS COMPLETED!

If the battery gets very hot to the touch, cease charging and allow battery to cool down.

Check voltage using a voltmeter. Readings for a charged, newly-activated battery should be 12.8v or higher after the battery is charged and sits for at least 1 - 2 hours.

If less, it needs an additional charge.

Yuasa Automatic Chargers and Accessories are the safest and most convenient method for error proof charging and battery maintenance.



U tft


Routine Charging The single most important thing to maintaining a sealed

VRLA battery is don't let it sit discharged: keep it fully charged. A sealed VRLA motorcycle battery should be kept to near fully charged for peak performance. In fact, it can need charging more often

than a car battery because it's probably not used routinely

and, therefore, not "automatically" charged.

Use the following guidelines for boost charge. Always verify battery condition before charging, and 30 minutes

after charging.

A fully charged battery should read 12.8v or higher after

battery has been off the charger 1 - 2 hours.

State"

'

OVERCHARGING CAN HARM YOUR BATTERY BEYOND

RECOVERY.

A word on overcharging: don't. Because of the characteristics of a sealed VRLA battery, too much of a boost

charge will decrease the volume of electrolyte. The

longer the overcharge time, the greater the drop in elec-

trolyte - and starting power.

Water can't be added to the sealed VRLA battery to make up

the difference. Overcharging can warp plates, making future charging difficult or impossible. Watch charging times

carefully, or ideally, use a Yuasa Automatic Charger. Always

stop charging if the battery becomes really warm to the

touch. Let it cool down 6 - 12 hours and resume charging.

Voltcige' Charge Time* "

Action, "(Using a constant_ , `current charger

@ std. amps specified on,theisaftery)

100%

75% -100%

50% - 75%

25% - 50%

0% - 25%

12 8v - 130v

12 5v - 128v

12.0v - 12.5v

11.5v - 12.0v

11.5v or less

(see special instructions

on page 33)

None Check at 3 months

from date of manufacture

May need slight

charge, if no charge given,

check in 3 months

Needs charge

Needs charge

Needs charge

At least 13 hours verify state

of charge

20 hours

* Charging times can vary depending on type o charger. Follow the charger's instructions.

Caution: Always wear safety glasses and charge in a ventilated area. If battery gets really warm to the touch, discontinue charging and allow battery to cool down. No sparks, flames or smoking when charging.



U Sealed VRLA Batteries

Charging Instructions for Sealed VRLA Batteries with Voltage of 1 1.5 or Less Batteries with voltage below 11.5v may require special equipment and procedures to recharge.

In charging an overdischarged battery having a terminal voltage of 11.5v or lower, its internal resistance may be

too high to charge at a normal charge voltage. Therefore, it may be necessary to raise the voltage of

the battery initially (25v as a maximum), and charge

How to determine battery condition after boost charge. Determine the condition of a sealed VRLA battery at

least 1 - 2 hours after the charge by measuring the

terminal voltage according to the table below.

Criteria Judgement

12.8v or higher Good

12.0 -12.8v or lower Charge insufficient Recharge

12.0v or lower Unserviceable Replace

Adjust voltage so that current will be at standard amps after 5 minutes.

for approximately 5 minutes. If the ammeter shows no change in current after 5 minutes, you need a new

battery.

Current flowing into the battery at high voltage can

become excessive. Monitor amperage and adjust voltage

as necessary to keep current at the battery's standard amp rating. Charge for approximately 20 hours.

Routine Maintenance for Sealed VRLA Batteries Check voltage periodically using a voltmeter.

Recommended every 3 months from date of activation,

or 3 months from date of manufacture for batteries

activated at the factory. Keep in mind, higher storage

temperatures cause faster self-discharge and require

checking more often.

If you plan to store your vehicle for an extended time,

make sure your battery is fully charged.

Fully charged should read 12.8v - 13.0v after standing

1 - 2 hours.

When a battery is in storage, check and charge it if

the voltage drops below 12.5v for YTX batteries.

Beyond that, maintenance is the same as for any battery,

except you don't have to worry about electrolyte:

Keep the battery top free of grime.

Check cables, clamps and case for obvious damage or loose connections.

Clean terminals and connectors as necessary.

For storage, pull battery or disconnect battery cable.

4C I



Acid Sulfuric acid, used to describe the electrolyte or liquid in a cell.

Active Materials Materials in a battery that react chemically to produce electrical energy: they are lead peroxide (positive) and sponge lead (negative).

Activation Making a dry cell functional by adding electrolyte.

AGM Absorbed glass mat.

Air Oxidized A charged negative plate that has been removed from electrolyte and permitted to discharge in an air atmosphere. Plates must then be recharged before they are capable of producing useful electrical energy.

Alloy A combination of two or more metals. See Antimonial Lead Alloy and Calcium Lead Alloy.

Ambient Temperature The sur- rounding temperature, usually refers to room temperature.

Alternating Current A pulsating electric current in which direction of flow is rapidly changed, so the terminal becomes in rapid succession positive, then negative. Abbreviated AC.

Ammeter An instrument for measuring electrical current.

Ampacity Current carrying capacity in amperes.

Ampere The unit of electrical current equal to the steady state current produced by one volt applied across a resistance of one ohm.

Ampere-Hour A measure of the volume of electricity, being one ampere for one hour. It is used to express battery capacity, and is registered by an ampere-hour meter; it can be obtained by multiplying the current in amperes by length of time that the current is maintained.

Ampere-Hour Capacity The number of ampere-hours that can be delivered by a storage battery under specified conditions as to temperature, rate of discharge and final voltage.

Ampere-Hour Efficiency The electrochemical efficiency of a storage battery expressed as the ratio of ampere-hours output to the ampere- hours input required for recharge.

Ampere-Hour Meter An instrument that registers the quantity of electricity in ampere-hours.

Anode An electrode through which current enters any non-metallic conductor. Specifically, an electrolytic anode is an electrode at which negative ions are discharged, positive ions are formed, or at which other oxidiz- ing reactions occur.

Antimonial Lead Alloy A commonly used alloy in battery castings. The percentage of antimony varies from 1/2% to 12%. Other substances are present in small quantities, either as inescapable impurities or by design to improve the properties of the cast part.

Antimony A hard, brittle, silver- white metal with a high luster from the arsenic family.

Assembly 1. Combining various parts into a finished battery. 2. Any particular arrangement of cells, connectors and terminals to form a battery.

Automotive Battery SIJ battery of 3 or 6 cells used for starting, lighting and ignition of cars, trucks, buses, etc.

Average Voltage A storage battery's average value of voltage during a period of charge or discharge.

Battery (Storage) A connected group of two or more storage cells.

Common usage applies this term to a

single cell used independently.

Bridge The ribbed supporting structure in the bottom of a battery container that provides sediment space under the elements, thereby preventing short circuits.

Burning Welding together two or more lead or lead alloy parts such as plates, straps, connectors.

Burning Center The center-to-center distance between adjacent plates of the same polarity.

Burning Stick A lead or lead alloy stick used as a supply of joining material in lead burning.

Cadmium A metallic element highly resistant to corrosion, used as a protective plating on certain parts and fittings.

Cadmium Electrode A third electrode for separate measurements of the electrode potential of positive and negative plate groups.

Calcium Lead Alloy A lead base alloy that is sometimes used for battery parts in place of antimonial lead alloys.

Capacity See Ampere Hour Capacity.

Capacity Test A test that discharges the battery at constant current at room temperature to a cutoff voltage of usually 1.75 volts/cell.

Cast Forming a molten substance into a shape by introducing the material into a mold and allowing it to solidify.

Casting A metallic item, such as one or more grids, straps or connectors, formed by pouring a molten substance into a mold and allowing it to solidify.



Cast-On Strap A multiple connector that had been cast onto the plates directly in a combination mold/burning jig; contrasts with burning of plates and prefabricated straps.

Cathode An electrode through which current leaves any non-metallic conductor. Specifically, an electrolytic cathode is an electrode at which positive ions are discharged, or negative ions are formed, or at which other reducing actions occur.

Cell (Primary) A cell designed to produce electric current through an electrochemical reaction that is not efficiently reversible and hence the cell, when discharged, cannot be efficiently recharged by an electric current.

Cell (Storage) An electrolytic cell for generation of electric energy, in which the cell after discharge may be restored to a charged condition by an electric current flowing in a direction opposite to the flow of current when the cell discharges.

Charged A storage cell at maximum ability to deliver current. The positive plates contain a maximum of lead oxide and a minimum of lead sulfate, and the negative plates contain a maximum of sponge lead and a minimum of sulfate, and the electrolyte is at maximum specific gravity.

Charged and Dry A battery assembled with dry,charged plates and no electrolyte.

Charged and Wet A fully- charged battery containing electrolyte and ready to deliver current.

Charging The process of con- verting electrical energy to stored chemical energy. In the lead acid battery, it converts lead sulfate in the plates to lead peroxide (positive) or lead (negative).

Charging Rate The current, expressed in amperes, at which a battery is charged.

Circuit A system of electrical components through which an electric current is intended to flow. The continuous path of an electric current.

Cold Crank Test A test that applies a high rate of discharge to a battery at 0°F, and the 30 second cell voltage must be above 7.2v.

Constant Current Charge A charge that maintains the current at a

constant value. For some types of batteries this may involve two rates, called a starting and a finishing rate.

Constant Potential Charge or Constant Voltage Charge A charge that holds the voltage at the terminals at a constant value.

Container Housing for one or more cells, commonly called a "jar."

Cover The lid of an enclosed cell, generally made of the same material as the container and through which the posts and vent plug extend.

Cover Inserts Lead or lead alloy rings molded or sealed into the cell cover, and that the element posts are burned to, thereby creating an effective acid creep-resistant seal.

Creepage Travel of electrolyte up the surface of electrodes of other parts of the cell above the level of the main body of the electrolyte.

Curing Chemical conversion process that changes lead oxides and sulfuric acid to mixtures of basic lead sulfates, basic lead carbonates, etc., which consequently forms the desired structures of lead or lead sulfate on negative and positive plates during formation.

Current The time rate of flow of electricity, normally expressed as

amperes, like the flow of a stream of water.

Cut-Off Voltage See Final Voltage.

Cutting (of acid) Dilution of solu-

tion of sulfuric acid to a-lower concen-

tration.

Cycle A discharge and its subse-

quent recharge.

Cycle Service Battery operation that continuously subjects a battery to

successive cycles of charge and discharge, e.g., motive power service.

Deep Discharge Removal of up to

80% of the rated capacity of a cell or battery.

Dielectric Test An electric test per-

formed on jars, containers and other insulating materials to determine their dielectric breakdown strength.

Diffusion The intermingling or distri-

bution of particles or molecules of a

liquid.

Direct Current A one-direction cur-

rent. Abbreviated DC.

Discharge Conversion of a battery's

chemical energy into electrical energy.

Discharged A storage cell when, as

a result of delivering current, the plates

are sulfated, the electrolyte is exhaust-

ed, and there is little or no potential difference between the terminals.

Discharge Rate Any specified amperage rate at which a battery is discharged.



GLOSSARY

Dry Charged Battery plates that have been subjected to the dry charging process.

Dry Charging Manufacturing process in which tank-formed battery plates are washed free of acid and then dried.

Efficiency The ratio of the output of a cell or battery to the input required to restore the initial state of charge under specified conditions of temperature, current rate and final voltage.

Electrode A conductor through which current passes in or out of a cell.

Electrode (Electrolyte) Potential The difference in potential between the electrode and the immediately adjacent electrolyte, expressed in terms of some standard electrode potential difference.

Electrolysis Electrochemical reaction that causes the decomposition of a compound.

Electrolyte Any substance that dis- associates into two or more ions when dissolved in water. Solutions of electrolyte conduct electricity and are decomposed by it. For batteries, electrolyte implies a dilute solution of sulfuric acid.

Electromotive Force (EMF) Electrical pressure or potential, expressed in volts.

Element An assembly of a positive plate group, negative plate group and separators.

End Gravity The specific gravity of a cell at the end of a prescribed discharge.

Energy Density Ratio of battery energy content in watt hours to battery weight in volume.

Envelope A separator folded and wrapped around a battery plate during assembly.

Equalizing Charge An extended charge given to a storage battery to ensure complete restoration of active materials in all the plates of the cells.

Expander An ingredient in the negative paste that delays shrinking and solidifying of the sponge lead of the finished plate, thereby enhancing negative plate capacity.

Ferroresonant Charger A constant volt power supply containing a special transformer-capacitor combination that changes operating characteristics as the draw is varied, ensuring that voltage output remains constant.

Filling Gravity The specific gravity of acid used to fill batteries.

Final Voltage The cut-off voltage of a battery. The prescribed voltage reached when the discharge is considered complete.

Finishing Rate The rate of charge, in amperes, to which charging current is reduced near the end of the charge for some tyoes of batteries to prevent gassing anc temperature rise.

Fixed Resistance Discharge Discharge of a cell or battery through a fixed resistive load, the current being allowed to fall off as the terminal voltage decreases.

Float Plate A pasted plate.

Float Charging A recharge at a very low rate, accomplished by connection to a buss whose voltage is

slightly higher than the open circuit voltage of the battery.

Foot Projections from the grid at the bottom edge, used to support the plate group.

Formation or Forming Charge An initial charging process that elec- trochemically converts the raw paste of the plates into charged active material,

lead peroxide in the positive plates and sponge lead in the negative plates.

Formed Plates that have undergone formation.

Freshening Charge A charge given batteries in storage to replace the standing loss and ensure that every plate is periodically brought up to full charge.

Full Charge Gravity Specific gravity of the electrolyte when cells are Fully charged and properly leveled.

Gang Vent Vents for usually six adjacent cells that are connected to a common manifold.

Gassing Bubbles from gases being released at one or more of the electrodes during electrolysis.

Glass Mat Fabric made from glass fibers with a polymeric binder such as styrene or acrylic which is used to help retain positive active material.

Gravity Specific gravity.

Gravity Drop The number of points reduction or drop of specific gravity of the electrolyte from cel discharge.

Grid A metallic framework used in a battery for conducting electric current and supporting the active material.

Group One or more plates of one type - positive or negative - burned to a post or strap.

H2504 Sulfuric Acid.

High Rate On charge, any rate higher than the normal finishing rate.

Hydration (Lead) Reaction between water and lead or lead com- pounds. Gravities lower than those found in discharged cells are apt to produce hydration, which appears as a white coating on plate groups and separators in a cell.



Hydrometer A device used to measure density or specific gravity of electrolyte solutions.

Hydroset Curing process for plates that oxidizes the lead paste, reducing free lead to a few percent of total.

Initial Voltage The closed circuit voltage at the beginning of a discharge. It is usually measured after current has flowed for a period sufficient for the voltage rate of change to

become practically constant.

Insert A bushing of lead or lead alloy molded or sealed into cell covers, and to which the post is burned to create a creep-resistant, cover-to-post seal.

Intercell Connector Conductor of lead or lead alloy used to connect two battery cells.

Internal Resistance Resistance within a cell or battery to the flow of electric current, measured by the ratio of the change in voltage to a specified change in current for a short period of time.

Jar Housing, or container, for one or more cells.

Jar Formation Forming of plates in

the cell jar.

Jumper A short length of conductor used to connect or cut out part of an electrical circuit.

Kilovolt One thousand volts.

Kilowatt One thousand watts.

Kilowatt Hours A measure of energy or work accomplished, being 1000 watt hours.

Lead (Pb) Chemical element used in

lead acid batteries.

Lead Burning Welding of lead or alloy parts.

Lead Hydrate A white lead compound formed by reaction of very dilute electrolyte or water and metallic lead or lead alloys.

Lead Oxide A general term for any of the lead oxides used to produce batteries.

Lead Peroxide A brown lead oxide which is the positive material in a fully formed positive plate.

Lead Plated Part Hardware that has a thin protective layer of lead electrode deposited on the surface.

Lead Sponge The chief component of the active material of a fully-charged negative plate.

Lead Sulfate A compound that results from the chemical action of sul-

furic acid on oxides of lead or on lead metal.

Level Lines Horizontal lines molded or painted near tops of battery containers indicating maximum and minimum electrolyte levels.

Litharge A yellow-red oxide of lead sometimes used in making active material.

Local Action A battery's loss of otherwise usable chemical energy by currents that flow within the cell of a battery regardless of its connection to an external circuit.

Loss of Charge Capacity loss in a cell or battery standing on open circuit as a result of local action.

Lug A portion of the grid used for support of the plate group, usually a hanging lug on the top edge of the grid. Also, a tab on the grid used for connection of plate to strap and other plates.

Machine Casting A fully or semi- automatic grid or small parts casting operation.

MF (Maintenance Free Battery) A VRLA sealed absorbed glass mat (AGM) battery.

Manual Discharge Capacity test

in which the operator disconnects the battery from the test load after all cells have reached the prescribed final voltage. With fixed resistance loads, boost cells are used to keep the discharge rate fairly constant as the test

cell voltages drop rapidly near the final voltage. Electronic load manual discharges generally do not require boost cells.

Microporous Separator A veneer or grooved-type separator made of any material that has many microscopically small pores.

Milliampere One thousandth of an ampere.

Millivolt One thousandth of a volt.

Modified Constant Voltage Charge A charge in which charging current voltage is held substantially constant while a fixed resistance is

inserted in the battery circuit, producing a rising voltage characteristic at the battery terminals as the charge progresses.

Mold A cast iron or steel form used to produce a casting of definite shape or outline.

Mold Coat A spray applied to metal molds that acts as a release agent and an insulator against rapid heat transfer.

Moss Lead crystals that can grow at high current density areas of negative plates- along edges, at feet or at plate lugs- and cause short circuiting.

Negative Plate The grid and active material that current flows to from the external circuit when a battery is discharging.



GEOSSARY

Negative Terminal The terminal from which current flows through the external circuit to the positive terminal when the cell discharges.

OHM A unit of electrical resistance.

Oil of Vitriol Concentrated commercial sulfuric acid, abbreviated OV or O.V.

Open Circuit The state of a battery when not connected to either a charging source or a load circuit.

Open Circuit Voltage The voltage at a battery terminal when no appreciable current is flowing.

Oxide (of lead) A compound of lead and oxygen in one of several pro- portions used to prepare battery paste.

Panel A casting consisting of two or more grids made simultaneously in a single mold.

Pb Chemical symbol for lead.

PbO Chemical symbol for litharge.

Pb02 Chemical symbol for lead peroxide.

Pellet The portion of pasted material contained in a grid section framed by adjacent horizontal and vertical members exclusive of forming bars.

Peroxide See Lead Peroxide.

Pig A cast bar of lead or lead alloy.

Pig Lead A grade of highly refined, unalloyed lead.

Plate A pasted grid.

Plate Centers Distance between center lines of adjoining plates of opposite polarity in a cell. One half the size of a strap center upon which the plates of like polarity are burned.

Polarization Change in voltage at terminals when a specified current is

flowing; equal to the difference between the actual and the equilibrium (constant open circuit condition) poten- tials of the plates, exclusive of the internal resistance drop.

Porosity The ratio of open spaces or voids in a material to the volume of its

mass.

Positive Plates The grid and active materials of a storage battery from which current flows to the external circuit when the battery is discharging.

Positive Terminal The terminal that current flows toward in the external circuit from the negative terminal.

Post Terminal or other conductor that connects the plate group strap to the outside of the cell.

Pure Lead Pig Lead.

Rated Capacity Ampere hours of discharge that can be removed from a

fully charged cell or battery, at a specific constant discharge rate at a specified temperature and at a specified cut-off voltage.

Rate of Charge See Starting Rate and Finishing Rate.

Raw Plate An unformed plate.

Rectifier A device that converts alternating (ac) current into unidirectional (dc) current because of a characteristic that permits appreciable flow of current in only one direction.

Red Lead A red oxide of lead used in making active material.

Reference Electrode Electrode used to measure acid concentration or plate state of charge.

Resistance The opposition of a conductor to the passage of an electrical current, usually expressed in ohms.

Resistor A device used to introduce

resistance into an electrical circuit.

Retainer A sheet of glass mat, perforated or slotted rubber, plastic or some other material installed on each face of the positive plates in certain types of cells, to deter loss of active material.

Reversal A change in the normal polarity of a cell or battery.

Rib A vertical or nearly vertical ridge of a grooved separator or spacer.

Secondary Lead Reclaimed as

opposed to virgin lead.

Sediment The sludge or active material shed from plates that drops to the bottom of cells.

Sediment Space The portion of a container beneath the element; sediment from the wearing of the plates collects here without short-circuiting.

Self-discharge Loss of charge due to local action.

Separator A device in a storage battery that prevents metallic contact between plates of opposite polarity in

a cell.

Series Cells All cells in a battery other than pilot cells. They are so

called because the cells are usually connected in series.

Series Parallel Connection Cells arranged in a battery so two or more strings of series connected cells, each containing the same number of cells, are connected in parallel; this increases battery capacity.



GLOSSARY

Short Circuit Current The current that flows when the two terminals of a cell or battery are inadvertently connected to each other.

Side Terminal SLI battery design with two through-the-container current connections on one side instead of two posts on top.

SU Battery A battery for automotive use in starting, lighting and ignition.

Sliver, Slyver Extremely fine parallel glass fibers used in retainers next to positive plates to retard shedding.

Smelting The primary process for recovering lead and antimony from scrapped batteries and scrap from battery manufacture.

Soaking A manufacturing process following pasting that soaks certain types of lead plates in sulfuric acid. This provides a protective surface and also sulfate helpful in container and tank formation.

Soda Ash Sodium Carbonate (Na2CO3) used in neutralizing sulfuric acid in spills or effluents.

Spa !ling Shedding of active material, usually from positives, during formation due to incomplete or improper plate curing.

Sponge Lead (Pb) A porous mass

of lead crystals and the chief material of a full-charged negative plate.

Stacking A cell assembly operation, alternately piling plates and separators in a burning box prior to attachment of straps and posts.

Standard Battery Any of Conventional, Yu Micron or Yu Micron CX batteries consisting of flooded electrolyte and cell accessible construction.

Standing Loss Loss of charge by an idle cell or battery, resulting from local action.

Starting Rate A beginning charging rate that does not produce gassing or temperatures in excess of 110°F.

State of Charge The amount of electrochemical energy left in a cell or battery.

Strap Precast or cast-on piece of lead or lead alloy used to connect plates into groups and to connect groups to the post.

Strap Center Spacing between cen-

ters of adjacent plates in a group.

Stratification Layering of high spe-

cific gravity electrolyte in lower portions of a cell, where it does not circu- late normally and is of no use.

Sulfated A plate or cell whose active materials contain an appreciable amount of lead sulfate.

Sulfation Formation of lead sulfate on a plate or cell as a result of discharge, self-discharge or pickling.

Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4) The principal acid compound of sulfur, sulfuric acid in dilute and highly pure form is

the electrolyte of lead acid storage cells.

Tack Burn A shallow burn used to

tack together two lead parts.

Tank Formation Electrolytic processing of plates prior to assembly in

large tanks of acid.

Temperature Correction In stor-

age cells, specific gravity and charging voltage vary inversely with temperature, while the open circuit voltage varies directly though slightly with tem-

perature.

Terminals The points on a battery to

which the external circuit is connected.

Terminal Cable A length of insulated cable, one end connected to the battery terminal post, and the other fitted with a plug, receptacle, lug or other device for connection to an external circuit.

Top Pour A method of casting in which molten metal is poured, usually by hand, into a top gated mold.

Treeing Growth of a lead dendrite or filament through a crack or hole of a separator, short-circuiting the cell.

Trickle Charge A low-rate continuous charge approximately equal to a battery's internal losses and capable of maintaining the battery in a fully-charged state.

TVR A temperature compensating voltage relay used in charging equipment.

Unformed A plate that has not been electrolytically formed.

Useful Acid The acid above the lower edges of the plates that takes part in the discharge reactions that occur within a cell.

Vent An opening that permits the escape of gas from a cell or mold.

Vent Plug The seal for the vent and filling well of a cell cover, containing a small hole for escape of gas.

Vent Well The hole or holes in a cell cover that allow fluids to be checked, electrolyte to be added, and gas to escape. The vent plug fits into the vent well.

Verticals The members in a plate grid.

Volt The unit of measurement of electromotive force, being the force needed to send a current or one ampere through a conductor with a resistance of one ohm.



GEOSSARY

Volt Efficiency The ratio of the average voltage of a cell or battery during discharge to the average voltage during subsequent recharge.

Voltage The difference in electrical potential that exists between the terminals of a cell or battery or any two points of an electrical circuit.

Voltage Range The difference between maximum and minimum cell voltages within a battery or string of cells when all cells are charging and discharging.

Voltmeter An instrument for measuring voltage.

VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) Sealed batteries which feature a safety valve venting system designed to release excessive internal pressure, while maintaining sufficient pressure for recombination of oxygen and hydrogen into water.

Watering Adding water to battery electrolyte to replace loss from electrolysis and evaporation.

Watt A unit of electric power, equal to a current of one ampere under one volt of pressure.

Watthour A unit of electrical energy or work, equal to one watt acting for one hour.

Watthour Capacity The number of watthours a storage battery can deliver under specific conditions of temperature, rate of discharge and final voltage.

Watthour Efficiency A storage battery's energy efficiency expressed as ratio of watthour output to the watthours of the recharge.

Watthour Meter An electric motor that measures and registers electrical energy in watthours.

Wet Shelf Life The time a wet secondary cell can be stored before its

capacity falls to the point that the cell cannot be easily recharged.



Jumper Cables Port No. YUAOOACCO7

Easy to use, easy to store

Convenient storage bag

Heavy duty, 8 ft., 8-gauge cables won't stiffen or freeze

Tangle resistant, encased rubber grips for safer use

BATTERY ACCESSORIES

Battery Tester Port No. YUA0OBTY01

Developed exclusively for the

Powersports industry

Determines accurate battery status in seconds

Single load, dynamic resistance technology minimizes battery drain during test

Tests both charged and dis charged batteries accurately


Port No. YUAOOACCO2

Pori No. YUAOOACCO4

Battery Accessory Lead

and Fused Ring Connectors Simple, quick connection

Can be used with Yuasa's 1.5 Amp and 900 mA chargers for applications ranging from motorcycles, automobiles and personal watercraft to ATVs, snowmobiles and riding mowers

Battery Analyzer Port No. YUAOOACCO6

Easy installation

Shows battery condition at the push of a button

Offers the confidence of knowing when your battery is

fully charged

Digital Multimeter Port No. YUAOOACCO5

Simple to use

Easy and accurately measures current,voltage and resistance

Eliminates the guesswork when your battery needs recharging

A must for checking maintenance free batteries as well as

conventional batteries

90 day limited warranty

Syringe Hydrometer Port No. YUAMHYDRO

Shows exact specific gravity reading on conventional battery's condition



A le FIAAV

WV:MN `41e0q1,4:14g"

YUASA P.O. Box 14715

Reading, PA 19612-4715

Telephone: 1-866-431-4784 Fax: 610-929-1295

yuasabatteries.com

FORM NO. YUA-069 (Rev. 4/04) PG - 10,000 PRINTED IN U.S.A.



WMOD2B Dual Band 900/1800 MHz GSM Modem

Transmit or Receive Voice , Fax, Data and SMS Text Messages

Dual Band - Operates on Cellnet, Vodafone, 1 to 1 or Orange networks

Mains or 5-32 vDC power supply

Small, lightweight, robust construction

Specification

Standard Dual Band EXtended GSM 900 MHz Dims 4 (2W) and GSM 1600 MHz Class! (1W)

Interface Serial interface RS232 V.24N.28 AUtobaigling function, .

AT command:set based on V.25ter and GSM 07.05 &:07.07 .

SMS : SMS MobileOriginatec (MO) and Mobile Terminated (MT). Mode Text 8 , i:,bi.i:Oo:inf to point_ Cell broadcasL '

In aCcordance:wIth GSM 07.05.

D a ,

Asynchronous:2400, 4800, 9600 and 14400 bitsls'.., Transparent and Non Transparent mode ,_

In Non Transparent Mode only 300, 1200, 1200/75 bauds. ,

(P STN) Mode .1 KHz (PSTN) arid V110 (ISDN). 3

Fax =

blists GSM teleservICe 62iri Transparent Mode.

, .

Olass 2. Groupe 3 compatible:

Audio , Half Rate I Full Rate / EnhOced Ftil Rate. AccesSortes (optibhsy. handset and car4dL

.- Dimensions 98x54x25 mm (excluding connectors) Overall dimensions : ,, 110X54x25 mm

Weight : , < 130 granis.

Volume : 13.23 cm3 Hotiairig, : , Aluminium profiled

Micro-FitTM connector

Front ca SUB HD connector

LED

Back cap SMA connector

xtractible SIM holder

UK / Europe / USA Office Tel: +44 (0)8700 434040

,I Fax: +44 (0)8700 434045 ' E-mails - [email protected]

120-122 King Street ,Broughty Ferry, Dundee, Scotland UK. DD5 1EW

Measurement > Control > Data Acquisition

Web Site: www.omniinstruments.co.uk

Australia Asia Pacific Office Tel +61 (0)894 888 960 Fax +61 (0)894 888 965

[email protected] PO Box 105, Leederville Western Australia, 6902



o Serfies Data a no Modem DR900 - Digital Radios Trio DataCom c D Series are high performance cost effective data radio modems designed as

an alternative to hard wired data transport. Transmit your data over radio with a /idly integrated data radio modem designed for fixed point-to-point and point-lo-multipoint applications.

The D Series is available as either a half duplex or a full duplex* 853-929 MHz +/- 5MHz

radio, including a fully integrated 4800 / 9600 bps data modem. These units operate equally

well in either a stand-alone configuration, or as part of a large communication system.

This complete package forms an attractively priced product for the transmission of data over

radio in fixed applications thus providing a viable alternative to costly networks of buried media.

Features:

Fully integrated half and full duplex' radio and modem

Transparent and non-intrusive remote diagnostic facilities

(Optional)

Inbuilt data routing and multiplexing capabilties, multi-port

operation

Simultaneous deliVery-pf multiple protocols using Trio.;DataCom's

unique MultiStreamTm technology

Digital Signal PrOcessing (DSP) modem

,Selectable 300-19,200 bps asynchronous RS232 user interface

Built-in antenna diptexer'

Integrated, supervisory data channel

Unique collision avoidance facility, for unsolicited report-by-

exCeption

Software selectable configuration parameters

Internaf fepeater operation

Housed in.an,attractive yet robust metal enclosure

Range of,aricillary equipment - full duplex base / repeater stations

and hot-standby base station

Radio

The D Series radio has been designed to meet worldwide

regulatory guidelines, including FCC, and has adjustable power

output up to 5 Watts. This fully synthesised radio is programmable

in 6.25/7.5 kHz increments to accommodate various worldwide

channel spacings. The receiver section has a wide tuning range

with an excellent signal-to-noise ratio. Exceptional frequency

stability is achieved by intelligent microprocessor controlled

temperature compensation. An extended operating temperature

range of -30 to 60°C makes the unit ideal for commercial and

industrial applications.

Modem

The in-built modem includes a custom DSP developed for data

communications over narrow band radio systems.

This system offers minimum occupied bandwidth and optimal data

integrity (using the standard HDLC protocol with CCITT CRC error

detection) inhibiting the transfer of any rogue unwanted data

caused by interference or squelch headers / tails.

The Trio DataCom DSP provides:

- the interface between the asynchronous RS232 user

communication and the synchronous radio link layer.

- an inbuilt multipexer / router which allows for simultaneous

transportation of multiple protocols over the one radio network

designs products & SO/Uti

Applications The D Series is ideal for use in a variety of sophisticated and

critical SCADA and Distributed Information Systems, where

complex routing of multiple data protocols and remote diagnostics

and wireless network management are important factors.

Remote units and a number of full duplex base station / repeater

models, suitable for a variety of requirements, make up the

D Series. At the top of the range, the DH model is a genuine,

duplicated hot standby base for systems where nothing short of

ultra reliability is acceptable.

Telemetry Systems - Utilities (Gas, Water, Electricity), Railways,

Mining, Telecommunications, Industry. Where network status,

system control, data collection and fault conditions are required.

Transaction Processing - Point of Sale Credit Terminals, Stock

Control, Direct Order, Banks, Building Societies. Stock Brokers,

Gambling Organizations, etc, where Point of Sale, inventory, credit,

or transaction data requires collection and distribution.

Common Carrier Data Services - The high speed, low cost and

spectrum efficiency of this device make it well suited to all forms of

common carrier data networking.

Alarm Monitoring - Fire. Power, Intrusion & Essential Services

Alarm Reporting.

87.5 Aveslable for DR900 furl duplex 1 W version (853 s 5 MHz 929: 5 MHz)



D Series - Data Radio Modem DR900 - Digital Radios

Configuration configuration using Trio's D Series programming software

IRProg) is completely Windows° based for all parameters, such

as: frequency, transmitter power, digital mute level, PTT timer,

system configurations, port settings.

Network Management & Diagnostic (optional)

A large distributed network, or even a simple point-to-point link,

requires comprehensive fault reporting and diagnostics to ensure a

high level of availability. Trio D Series data radio modem products

offer sophisticated in-built diagnostics using the optional TViewTM

software. This capability allows the customer to remotely monitor

and maintain their system, minimising the likelihood of failures, by

pointing out component degradation and decreasing the time to

diagnose and repair. There is no necessity to visit the master

station or interfere with the host data integrity, other than additional

data transfer. For further details, consult the TView data sheet.

Specifications:

Frequency Range** [Channel Selection Frequency Splits

Frequency Stability f. is

:Half / Full Duplex Data Rate(rf)

t Configuration

TX=PoWer

Modulation QcCuPied Bandwidth

'Tx Attach Time .Tirneout Timer,. 'Tx Spurious -

853-929.MHz +/- 5MHz Fully prograrVmable 76 MHz Tx/kx frequency split available

'..including simplex ±1ppm (-10 to 60°C ambient, opt -30 to 70°C) 1-ligher. frequency stability: options are available due to intelligent OroCe.SSOI:coritrolled temperature compensatioriz --- <=:100m/annurn half duplex or full duplex* 4800 1 9600.bPs -

All configuration via WindoWs softWare -

5 W (+37:dBm) or.1 W* (+30 dBm) (sciftwarCprogramtable)- Narrow band digital filtering binary GMSK Meets various international regulatory guidelines for point-to-point and point-to-multipeint , 1 rriSecond ,

Programmable"1-255 seconds 5=:165 clf3m

Sensitivity Blocking:- Intermbdulation Spurious Response Select and Desense AFC Tracking Mute

-115 dBm for-12 dB SINAB > 75 dB (EIA) <= 70 dB (EIA) <=70,dB (EIA) 70 dB (EIA). ±3 kHz tracking @-90 dBm/attack time <10 mS Programmable digital mute

Available for DR900 full duplex 1 W version (853 5 MHz / 929 x 5 MHz)

" Various sub-frequency bands available.

Collision Avoidance A unique fully integrated, yet independent, low speed supervisory

data channel embedded within the primary bit-stream provides

collision avoidance facilities which are transparent to the user. The

use of this feature makes this product ideally suited for reliable,

error free data transmissions between stations in high density point-

to-multipoint data networks.

The benefits include:

- Multiple asynchronous applications operating on the one radio

channel.

- Enhanced performance of report-by-exception networks.

Related Products Base Stations (DB900)

Hot Standby Base Station (DH900)

9 Port Stream Router Multiplexer (MSR)

Network Management and Diagnostic Software (TViewTM)

D Series Programming Software (DRProgm)

User. Data Port Antenna Power

2 x DB9.RS232 female ports SMAlemalebulkhead(optional.N) :2 pin Icy:king. Mating connector supplied

MODEM

Data Serial Port /#1

Data Serial Port #2

Data Sterage. Channel Data. Rate Bit Error Rate

Collision.AvoidanC'e

MultiStreamTM

Full duplex DB9 RS232. DCE (modern, bps asynchronous, hardware/scry.,re

handshaking Full duplex; DS9RS232, 300 -9600 bOs

asynchronous, sOftWareshandshaking ,On-board RAM 4800 /.9600 bps, full duplex < 1x10:6@,-108 dBm (4800 bps)

1x10g"-105 dBm (9600 bps) Trio DataCom's unique superviSory Channel': C/DSMA,collision aVoidariCe system Trio DateCom's unique simtiltaneduS delivery of multiple:data .Streams,(protocole)''

:Power Supply. Transmit CUrrent

Receive CUrrent Dirriensions Weight

Now Model codes previously known as sacd3R are now depicted as DRxxx.

designs p rod u cts & S / /ions

13 8 Vdc nominal (11-16 Vdc) 600 mA max. @ 1 W 1700 mA max. @ 5 W 175 mA 260 x 161 x 65 mm (robust metal enclosure 1.3 kg

Local regulatory conditions may determine the suitability of individual versions in ddlerent countries. It is The responsibilty of the buyer to confirm these regulatory conditions.

Performance data indicates typical values related to the described unit. Information subject to change without notice.

0 Copyright 200a Trio DataCom Pty Ltd. All rights reserved. Issue 11104

TRIO DATACOIVI 41 Aster Avenue Carrum Downs VIC Australia 3201

T +613 9775 0505 F +613 9775 0606 E [email protected] www.trio.com.au

OFi r C,



Explanatory Notes

Lightning Protection Lightning damages equipment at radio communications sites every day. Although lightning is a DC pulse, the time from zero current to peak current can be very fast.. When lightning energy travels through a coaxial cable, there is a slight propagation delay that occurs due to the unbalanced inductances of the shield and centre conductor, arid the centre conductor's capacitive relationship through the dielectric to the shield. The higher-frequency shield energy will arrive at the equipment first, followed by the centre conductor energy. Since the pulse energy arrives at different times, a differential voltage occurs. A properly designed coaxial protector equalises this potential difference, which prevents current flow and therefore damage to the site's equipment.

However, the choice of a standard gas tube type coaxial protector without DC blocking may not offer the user complete protection. The fast rise-time lightning pulse can produce over 1000 Volts across the gas tube before the gas can ionise and become conductive. Since there is no DC blocking mechanism, this high voltage is-applied directly to the equipment input before the gas tube turns on.

A quarter wave. stub coaxial protector creates a band-pass filter, at a frequency determined by the length of the quarter wave coaxial section from the horizontal centre conductor to the grounded base. However, if the equipment input is DC-shorted, the quarter wave stub can allow significant divided DC and low frequency energy to flow towards the equipment input.

A "DC blocking mechanism" inside the protector (no DC continuity through the protector) will prevent harmful levels of throughput energy from reaching the equipment. RFI stocks and distributes the patented PolyPhaser DC-blocked coaxial protector line, which has the lowest throughput specifications in the industry. There is also a series of PolyPhaser coaxial protectors that block DC in the RF path to the equipment, and either inject, pass through, or pick off a specified DC voltage on the feeders.coaxial cable centre conductor. This series of protectors is particularly suited to applications requiring DC to be passed up the coaxial feeder cable to power tower-top amplifier electronics.

Remember that no matter how good your lightning protector is, it's not a fuse. It still needs to be correctly installed and connected to a suitable grounding system. RFI offers a

complete range of products to protect your system, including the coaxial protector, grounding rods, copper strapping and grounding kits for the feeder cables.

www.rfi.com.au Vv.

RFI 193



.44.12,1 STAREESS STEIL KOZTAYAILt IKOWNOI TO tIOVIN. C404.94004C

I

TRAM AHTEXNA (TE ANIONUTED SVOCIE

TOP VIEW

SIDE VIEW

11.4' 11I111V C VW*11.11kNi (larg 11*.C.114 kftldtik

to it Pi Chl elID

Mounatvg CooN9un:Mon: bAt.ead mount mcx_441.1

Peal'ov Prit4PWorw 15'.50N4<;s0, 63i/geAmovni

1,144.3,11 . 1.139

ko-,-.223117.1!1-12.1

hook! am rains. Eulth*exi

IS-B5OHN-CO Throughput Energy: <20mJ* (N Connector! Bulkhead) Frequency Range: 1.5 MHz to 400 MHz Max Power: HF 3kW, VHF 500W, UHF 250W

IS-B5OLN-C1 Throughput Energy: <600pJ* (N Connector! Bulkhead.) Frequency Range: 50MHz to 700MHz Max Power: VHF 375W, UHF 125W

IS-B5OHN-C1 Throughput Energy: <1mJ* (N Connector/ Bulkhead) Frequency. Range: 50 MHz to 700 MHz Max. Power: VHF 500W, UHF 250W

IS-B5OLN-C2 Throughput Energy <220pJ* (N Connector/ Bulkhead) Frequency Range: 125MHz to 1000MHz Max. Power VHF 375W, UHF (low) 125W 900MHz to 1GHz 501

IS-B5OHN-C2 Throughput Energy: <800pJ* (N Connector! Bulkhead) Frequency Range: 125MHz to 1000MHz Max. Power:VHF 500W, UHF (low) 250W 800MHz to 1GHz 125W

IS-B5OUX-CO Throughput Energy: <10mJ* (UHF Connector/ Surface) Frequency Range: 1.5MHz to 400MHz Max. Power: HF 2kW, VHF 375W, UHF 125W

IS-50UX-C1 Throughput Energy: <600pJ* (UHF Connector/ Surface) Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 700 MHz Max Power:VHF 375W, UHF 125W

IS-50NX-CO Throughput Energy: <10mJ* (N Connector/ Surface) Frequency Range: 1.5MHz to 400MHz Max Power: HF 2kW, VHF 375W, UHF 125W

IS-B5ONX-C1 Throughput Energy: <600pJ* (N Connector/ Surface) Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 700 MHz Max. Power: VHF 375W, UHF 125W

IS-B5ONX-C2 Throughput Energy <220pJ* (N Connector/ Surface) Frequency Range: 125MHz to 1000MHz Max. Power VHF 375W, UHF (low) 125W 800MHz to 1GHz 50W

IS- 75F -C1 Throughput Energy: <1mJ* (F Connector/ Surface) Frequency Range: 4MHz to 900MHz VSWR <1.2:1 Max. Power: HF 100W, VHF 100W, UHF 25W

Add suffix - MA for male antenna port connector Add suffix - ME for female antenna port connector

DOC REF:P838328-1



111) II

5 QA Documentation

-------



B

1




5.0 QA DOCUMENTATION




J. & P. RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES PTY LTD 114 Campbell Avenue, WACO!, QED 4076

1h: (07) 3271 2911 - Fax: (07) 3271 3623

E-mail: jprapr.cormau

SWITCHBOARD ELECTRICAL INSPECTION & TEST REPORT

Form No.1'101918

Page 1 of 6

Customer Narne: /3,,R <1. 84 Aje c, r7 c 0,......14._ .c. -,

Project: 7a-,,,4,tc.-y R2) 8,0.5-,---te JPR Job No: /1 c 3 7 Item: (00e7 Constructed b : 1.--i. ,..c., t

Elli,roas:,s,1 :441.4.0:- 1.,,

Tested b : A iiz, row iear7,:orkos:ou Date: /6- -42 67

legammeapwitaims Main Functional Unit/s Qty Size Fuses /O/L Fuse Fittings

. ... . Qty Size Fuse Size .V

ircult LireaKers

Neutral Earthing C.T.s Meters Contactors Overloads Relays Timers

Size OIL Reqd

Checked

Qt

Control Switches Push Buttons Pilot Lights Transformers

Qty

Qty Qty

Qty Qt Qty

Qty Qty Qt

Rating Rating Rating Rating Ratin

Voltage Function Voltage Volta e

ATTNFD/Soft Starter DC Su )l

Terminals Engraving Cabling - Busbars Escutcheons / Shrouds S.A. Metering CTs S.A Meterin Links S.A. Meters JPR Label

Qty Qty

Type Type T .e

Rating Rating Rating Ratin Rating. Ratin Sizc Size Size Size

Material

Function Function Voltage Volta e

Function Volta e

ID ID ID ID

IP ratin Ratiry

Fitted Le end. Card

Stain cd

Correct. PLC/Telemetry Power Monitor Rcla MO: -e_rii/Vitganr IP Sealing Door Latches/Hinges Ventilation Circuit Schedule

Size Ratin

Safet Stkr

Function

Terminal Tightness Busbar System Earth Continuity Cubicle Cleaned Paint Finish Intact Polarity Check Function

Rating V-- Qty ..""_,, Type V Operation

Required ../ Type / Operation Required Fitted checked

111 III W.'

.-., ,"OrrMr

Power Clearan.ces Body to E

R R Power.

Control Joints

Doors to E

W - W Control w -

Result ID

Panels to E

13 - B

PLC/Telem Continuity Check R - R

nixie %ils- 'cam '' ,..9fM, VT.

441,4r 1.

B - B N - N

-45aS -t1t, ."-,,samos



J. & P. RICARDSON INDUSTRIES PTV LTD 114 Campbell Avenue. WAC01. Q1.1) 4076

II: (07) 3271 2911 - Fam (07) 3271 3623

E-01411: jprapr4,00.40

SWITC:DBOARD CONTINUITY & INSULATION 'FEST REPORT

From N. F1019/9 Nu 1,016

Customer Name: 'j13 PE C fry CG7Z-IA,C4-4"- Project: .74e,ey 647i) tio7.EW JPR Joh No: P-110 331 Switchboard: vvoiy-?. Constructed by: PI , LA (.4-0,/,..:17 Tested by A vAky Date:

.:;.: :01Y1711,SWWiM=5T'-':::i".' '...., ' .. ,,.:,'0:T From To Red White Blue Neutral

Sketch:

26m1-167..., : .-t=igli,.4',-7,-135-2,51NROT,19.8101.sgst71-04sficAt2NOVE'41.5:1'4491L - - ,t, :...t..--;:i,?!'.:;4i.....-.-Aati;I:a. Designation 1000 V Test (MCI) 2.5 kV Test ( lmin ) 1000 V Test (MS1)

Red to Earth 3-ctO White to Earth

Blue to Earth 6--" Neutral to Earth Red to White Red to Blue White to Blue

Continents:



J. & P. RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES PTY LTD 114 Campbell Avenue, WACOL Q1..0 4076

Ph: (07) 3271 2911 - Fax: (07) 3271 3623

E-mail: jpr(ii)jpr.com.au

SWITCHBOARD ELECTRICAL INSPECTION & TEST REPORT EARTH LEAKAGE TEST

Form No. F1019/8

Page 5 or 6

Customer Name: a gisa A,,,,,4- etr7 Cc'-lx-Cg-- JPR Job No: /44 3'337 Item: tiMia?' 7 Constructed by: /1. .4:Awe...ay Tested by: 4 . vii /ft/ IDate: / Test Unit IMegger RCD1730 /'''' [Other I

i ciatiBledke . Phace , qvated.quitliti)

. ' .(titNitg0

:-. , r''' ,, ,- :44.,

?..%V.1:4k 4.

- - ^.^.. i , -,-g,,V8S. *Triprelititi" NOtt.,19,524:

4ia ,, x`"41

.';:t.Arlt.:: .

-

V c,.-,- r ... - :1,...., 4, -4FripiTime'-

-

Comments

.2X .-- ,2.... 9 ....s

cz pc, c-i 3 c? 2- icr 3 2-2_

Q. I ,...,, - P

Comments:-



FILE: EMC0381/13I, 03/01/03 PAGE 1 OF 1

JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS

LIVE LOW VOLTAGE WORK

TESTING SWITCHBOARDS AND CONTROL PANELS WITHIN OUR MANUFACTURING PREMISES

APPROVED BY: Eric McCulloch (INTISO)

LOCATION: WACOL WORKSHOP DATE: ?.?././.?-.1.'Ef

AUTHORISATIONS

Authorisation from person in charge

YES

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

Long cotton clothing d YES Insulating work gloves in test gf YES

Insulating mats / covers in test YES

Switchboard rescue kit in test 0 YES

TASK

LIVE LOW VOLTAGE WORK

TESTING SWITCHBOARDS AND CONTROL PANELS WITHIN OUR MANUFACTURING PREMISES

OPTION

OPTION

Isolation points identified and accessible Work area clear of obstructions

Unauthorised access prevented to work area

P.P.E. is fit for purpose

Test equipment is fit for purpose

Written authority to proceed has been obtained from a person-in charge JPR authorisation to conduct live work is current

o Approved dedicated power supply only used for testing.

Approved dedicated power supply in current test

(A) RCD protected outputs used at power supply

> RCD protection checked daily prior to use

> Safety Observer is / is not required

(B) Non RCD protected outputs used at power supply > Supervisor consulted prior to use

> Safety Observer is in attendance

YES

V YES

YES

II YES

Pi/ YES

YES

YES

YES

O YES

E/ YES

fl YES

YES

YES

O YES

YES

I understand and am fully aware of the requirements of this job safety analysis.

Signatures: 2. 3.

4 5.



41110 ID 411, 4111

6. Switchboard Works Test Results



1111111,1111111111111111111'




6.0 SWITCHBOARD WORKS TEST RESULT




ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE

24 HOUR BREAKDOWN SERVICE

POWER RETICULATION

ITCHBOARD SIGN AND

MANUFACTURE

P. IC S IN ST S LT A C.N. 001 952 325

114 CAMPBELL AVENUE, WACOL, BRISBANE, OLD. 4076

Telephone: (07) 3271'2911 - All Hours Facsimile: (07) 3271 3623

ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS & ENGINEERS

INDUSTRIAL - COMMERCIAL - MINING

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE

CONTRACT NUMBER BW.70103-06/07 ORDER No: 70103-007 JPR JOB No: C30337

CONTROL PANEL FOR WB087 DRAWINGS 486/4/9-0082-001 TO -016 AMEND. C INCLUSIVE

J&P Richardson Industries Pty. Ltd. certify that the above listed control panel has been tested in accordance with the job specification and the as built drawings on the date recorded on the quality assurance documentation for this control panel.

Yours faithfully, ELECTRICAL J & P RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES PTY LTD ENGINEERING, PROCESS SOFTWARE AND DESIGN SERVICES

SHEETMETAL FABRICATION

MUNICIPAL PUMPING INSTALLATIONS

HIGH VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS

ITCHBOARD MANAGER

File Name:- wb087 certificate of compliance

GOLD COAST PH: (07) 5591 6340 SUNSHINE COAST PH: (07) 5476 5133 TOOWOOMBA PH: (07) 4659 9900

-A Family owned company providing Electrical Services since 1958." FORM F 1025



J. & P. RICHARDSON DURRES PTY. LTD. A.B.N. 23 001 952 325 Lic. No. 758

ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS and ENGINEERS TELEPHONE: 3271 2911 (All hours) 114 CAMPBELL AVENUE - WACOL, BRISBANE Q 4076

DOCKET No.

CUSTOMER:

ADDRESS:

70-0?/C`i

DAY: *CA/ DATE: / k. cit

EMP. No. 2.1/

K 7999

,...,,JOB NUMBER

W ti NHOMS 11

0 -1 7, -I WORK START TIME

NORMAL

RISK MANAGEMENT HAS BEEN CARRIED OUT IN ACCORDANCE WITH: RISK ASSESS SAFETY PLAN

1 have carried out the work listed & I confirm it complies with

Good Work Practices, Our Quality Goals & to Customer's Satisfaction.

H

izoe#,Pt0-.e. city/' e7-e

c)K

Customer's Authorisation for live work:

/01,4 44 es 4-

REPORT PROMPTLY ANY

CONDITION LIABLE TO

CAUSE AN ACCIDENT

REMEMBER

YOU AREor RESPONSIBLE

FOR YOUR SAFETY

TIME CLO

n (A-n./ %y -ic7s7 cc i/W .--/APC)4/1 54m

Customer's Signature Employee Signature:

Refer to Customer Copy for General Terms and Conditions of Supply

WORK

TRAVEL

W 7_,42.0 To j S.() 0 To

48m

42m

10 UNITS PER HR.

12m

18m

36m 24m 30m

ENT BY:

FIRS. MIN,

To

UNITS

To To To

SERVICE CALL - APP BY - ENDORSEE-

CALL OUT - COST SECTION - SERVICE

FOLLOW UP CA SS

DRIVER FATIGUE MANAGEMENT UNIT No. Over 12 Tonne GVM

Driving Time Driving Time Total Hours Start Finish Start Finish

Farm No. F1024/4 June 09 e Copyright 2008

CERTIFICATE OF TESTING & SAFETY

I certify that the electrical work liSted has been tested in accordance with the prescribed procedure and that such work complies in every respect with the requirements of the Electrical Safety Regulation 2002. The electrical equipment listed to the extent that it is affected by the above electrical work, is electrically sate.

Electrical Licence No:

Signature of Electrical Worker:



P09 J & P RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES MI

J. & P. RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES PTY LTD 114 Campbell Avenue, WACOL. QLD 4076

Ph: (07) 3271 2911 - Far: (07) 3271 3623

E-mail: [email protected]

TO

Form No. F1017/3

A ,Sec..7-Tu.)A)

of SWITCHBOARD & SHEETMETAL INSPECTION REPORT

Customer Name: C C Item: v\i, 6 oa-7 Tootee,-/ wi3 TeR abiric

Job No: C 30,S37 Drawin No:

cb2 / /0 CORRECTIVE ACTION

REQUEST OR COMMENTS

PRODUCT INSPECTED TASK DATE

DETAIL

Design Documents

Drafting Documents

Sheettnetal Switchboard. (Refer F1018 for details) Doors.

Cell/Panels

ainting

Process

Min DFT (40 STD)

Cure Test

Colour Exterior

Colour Internal

Colour Panels

Powder / Wet

Cubicle Erection

Electrical Fitout (In accordance with drawings

Inspection & Test

(Refer to F1019)

,cking

ornments:

et5S

,-;-MWERMA Affix Status Here: -

Yellow Awaiting Inspection

Green Inspection & Test Passed

Red Inspection & Test Failed, Awaiting Rectification



.1. & P. RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES PTY LTD 114 Campbell Avenue, WACOL Q1,1) 4076

Ph: (07) 3271 2911 - Fax: (07) 3271 3623

E-mail: jprgipneom.au

SWITCHBOARD & SHEETMETAL INSPECTION REPORT

Form No. F1017/3

Customer Name: 3265/Qat Cay Cau/vaL Job No: S 30337 )4 30337 Item: W43 o8-7 'TcciiE1 D

14) /TER &OSIER_ ru 10$ 9 NG 5k,tftc.1-1AAte. b.

Drawing &*5---

DATE

No: Ca)33-7/A0

PASS /

FAIL

CORRECTIVE ACTION REQUEST 017 COMMENTS

TASK PRODUCT

DETAIL INSPECTED

B Y

Design Documents S kT 10 io o8 Drafting Documents

Sheetmetal (Refer F1018 for details)

Switchboard Atli

Doors u

V Cell/Panels }

tinting

Process

MM DFT (40 STD)

Cure Test

Colour Exterior .

Colour internal

Colour Panels

Powder 11 Wet

/

364 tilL ASV 364.0 Cini.`ni ifff illirffir

,

.

al GC wile Cubicle Erection-

- , Electrical Fitout

(In accordance with drawings) M. Z-../P44-Jz...ay

Inspection & Test

(Refer to 4' 1.0 I 9)

4. VAR.- 1 / er /9/95.9

Packing ....aka .4.7","

. ;.+Intnents:

book CNER F ige",0-40pEASE: Ly CT PA 1 'lc R 6 D .

tar ' , g autrski //01,..-p," / e /1 0

-, -44/30,w.k,ii.o.:4:iiiitiftwo:*o70,04-v,sliitigigihr?.p..4.s. ovii,goigi* Affix Status Here: -

Yellow Awaiting Inspection

Green Inspection & Test Passed

Red Inspection & Test Failed, Awaiting Rectification



a

J. &. P. RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES PTY. LTD. 114 Campbell Avenue, WACOL QLD 4076

P11: (07)3271 2911 1ia: (07) 3271 3623 E-mail: jpr®Jpr.contau

1

SWnrra ()ART) / SiffE3'114kTA TNSPF,MON eiffrKLYST

FormNo. F1018/2

. . _

CLIENT: Jgai 6/4"-/b..'_ el ry eff,tritie/4_. JOB NO *. -,; 7 PRODUCT DF,SCREPTION: - Iii'' 00 7 7-z-4.24/,,,,,v go

....?,

DRAWING & SCHEDULE NUMBERS

' C'O'> o ,. i- e -a-- 0 Mei)

CONSTRUCTION QUALITY commiANck

WITH DRAWINGS REMAR1CS OR

GOOD POOR YES NO. ACTION

1. Folds -1 Welds

3. Edges/File

4. Gauge

5. Material L/

6. Ventilation Openings / Filter Bracket

7. Equipment Mounting Arrangement

8.. Doors Stiffened

9. .. Escutcheons and Lexan Covers

10. Cable Saddles

11. Grinding

12. Door Stays Fitted

A . Earth Studs

14. Rubber Retainer

15. Drawing Holder

16. Hat Sections

17.. Locking Bars Fitted

18. Eternal Crevice Welded, and Ground

19. Legend Cards

20. Genersil Conditions Satisfactory

21. Cabinet Clean ,

34b Name and Number Marked

INSPECTED BY: -a-7.---- DA.TE: /4--/ 0 -0

AFFIX STATUS HERE Yellow Awaiting Inspection Green Inspeeted/Testcd Passed Red Inspected/Tested Awaiting Rectification



GI

7. Electrical Drawings



41. 410

iiiiIIIMIHMI11111111




7.0 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS




A

B

E

F

G

H

2 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 18

ig

I I

iIIIIIIIIII BRISBANE

WB087 TOOHEY RD, SALISBURY

WATER BOOSTER SITE COVER SHEET

/ ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS INDEX

DWG N°. TITLE SHEET REVISIONS L860 /9-0082-001 ELECTRICAL DRAWING INDEX 01 A 5 C

LSE/L/9-00E2-002 BLOCK DIAGRAM 02 A B C

EFs/E./9_0052_003 AC POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 03 A B C

L06/L /9-0082-001. PUMPS POWER S CONTROL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM Of. A B C

1.6/L/9-0002-005 DC POWER D S'RIBUTION SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OS A B C

1.06/L/9-0002-006 COMmON CONi POLS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 06 A 6 C

L06/L/9-0002-007 RIG DiGJAL .NUTS TERMINATION DIAGRAM 07 A B C

( LBO/L/9-0092-008 RTU 0 Cr: AL OUTPUTS E. ANALOG INPUTS TERM NATION DIAGRAM 00 A B C

L86/L /9-0082-009 PUMPS CON-:ROL 7ERMINATION DIAGRAM 09 A

A

6

B

C

C ( L86a/9-0082-010 SWITCHBOARD EQUIPMENT LIST 10

06/L/9-0082-011 SWITCHBOARD CABLE SCHEDULE 11 A B C

L8E/L/9-0082-012 SWITCHBOARD LABEL SCHEDULE 12 A B C

LE6R. /9-0082-013 SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCTION NOTES Ey DETA.LS 13 A B C

1.06/1./9-0082-01L SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCTION DETAILS -1. A B C ( L86/1./9-0082-015 SWITCHBOARD GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 15 A B C

( L8e/L/9-0082-016 SITE LAyOU" 16 A B C

( LE6/1J9-0082-017 spare

L86/4/9-0082-018 spare ( LH/L/9-0082-019 spare ( LF6/L /9-0002-020 spare

(

(

.( S

ELECTRICAL AS BUILT DETAILS REV COMPANY -

_ CONTRACTOR LICENCE No. -

ELECTRICIAN DATE: -

r STANDARD VARIABLES N.

DESCRIPTION VALUES WATER BOOSTER PLANT ID WBOE7

MAIN FLOP/METER ID, F0105

PRESSURE INLET ID. PRESSURE UL.:_E I ,D POO9L, P0095

STREETNAME, SUBURB TOOHEY RD, SALISBURY

DRAWING NUMBER 1.06/i. /9-0082

SUPPLY AUTHORITY POLE Nc 2L118

INCOMING MAINS SUPPLY CABLE s:;---.7 16 MM

MAIN EARTHING CABLE sqmm 6 MM

CT METERING ISOLATOR 80A A, DINTMS0C3

NORMAL SUPPLY MAIN SW,-Cr- 80A, XS125CJ80

GENERATOR SUPPLY MAN SW ",-- BOA, XS125C.:80

Grundf cs PumpSei Assn Par \.,:. CRE45-2

PUMP KW RATING 11, 2, 3. ,:::

PUMP CIRCUIT BREAKER H. 2, 3, I- E,

2 2 NW 12 2 ,.W 122,04

DTCB15320C 12,1C3S.:2CC 101:B15320C

2 2 ',..,4

01(51",:201

PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY CABLE s(E"- V'. 2, 3. LE 51 5) num 3C.E 25 ,,,- 31E 125 mra 3C-E 25 mm 3CE

MAIN FLOWMETER RANGE T B A.

RADIO DR900-06A02-DO

. .

c, . STANDARD DESIGN OPTIONS

OPTION DESCRIPTION FITTED

Al PUMP 3 FITTED YES Mr] A2 PUMp L FIT7t2 "ES M

TLiY.n-5-nT7ED ,35--. NO A3

D D sT r Cn,'ME TER-HET TED 6,--;=-2 NO A-S..-S L

C1 MET R T Li YE S DM ',D'A DIG P.:5..K-' NO :=1.

I Di GSM MODEM YES I>L1

TACO '..CDE_'.. i'L....'.,S NO DC

E TRIO RADIO YES CNSTJ

Ti PUMP BOX SUMP PUMP YES IIT:g]

±R-P4-T-SlzdivtP-E-1,,,,M-P ,'''. NO -9-2

C",_:17. H:='.-2 NO Ci BO;', VENTILATION-PAN

. .

A

B

C

0;

E

F

I

V GI )0

II

O. I

0 I

HI ,

/B\ Sheet 01 ,

ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION C 18/02/09I RE-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION I OPM AW FUNDING

EXTERNAL ( ) ._.A.

DRAFTED P. NA c, stet rt Original Signed by A.Witihoft

DESIGN

8895 04/07/2008

R.P.E.Q. No. DATE

04107/2008

R.P.E.Q. No. DATE _A...CLIENT

Original signed by F.Fomailer 04/07/2008

PRINCIPAL DESIGN MANAGER DATE - -4` _- r,"."-P' - tilt &AO sati6A746

SITE

VVE1087 1-CIC:31-1Elr RID VVAMER BOOSTER.

-A-__

TITLE

ELECTRICAL DRAWING INDEX

SHEET No. 1

A 05/08, REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DPM AW DESIGN W.O. No. DRAFTING CHECK 1 p, i-lagueat BRISBANE WATER DRAWING Na. No : AMEND.

486/4/9-0082-001. C - 0 09.08 ISS 1-1 EC) RC. IR. -1- a NI ID E Ft 1 DPM CONSTRUCTION W.O. NoLi

FUNDED BY B.C.C. (v)

CAD FILE 490082set_A.dwg Original Signed by R.Janfada

DESIGN CHECK

_ Original signed by P.Sheniff

DELEGATE

04/07/2008

DATE No: DATE i AMENDMENT DRN. APD. -A. B.C.C. FILE No. .1\

2 3 4 6 7 8

0.1194 WATER supPy2tz onyi,roszyg piuns191a,tnyahl WATERWETNORKSIW)3087 'Foamy PAConseuctic41490082saLCAsyg Loll Saved by 002670 on Friday. 20 Fa.ary 2009 2.2748 PM

12 13 14 15 16



E

F

H

2 3 4 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 18

WATER BOOSTER SWITCHBOARD

NOTE

do.,b,e nes nd,ca'e oper2for,nierface

NORMAL IMIRG COMPARTMENT POWER COMP CONTROL COMPARTMENT

-I5V AC 10kA

(80AAISOL

KWH 1

GENSEI

MAIN MTS SWITCH

COAA

60A

EARTH tONG

SDI

SuRGE PROTN

WATER IN

iLVDC GATT

AN-ENNA

ONO

SURGE . I

- RADIO I

SEI PSi

AC

FIL

PAIR L

2LV DC

SUPPLY

2L0vac/24vdc

MPG A )1

Grundfos

AL ARM

RLY

SOAR

7

t113

2LVDC

Grundf es 0100

MOnbus. HC.- WAY

6A/ BA/

-1 1-

P H A SE I ,

FAIL RE_As'

2A/ 20A/ n

C

C

(

C

C Sc., \IP H

E EVE',

AUTO

VFD

C

WA' H BOOSTER PUMP BOX

REV

ELECTRICAL AS BUILT DETAILS COMPANY -

CONTRACTOR LICENCE No. -

ELECTRICIAN - DATE: -

I

20A/

GEN1b.,s GENIbus

PSR I/L MAN Rd\ - MAN RUN

2 2 kW .

2 2 kW

PLO/SKI

>1

GSM

AN ENNA

-

I GSM

MODEM

L 0:AL / TIMBrE

SE_ECTOR

2LVOC

RTU D I H

1

(----..,----v--Th,--- ; \ 1 L../

I-- ( I ) 4----,,::: , ) -,,

0 I

.

I I

E 1 )DI(3.- AL DIGIT AL

2L VD: ( , !NPUIS OUTPUTS

C ,

( 1 ,/, ) 711 I

I' I

I

20A/ n 20A/

VFD

0FNIbus

PSR IT L- MAN RUN

22 kW

-1 1GENIbus

VFD PSR I/L n MAN RUN

22 kW

PL,

POui 94*

IGRUNDFOS CRE45-2

I s / / / / LA.= j

I . . 1 1

P, P2 P3 PSR IL

r7

Pi.

goego 1-1

' ( / I ;

PI P2 P3 PL.

MAN RUN

C PUMP mOTOR V=Ds./

'..-----N\ ---",--- -, (REMOVED. c!RE SW \

ACONIACIS. J \--"-_,....._.........-/

1-77 WATER OUT - -

WATER BOOSTER 1./m

FLCWVE1ER P''

C

C

C

C

C

C

C(

S-N =.;-ZE SW

'RI/OFF/CONTROL VflflT SELECTOR

/43 R.2".P BOX

\ AT1ON

PB

POMP

V! P`,"

Sheet 02 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION

C 11562X61 RE-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 DPM AVV FUNDING DRAFTED 1 F..IVIcsstosart

A 105/081 REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 DPAI !AVV DESIGN W.O. No. 1 DRAFTING CHECK 1 o.

0 109.0E11 ISS U a C7 FOR c -r88 NJ C3 E IR 1 DPN : CONSTRUCTION W.O. 90.1 CAD FILE 1490082sol_A.dwg

No.! DATE! AMENDMENT 1 DRN. / AND. FUNDED BY 8.C.C. 1.1 EXTERNAL ( 1 B.C.C. FILE No. I

Original Signed by A.Witthoft

DESIGN

Original Signed by R.Janfada

DESIGN CHECK

8895 04/07/2008

R.P.E.Q. No. DATE

04/07/2008

RP.E.O. No. DATE

Original signed by F.Fornasier 04/07/2008

PRINCIPAL DESIGN MANAGER DATE

Original signed by P.Sheniff 04/07/2008

CLIENT DELEGATE DATE erTia4NE WATER

SITE TITLE VV 087 MC) CD I-1 B Y" F E WT IR. BOOSTER FL. BLOCK DIAGRAM

SHEET No. 2

BRISBANE WATER DRAWING No.

486/4/9-0082-002 AMEND.

C

2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10

G:1194 WATER SUPP1266 0ral:m0162A wA TERWEI1VO.S1W8087 Toonay RCAConstruceonIA900626c_C.

12 13 14

Lam Sand by 0626700, Fn., 20 Fbruary 2009 2.2746 Pm

15 16

A

B

C

D

E

F



18

jD

E

G

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

3 PHASE C5VAC SUPPLY FROM POLE No 2L1TE

CABLE SIZE 16 ,1M

N P w P,

miR6 SOLAToR 80A

1 I

PENERGE X 1 LOCKABLE 11 D:RECE mETERING

ETEr,,NCT: COYPARTMENT

MEN LINK

FT SR1,2,3 610

oli

CI

512

ETA 80kA

ii IS MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCH

02 NCRmAL SUPPLY GEN SUPPLY miUN SW-TEA MAIN SWI EH

500 800 ING1E 7. tNOTE i 71

GENERA i OR EXTERNAL CONNECTION PLUG

{

Iro

5A

620

621

622

. 09n 610 //9

(EA = 3OrnA

Er

o_

S i A ION MANS POWER FAILURE RELAY OCT 05E?

( GP^ IN P CUBELE (LAPTOP)

-(. GPO .N 13 s'R.BGTION CUBICLE

NOTES I INCOMING MAIN, GENERATOR, E. DIST BOARD CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE SHROUDED ON BOTH LINE E LOAD SIDES

2 CIRCU11. BREAKER RATINGS TO SUIT FAULT LEVEL 2. LOAD ENSURE TYPE 2 CO-ORDINATION WITH CONTACTORS 2. OVERLOADS TO IBC NLT-L-i

3 ALL MIRES C CABLE CORES ARE FERRULED WITH GRAFOPLAST 512000 COMPATIBLE LABELLING

623 SF1

FT CRJEC ism,-

FIL TER I

l 11- _I

- I

'

.,-:' , , i T ' - : TS:

z.,_

i.)

SDI

AC POWE:R

sLisT,3E

502

0: \.(E ERc I JET

020 624

RTL; LL VDT POWER SUPPLY RT.- 05E12

! I

\/ : '

LS.Di2!

SC SD.

5D23

1:ARY Av LA N20

52 A

c

-50- li

,,..---o

, ,,,. LA

625

- !.- , 1/2I

:

- - I 623 - -:_-.---0 i

022 626

GRuNDFOS rlYDRC MPC

C-2RUNDFOS G'00 GATEWAY oF Gs H=.

SURGE DiVEP TER AND FIL EP. OK 1 REF TEE'?

N

0102. 4A N22

0/02- :

i

623 023 627 ...---° LA 1833

SLR-' 010 650

651 1 FLUORO IN CUBICLE REF

BA

) .012 639 P-012 10,4 OGELL T. )

PUM- oc..3X 7- -C , ----1--, NI3

) EA = 30(EA SUMP PL,MP _7 ....-- ..

LPUMP BOX N - A" 0 5 5 MP PUMP ) ) ) )

).---"

' - - - _ - . . " . - - - - " , . . . - - " , - - - - " , - - " , - - , E N A W

CON T.NuEC ON S

ELECTRICAL AS BUILT DETAILS REV COMPANY -

CONTRACTOR LICENCE No. -

1


; C 160209 1/090-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DPM FUNDING

A 105/06 REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DPM AW DESIGN W.O. No

0 109.06 I 2020 U EC) F Ft TENDER 88 I'4 DPM CONSTRUCTION W.O. No.

DRAFTED 1

DRAFTING CHECK

CAD FILE

No DATE AMENDMENT DRN. APD. FUNDED BY B.C.C. (,) EXTERNAL ( )

1 2 I

3 4

B.C.C. FILE No. 1

C

C

C REMOVED PUMP BOX

LIGHTING & VENTILATION F.

PUMP STOP PS

ADDED SUMP PUMP

Mosta rt Original Signed by A.WIttholt 8895 04/07/2009f Original signed by F.Fmnasler 04/07/2008 SITE TITLE W13087, -1-001-1EY IRID AC POWER DISTRIBUTION u DESIGN RP.E.Q. No, DATE PRINCIPAL DESIGN MANAGER DATE Pi i5 vviocraFt Escpcis-ra SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 490082set_A.dwg Original Signed by R.Janlada 04/07/2009 Original signed by P.Sherriff 04/07/2008 ugtiti

BRISBANE .,DESIGN CHECK RP.E.O. No. DA CLIENT DELEGATE DATE

6 7 8 -

I CriENE

VDF TERMINAL

PLC /R3L; MARSH FUSE TERM

o PLC /P'S MARSH LINK TERM

-C,-- CPSCONNECT PLUG

RTU

D"-". ) DIG.T! AL 'NRU1

< > OiC2:T AL OUTPUT

),1102 1 ANALOG INPUT

1 101-15 -11; ANALOG OUTPUT


SHEET No. 3


486/4/9-0082-003 AMEND.

0:1194 WATER SUPP,268 0ral94,916248 Pl0.,Ebcalcal4 . WATERWETWORKS1W8087 TRolley Rd1C0ns.c8on1490082set C.0.9 Lam Saved by

12 13 14 15 _ 062670 on Fnday. 20 Feduary 2009 227,18 PM

16



I A

,C

F

G

H

4 3 3 F ALA. 8 in 10 10

CONTINUED FROM 03 E N

Pi- VFD

03 ,

1 LI

I

/ 1 io

'j-°- 1

L2 I ( P } ... --( 1 Ei

- \ I

L 3

204

3 v

Gn a PE

PUMPS STOP PLY REF 01. Fil=1

ITO 3 PSR-2 I '

II

3 :I /10 ,21, /

RTJ DO MAN RUN PLY P/RUN REF 06 ht. '

(A REMOVED Sil FIRE SW )

1

C 1

11 DIII P1 PAuL 1 0- !

-3, REF 05 02

ORLINDFOSS ERE 32-i 22 NW

Si hr//s!£0

1! 2,db 3 ONO (frame!)

II 281 0,g,t a! inpu;

II 'WI) E 38t,

FAULT NE) ,,

vn ,, C X - P1

A FROM MPC

WI:

GENIbLs PS/-EN REF OS h6 1 sh O,

Po

/ /1 i/n

( 6,

P2- VFD

i

Li 1

r , p,- IN

L 2

\ - I L3 I

I

PE

120 Pdh , C P2 iwr, 0 , '-ii -- I

PUMPS STOP PLY i

il II \ _t:, REF 01. Fi 13 ,-__-0 \ 2 St af i /st op

29!//1 ii!: i!..,;. -0 ! II '..i GND {frame!

iii nii3A i - /, 1 7E -I i Op/ c/ ,npui

II I

\ I

\ I

50

GRUNDFOSS ERE 32-1

2 2 44,1

I RFU DO MAN RUN RLY , p2RLJN REF 05 HI- '--

------ /------N.---,,,,---_, (AEMOVED S11 I

FIRE SW ) N....-- ..._......._....------'

WI: FROM MP( f

REF 05 HE 1

P2 A

L.,

PEP 05

On). 3' WO I

l' MC-

11 -, 11 i'' i FAULT IT-HI

FT /, EX-P2 : Ti I A WA 4

I !! r-E, -a Y GEN1bus PS/-TN

1

05 PO

4 !

\ 41 W17 "

(--n ' ..-.1--- --.___' 1-.1 20A \ I

Go

\ p w B

PUMPS STOP PLY REF 0/- ,T13

PSR-1.

RTU DO MAN RUN PLY p3puN REF 05/1. ..e.......0

(APEMOVED C FIRE SW )

...-..."...,_....."..,__,...........4

POM MPC WI:

REF 05161 Sh

iv ELECTRICAL AS BUILT DETAILS COMPANY -

CONTRACTOR LICENCE No.


Li.: 020/h

127_ 11

!,/ 0 :1

21 /-ALL. 12

RE, 05 02

loIn

iE

D113.

P 3-6/F D

MLT

L2

L3

PE

GRUNDFOSS (RE 32-1

2 2 NW

2 s. c iis. cp

GNO (frame)

i ;EA I

z! !nr,u;

:11,/h

FAULT (NCI 3E/,

3C //71 TX-PT

I

v I

PUMPS

071 A 'dr, A

GENibus P5/- 35

BOOSTER ?LIMP Nol 2 2 ',14

(ClosedrRunPerrn,)

(Ciosed.,RunpMaY.Speed

(Oper,,NormaIRTUcont roll

(Open,Faulti

N4 BOOS TER PUMP No?

2 kW

(E138.00,RurParniu1

Tfleseb,Run@maYSpeed) TOpen,N0rrniPI..2.:(_,-.roT)

TOpri,Fact TT

BOOSTER PUMP No3 22 NW

IT tos ed,RunPMax Spee.d)

TOpen:NcernaiRi Uc not roll

(Open .=;:ault I

N RW

05 Pc GRUNDFC1SS

/ - III 1 CRE32-1

/: e44 7 2 kW

i°-- / - IlL2

I / ---,IP .PL -.' - f '---EL - - - - -- - -NL3

6 204 41

1

U fr

N 0r PC

iz 0 I'dh ----- -- PUMPS STOP PLY pcp_s

12,.. I \ il 5 T.A 1E4

REF 0 I. Hili F. 06 A Z 1 __,....0 0' \ 112 St4,474StoP 12'. II II \

TOT 2//u , 2e, ,

0- ! - I' - 3 ONG If ramel

11. 2 ?Et, ,1 25t, 0- ' - 1 D!gl; a! nput 127 I' II

II 1[

II 1:

-%13,1 DIU 3',/r,

RIU DO MAN RUN RLY pt.RUN REF 06 '

(A, E MOFVIRE S/.1

FROM MR( wt,

REF 0602 I 0154

P3 FAULT 31 '

- 32

,,17i!

WT

4uLL (NCI

REF 0516 " ON nos PS/-EN

C

C

C

/TO.

REMOVED PUMP BOX PUMP

Si OP PB

ADDED SUMP PUMP LEVEL

PLY

RUMPS

I. V DC POWER SP.'"' 110-

REF 007

PS/ (ST ( ) "1-0

0001/ TITIiTOII (30:311:(003=5 a os: 0 PUMP 3/0/

DO DS2 T ,

Eo. ,s DS i 0 , 0 0 O ITT-

TO ' -04

. 1 Eil(r HA , (. 36F ".!....."-:"----..__- PL °/ .0. 17) PIT LEVEL R(/- AY

( PROBE 300 'or AEOK._ PIT FLOOR LEVEL, 1 i(

REF 05 Ell.

__

5E1' 06 02 Pi. k

1 11 !!:!'.!

..._,,.........",....-;,......./ -,- j

(......_../..-/..___/.._, - - -- ' L.--)

S TOP ALL PUMPS RELAY REF 06 02, 04 01. El, 0/.33. 0:. 0.

SECURITY E LIGHTING NE_ A' REF 03 FL. 0502

BOOS' ER PL2,-P Nc.T.

7

osecT,RurPe!-Tr!,,I

ICtosed:RL,npMaxSpee0: TOper,Norma!R T UT CS' roI)

LEGEND

VOF iERM;NAL

PLC /RI U MARS, FUSE 11L-1-7,7,

0 PLC/P. MARSH L''6% TERM

DISCONNECT PLQC3

Riu

011-0, )

Ill-02

E,61Ciri AL OCP,..,

ANALOG APu

401-02 II ANALOG Cif' PU-


C 18/07./09

A 05/08 '

0 09.08

No. DATE

RE-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DPM AVV FUNDING DRAFTED P. NA as ta rt Original Signed by A.Witthoft

DESIGN

8895 04/07/2008

R.P.E.O. No. GATE

Original signed by F.Fornasier 04/07/2008

PRINCIPAL DESIGN MANAGER DATE i 6 :..., U 4' '?

"7-' III 10111

SITE

VV E9087 -1-00 I-1 El' RID VVATER BO cls-ra Fk

TITLE

PUMPS POWER & CONTROL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

SHEET No. 4

AMEND.

C REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DPM AW DESIGN W.O. No. DRAFTING CHECK

; 1.... I-lag u a BRISBANE WATER DFtAWING No.

486/4/9-0082-004 ISSLJEC3 Pol.:. -r i!!..s cl.st DPM CONSTRUCTION W.O. No., CAD FILE 1490082sot_A.dwg Original Signed by R.Jardada

AOESIGN CHECK

-- 04/07/2008

R.P.E.O, No. DATE

Original signed by P.Sherriff

CLIENT DELEGATE

04/07/2008

DATE AMENDMENT DEN. APD.A.FUNOED BY B.C.C. (v) EXTERNAL ( ) B.C.C. FILE No. BRISBANE

9 10

GA,Cie WA, ER SLIPP1260 12010,62ee PIw,mE4nc$3. WATERWERV0.S1WB082 moray Rd1Coaslmclien 490082sei_Cdwg Last Sawed by 062670 on Foiday. 20 February 2009 2:27,48 PM

11 12 13 14 15 16

A

B

E

F



8

D

1E

F

H

2 3 4 8 7 8 9 I

To 12 15 16

200VAC SUPPLY ISHRUDEDI 0E5 0317

Pt.,NIPS

1

i

i

i

,

!,

0 ( __ ,_ --- J

M A 444r( 0

='_ ,

0095 E - - C (--.- 1

:71

674

500/

I '

o Quo

ps

1/.

11,

J;(3.

L., A

LJ

BOK

R

.10 1- 1

L±;

(CMI

I I

'0007 02.

003-

0/03-

DIG/ .

0/04

1:5U POWER SUPP_Y /OA 2I.VDC

/2.

11A 10

114-

OAT TERY OK

0E5 0502 - 0 4 Fault. A Heai'hy

POWER ON

R 04E2

o Fauli, i

moo TEMPERATURE PROSE CLUED AT GA]

P o RTU

4102. ' REF 06 F10

4102

16. - Foul i 0 RTU 4103

6103. 1 REF 06 HO

2c.VD(

)6- RLF (7

054401 'OFT

21.0VAC C,P:7-, ' 6,26 4241,

ISHRCUDED; SA'! REF 0717

1

EX1

001

72

.40w j3. I 20001 .

500P

05_ '

"3 EV 0.1

/0 A . ,4m= 10.

- (44- .L. A

2-/7 I)

002 .

4. 0 XO?

15.

2.10 -)

04MP 16.

FLU 2LVDC CARD SUPPLY 6 10 j

REF 0043, AS. 06 41, 00E3, 0640

7. CI- GA 0,,

5000 e.

54-M

00

I DELIVERY FLOWME TER

I 0,011

SPARE

5015A - e;c

.0 ',SCE _ LANEOUS 1015

RET st

51

1

Or

0109. 627 :-AuL -0 RP.) 2/.0VAC

0/09- 01c 001? AND 07110 (05005,DA:;; 1 SNZ I ,

71/ 02 =3

rn A . P'

' )- REF 00 C2 E

C3100

1,01

GND ,1 :4 Ed

0,0 I 2 (1'.

Gen Du, SP, re

01, II

' A

p

IN; 5:7,4D, I Y,

A ( TO P3

Os 1

df) r O Pt.

- - X REF 00 C C;

I E Et L;

Grundf as MPC 351

Grundics C110i.?

REFER

SHEET 06

1

0N,A 1

<D'A --q w cv et. ,At IA- 1:-

a t 2

: s ,

z

. 7 ' '9 8

. 08

a 7

a 9 8

a 9

xr '

a .1.

- a a

r-r- , ,.

a 4

a A :.

a ; .

-0 a s ,

s -

_

.

-

a

1

,554

0_

l.f)

..?:

< -'",-

-/

-i

'''-' Z

0

.

-, E

,-.4

I

0

0-4

E

. a

Q s

9 ' 7 i 1

9 v

7 a

7 '

5 a

s

L-11 9 a , i ,

v g a

; ; r--3-

s

....-1-

N 71 LT

REFER

S'nEi. 105

REFER

55(1106

REC'ER

!SHOE' 06

;AE: 401 TERM/NH//ON DIAGRAM

eNe TAO!()

I R111-2. / DES-M-21

Red R111-1 Coo-V, 31

Creep.

ve,tcv:

Etue RoTJO DE3-N-6

N.

III I

7-1 DE]9-m-E

DEC-P-;

C

] ALL WIRES F. ALE CORI S ARE FERRULED 14/111-i GRA=GPL AS] 52000 C31':=4, rEiLE ASE:_LINC:

2 ALL FUSES 4I,/ LX/E,' VP-ERE

0 iHERvhSE

LEY_ \"::

vDt= iER`4,NAL

PLC/RIO MAPS,-; FUSE 'ERM

CD PLC /CC' O MARSH oN'K ;F,' DISC ONNEC HUG

qr, 0042 D/(11/'L INPUT

> L'''.3I'AL OUTPUT

ANALOG INPUT

5,0.17 ANALOG C0TPUT

Sheet 05 1

ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION

c limos! RE-ISSIJEO FOR CONSTRUCTION ' DPM /WV A 105/081 REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION OPM ...kW DESIGN W.O. No.

FUNDING

o lostoei issuegp RC) ITE rervoaFt OPM CONSTRUCTION W.O. No.1

901 DATE I AMENDMENT DRN. APILAFUNDEO BY B.C.C. (r) EXTERNAL ( )

2 3

DRAFTED R.F1,trt DRAFTING CHECK . 1. t-I g u Ea

CAD FILE 490082set_A.Mmg

B.C.C. FILE No.

4 5 6

Original Signed by A.WItthoft

DESIGN

Original Signed by R.Jardada

\DESIGN CHECK

7

8895 04/07/2008

R.P.E.O. No. DATE

Cul/072008

R.P.E.O. No. GA

8

Original signed by F.Fornasier 04/070008


Original signed by P.Shea-riff 04/0702008

JCLIENT DELEGATE

ineitt DATE

9 I

10

SITE WB087 To:DOI-1El( RID WATER FR BOOSTER

11

TITLE

DC POWER DISTRIBUTION SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

SHEET No. 5

BRISBANE WATER DRAWING No. AMEND.

486/4/9-0082-005 C G1194 WATER SUPP268 Oratring1624 Pia.s0Ekicacalk3. WATERWEIWORKSWI13087 Toohay RdConahrcIonM90092ser_C..., Las, nosed by 052670 on Friday. 20 February 2009 217:40 PM

12 13 ._L 14 15 16

A

B

C.

D

E

F

G

H



A

18 1

C

E

F

G

H

J

1

2 3 4 5 7 9 10 11

I

12 13 14 15

RTU D;CDT \l'UTS

2 /VDC POWER SUPPLY -

REFER SHEET 05 C7

?A I 16. I .1,5-

F-!, 07 P1-,9 (16

1 0 0/00- PSR- 0106- 0100 0160 DI-00 J-- PUMP STOP RELAY RE= 01. H13

1 0101. PFRS-i ...----°

0101- 0 0/0/ 0/6/ 4-( DI-02

01-01 ..\- RSE3FA07310E3N H//NS POWER

o

/ O p(17

3

%----C

OS 05 P'-07 I OW, SADR- 0101- 0102

OS

SURGE 0,VERT'R ANO FIL TER 00 RE= C33.1,

500 J 0103- 0103 0163

DI-07 )-----\ RTU EA' 1ERY OK

. 1

10 P1-01. 00 ' ' RE7 05 53 R I U 1 0104- 0104 0 r DI FL \-- RTC! CONTROL POWER

12 05-1- _J REF 05 C3

). 0106.

t ° 15

1 0107. C I ' 0 L 0 c S10

0 . C

0107-

0

0 /5

00 1/6 015

0167

0000:: 60150

FIRE HUGE

ST ii I LJS

D1,07

Ci

06 "- %-Li 01-00 )-- STATION LOCAL REMOTE SWITCH 07

_}

REF' Ot H13

MODE SELEC -ED

1

- ,0105. S-R- I 0105-

REM LOC 0106- le.

1 i7 ' iS OE .---

(31,5' D108- O

0108 (. D166 ...1 ( DI OS; 1)- CONTROL MODE SE! EC TED

..-0 . Di" t4-,1 DI os .)- MPC FAUL

1,-Thr \IT-N".."Th."--/'\,Th,--"--,"-\,-7..fir,-"N,ICN --/-LN-=w"\---7,67.N"-\,---'--'---\,--N

.----° D1

L 5110- 0_0110 0110 Al-L 01- 0 , t ° 16 .

R'- i

RE= 0/. C - ...15 7-.%.--i:Au-S"--.H36 i-122 \'- . -. 0E= C!;CO/2..--"''...---'''---'...---'

0112.

77 7-;

o 0/13 0/13- 0113 D113

1 29 "-7/.-F ALL. T 30 P1-10

1 0 ono D114- 0114 D114 01-1 31 32 P1-15

005. 0115- o 0115

53 01. Pi- i0

P-0 0117- 0112 r DI-12 J- 01-/3

7.5 Pi-I3

35

37

0/17.

39

a 0115.

0/19. .-c t 3

05

-0 1.7

5,

2/.VDT POWER SUPPLY -

S'-..En 05 (7

16 i6-

Dr2 .

0171.

0172 .

0173.

RT, D'( - A. 0,.:TPUTS

P2 FAUL

REF 00 /01.

PC FAIL ;

REF Oc

PC 'Au, i

PEF 00/? 01/5

DI 15 )-1 RESERVD FOR 115 =AUL1

012- C011 r._ 012 - OW

36 .1-19 CM

0116 , 0116 o 30 PL-01

0117 , o 00 60-02

o U- 07 f70-03

o C. 0 ). P i.-0i.

05

50

52

011,5

D119

0170

0121

0122

P/..05

C- Pt-05

0123

C-

0/17

0//S

0119

0170

0/2/

0122

P0-07

D173

DI 167)-----7 5PAR

/

20

21

72

DI-22 23

D1-17 )-1 SPARE

cpA:z:

01-/S SPAR'

DI-20 }-1 SPARE

SPARE

7-

D1-18

01-2/

I

01 -23 ;

2LVDC POWER SUPPLY -

REFER SHEET 05 C7

____ 4 051.2'0 7 -. 001 24 I/ 2,4 16, I I .16- ---, -

P2-09 53 50 i

P'RUN 0 0__ Po ,.- , YAN,A, RUN COMMAND 55

L j 56, REF 00 C 3

0002 P2RLJN

2C2 NC 57 ,,CE P,..,..7.1 r:32 YAN..,A,_ RUN COMMAND

I,_ j 7P :RUN

0003

7,C3 NC 59 -i P LRCM 60 00- 00

0 1 -'-YR . 7. YANJAL RuN COMMAND P2-00

0

ci. .> ,A DON 0000

0i

17,v.: 0 0 is'A \ _A_ RUN COMMAND 0 0

0005 n___.! 51 5- :1). - 0, s7uMP P5 MANUAL RUN COMMAND ___(,,r 6,--- ,A 0005 ..) P2-05

0 ' - - - /i7C: NC 63 (..."-\----N.---\,--\"--7---";""'-""v"-"\/-"/-"..

-( ::- : C- E > 306 N C. -

D0(6 Xi

E6 1 R'.:

.

0-3'. ' A -..\

) Co 07:.> /.4 0007 -') 0007 0 ---"----.-------,---,,-fiss.-i,"SZL..--",.._........._.........._."...._,

L _ _ _ "307 NC --

92.07 57 ES'

7`,. D005 -.) 0005 o -- /0035 NC P2-00 69 70

0- S.7A3-

c, D001

P2-01 _ 30 N.

DC'C'' P2-02

0001

2/. '!OE POWER SUPPLY -

REFER SHEET 0S07

I 1

?/S 0 71 '72

173

0 170

76

PROMATIC IC

FLOWMEIER SENSOR

02

FLOWMETER PIT

M D CC

DELIVERY FLOWMEIFF- EHPROMATIl, EU

FLOWMEIER To

H° Jj2i 1,-; 7,57;

LI ,

RTU ANALO(2.1NP,JTS

4.100A ""-nA .4100, 1/00- 26. ! A -- VERY

77 P3-01 0. 0,3WME I ER

77T 0100- 0 010.0 C

0/09

70,

[- .4. 1 21-VDC SUPPLY

I

2 ./.7-

REF 05 D7

(IT Li LI

A

ANALOG .NPUT S

par I of EIRUNDFOS MPC.

INLET PRESURE SENSOR

poll of GRUNDFOS PUMP PAK

1.2004 1. 20,1

I I

J6- A,, p, . 4157-0 3 ,

56 L_ 106 1'

OU'LE1 PRESoSC SENSES

par of GRUNDFOS P,,MP PAK

1 0-21,4

)6103-A r.,, 0 `-/-----7' [; ICS 1

a

S`°" 1101

79

o 1/101.

BO

P0-03

( P3-00

4101.

4101

RESERVED FOR

% A,0" OW ZONE OWMEIE

Al0- 6 -

107 102.

-102- A102-

L

07 P3-06 3-

) ) )

50103. 0- (..,-. 4I".-% 7 A :73------- '-' :1,-

A/01- A103- 0103-

80 2300. F-

y..--/,-----,

) 05

(... ,4104

P3-09

) 0 A104- A104.

06 P3-'0 5-

1/01- .1-4-1, A!cL SP ARE.

500r:14 A 105,

'67

SE

A/05. ( %-, A'FT -- SPARE

110.5- Al415,-

(

NOTES

1 ALL WIRES 31 CABLE CORES ARE FERRULED WITH GRAFOPL AS' S 2000 COPATIELE LABELLING

2

0/ HER WISE

ARE '300,-;A EXCE,' W--ERE NOD

LEGPND

vDE TERMINAL

RLE/RTu MARSH FUSE TERM

0 PLC /R iL) MARSH LINK TERM

DISCONNECT PLUG

RiU

001-02

0101AL ARG:

0 0.7 AL OuTPUT

ANALOG INPUT

II 00/-72 11 ANALOG CNPL


C 1'642* RE-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DPM A41 A 105/081 REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION OPMI^WA :SIGN W.O. No.

FUNDING

0 109.081 ISSLJEC) FOR -TEP4C3EF2

Not DATEI AMENDMENT

1 PM 1 IC MSTRUCTION W.O. No.I

DRN. 1 APD,FINDED BY B.C.C.

DRAFTED Mosta r-t DRAFTING CHECK II...I-lag woo

CAD FILE 490082set_A.dwg

EXTERNAL ( ) FILE NO. '

3 I

4 1

5 6

Original Signed by A.Witthog 8895 04/07/2008

DESIGN R.P.E.O. No. DATE

Original Signed by R.Janfada 04/07/2008

_,.DESIGN CHECK R.P.E.O. No, DATE_,CLIENT DELEGATE

Original signed by F.Fomasler 04/07/2008


Original signed by P.Sheniff 04/07/2008

7 8 Nor 9 10

SITE WB087 -1-001-16-Y FID VVATER EIC0CDSTER

TITLE COMMON CONTROLS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

SHEET No. 6

BRISBANE WATER DRAWING No,

486/4/9-0082-006 AMEND.

DATE

1./ IS' WATER SUPPS288 Drelttn02411PLynslEtacy,,,,s3 WATERWETWCIRKS1WB087 Tooltay RrAConseuctionl4900825at_Cstwg Last Sweat by 052670 an Fridays 20 February 2005 21748 PM

11 12 13 14 15 16



3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 18

RTU

eNE I REFER SILT OF

2

3

COM

10

17

15

IV

16

(OM

or ./16. = v;

I 2L-VDC.

1/3/7/3

SHEE I 05

DISCONNECT

PLUG 1

D100 CY r

gY 3- D:01

0107 ay

0:71 91

01 -C 5

0105 CY *-C 6

c=0 7. 1A;

A 1 = 5 I

1 c=c ;- or "CA. '

LI I " v, A c_70.

I SA

1. c=0 -

Li, 1 = (. S.'

S-

A

1 A =0' 7_

A 1 E c=0 0-

. 1 ,.=1, S. ',A

Fl = E-

. CO 10

310. or 31A- VI

Ji. Cd

J1- o Cr

if. or JO- VI

J5.

35- V.

JO. Cr

J0- VI

J7- Cr

17- VI

38- Cr

18- v,

PO, or

J/0- vi

fl cr 1LA:=J, vt JO, vi

; 7:0 D/00. ay ! 0 g y D/00 H-- 0/00-9/>

CY D/6 0501- 91> gY c=c7

QV 0102- CY> , 0103. gy

0103, :1 D303-0y> 0103.. Cy

CY 0/04 0100 - 01> 0105. gY

7 DAS 5; 1 0/05- ci> c-c 0/00. 91\

SO 0)05 0100- c.,/ S

0°7' " 7 0/07- 9i/ (.7

0/08. gy

y 0105- DIOS- gy> 0109.01

Cy DAS 9 -- 0_ c 7: 0109-0 0110. CY

9Y 0110- of

part of

H,f7(------(C )-

0:00

0177 ;-C Cy

9

1101 Yr 9Y -C ;0

0109

0110

(2111

0117

0113

0112

7115

) 011.100

17

19

10

21

27

7:

EOM

c-1.7

1i

CY

gY

C-17.

011( 9Y

D111

2

Dill cy

DIII CY

01210 II -C 91

11;171 05 y

21/1

(091195(0 ON Oil ea

-C 6

217-(CM s

1766E91

SmEE: 05

---r.: 0111. 3Wn

ay _:7

Dal- 380 76 --- - 0112. 3.,,it,

co.":: i, ;

51 0112 ----- -./.,-, 0112- 351

Diii .11/0

SY OIL. D113- 351.. ..) r r_Q- ....- ' '../ part of

, - Dig 3:://, CC -P L )---- 0 0 1"

L1, 011, - DliO - 3E1 D ;12 p.3r 1 o I

D115. 3 10

\ c c :: 135 y 0115 0115- 383, ) 0 M52/

1

1

-a_ DISCONNECT

PLUG L

9Y !

. _

C. C 95 0120- -

91 0/21- C C

gy

C Ii 0,2., 7

1Pt S1s1 13 FOR PLO/SOT CODING PINS;

C 16=91 RE-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DPM AN/VV.-- FUNDING

A 05/081 REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION OPM AW DESIGN W.O. No. .

0 09.081 I 2020 U 880 FOUR T 88 NI CD E FO 1 DPM CONSTRUCTION W.O. No.

No DATE AMENDMENT I DRN. I APD. FUNDED BY B.C.C. (/) EXTERNAL ( )

JO., or 36- o,

(00I ON

5/113/00

RAFTED 11. . IV1clata rt DRAFTING CHECK p u a CAD FILE 490082set_A.dwg

B.C.C. FILE No.

2 3 4 6

C" 27 01 DI.;

(CV ON

0100-

0100-

0101.

030/-

0/02.

042-

0103.

0)03-

0100 .

0/00 -

0101.

0105 -

V/ ICH:HARD

PSR-1 PUMPS STOP ?Sul TON OK

PFRF-1 STATION MAINS POWER 00

SURGE DIVERTER OK

P59-2

REM LOC C. 1

0306- SiO I

FCC 0/07.

0 , I a FIRE MODE SELECTED

N-- 005117-. l' 00 HI 0 1 i .0- FSW CONTROL MODE SELECTED \--TC-07/0 S'l

0/02; D.01

----C>.-1 MPC OK

( \-- 01.'"...!--N

FLOODED DD;1°01 LR I-

\-----"____)%,_.).,_.)_..."...,_..."..._...)".)

11'.jd BATTERY SYSTEM OK

RTLI POWER OK

ALL DOORS CLOSED

REMOTE CONTROL SELECTED

P5/

R U POWER SUPPE Y

100 2050C

POWER BOX P525I-20CM

Original Signed by A.Wiltholt 8895 04/07/2008'. Original signed by F.Fomasler 04/07/2008- TIV7-17-LE WB087 HEN' F:20 RTU DIGITAL INPUTS DESIGN R.P.E.O. No. DATE PRINCIPAL DESIGN MANAGER DATE 'PI 7 \`

1- '''' VVAMEF2 BOOSTER TERMINATION DIAGRAM Original Signed by R.Janfada 04107/20013 Original signed by P.Sherriff 04/07/2008 MIA

BRISBANE .ADGN CHECK FLP.E.O. No. DA-I_AE CLIENT DELEGATE DATE/ \_,_N,,vg).(_,N,

7 8

7, I CLII

LEGEND

-c--

s I

CAB,_E _7;.;;NT

DISCONNECT ",

FUSE :LP' NA

I c0150 5 I DISCONVC CT , ;R,INAL

NOTES ALL WIRES X CAB.: S 11RE TERRULED

WITH GR000",AS 52001 CE'PAT-BLE LABELLING

2 ALL FUSES ARE SCC-A XCF". W-ERE NOTED OTHERWIS


SHEET No. 7


486/4/9-0082-007 AMEND.

C 0:1194 WATER SUpp,9a8 0n1500,924 Flen1Eleceice43. WATERWETWOR6SW/B087 Toohey Ra1Consevcion.190082ses_Lawg Last Saved try 062070 on Friday, 20 February 2009 227:40

12 13 14 1 16

A

B

C

D:



2 3 4 5 7 10 12 13 14 15

SWITHBOARC ;LLD

C000-3'900 STII 07

-1 I

r"---

000

eNE,

REFER Si-T

2

031

DOD

DOD

000

DOS

006

DOD

000

0. NC

C0

CON NC

(00, 00

1'( (00

\:(( 00 nG

(00

( 1.01

din 0

DISCONNECT

PLUG 2 000

I I

A. or 001400 or F-C9 00124 V i,' '5:

) 1 0000 Or

1

cy DOI-4-0M -

I 0000 I' C7c) 5'5'

C000. Sr

.45-

En PIRUN PLIMP1 MANUAL RUN COMMAND

-I gy !-4!, 0001 I C=0 '667

0000- gy

El 2

00(/ 0001. gy

1 00/2 I--(2 0007 + SS

D001- gy L J-1 P2RUN PUMF-2 MANUAL RUN COMMAND

2 " (-- co 59 0Dgf'22:

gy Li" ( `";RUN PUMP3 MANUAL RUN COMMAND

I 900i I ' 000: ' c=c) 65?

D003 gy 9? 0003- gy

FE; LSI Pi.RUN PUMP/ MANL.A PTItrommANr1

0004 !---+ 666 :: ,...--,,,...-A.,,,--, ,.-,.....-..,,---,/,-- 4,----/ -e"---".....--,.....-,

) 1 20(1

D005 : ir 0005. cY

QV QV

'I 9005 I 0/ ' CL-0 55

r--)

, : 6 ( 0005- gy L. DIS.AELE MP( COMmAND A\ co 0/ 0006 +

! C-C 5? 1

56 ,

1 300

2 NV 0 Y 1_(...s gy

13007 65

1 ---'---,._...,..__/.._/._.",...._."-..__.,',---,--,--,'--/----j 69

TO I

A 00.

4/00-

A10'

A10'-

002-

,492 7 0107-

) J

C

C

( 13 r /5.

(:?:%A,d 1108.227A TI)

'1. C11,76

I Y 1, )

r17.13 1.3

ioe scr I

i , -,,"\ - ' }

,.:7-- -:,,-0

,

1,--: Th,, (-,,--------

- C

( Y AI0 3-A 51` ;';),

( )

!!:!.!: S!" ii FOR PLU/SAT COOING PINS) ( I

I

1 C ;

i

I

.,..._,...)

I ( )--"%."-A-- v, ! /41-24 i 46-

or 7411201 _ ,i'.--.1, 35. or

( ) I /4124 V 73_ Ali 74 V

All. i4/ 7, k ( ) i-c7c,

I-C '

ay

0/ ir/i()"01 :----='-': r' TA ( e 26-

11.

) ( aY ) A100A

60 24 v '

< ! 4100

) z I-( '

i); All :1 I= 77 9:(1-Are)i!4-/e" ,.......,7>fsb yP d s ,.........s 1 I 6 ',I m 6 ; e r ( )

I ( 7.

,,,,_

,.., __(_t.

ay 7A: r--_--7e-i 6102- 2

i ( I

PSI EARTH

-III z . A103. -gY C... =... -7=----. -3 =i

6/63- ) ) I---<++ 6 0Y 2

1=1 AIOS 'Y 1---,.", 9

1 ' i0 )

ESFU 00,5P 07 1 ; c _

0103 3 . I 0103-

FOOL TY

,, v

I , -4 c

9/ , __.1

1 ) A10515 Ain I-57- ' 2

gg'oy'flY 6'6A//1000;./.5.9 -1 . --I- i8 E7A5 \ -.) ( )

Mgt 0 0/01-

I (-f-. (,,ri.

7---i -- " I

1 ( ) lio = ( ' ( )

! ( 1 ( (

i ) 1 (

2e --Ir 1

= ( 1

) ( )

DISCONNECT

PLUG 3

0E1 055E

C

C

[ H PROMATIC 10

FLOWME iER 1;:

S-. "3 TOR PLG/SKT CODING,' \SI

JAI <FfSVMP(

Fr 5i A102-A ( 5, I A10.,- A

Foul ,-, 741- )4 V ( c

o

7- .-e-;-H 57I-I r'_m`) UNDco Ili

E - .5%, Par )

Scr n.

Wri

EA r P'' ,

5rr IL

DELIVERY OWMETER

PROMATIC 10

'1.0WmE0E0 SENSOR

PL. 0 \A/Mti TER PIT

L

LEGEND

CABLE IDENT11,1EP

DISCONNECT PLUG

5 I FUSE TERMINA-

I co S I DiSCONNECI LINK 1ERMiNAL

\GTES ALL WIRES 8 CABLE CORES ARE FERRULED

Y/1, H GRAFOPLAS1 512000 COMPATIBLE LABELLING

2 AL, FUSES ARE 500mA EXCEPT WHERE NOTED


C 1602109 RE- ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 DPM 1 AVV FUNDING

A 05/08 REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 DPM I AW DESIGN W.O. No.

0;09.081 ISSUED FOR -FENDER I OPM ; CONSTRUCTION W.O. No.,

No! DATE.; AMENDMENT l

ORN. I

APO,,AFUNDED BY B.C.C. (.1 EXTERNAL ( )

2

DRAFTED F. . Mosta t Original Signed by A.WIttboa

DRAFTING CHECK F.. 1-1.a9 LA ea DESIGN

CAD FILE 490082set_A.dwg Original Signed by R.Janlada

B.C.C. FILE No. ,ADESIGN CHECK

6895 04/07/2008 Original signed by F.Fornasier 00072008 II

R.P.E.O. No, DATE PRINCIPAL DESIGN MANAGER DATE

04/072008 Original signed by P.Sherrif( 0037/2008

R.P.E.O. No. DATE CLIENT DELEGATE DATE WATER

10

SITE WBO87 -rc,CD1-1EY RID WATER BOOSTER

TITLE RTU DIGITAL OUTPUTS & ANALOG INPUTS TERMINATION DIAGRAM

SHEET No. 8


486/4/9-0082-0081 C 69194 WATER SUPP,268 Onnung162.1 PlensiE42.893. WATERWETWOR051W3013 Todmy ROTosa9920,99900829M_C.9909 L.. 0.0 by 062670 on FoOgy. 20 NARA, 2009 727:45 PM

11 I

12 13 I 14 15 16



A

B

IC

D

E

F

L

G

H

2 3 4 5 7 46. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

C '110208, 1,002-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DPM I ALVV FUNDING DRAFTED F.. NA s t4a rt A 05/08 REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DPM ; AVV DESIGN W.O. No. DRAFTING CHECK F.. hi 0

0 ;09.08 I SS Li EC) FOR -I- 88 NI C3 E R DPM. CONSTRUCTION W.O. No.I CAD FILE 490082set_A.dwg

No. DATE AMENDMENT DRN. APD. FUNDED BY B.C.C. (/) EXTERNAL 9 ) A.B.C.C. FILE No.

2 3 4 I

5 6

057 f

REF EL t-111 055

I POP

/10

(091 00

5// 11 01

SW:-CHBOARD

052 D52 DS:.

i,..-.,..-Th/----N.--Thvtv---N.----N,----N,--Th,,,--Th ...--- -- cL 0 - r 0_,

IPL)24ER BOX) 1

AVERS ,L,SED

"...ft/7 ....,,,r ,,,, ._./"-..."'"="N-....."s.----/,:-.--- "..y- 1

1

EL) P

-:.---. -/\"--"'..-.."...,V,..._/,...j"...__/,.._,."....._.,%.....""---V--''..--,/..._.../..._./

\_____,.

OVER FOR 100-111

117

REF 01. EON

12

120

175

REF EL 20

I 122

130

113

114

N) 116

LE5

REF N. 5,01

;37

it5 REF 01017 140

I 742

117

liE 1/9

120

121

177

/1 121

125

125

177

120

129

/30

Original Signed by A.VArtholt 8895 04/07/2006

DESIGN R.P.E.O. No, DATE

Original Signed by RJanfada 04/07/2006

%Eh/ '

110 1)/i,

2,;) vcD 270 1E4

1.dh - /511p

L "9 c

; 2 ,In), II, RAME) 05u ft-

K 117 25,, 25.,)

1

Te/r,

oi, AJL MI

/ 754 )

/ 170 1W,, 217/)

/75 /3 112S. Js.,op

120

S 050 II iFRAm'E

0117 JO;

; (SC; 0112-

150

------H::

. ' I! i S' ar is op

130 lel

_ H

2//N - Di c ,.-21 ,,,,J, 10 - '1

N-

I/O id;:

145 ;5= -

I/O JWS

1" 75/ 16.

004. :WA ml

0114 INC1 \,

Original signed by F.Fomaskx 04/07/2008 i SITE VV 0 8 7 TOG) I-1 BY F1D

TITLE PUMPS CONTROL

PRINCIPAL DESIGN MANAGER DATE Il WATER BOOSTER TERMINATION DIAGRAM Origi& signed by P.Sheriff 04/07/2003

21ri.

II fflit II

j.,_........ABWATER DESIGN ChlE0),1/4.<1.1, CLIENT DELEGATE DATE

7 8 IV_ 10

PLVIP

' iVD CteseS,RunDu-H

(VED CIssc,drmaxSpeecII

(VFD DO Open)Fault)

PUMP 2

IVFD DI Clasec)RunPer-m,

1\'O Di CiQsed.MaxSpesc.11

(VFD DO Open,Fav1;;

PUMP 3

!VFD DI Closed,RunPerfnir I

(VFD DI CleseMaxSpeetil th

s (VD DO OpenF uit)

PUMP 0

IV:=D DI Closed,RunPErmi I

iVFD Closed,May.Speed

WED DO Oper,Fauill


SHEET No. 9

BRISBANE WATER DRAWING No. l AMEND.

486/4/9-0082-0091 C GA194 WATER SUPPN268 Ondeno1624 PlanSSEacelcan) . WATERY< TWORNSM8087 Toohey RraCons0u000n,490082sat_C.

11 12 13 14

Last Saab by 062670 on Friday. 20 February 2009 2:2748 PM

15 16



C

.0

E

F

H

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

,;(m. r( 0003/10100 MAN0101 11/RER CAT ALOGUE Nie PEMARKS,

iERNG 4131P, 304 A

I E C3Y SE. RIP T1G0 044,31 1,3 (09(2 I CA 1 =L0500 No 1117 430riS

3E085314 7.6103040 53

(31 NORMAL SUPPLY 0.430 5311(13 904 A 1100531333 03173E130 11

00 6(3(00 (04 SUPPir MAN 30001.6 304 A

((PUMP I (10(81 BREAKER /0 A (491101 LOCK 000

P00P (P.11111 39EAKER 20 (4/111/3 LOCK DOG

PUMP 3 (10(411 4011419 10 A (A/1101 10(K 000

TIRA.SAKI 051250110

110158333 01(0153001 FLU 10334 704 "0" tetve

iERASAKI 013E153701 D3L0( 10'01 39 104

1E9000333 0100163701 DELO( 111.4 1' MA "D" curve

(3/9094 391101 BREAKER 24 A .34331101 ((133 306 ((94 0733, 41(4101100( 716D1 1133A 08001 "01 ctrre

RESERVED

9

10

12

13

03 P33430 (436 OLY 4 CC 91013531Pa r (13

333 5WE0 G/01100011 BREAKER

013 SWED INE LIGH1ING CIRCUIT BREAKER

1110ASAKi

130438333

IERA5AK1

0110101061 3(3380/18 C curve

(50(00-1-1(0 1(5019(11 30e1.8 RED

(I (0103(11 10331 IP 61 "V curve

1312 PUMP BOX 500P PU/9 3000011 ERE AKER 10945441 I 004(0,-.-0:-3(..4 1054 1P 61 00m4 9(0

35 1 19646 03(0 3P 0115 1004 719051/1

1 16 3 EUS (OMB MAIN TERMINALS

01 POWER SAJP9I 12EU 401033431

ai; SU060 DIVERIERS 0E1,1r i393011 10E133E9

GRUNDFOSE 0/1 CIO(" 44(43309

TERA$AKI

TERASAKI

iERASAKI

(304.54K;

21/061

33seen,

11334 IP 44 "E" nerve

6304 IP LA "E" curve

2.,:aw.00L; 10330 121 tA

011 69430705.35 6100 0031111 BREAKER

INSULATED 0P 005 10140

BUS (090 MAIN TERMINALS.

1E9054331 0'1110104( 10334 iP 44 "(- corre

iE81539I 1(1031 1 POLE

3E0450331 011633 351erem

73 3 11 - SURGE 010339100 [1030,i FLEES NrIP 13121P 6305

13 SURGE 1311/30100 (2.37E3 45 113

31 3 SURGE 43000( 0/ A; A310, 7017' 5118 (933(1 1340 77E0

12 1 SURGE 91011(1100 (313(5 P10 10033 173 -'ee4 2400

30

3; 1 ST A1100 MAINS 'PHASE 1 41,093 03,3, Ay . 43-rts, (200P9(0 103(0050035 752 PSC.'

37

35

39

40

41

47

43

, Le.

LS

MAIN 33303901 (INK

MAIN EARTH LINO

INSTRUMENT 01033111633

/IL IERED SUPPL Y NEUTRAL 3100

PHASE OUTLE 3 (54

FUSES 933010003

85 3 5101-1 ALL PUMPS /001(03 306 - SI EPRE:HE1 $1/109 (35971153; 310025

66

17

53

19

70

17

71

73

11

77

73

/191 - SUMP PUMP iEVEL 9014/ 61113 itTRODE MIR MD(

I -.33-- r 3`.3413r137,34.9/16. ---3-633,-.....1.11343-11"..01-i u

(06 EA.U. (0.1,11

0911111 7:40-3

091 ELEE 0,3,12

ELIPSAL

1119541 '5/'593133 15-3301.1111

050183E4

INSULATED

INSULAIED

79

10

11

33

311.

16

14

19

90

Si

37

93

34

35

36

351/0/:-013103 (00'4,71. AY

511 EIRE 0001 SW13133

310 .33431033 0141/R10031 30 13i3

311( 33(4 5Dili:1

/RALIS 1 541037

KRAUS 1 9010,32

0E, 71 -220241/ (33 /4 016 70024501

(A011 1P65 ENGRAVE 'FIR; 011 C(51101

(1011 35694140 '10(4. 91 011.'

FLOWMEIER

GRUND10.5 PUMP (031RO, 949E.

GRUNDF OS CA TE WA/

161:19i5 0 HAUSER /110711 113 10 E/1511616

600501 OS MP( PART OF GRUNDFOS HYDROPAK

000613905 600 PARE Of 3034130105 EirDROPAK

01

91

39

300

910 POWER SUPPLY (4/01 '11

19L390 199 0103

RAM 2403,3,3003 01-5i

GSM - it.V1900C 133601 R

TER1ES

639 90009

630 (0114( 44 30455 05r3540

RADIO

101

101

100

3 PHASE NV APPL3A331 ALE 51 4 6E5 POWER ME9001:03 3131

47

43

3.0

50

57

33 I PUMPS STOP QUAY - PEP

53 1 PUMPS STOP RELAY AGY. (0541 0,0(33

55 I PUMP 104,5003 /90 PEI 0_I ',IRON

1 PUMP 7 MANUA! RUN 0E347 r".750N

57 I pump 3 MANUAL PUN R1,4" 919.01,

3223NE Ow 10730 9-21:1 re ..TiPr

5/01-0000 5013(7 I cs 71 46320

0100(3019 45(3310 (5 7 9v 20

NHP FINDER 3391(0773

1031P FIND: 33 5' it V4(

33(19 1(6009 1(1 7043

103

101

107

/47E1- 74(61

9DS 101121A( 1

10004114E ENERGIES

9010-74176

10 410/MV-13

041E4 02:137-17

43/103100 50801013

Ri INNSIR;IS IL02000

ANTENNA

RADIO COAX 50961 D11:13

ANIENNA MASI

0010 EAGLE (1611339)10; 3 44.3 50 53"

1040 (ABLE I 1713098, AO Y(7

CO40 PLUG

101

, 109

110

112

113

DIN 9111 016 0 240131 R31,4' 115

2

7

SW/BD DOOR /37 /7 5W1-3635

30W5350L111470101-'01

(05905101/ INH0,101.

404 ELO(K 2 Ill 111

033 9411 MG 11/0 24 0 RE,/,/ 3 117

DIN RAR 6136 11/0 131/ 031,01 II)

DIN RAO 101(3 11/0 it V 03.0° 110

1---,7 1 DISABLE 0191 0(117- 0' 39913003/ 1 33 5' 23.001 /C 03 RAI1 111(3 13/0 715 9.0,0" )

II SI

1 "

C 1161:0/09 RE-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION OPM I AWN/ FUNDING _ .

A 105/081 REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DPP4 I AW DESIGN W.O. No.

0 100.081 issueaD F'c)FR rr.iQF8 DPMI CONSTRUCTION W.O. No.!

NoI DATE I AMENDMENT ORN. I APO. FUNDED BY B.C.C. (.1 EXTERNAL ( )

2

320

121

177

ill I?'

DRAFTED staso ,-t 1t

Original SIgned by A.W99108

DRAFTING CHECK ps.1-4 g taa DESIGN

CAD FILE 490082set_A.dwg

B.C.C. FILE No. I

Original Signed by R.Janlada

DESIGN CHECK

TRIO

3210

POI. YPHASEP. (00'

(19300106401-00 10900-06107-00

1001 4131110A1

1S-3004-01

1,2 N Series ccerie,,,,

0W3D 001101/

1010

1/ INDUS IRIES

RE 3005101E5

20 1130U53910.5

0651 - SMA - rrige - 0 5n

(1(3.00

N Ser,e6 (MALE)

000

RAN 10 SURGE 01010114

SURGE DIVER IER '0 1931304

(330510

101790

(09111

50707

( ADEI

0911-110 OR Ili

7 091 9.40

PROM AP (0030015

11E63 Clir DE SC Ri/ T1ON

11E

0 A 0,5 A CIL 30130 Sc 4,3,c0

I ,

114

119 ,

1

i

3311E1330800 11101104L0 ,

1

130 1 2. 30530 1E90NA, 5 ,. I ,1i'2 740 3131(11109 P330110/ (001413 033-1IESI 1E074 13,73.0 1

33(0 21 (050 CARIRIDGES '330(0(01031403 0105 RA 3335 /35 PEOuiRE6'

301 95 0151060E13 110030;5 PHOENIX EONT Ai 3 ,i13-01 P/9

11(0 5 1 AR iii 13,100.3A,3 P0016310 (001401 u1463Eu.ous

3334 1 GROUP 0493132 (733/330 P33001117 (0514(1 1150

00' 2 1E53 PLUO 404P,OR 110011010 (03( 4(1 13.0

i 130 7 1 SERE 01 DRIVER PHOENIX (ONE A( i 545 0 6 :3 3 5

;30 3, Lei , PLUCHIN BRIDGE 833012910 (01014(1 1E5 03 5(943034

131

132

133

.

333 1 0,3E000117 93005 PHGE mr. 10414(1 15 iii 25/70-5' .5 31

135

111 3 13'3(ON6EE1 (LOCKS PHOENIX CON: 411 1105101/132E/71 -6 500

131

131 0 I 141313 3301151013 91300010 ( (2113 A( I 3363-15102 5/11

139

130 0 300396 /395 /HOENE< (ON1 AC i CP-0514 i CR -015' 0

141

,

3,42

133

134

1 135

131

133

3,5

140 ,

151

157 K'-"","-N/--N/'''-'NK'ThK"-NK--N3''-''N.K"-N3'4-',3'""Thi/"-'/"-NK--N/--'`v"--"%3'-'NK"-''K''-'%/''-`,---"N/--N -"N

,

154 ( 1

SOF PUMP NON-3010100014t0 3E4 0611( i 1951 i 131P5AL 4' 5 -, 3.31 (OMR:gig )- 0R0110105 3541 4010 2401/A( 5,1033 PUMP 5460D7053 ' Er 5 '1 3..11 CONIRA(1 OR )

151 \--3'6r-, N. --, sr.-, \ --,,...-/..--,,.--, ̀34 ..--33N-1-3"..--- N.-, N. --i"..--/"..-."3,-,N3.4.-- N. --/ - ---33 st. --/ \--K3 '64.-"4---- 1 156

151

153

150

15C

,

L . -


8895 04/07/2008V. Onglnal Oared by F.Fomasior 04/07/2038 TI-VTLE SHEET No. 10 WB087 "TCC01-1E'Y RC) SWITCHBOARD EQUIPMENT LIST WATER BOOSTER

04/07/2008 ffiekIA R.P.E.O. No, DATE

R.P.E.O, No. DATE PRINCIPAL DESIGN MANAGER DATE

Original signed by P.Shoniff 04/07/2008

CLIENT DELEGATE DATE WATER

BRISBANE WATER DRAWING No. I AMEND.

486/4/9-0082-010 ' C

3 I

4 6 7 8

GA194 WATER SUPPV60 Dralbr1,90248 Plans5lecrolcs63. WATERWETWORKS8W3060 Toonay RdifenmesctionM90062sel_C.dwo LAM Saved by 062670 on Friday. 20 Fetreary 2009 12246 PM

9 3

10 11 I 12 13 14 15 16



2 3 4 5 2 13 14 15 I 16

(

CABLE NG S.'. Al US SIZE :ORES I YPE LENGTH lirT FROM :C CABLE ;U\ C 'ON NCTES

P01 NE W 16 MMmm' LC PVC/CU/PVC ENERGE X Supply POINI SztchpoarO Incoming Mains Suppiy

P02 NEW 6 liMmm' 1( Eading W,re S., chboard ta,;i-. se Main Earth

P-P1 NEW 2 5nm 3( .E PVC/PVC Sw.,:hboard Booster Pump i Mo or Pump I - 3 Phase suppq

P-P2 NEW 2 5mm' 3( -C PVC /PVC 5,,,t(nPoard Booster Pump 2 Mob or Pump 2 - 3 Phase suppty

P-P 3 NEW 2 Smir., 3( E PVC/PVC Swichboard Boo 5 er Pump 3 Motor Pump 3 - 3 Phase supply

P- Pc NEW 2 5mm.' 3( .2 PVC/PVC S,.,;(hboard Boos: er Pump L Mot or Pump C - 3 Phase supply

---"Ny-Nve-N---,..,^,s..---N.---- .---N.---",--- ".. --- \ -^,..-Th.^. -"t. ."-"%,-----,M----...-- ,---N.-- - ----.--"/"...--,...."..---.--","Th,Th.--.em"",--- \ ---\,---"N -Th.----,-"Th.

P-012 NEW 2 5mri,' 23 -E PVC/PVC .5wichboard Sump Pump Sump Pump - Single Phase -- %.. ___...._....- -__--- ......_......-..----- .._... .---..._..., .---...-, 1/4-......-, ... _.... ...._...-,..__-.....-., .---...._......--, ...--..,...---.-..- ._....- ._.......__...._...---..._.-- ._.... . __..._...... ...--, %... ...- ̀ ..-...., '1/4.._....

CEr...2.:.;%,......-4.1...---N _....5;e...--... ....-4.41/...--,s.. ,..-`44,1:X,-..,v,..-,s/...-,v,.....,v,...-.N.,..--;,4,....-....,s,..-,,,,,.-,%,,,,s7..-.....v..1-34.j.j.,. '-:..,,,' ,.....-...,,,i/--..,,....--,,,,,...---N,..--N.,.---,,,',,,,.1- ,..--N/--.,,,....-...s.,.....-N.....-.,,,v...--Nv..---Nr--N '

PLR NEW Vendor Vendor Sw.i(nbcaro Mut hi rode Probe n:ludes (able Pd level high Alum (Probe 300mm Above Pt (lore Level) ) 4..,.._,..."....__-"...,,,__.",.... *1/4.___...A.,_../ 4........../1/4....--"...-.-'..--.../1/4.--, ..._/N,____,.._./...._/...,...,......./...._ '.._..../....-../..-../%6.-/%.--,..--/..--/.-/...---/

C -Pi NEW 1 (mm? (PR PVC/PVC Switchncard Pump box Pumpi Pump 1 (onlrol E In'eloC.,s

(-PP NEW 10-,m, (PR PVC/PVC Swiicnboard Pump Box Pump 2 Pump 2 Corti-01 1 in!erlocks

( -P3 NEW 1 Norm' 3PR PVC/PVC Swtchboard Pump Box Pump 3 Pump 3 (onrol 3. Inie-lecks

LPL NEW 0,7," (PP PVC/PVC Smtchboard Pump No Pump I. Pump I. (onftol C Inier;ocks

,..........,-- ,.....-.24,Z.,!--..... ,....-S.' 7!._-...... .......Uk....-......ys.........,_.....,s ,.....--..,..-ki.--.,.-..--..--...,v.--....%;;,LB....s-zsw>.--...--..--..,.,.--.--,?.s (C-1 NEW 1P.P REXON 820 Sw,i(hboarc - VP( GEN,bus 0111 6100 GENIbus 0 PIN via 6100

,,,,...........,,,..(,...._...".__...,...._..../...,..., ...,,,,_.......-1/4.__.,...._...,___,......,./......(,,,___ , a C X - P 2 NEW 1PR REXON 220 Swit c,boa,d - V,Pl. GEN:b...,s Pump Egy Pump 2 GENlbus - Pump?

X-03 NEW ,p. REXON 820 Sw,hbcard - 142( ',.::: \ ,.,,, Pp Er:, Pp 3 GEN!Dus - Pcmp3

C X -P L NEW (PR REXON 820 Sw Ichboaro - 221 G', N Duo Pump Box Pump L GENibus - Pl,rnp.".

I-PIN NEW 1PR Vendor Switchboa,0, - MP: Su( no Pressure I raosmitler Suctco Pressure

(-POUT NEW Vendor SwilcnDca-ci - MP( Delivery Pressure I ransmit ter Delivery Pressure

iPM.(3-1 NEW Vendor Vendor S..;thboa'd - 110,r,2F ' ,.. Flowmeer Delivery I 3,....--el er

(FM-0-2 NEW Vendor Vendor Swiic',Pearo - F IC...me' er ;:. Flowmeer 71. en;

X01 NEW COAX RG52. Sw:;chboard - RADIX Sm:thboard - Surge Diverier SO? l o t ,

X02 NEW COAX RG213 Switchboara - SURGE IVER I ER 582 Switchboard - Antenna '-,c ReAp 0'1 ee,, (Eer.e"

X03 NEW CPR SCR LAIN Swi;(nboard - R I; Switchbpard - Rad.o 'ric ReC

,.........11-"--Nr--4,'Arhelr.--,,,,,....-N,..--...,4

X05 NEW

" / . P R . SCR CA16 S.,:itchboai-c: - Rid Swikhboard - G100 1'.0( `...'' 2 )

1/

NOTE:

1 ; 'HE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE IN DE ERMINING THE

A,..;Al -.A.ELE LENGTHS REQUIRED ON SITE

2 512 MASS CABLE FOR !ENG n OF CABLE PUN 'ROM ENEGEX POINT OF SUPPLY TO SWITCHBOARD

3 CAC. C . TINGTHS TO BE MARKED UP ON AS BUB I S

Sheet 11

ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION

C 11602/091 RE-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 01.6.4 1 AW A 105/081 REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 DPAI AW 0 109.081 I S.S FCDFL -ren.upal !DPMI No] DATE I AMENDMENT I ()RN. I APO.

FUNDING

DESIGN W.O. No.

CONSTRUCTION W.O. No.

FUNDED BY B.C.C. (r) EXTERNAL ( )

DRAFTED F..IVIOstart DRAFTING CHECK H.1-1 g u es

CAD FILE 4900132se1_A.dwg

B.C.C. FILE No.

Original Signed by A.WIttholt 8895 04/07/2008

DESIGN R.P.E.O. No. DATE

Original Signed by R.Janlada 04/07/2008

DESIGN CHECK R.P.E.O. No. DATE

Original signed by F.Foinaslar 04/0712008


Original signed by P.Sherriff 04/0712008

CLIENT DELEGATE DATE

2 3 4 5 6 7 a "T- 9 lo

BRISBANE

WATER

SITE

VV 13 0 8 7 'T C:1 C3 I-1 V FID WATER BCD0s-ratR.

TITLE CABLE SCHEDULE

SHEET No. 11


486/4/9-0082-011 AMEND.

C

11

GAISa WATER SUPP268 Draleng16248 Lans1Ele,,,,W. WATERWEIWEBRAmB082 7.h., R.Cons.c6.4900823 t_C.dwa Last Saved by 062870 an Friday. 20 FebNary 2009 2.2748 PM

12 13 14 15 16

A

Rb

DI

E

N

.! I

CT

N

XC



2 3 4 5 7 a 10 11 12 13 14 15 18

I T E M 9 I OPT: DESERT. P'ION LABEL T LABE: 1 S. 3 IP NE(ESSARXI i Ey i -ETD,' MA-ETRIAL / FOTOUR I ITEM. 9 OT , DESERTPTTON LABE, LABEL 71 3 oF RYT TEXT TTEIGHT MATE:AA. / EVES

07 ENERGE X SURF, X NORMAL SUPPE . MAIN S WIT (1 ,Elm o T.TAFFOL' T:

33/5//5

lOrtm 1,,ArFo: Y 1 a

55 ALL PUMPS STOP PUSHBUT TON STOP ALL PUMPS

r x -EDA AL LABE,_ '

1,---","--",---'4./11-,----N./-11',"---N../-1-`,"--"xj-Th./Th4;"--N.,--N.K-1-NK---------N/1-,.."Th.----Ns."--\,--",,,

03 GLNERATOR LIPPE . MAIN SSATCH

GENERATOR SURPt X TPLATTEOLYTE

trur,

OA i BOOS i ER RUMP No i

PUMP CIRCUIT BREAKER

.9/W/6 Li. iIIAEFOLYIE . ,. ABEI

1 ;E:(' if XI RANT FILL Si °D-

. I

riTi3Hi LEI TERAD

A 7 PUMP CIRCUIT BREAKER BOOS IFP PUMP No 7

Ot tcc IRAFFDLYIE Lc, W/B/W

I A I WEO.E1 70mm DIA, ISOT.ES 1 I

1 1

Ot 3 I AT RUMP CPC TAT BREAKER BOOSTER PUMP No 3

OS

L nm TRAFROL,TE

tror, W/E/W O. . gil1 TOrr.H. SOT20

OT. t AC PUMP CIRCUIT BREAKER BOOSTER PUMP-No.

05

LAA TRAFFOLYTE lOrom DIA, 10079 '

04 S A; G I WABSM, C

Emm

THIS SPE IS MCAPORE' XTT T KORK ETEN-ROL

Olt, 7SELTCO : 2

7 : PmASE FAILURE CI 4-(1:11 BREAKER

E SW BO DPOs CIRCA i BRE AKEP

Ph ASE FAILURE 1 DC POWER SUPPLY

OE

SWOLD G90

09

Lam IRAFFaylE PLEASE INFORM 'T-P. OPERA-OR ETTORE ISOLA TiNG PUMPS OR STATION I

Lr,,m W/DTPA'

TRAFFOLYTI

trnm W/SPA'

3 I PLEASE (HEE! TmAT P-E E-47:EEN S IN REm.OTE no: 1 z.,,,, "LIFO PE \Mt:15F. I.:A

El4E, POTS7 I i

9 SARA LIGHTING (IPLEUTT BREAKER SWO.D LIGHTING 1RAFFOLXTE

0.10

LfIlm

Unrn /B/W W

1

I

) T)

A PUMP BOX FLOODED REL AY LP LW' T RAFFOIXIE

W/E/W i

17 RUMP 60-Z SU PUMP (11,-(Gli BREAKER PuMP BOX SUMP RUMP TRAFFOLYTE

MP isrom W/E/W

1

T.-...- %.4.L..-KST....../-./%-..-..-'...--- ....--TAx..-.."..--/..-.--- ....-....--"\-...."...-....-/ .-../ -1.x..-1...."7...--/ :1/4-.--../1/44..-HK.-.../%4.-../.........,..._...." H : MAN SW.-TEHT.S. lErom Bit:, i ---1

17'7,70

SPARE tom IPTAFOLYIE T T. SPARE CIRC Uti EREAKER

Elit Amm W/D/W 19 STAITCHEOARD LIGHTIND ELONTROL FONT A( TOR LC! tom

TRATTEFOL Xi: DTSIRD'u:TEN TEDARG ier:o. DIxe-. 150,25 :

I ii FIRE MODE CELE( TOR STAIICH EIRE MODE LP,

THArrul f IL

W/E/ST:

.

1

7t AV POWER SOPA'. WM '1 : V POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER

070 tan TRAFFOLXTE

TyPE/W 332 STATION LOCAL /REMOTE SELECTOR SWITCH (ON TROL MODE

TRAFF-Ot Y1E tr....m

W/E/W ,

T T PE COWTT:OT SW': 10, EAR, ISO. 70 I -

TE : SURD:- DIVERT EP RR AY CIRCUIT 'BREAKER SURGE DIYERTER RELAY

0.71

tcm TRAFFOIXTE

'416/W

:

EPATPT NE- "O:-.-, . ' OLN C

1

1 ET, 120,20 T A

GRUDFOS API o GUN RVOS APE CIRCUIT BREAKER

N

077

Istur

LMM

TRAFFOL Xil

PIANOS GTOO 70 : GRUM:T:0S GM oh'cula BREAKER

073

trin LLIM

TRAFFVYTE

.10E/W ES DELIVERY FLOWMETER TR.ANSMII TER OELtypix ELOWME TER tom

1RASFOLYTE

W/E/W M

1 SuPPL, A.,:-CR'i" ME L39NE TO,' :31.30, ne:.7o

N DANDER T.:59 1 10mc

!

Poo TOOT7C I 1

0 , DANGER . i SOGRE.ES OF S5PR: X I Cr ,n NON I

720,7E

:

I 1

i

I

I

E X i ERNA. i ABE.S. ic.c. 11-ITH :TA GPADE STAINLESS STEEL .

ETXED WITH mT 3"; 51 MOSS STEEL ME I Al THREADS

SURGE DIY:PIER FUSES 75 SURGE DIVERT:ER FUSES

S'A TED NOM LAE S'OE

n, mAN ,,w ri-, Ian IdIrl

TRAFFOLXit

W/B/W . R/W/R

93 RTUALOVAE/AVE POWf q SUPI.V %LVY.

'4ER CM^

DETAIL 0

IRA:PG:YEE 3: SURGE DIVERTERS TIGHTWAD ARRESTORS /cc P.A. TOL X T C

, .

. SURGE DIVERTER ALARM. RELAY LOAN LIMM

LMM

i "1 Af Fa (II W/E/S/

9, TEL EME TRY AR T PT Am

37 STURGE ALA '1 F IL iER PITJ 5UmGE

REDU( FIL TER

ton 4mm

' !',AfF01.Yif W/R/W

95 E RAVE C VI T3 EVOL SONVERTER i.r./.? 'la

CONVERTER RAG 0

LMM TRATrOLYTE

tr.H. W/E/5/

0 ,

ION -- - ' " 4'79TuKT-T.",',9'1,L70

''''' "'6,,,&'.:4,-- - ',=,' ,a-';',.4:::,:frtrpc '''.1- .,!!----,.,-:::: -';',5-,-'- ' PHASE E Alt UP.: RELAY

S1A 1 ION

IL

MAINS

POWER FA - PERS

IRA'FrayiE tmm NAV; 97 54E1E0 FuTT:TRx A tn., TRAFF-01 X I E

e Tr. '''R T

c :::0

Vs ,

.

SE MO DEM TRAFFOL YEE 0 A i ,

-t- ''...-.,..

_I

100 E RADIO TRAF/W FOL Y if .' ,. .7., . ,,...,

.,-.' . *.

W/E fra.i4t.a.... Y2,41; ,.. :-R. ,1. , , ...-4.4 ..2.,--...5-11%-",:. .r.F......,k,..."47,14=i--Atl'

... A N N NEUTRAL LINK

35 MAtti EARTH LINK

MAIN NEUTRAL

MAIN EARTH

tom

tr.

IRIIIPOLYii 'AVB/W

i RAFE-01.9i(

5//03PN

IN E RADIO COAX SURGE PRATE( I ION RAH S,RET: RRVL: ' c.,N ismm IR AFFOLX1E

_ ...

W//W

IS::: "Li4l. :Tt

5'. TNS IRUMENT EARTH LINK INSTRUMENT EARTH tom TRAFFOLYTE

W/B/W

:- ;TERI D SUPPLY 0(010/A LNK Fit ! X ERE° 5UPPL

NEUTRAL

I lam Limn

TRAFEOCNE

'4 IL:ISS

ILL.T;

;

- -,:- .., .

. . P :AP 10GPO LAPTOP GPO ONLY TRAFEO LYIE

. ' DENERAIOR POWER COME; ilON SOCK: i GENERATOR

MANE( liOH

5co. 5mm

i RAFFDLY i E

W/E/51 TERM:NAL HEADER

R'o RVET.RT /gr.. 1,ATTFOL X It Lrom CITY COLJIACIL TERMINAL H;ADER

DE'A \RCS tmrr

I

1RAFFOLYTE

tr,m : 5//E/W BRISBANIE

IERMAAL TTEADEP VS -4::---3.-S. LMm IRL::OVIE

NAL HEAD CP.

po,::::: No._ 's 4 '

Lmr,

tram

",,AFFCI.YIE

I 5//8/14' Phone

iETio

4'111111 II1/2'1 3403 8888 L

.. ' RUMPS EMS-PG STOP RELAY ESA tmoi

IT RAFF00TE

:. r=cM R RE PS MANUAL AN ANY MProm UN t T RAF FoLyiE

Sx'/B/W 3 L _. A' j- SA.'ETY SIGN - DANGER EI ECTR L AL F_OUIPMENT el(

HE AC E3 LABEL Ilmiomer Sec imr.1 mEN BT-N: S

TRAFEOL Xi: W/E/W 280x.90..(i--- ,. / .d.rnrn FIXING HOLES) A LUNIm,v RCWOLTR COATED WHIT:

HEADER L AO.:EL iM.ANSioicA SeLiTor:1 woo.: EN, R' R .S.....:::-V.: Scm i RAFFOI 'NE

W/E/Vi SCREEN PRINTED - AN! .i-F;AF : T I , 'MIN A I E

HEADER LABEL TABore (coo Brea1ers) 12 \ -T -R. : /,,,,

5Tmem

TRAFEOLXIE

APIA I R-.-E :SSUED BY BW TO SWF., YA \_'/AL 1 UREP, . _

HEADER L Ar:f I. !Above (coo Breaers) Emm

ErEPT

TRAFF01. YEE

W/EPK

" Sheet 12 I ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION

C 16/02/09 RE-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION I DPM I AVV FUNDING DRAFTED IF. . INA ost.art Odginal Signed by A.Winhoft 8895 04/07/2008

DESIGN RP.E.O. No. DATE

Original signed by F.Fomasier 04/07/2008

PRINCIPAL DESIGN MANAGER DATE i

i7/ Y.-, '-j '-'

MIIIA6 BRISBANE

SITE W13087 -I- C30 I-1 El' RID VViajr FL Boos-raiR

TITLE SWITCHBOARD LABEL SCHEDULE

SHEET N. 12

R. _F-1 a g ._, 0 . . _ _ _ _

A 05/08 REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION I DPM I AVV DESIGN W.O. No. -r DRAFTING CHECK BRISBANE WATER DRAWING No. I AMEND.

486/4/9-0082-0121 C Odginal signed by P.Sheoiff 04/070008

CLIENT DELEGATE DATE

0 :09.013 I S.S Li EC:. F OR TE Ni ID 88 Fz 1 DPM CONSTRUCTION W.O. No.!

,

CAD FILE 490082selA.dwg Original Signed by R.Jantada 04/070008

DESIGN CHECK FtP.E.O. No. DAlEj,.. nil DATE AMENDMENT I DEN. I APD. FUNDED BY B.C.C. (a') EXTERNAL ( ) B.C.C. FILE No. " ..A. A.

2 3 4 7 8

GAI94 WATER SUP1,268 00104916248 161666,64616063 WMERWERV0R169/W8007 760662 6.6C6661.666.6490062611..C.dw9 1.611 Saved by 002670 on Friday. 20 FaMvary 21:09 2:27411 PM

9 I 10 11 12 13 I

14 15 16



B

C

H

2 3 4 5 8 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 18

CONS..;( 2]ON

in-tie constrvlior. :577 Marine grade Alum efbm if32511

Pin tic onsrroc on 200)60 c narnel 5061 26 (fade Amoinium

oclded -Pulse NIG 0 -2(6 weided with all visible seams and joints f illy welded

free from sptatt er are ground smooth woe-e needed

erna! GM'S and tofees fit fed won Emka 102.1-207 self grip seal

' D. rfandles f.tted where ,nclicated or 2'ne osaw,ngs

NS Earth studs fIxed to the int ernor Cl Ell doors and htnged escutcheons

and on adacent cubicle .nt crier surf aces

Door in f f Priers. door stays. cable straps and co(-men; hofders or fittea

acorn snow, on no drawings

Door stif f eners to Pe S/Steel and of sutfqent $'-enoln to prevent being

def ormed when subjected to reasonable toads Min.nun 3mm S/St eel

Ltf -0`f (Oyer S and mot,,nimig panes fixed with ME stuos 0 nrome acorn nut s

Gland ;oldies manulac lured iron Onto Bakelite

bland plate openings rent arced with 25xlirrim fla; aluminum bar (De ad F

Cable glands to be fitted with compression scte installed w!thin cubicle On a,, Gl

bland plate seals at tached to cubicle not gland plate

Gland plate tomes are 001 more than 100 fir apa-'

Oland prates are NOI o be split

f)rovide Shrouding so all fee parts to IP70 where regL CO r

Humeri fexternall Seiectrix H15500ss- 326. Stainiess S-ee.

Star washers lulled under all none screws

00000 eSruirneons i xed with Enka 1/0 'u-rt 21,00 u1.2

Doors 2 0.3

Dif-ak Swing Handle 207-9295 St a:n.ess See.

Select nx 1107.U123 (pi cam

2.0C,wood 71 bard l Lomb

Enika 20=9-03 roller rod

4ey (odes DOOR 1 P.(095A. DOOR 3 76=96A0

Doors ?

Seiectr.x Swing Handle 1101-SSC1-326 Stainless See.

Seiec t 2107-0123 (Xi can

Inca 2009-2:3 roller rod

ENE 01:20X paolock =5min brass pin humbler KPY SoIlS

DPER02tNG PARAMETERS

St rdard OS .i=39

:prrert I. Frequency Al `Al-

P.ated Operational Voltage De L'S hAl

Paloa ion Voltage Or 660 V

Rai ad Auxiliary Voltage e 210 VA: / 71. VD(

rirl: eel Current (Main Bus) .f,oc ANDS

Snort C.r(aa Current 1st 57 a0

D,raion of 1st 2 sec

Degree of Protection 3510 AS 2939

Measure of Protection by barriers

and enclosures

Service ion/ens Z., doors

Nass Sr or leer, rfg 2000,g

6orms of Segregation Form

Ea-thing System T0-5

A indent 1 emperat ure =VI Ma:,

PAINTING

Al...minium Surf ace Preparation

rem smooth all exposed welds, clean, des.caie, eon deg-ease an swrf aces

Surf aces pretreatment in accordance with AS 2S60 0 AS 371S. us,no

Novox. CF acid etch cleaner, Novacoat 12 crvars on cea' -g 6 c.ea- ,%2SeS

Apply DULUX ALPHA TECH 3000 powder :oaf to -nanbf ac'L-e- s ecc-,re.at one

1001112 0 E X i ERNAL COMPONENTS S - DULlA L'ee, :366A11 Ire" `," so

'N'i:R!C;R 11(MS (mounting panels, esculct,ecns et; 2 1..; E-.7' W- l322501

mi,..num Dry ;Ara thickness all surfaces 50 mar ore

C '1502,09I RE-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 10PM AW/I A I05/08I REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION OPM1.4 AW DESIGN W.O. No.

o 109.081 isst_sec) Fc)Ft -rniuDeFt. ilDPM

Not DATE, AMENDMENT ORN. APO.

At 17 u NO

Alf wring me be PVC VS0 0i0 0/do brace with tinned conductor

(or mci and ifisiremeeIe,on w.roG,oas ilerrpIe copper (ender %ore, and is :my rodeo as deladed beloc numbered each end and terminated by Ian use of

appropriate pre-insulated crimp lugs or ens

Separate lugs or pins shall be used me each c enduci or

Not more than ;we wires snail be connected 20 any ; ermmal

Not more lhan one wire shah be connected 00 or-*' side of any tunnel type I ern;nal

Wnere multiple connections are required on tit-2ne1 'emit-lats. proprnet Cry ermnal

u/-s shall be used

, Power wiring to be minimum 2 Ssomm stranded copper conductors, phase

colour coded as detailed below

Control wiring to be minimum 10sqmati flexible copper conduc tors,


Low level control signals to be roinirrliffn 0 Ssgmm flexible copper conauc 'ors


= -20mA analog sIgnals On; ernat 0 external! wren in snielded Gain minimum site 0 5sgmr6,

overall screened, and earthed ai one end only

All 200VAC IerrielatS Inc at ed ;r, roe RID or PLC set lions snail 00 sni-ouded and iane;fed

- Danger 200002'

Earth cables minimum 2 5sgrnm iexib.e

Doors and hinged escutcheons bonded w2th =sorom flex.Ple earth strib

Wire numbering will be equal 'o brafop,ast 512000 system

Wire numbers are readable of; mc r,20 '001:010 10100 as

Color 01 00 wiring beyond final f use/l.,1, to be Grey

= 2222

1-1

LOLOUR CODE

Phase wiring (AD 1.C1

Potential Melertnq (MA i5 VAC)

Current Metering (Secondary!

200 VAC Control Active

200 VAC Neutral

2= VDC Positive supplies

20 VDC Negative supplies

20/21 Wiring (Diner than supplies) C-ey

Red Wrlite. Ewe

Red White, Blue, Black

Red Wh,;e. Dlue, Grey

Red

Black

0-ange

Violet

RID 2. PLC Wiring

Elec trode Wiring

Intrinsically sale wiring

Eartn

Door 0 Escutcheon Earth Bonds

brey

Saimon

BloP

cl:erlYe110.4

L'eer/Yet,o,

LABELS

Internal labels W/B/W engraved t-a`f o;yte :0 ciii21 schedule

Warnmg labels R/W/R engraeed to.yte

Main swilch labels

Pump CO labels

Compartment labels

Warning labels

mAIN 20rorn

100A 4- 0mm

2 Ssomm (min;

i Ss:pm

2 Swim

iOsomm

20somm

lOsomm

2 °vitro Osdrm

O Ssernm

I Osomm

Sulfur)

25sonrn lirin;

5.Girel

Material (rat fele': Colour B/W/E'

PUMP Nol D" Material Iraf f °hie

(20 1- 'ma Colour W/B/W'

lOiren Material Stainless Scpt

L'5V t Material irarroi,:o (Clete- R/W/R

r:,01361 0.50 5,(mm te

Internal labels secured by 613 crrc--e pla,eo "eta! threads

CB's to be identif led won platy-dual .aoe,s as per label schedule

Labels obstructed d by swtichboof d w.r.ng re relocated to adjacent duc

Labels secured by 113 nylon ;needs The duct lid is secured by a s '.e a one corner

External labels secured by M.', ess steel metal threads

FUNDING DRAFTED

2 3

CONSTRUCTION W.O. No.I

FUNDED BY B.C.C.

I P. rVi <>stoat rt Original Signed by A.WItthoft

DRAFTING CHECK DESIGN

8895 04/07/2008 Original signed by FFornasier 04/07/2008 \ R.P.E.O. No. DATE

,ERM2NAL 01 00-1 i I l

01000

[7QrIl!h1117111111-,//; r71111111(AMC,,,(z.,,Arr77/7:\/.01111,A,

NPLUG 2

iERNINAL BLOCK IERKNAL BL06.K 3 I I

I .1 1 11.1 ! TT w7:% H 11 11 IFITH !

0000 3 N PLUG L / RTU DiSCONNECT PLUGS CODING

PIN CODING DE I AILS

L=72

0

-Li

DETAIL M

SU3-LIS R.BUTION BOARD

ARRANGEMENT V

CA!) FILE I 490082set_A.dwg

EXTERNAL ( ) J,B.C.C. FILE No.

4 5


DESIGN CHECK

7


04,07rz00e Original signed by P.Showiff 04/07/2008

R.P.E.O. No. DATE LIENT DELEGATE BRISBANE

TE

8 9 10

r

0,0Pr.wIL SwePLO1 IGEwEro IC; SuPero' :owoo, SwITO, y.,N SW Ca

,

o FLowmETER

"PC

61

)

Lj Sn-dud behind

`.11 ?,F own ;

C

HIWICHEON LAYC,'

DETAIL S


WI3087 1-001-1EY RID A/p.TEF IBCDC:is-r-

TITLE SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCTION NOTES & DETAILS

SHEET No. 13

BRISBANE WATER DRAWING No. AMEND,

486/4/9-0082-013: C 0,1194 WATER SuPP126a Ormning16248 Fiaw0Ele0004.3. WATERWETWORKSWV006) Toolwy RdConswci00i490082.1C.Wog Lest Saved by 062670 01 Cr/day. 20 Faim.aw 2039 2:25,4 RIA

12 13 14 15 18



A

B

C

Io

E

F

G

H

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 13 14 15 16

DCCR

0 0

CUD Et E

z Door Sea ErnOa 1011-001 (POD Set' C3rD Spa]

DETAIL A

I DOOR SE ALI

Corn DaH.r.un- Sun Sneld Snnsbe,000r-ereOAusVR

CREOLE

crV Al .:0.v,, DOSS mImI aHernal Enread ME

MC r 35 Ysteet But ion Head Sooner Screws 1/. 3,6 Siii eel sorm; B (tam (05,01

Seudely ,Pla DOSS in; o pos,Hon

Nc:e Sc. ews Ale 001 o penetrate cubcIe metalwork

DETAIL B

(SUN SHIELD MUNI INCE ID SIDES, REAR AND DOORS)

(e---

e"--",---,"--- -..., \

V----- e----,-,1---, 0.---",.1" ---,1---,er---- I",..e","","--'ee-",e-","----

( . I ..,,rloozrd Cucicle

( I

II

:611n, n 1661660ab6

( ( ( ( ( i _ - AiLm.rEarn En,' in (me cnated wiln

Etu-nas, ( FEED C 0 2I i a, Ecor} or

Goner eqoat :01 bum', surf ace

tole-an %a;er;roof D,IR f I i, coanng

( ..----"'---(

- Neop-ene GasNel

7 I

60, .tde 'X 3f=ra thrr all ro,nc

AionnAlro Champ; (Par; No 6161 161

11010 down bco, 00P cc, inernal tom, :'

caw 50,50 square ca. washers

PLINTH

DETAIL El

;PE INi (-1 FIXING DETAIL)

_ if C 0,0e

saa,

$. arof a,'-' no 000m

..3_ 3'53/sfeai saode

r

I I

.rtnt.T.FT.

DETAII N

(A:PAl. SUi-PORT BRA1.61E HASPS DPILLEI.:

IA3

id) apRt,

n'd So100l stre,

spat r,

Ordl Bao `ff., 3,5 sf0,00 buttcn hearf sure, stre, IL ..z,ers

NE VU,oeo.at;rrnoe ,a,er

3005 S/S DAR IdA66P

POUNDED TOP END I WELDED TO (OVER

i70,i2OrDEPTHai 6 S/S (OVER

9:NuED TO CUBICLE VIA BLOCS PINiCI VASES

DEPTH 90nn FOR GEN INLE

DE=i3i 50=== FOR FIRE SWITCH

i

17

/1

IC SW' C! A. SE.;

)

:q,5 A. 6:A.',. -1,50 ) BOUNDED I(0 IA- : %.

WLE2 .0 ;.',:.' ) ) - - \ - 3 )

DETAIL F-2

SwIft i DEN INLET - HINGED DADLOCKAOL)

SUNROOF

2 OFF MEx20 S/S BA; ION HO SCREWS, DIAGONALLY OPPOS.TE

CUBICLE AtX

.

)

) )

1 )

Fl I 1 r---1

) , 1----!

3,

PLINTH ) ) )

DETAIL 6 ) ICABLE GLAND INSTALLATION OL I AiLl

) )

(tool Ai 61,1mora Sc Roof slopmg from f rorf on rear

Ii

( t

iS 61 Atun rorn boss ( cer,a1101ernal'tNeead ME

'60xSO,E,mm Alurntnium atnqj, posiiion

DETAIL C

ISO ROOF 110100 D C I AU TOFU MF,x2e S/S BUi iON ND DIAGONALLY OPPOSIIE)

Note Svews are 'lei 10 0105105 1001111 fneRlwor'..

6 0` f ME. S/S 11101 screws

CISM Ani pool

SWITCHBOARD

M20 f hreaGee 25rm plpe utty Sea! we!c;eP SWE.

20ince PVC Cable Gland

DETAIL X

IGSM AN)ENNA MOUNTING DETAIL)

Doc, :HE finer

,Va'0' 000, 5, 'free

frfrqr

105

L__ Hinge

MD/DO S/S E°CBOLS O'0EE0NA.: OPROSIEE

/B\ Floor

..e2t

Ti 0.10:116

I

CUBICLE

VT

Droll =4 loam//n hole on ;op Con, (ucHle C angle

Alommum Son Roof storrIng Iron Iron; 12 rear

iOrC.0,Carra Alorman Angle ...eloed 0,0 roostflon

,c) p.55 :Karat Inrernal threaci MI

26, ;Eta' e

welled 1005510 Drava-, Ingress of ,2t,r

DETAIL D

EYE DOLT F,XINC, DEE I A E. 2 OFF M3:20 s/s DIAGONALLY OPPOSIIE

(REPLACE EYEBOLTS WITH M8y.S0 s/s DUE TON SCREWS Al SFIEI

- (Orlinuous seal

Inspei3011 pla'e 6,7 / CE.5 CEE '.1--II II

1 11J , it 22

I 'C...% Reinf °tong Dar 25,1061, I

ian ,ong 6000 0 11

DE

(010 LA?' SL))),)CT. Sr-ELF)

_ Weld bar irao cosoion M6 21 316 S/steel Cu; or ^ea:, Drrenn

cfri 316 Simeel Ha; 'washe6 securing Insp.?: ion pia; r at 110,..ne'va.s

Note Screws are not to penetrate re,nfor(,g Par

DETAIL F

(INSPECTION PEACE 110100 DE I Ar.:

Door sHifner

.S.u0D0r, 5101110

reed 005,1.00

) Y

==.1.0

Oil able glands tnsralled ern =Dress!. Seal 102,e0 war, ,a EUDICIF

SUN SENELD

1REFEP OEIAIL 51

0/ I

NJ\ Si' i9

I , I

SI

DETAIL K

10000 SUN SHIELD B E E APJ

50

All 3rnm neoprene clone' wee7. ;11,-h E. Eleggel

1111005 316 s/steEt r ' %. 1.0110 washers)

DL /\,

(AERIAL FLANGE \ ' NE. I


C 118s 2A91 RE-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1DPA4 1 AVV FUNDING DRAFTED R . \./Ictst4st rt Original Signed by A.Winnoft 8895 04/070008 Original signed by F.Fornasier 04/07/2008

A 105/081 REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DPM 0RW DESIGN W.O. No. DRAFTING CHECK p. g R.P.E.O. No. DATE PRINCIPAL DESIGN MANAGER DATE

No! DATE1

0 109.081 ISSLJEID FOR TEN IDE IR

AMENDMENT

DPM CONSTRUCTION W.O. No.! CAD FILE 490082set_A.dwg Original Signed by FLJanfada

DESIGN

04/07/2008 Original signed by P.Sherriff 04/07/2008w,itgeght aruss7wa

I DRN. APDAFUNDED BY B.C.C. (.1 EXTERNAL ( ) A13.C.C. FILE No. DESIGN CHECK FLP.E.O. No. DAI.A. CLIENT DELEGATE DATE

SITE VV 0 8 7 -r4c cp Ft. ID vv,ocrei BcDos-rcFt

2 3 4 6 7 9 10 11

TITLE SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCTION DETAILS

SHEET No. 14

BRISBANE WATER DRAWING No. I AMEND,

486/4/9-0082-014 C 9. WATER SUPP,266 Ekena,0248 lansEbtIntelaWAMRWEIWORKSIWB087 Toohey RenConstrucearM90062set_C.0+.0 Last Saved by 002670 Or1 Friday. 20 February 2009 2:27.00 PM

12 13 14 15 16

A

D



A

:0

E

F

'1H

300

300030.50 BATTERY (OXPAP.ITIENT ENEERNAITY DENIED

WITT. i NTETTNAL INTEL i S.F.P11010 VENT

(Pe ISOTETO LID INSGE cua.ca OLIR;10.210 le 6,SKF.1:0 S/S S(PEN F040 AT T00 CEPS

5 7 8 9 10 12 I 13 14 15 16

RADO

)

E-0

) ) ) 0

FRONT /\\ ) DOOR REMOVED

)

RHS PANEL

B )

C°

2

P

AN 111NNA LONE 1050) DAL MAS:. LAE ',AP q": COAX

FABLE & SUPPLIED ODSE 'UR R

HiiED ON SITE

IL LI L. __44441441++1. rri,

9 NiR041. SUPPOPT

ANAL-LIES 3001+" ,EN Pit5L A

E

DEIAL. N

L ONE. PSI JNION .ANTISEn ON Aii iNPEADS

:ONE, El DOTE

AERIAL F AN0i

Di TAR P -

A

ER

C:== T =5

DE TAIL 0

I

LAPTOP SUPPORT SHELF

WORKKG HEIGHT OF 1010.Pc

(LOU/LAO INSIDE DOOR

MEER DETAIL HI

SUN SHIELD

IREEEP DETAIL DUI

DO A AG POE T

270H.EFF,E00

FRONT

00.30 PSI DU(

HE

L EI

NOTES P5( SHE

REAR

DOOR [SLUE AEON REMOVED

SUNROOF FIXING Z REFER DETAILS & D

AT-71

TL-T" \.-..."

MI

J

000P i ..f.Y RC iSgE.

H = NI

IT

II '

-TT T

T

I i I

0

DETAIL a

DL I All F

SUN SHTELD

liTiFEPT TX 'Alt DIEU

J.---.....-

...........,-..." ̀.-.. -../-..--..">"----."".-T"

-

i T

''''.--,

IT

M 1

,,,o

Ili} r

REAR

DOuDle P.Pgeu -

: . 1 il.TH 11: TiP . Y'er."'N'er-;-7:4I' Lib'

. ENERCHN

T----1 P

(."-,,----,j8 1

d

i

;GTE. MOOS SMILE:

RIGHT SIDE VIEW

DOOR E SUN SHIELD REMOVED

0

_

u0OD 1 LNE ,GE .L PNOLOcf. II

LE= n = DL TAN T3

SUN ST-'410

107E5 ELFIN DS.TT

DOOR E PEED TOE'

'd LUTE SW

d DETAIL R

I

= 1 = DETAIL C

OiTA110. C P = = N =

i

1

1 GEN PM T 1,

TT OITATT P

I

7E:0

) )

1. ) / ) ) ) ) ,,,,,..,,:,- .71 ) 1

,

) --- -1---,

. ) ..:1

)

'.---(

)

IPEFiP CIPIT iii

,..!,

PF

SUN Erilli)ITLIN6

(.../

(L

c........t. M II ) (

( ( )

) ._..."-.....,,--, '... r. '..,S) A A A

0: I ATT

EN= I

C _

Ii

F

L

'Ft= rY.3.7.117-E. ) )

)

) L_

11=-7;

) I

ESCUTHEON LAYaL:7

T ii . M V, (APE

:LEL T 0, ANT: Ha 15 - 6A0.15INSPEEIIONCFES 110 1/1 CYER Y41E10(01011

(0iF0P Di I Alt i

ocoR C C C c,* Cocc 0 C

.c..coCe

SEC- C\ 3 :3

) 77) 1_ ;75_

) ) _

)

RIGHT SIDE VIEW

C 0 C C C C CT C

C 0 0 CC C C C

S- 0T>

,,i

.ET, 4. PT Li ..4 .4

.' ,.), ,1 c

/14 Fe. Fi ...., ....

.,.. e; (

<

,/

$ 0'''' , '' \'''''

( 4'' ' / <

(........ COCCOCCC .S'.'4:.' ''''.9.'' \09.S'(P;'..'.' 'cl\

CCOCCCCC )

(.

(

CABLE ETR _LO- ) ( (.

NY P PEPE= Di TAIT 0 )

NI"' ,,-...., ''''-" ',..--, ,,-....,,A._.,,,-",..-.."


C 050201 RE-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 DPM A" FUNDING DRAFTED

. .

A 05/081 REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 DPM 1 AW DESIGN W.O. No. DRAFTING CHECK

oi09.081 ISSUED c:,Ft -ren,c) 1 DPM CONSTRUCTION W.O. No. CAD FILE

Noll DATE1 AMENDMENT 1

DRN. APD."FUNDED BY B.C.C. (/) EXTERNAL B.C.C. FILE No.

2 - 1 3 4 5

P. NA rz. stirs. rt Original Signed by A.VArthoft 8895 04/07/2008 Original signed by F.Fomasier 04/07/2008

u es DESIGN FLP.E.O. No. DATE PRINCIPAL DESIGN MANAGER DATE i

490082Set_A.dwg Original Signed by R.Jardada 04/07/2008 Original signed by P.Shernff 04/07/2008 hp m i ,---

eFuseme I..DESIGN CHECK R.P.E.Q. No. DIIE..,..CLIENT DELEGATE DATE

6 7 8 ' 9 10

SITE

VS/13087 1-001-16V 1=21:1

vviccrEIR. BaDCDs-raFt

11

TITLE

SWITCHBOARD GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

SHEET No. 15


486/4/9-0082-015 C .i\

.11. WATM SO.. 0.1.011. PY.Elealalia WATOWIETWOMIVIION7 ro:Iwy lithComina.2.800151.L.C.Ag Law 11.. try 06270 en ibay. 20 Few, 709 277,1.8 %hi

12 13 i

14 '

15 16

A

C

E

F

G

CO

H

c'ser

a

ft; I

CO

A



B

C

D

E

F

H

n

2 3 4 5 8 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 I

18

NOTE

CONDUITS =OR ELEC'R,C AL C ES S-TALL BE

'ORANGE' AND OP -E,H1RC C;RADE

2 CONDUITS FOR P-ONE L,NE (ABLE SHALL BE PVC

"WHITE" COLOR ADJROVED BY ir_S"--Z A

EXISTING .FLO,A,ME'ER SENSCR

C-

1N;ENNA ACRE 4A; BAST, t(INEUA (AP, (AR; SE AND :CA>: (AEI; S

SVPPLIZE LOOSE EY SAND IIANVAC IUSES B "LEL: DAN

'\EIVLLY VOL TED ID CONCR: IL S, AD

ANCHOR EDE TS S SO SD GAL WAS"ERS -- ONE PER INTERNAL CORNER C.

REFER SAT TA DEAR E"

MAIN CABLE PIT

'ACCI CABLEMATE

(NW LOCAELF.

SCORE OF NEW WORK

, c - PO,A'ER - "x"CO (jPVC GRANGE)

/- c- --- INS1R - ixiTO IUPVC GRANGE) CONDUITS )--..---,-,--....---\ SWE0 TO cuMR BOX APPROX SE M )---- ,-

,-,--, (5 2500 x 1500 x 2501HK ).-...)

GRADE ;-C, ..",_,N,.:,- r- (5

CONCRETE PL'N' -.. ) c- c-

c- ( i

) c- / C-c-c

c- (.. ) --------..,,,,.,....,.

1: I- )

(rc- ( ) ( ( 1 r 1.)

,,,,X//

( I )-. / 7/ ( -- CA I )

ING

REMOVE EXISTING RTU g BASE

.....- ) EXIST1NC:

EXIS' (

l L 1 )) wE0,93

). SWITCHBOARD ) ) ( '

I i e-,-," I C

LOCATED CENTRALLY REMOVE 'I\>) wE30;i7 ) L.L. . \

c OVER SWE CABLE PC

) ) ( )

\ ( ) (

( ) (

( 1 1

( ) 1500 1 ) POwER - IxE0 luP.,-(....oR,ANGE)

( 1 ASIR - "x25 IUPVC 0,-.1 A '.:Ci.lsTr----'-'''-'.---.----..--(. 1---.

( ) ( ) TELS-:,A IFUTUREI - lx25 CURVE WHITE) CONDUITS EXISTING CONCRETE RATH (

I ) P11 TO SWOG APPROX 3 VI

( ) ( ) ( ) C

EXISTING ENERGEX POLE 21.115 SI

NE II GP.\G'OSS (xcRE 32-, ACOUS".: BOX

))

EXISTING CONCRETE KERB

Iiii4+114114#4#

I I

SWITCHBOARD LOCATED CENTRALY OVER SWE CABLE P

l __,,)

I 'X_Zz / \".' i.,\ \ .'\ r1.7V--1- (-, ELECTRICAL CONDUITS

/ ., y / / \\ /, \ 7 /' .\\/\ ,N

Ce -;\

S

-- :ARIH:NGT.00 "CLIPSAL EP2fi" LINE TAP NY/ABED 10Cam BELOW (0951(1;05 E0A LID

f CPiCAL INS 1 ALL ATION CONTRACTOR

AWED CABLE PIT

'AC 0 (AELEMATE :6H"

/B\

r 91 MESH tOrnin COVER

30P Of SEAS 2Ornm

AEOVE GROUND LEVEL

L .>/:\;/7 \'7

\;\ / /\/> /// A

/N\ '

SAND DAD

OS COMPAC TED

- ( ON( RE I FLOOR

ID ENSURE DRAINAGE TO MAIN PIT

1- cD; VAT,: :5

SW .;--:;CA1.) SLAB SOE cEf-,1!CNA.

TflCHEV flfl Fl _ 7\ IJ

err Cr r

MA'S CABLE PIT

(-A'E(-CONDi,i,ITS

LOCATED CENTRALLY OVER SWE CABLE RIC

0

SWITC HBOARD

A;

EARTH POD CONNECTION 500 SC NE ERE FLUSH MICA SLAB

23mm CONDuil 10 SWED PIT

500

'750

)

2500

r HBOARD SLAB DE TA

Bali' EDOS'EP

(M:PRO


C 160289 FEE-ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION I DPM AVV

A 05/08 REDRAWN ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DPM I AVV

0 .09.08' ISSLJECI FOR DPM I

No. DATE AMENDMENT

FUNDING

DESIGN W.O. No.

CONSTRUCTION W.O. No.

DRAFTED Neloste. r-t DRAFTING CHECK

CAD FILE 490082set_A.dwg DIRN. I APD.AFUNDED BY B.C.C. (/) EXTERNAL ( B.C.C. FILE No.

wo

2 3 4 5

Original Signed by A.WBthOO 8895 04/0712008

DESIGN


_...A.DESIGN CHECK

7

Original signed by F.Fornasier 04/072008

R.P.E.O. No, DATE PRINCIPAL DESIGN MANAGER DATE

04/0772008 Original signed by P.Sherriff 04/0772008

RP.E.O. No, DATI.A.FLIENT DELEGATE

8 9

-S

ORISOBISO DATE w...R

SITE

VV 130 8 7 T C) CD 1-I E R WATER B C)CD

10 11

TITLE

SWITCHBOARD SITE ARRANGEMENT

SHEET No. 16

BRISBANE WATER DRAWING No, AMEND.

486/4/9-0082-016, C Oen. Wnn, Inolingtitan Plenaloced.3 WAI0SMETWOR.1.00117 roe, lanConInonno49COINetpann. Lug Ilmnma toy 01112570 en Ma... Fean.0*0C0/7 221.41

12 13 14 15 16

A

a;

DI

E

F,



GO III

TIffiffliffifittaffETISTE

I

Service and Maintenance



PIM 11111114 111111111111



I & P Richardson Industries Ply Ltd

8.0 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

This product is designed to operate under specific environmental, supply and load conditions. Should these conditions change, consult a licenced electrician or electrical engineer before operating this product.

These procedures are to be performed only by a licenced electrician as they may expose live equipment.

The Switchgear and Controlgear Assembly is essentially maintenance free, however the following safety measures and routine maintenance is recommended.

Where fitted, ensure cabinet vents and filters are clear and clean. During operation, ensure all doors and covers are secure and closed. All faults are to be investigated and repaired by an appropriately licenced electrician. All components to be operated in accordance with manufacturers data. The protective devices within switchboards are designed to operate in the event of a short circuit or overload condition. In the event of these devices operating under such conditions the device or devices must be inspected and tested by a

suitably trained person to ascertain its condition prior to reconnecting the protective device to the supply.

Periodic checks should ensure

The switchboard is clean and free of any contaminants, which could reduce the insulation properties of the switchboard. All entries are sealed to ensure no vermin can enter. There is no evidence of overheating, arcing or moisture. The earthing system is maintained and is adequate to allow correct operation of protective devices. Insulation resistance is maintained to appropriate levels. Check terminations for correct tension. Test operation of protective devices. Re-calibrate instrument loops as required.

Refer to AS-CONSTRUCTED electrical drawings for details of protection equipment settings.

No special tools or equipment are required to perform routine maintenance.

File: Swbd Manual Revision 0 Date:l 1 /3/2010



WB087 Toohey Road Salisbury Water Booster Electrical ...

Documents

Transcript of WB087 Toohey Road Salisbury Water Booster Electrical ...